ArchiCAD 15 Help

Printable PDF version

ArchiCAD 15 Help

GRAPHISOFT®
Visit the GRAPHISOFT website at http://www.graphisoft.com for local distributor and product availability information.

ArchiCAD 15 Help
Copyright © 2011 by GRAPHISOFT, all rights reserved. Reproduction, paraphrasing or translation without express prior written permission is strictly prohibited.

Trademarks
is a registered trademark of GRAPHISOFT. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD®

Contents

Contents
Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15 _____________________________________ 31 ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide _________________________________ 37
Design Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Enhanced Model Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3D Editing Plane for Accurate Element Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 More Sophisticated 3D Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Guide Line Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Renovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Integrate with Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Easier IFC Property Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 New Features of IFC Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Easier Library Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 New and Enhanced Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 New Objects Supporting Sustainable Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 New Objects Supporting Hospital and Health care Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 More Modern Furnishings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 More Contemporary Sanitary Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Boats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Door/Window Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Door Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Window Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Customer Experience Improvement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 _________________________________ 79
Migrating from ArchiCAD 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Migrating from ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1 or 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Migrating Roofs and Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ArchiCAD 15 Help

3

Contents

Changed Renovation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml, .aat, .prf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Migrating the BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. 13 or 14) to ArchiCAD 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Minimal Space Extended to Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 No Automatic Home Story Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Lost Criteria Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 IFC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Review New Model View Options for Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Changes when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Configuration __________________________________________________ 131
Start ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving from ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archive Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Problem Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Projects through a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-Ons and Goodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 132 136 138 140 141 142 143 145 146 148 151 153 154 156 157 158 162 164 165 168

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Layer Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Place All Elements on a Single “Active Layer” (Simulate Autocad Work Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Slab, Roof or Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Define a Custom Composite Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Components of Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pen Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Apply a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Redefine a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 About Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Assign a Material to a Construction Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Align 3D Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Display of Materials in the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Display of Materials in Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Missing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Custom Attributes of GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 About Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Recommendations for Using Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Embedded Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Add Objects to Embedded Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Manage Embedded Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 BIM Server Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Add BIM Server Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Manage BIM Server Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
ArchiCAD 15 Help

5

Contents

Reload/Refresh Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Library from Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Library Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Container File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Favorite Settings as Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Favorite Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Favorite Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Favorite to Placed Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ArchiCAD User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Your Customized Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oriented View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fit in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Preview (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing 3D Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explore Model (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orbit (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Preview (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D connexion Enabler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

238 239 240 251 252 253 254 255 257 259 260 262 263 265 267 268 269 270 272 273 277 279 281 283 285 287 290 291 292 296 305 306 307 310 311 312 315 316 320

Interaction ____________________________________________________ 289

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 About the Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 How to Display the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Project Workflow in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Organizer Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Navigator Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Navigator Project Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Navigator View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Clone a Folder in the View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Setting up a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Saving a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Modifying View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Quick Options Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Navigator Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Navigator Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 External Projects in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 About Origins in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Reposition User Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 User Origin in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 About Elevation of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Elevation Values in the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Reference Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Quick Selection of Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Selection of Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Selection Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Selection Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Selection Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Element Information Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Deselecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Find and Select Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Zoom to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Edit Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Store and Access Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
ArchiCAD 15 Help

7

Contents

Marquee Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Marquee Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marquee Area Definition: Single Story or All Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Marquee (Geometry Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select All Elements in a Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Marquee Area as PDF or DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Marquee in Find & Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Editing Operations within the Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Input Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Intelligent Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Shown in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Tracker Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Input in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Snap Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Plane in 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Construction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle Bisector Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods) . . . . . . . Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snapping to Existing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Snap Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

387 388 390 391 393 394 395 396 397 399 400 401 402 403 408 409 411 412 413 415 416 417 419 422 424 425 436 437 448 449 450 452 453 454 455 456 458 459 461 463

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Cursor Snap Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Basic Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Cancel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Move Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Nudging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Dragging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Rotating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Mirroring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Elevating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Offset Selected Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Intersect Two Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 About the Align function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 How to Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Special Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Distribute Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Special Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Modify Element Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Overview of Modifying Element Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Stretching Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Modifying Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Modifying Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Stretching with the Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Stretch Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Splitting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Adjusting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Create a Fillet or Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Adding Element Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Curve/Straighten Element Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Explode into Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Create Element Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
ArchiCAD 15 Help

9

Contents

Multiply Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock/Unlock Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Magic Wand in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magic Wand Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings . . . . . . . About Trace References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing a Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Hide Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Display/Element Visibility Options for Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activate Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebuild Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare Reference with Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Consolidate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linework Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ArchiCAD Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Model Views in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigate Among Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Story Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create or Delete Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Story Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

540 544 546 549 552 553 556 557 558 560 561 562 563 564 567 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 583 584 585 587 590 591 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 602 606 608

Virtual Building ________________________________________________ 589

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Set Home Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 Show On Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Define Element’s Floor Plan Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Define Range of Element’s Projected Display (Show Projection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Show All in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Show Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Show Stored Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 Show Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Default Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 Filter Elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Save Contents of 3D Window as a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 3D Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 3D View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 3D Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 3D Navigation Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 3D “Cutaway” Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 About Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 Create a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Define Marker Reference for Source Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Assign Section Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 Model Display in the Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Open a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Place a Linked Section Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Place an Unlinked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Create an Independent Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Updating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Summary of Rebuild Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Display of Section Lines and Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Interior Elevations (IE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 About Interior Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Create Multiple IE Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Interior Elevation IDs and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
ArchiCAD 15 Help

11

Contents

Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevations and Zone Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Elements in Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redefine the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Display of the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Detail Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet vs. Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing in the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Worksheet Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Markers in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Marker Range Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Source Marker Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Marker Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Using Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find Linked Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Markers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

683 685 686 689 690 691 692 694 696 697 704 705 706 707 709 710 711 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 735 737 738

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 About Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Open and View a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 Editing and Updating Schedule Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756 Format a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 Schedule Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 Add Annotations to Schedule Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 About Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864 Index of Published Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .868 How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871 About Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .872 Create a Straight Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Create a Curved Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 Create a Chain of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 Create a Rectangle of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Create a Trapezoid Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 Create a Composite Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 Create a Log Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Wall-Wall Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897 Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 Creating Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Create a Slanted Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903 Column Display on Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904 Column Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907 Columns and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910 Beam Reference Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 Beam Display on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
ArchiCAD 15 Help

13

Contents

Create a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 Create a Hole in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 Beams and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 About Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 About Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Create a Single-plane Roof on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 Create a Single-plane Roof in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 Create a Multi-plane Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 Examples of Multi-plane Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 Editing Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 Trim Elements to Roof or Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Define Trimming Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 Trim Particular Elements: Manual Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Merge Trimming Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Managing Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 About Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Extruded Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 Revolved Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Ruled Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 Define Shell Base Height in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 Sample Workflows for Shell Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 Graphical Editing of Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 Create Hole in Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 Edit Shell Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077 Define Shell Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 Edit Shell Contour Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082 Customize Edge of Shell or Edge of Shell Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 About Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 Creating Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 14
ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Placing Holes in Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092 Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094 About Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095 Display of Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096 Create a Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097 Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099 Add New Points to the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 Zone Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104 2D Display of Zone Backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 Zone Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1107 3D Display of Zone Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 Trim Zone to Another Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 Updating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119 Curtain Wall: A System Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121 About Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 Working with Curtain Walls: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124 Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126 Create a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 System-Level Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166 Curtain Wall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 Curtain Wall Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 Edit Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1177 Edit Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188 Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 Curtain Wall Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209 Curtain Wall Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 Curtain Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217 Free-Rotate Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228 Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229 Model Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
ArchiCAD 15 Help

15

Contents

About Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Settings of Library Part Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating a Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View-Dependent Display of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Options for Object Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Placed Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretching Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Object Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Transfer Between Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Patch Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Creation of Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Library Parts from the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving 3D Models as Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Rectangular Doors and Windows from the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Custom-Shape Holes or Niches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About GDL Object Subtypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Script of a GDL Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Script of Objects Placed from a BIM Server Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scripting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Resources on GDL Object Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring Sill or Header Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Doors or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Empty Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Wall Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corner Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing and Moving a Skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylight Constraint Relative to Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Stairs on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1232 1234 1236 1237 1240 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1248 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1258 1260 1262 1264 1265 1267 1269 1274 1275 1276 1278 1279 1281 1284 1285 1286 1290 1292 1294 1297 1298 1299 1300

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Custom Stairs with StairMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304 StairMaker Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305 Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 Structure and Landing (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319 Tread Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Railings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325 Symbol Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 Listing Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 Check and Save Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 Element Extras: TrussMaker, Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 TrussMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 Creating Trusses in the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 Editing Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Creating Trusses in Section/Elevation/IE Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346 About Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1347 Solid Operation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349 Solid Operations: Element Display and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 Solid Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351 Managing Solid Element Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1358 Set Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359 Model View Options Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360 On-Screen View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 Applying Partial Structure Settings to Model Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 Save Partial Structure Settings by View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369 How to Define Components as “Core” or “Finish” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371 Visualizing the Entire Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373 Partial Structure Display Settings: Effect on Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375 Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker . . . . . 1378 Renovation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 Assign Renovation Status to Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 Renovation Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1386 About Renovation Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 Apply Renovation Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 Show an Element in a Single Renovation Filter Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 Renovation Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
ArchiCAD 15 Help

17

Contents

Examples of Renovation Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Override Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renovation Override Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Override Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Openings in Renovation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Best Practices for Creating Renovation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workflows for Tricky Renovation Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Insulation to Walls: Renovation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Door Panel to Existing Door Frame: Renovation Workflow . . . . . Zone Stamps for Renovated Rooms: Renovation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing Material Quantities for Renovation Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign a Cut Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign a Cover Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw a Drafting Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Area Text to a Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Vectorial Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Orientation of Vectorial or Symbol Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options: Global Settings for Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Solid Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create or Edit Symbol Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Gradient Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create or Edit Image Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Categories in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Single Straight Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretching or Shrinking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Circular Arcs and Full Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stretching Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an Arc Using its Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Elliptical Arcs and Full Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert Ellipse to Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1398 1402 1403 1405 1407 1408 1409 1410 1412 1413 1414 1416 1417 1418 1422 1424 1427 1428 1429 1431 1433 1434 1436 1443 1444 1445 1447 1449 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1458 1460 1461 1463 1464 1466

Documentation ________________________________________________ 1415

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Drawing Freehand Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 Decompose a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Unify Drafting Elements into Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472 Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 Drawings in Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1479 Dimensioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481 Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483 Glossary of Dimensioning Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 Static Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485 Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486 Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492 Dimensioning Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495 Elevation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496 Dimensioning Wall Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498 Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 Level Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 Angle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 Editing a Dimension Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 Modify the Witness Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510 Edit Content of Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512 Dimension Text Type and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1517 Change Position of Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 Associative Dimensions in Sections/Elevations/IE and 3D Document . . . . . . . . . 1520 Secondary Dimensions (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 Automatic Exterior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1522 Automatic Interior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 The Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1527 About the Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528 Components of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1531 Visibility of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 Creating a Straight Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 Creating a Curved Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 Editing a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 Editing Grids in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 Place a Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
ArchiCAD 15 Help

19

Contents

Placing Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Text Blocks As a Whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing Text Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Favorite Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Individual Components of Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Insert Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotext Reference Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Independent Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Associative Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search for Elements by Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool-Specific Default Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Default Text Content of Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Select Text Blocks/Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Editing in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment for the Layout Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Book Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings in the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Drawings Onto the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing PDF Files As Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing and Updating Placed Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout and Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Layout Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Layout ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Layout/Subset IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1545 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1556 1559 1560 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1574 1575 1576 1577 1580 1583 1586 1587 1588 1594 1595 1596 1597 1601 1605 1606 1607 1608 1610

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1612 Layout Workflow Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614 Layout Workflow: Smaller Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615 Layout Workflow: Larger Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616 Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 Publisher Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624 The Publisher Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625 Defining a Publisher Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628 Defining Output Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633 Defining Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634 Viewing and Redlining DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637 Publishing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Calculation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641 List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642 Displaying Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1645 Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648 ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1651

Collaboration _________________________________________________ 1655
Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658 Setup/Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1660 Modular BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661 Start GRAPHISOFT BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 BIM Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668 BIM Server Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672 BIM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677 Open BIM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678 Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680 Export Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681 Delete Teamwork Project from Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1683 Manage Users on the BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1684 Administrator Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1693 BIM Server Manager: Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695 List of Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704 BIM Server Manager: Review Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708 BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709 Monitoring BIM Server Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
ArchiCAD 15 Help

21

Contents

Server Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor User Activity by Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize User Roles for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Project Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force User to Leave a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Join or Leave a Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Local Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Send/Receive Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Local Teamwork Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is Local Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Feedback on Local Project/Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Local Teamwork Data to a Different Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Local Data to a Different Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Local Teamwork Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Data Cleanup Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in Detached Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Access to Teamwork Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the BIM Server Over the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Pack: Move Your Project and Libraries to a Different Computer . . . . . . Working from Home and the Office: Suggested Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoid Conflicting Work Sessions in Teamwork Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reserving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Teamwork Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reserve Elements by Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reserve Elements by Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Custom Criteria Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reserve Library Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback on Element Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reservation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Reservable Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1716 1722 1723 1733 1736 1739 1741 1742 1744 1749 1751 1753 1756 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1777 1788 1789 1790 1792 1793 1794 1796 1802 1806 1807 1814 1817 1819

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Feedback on Ownership of Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1820 Reservation in Attribute Manager; Reserve All Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821 Reserve Individual Views and View Map Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823 Reserve Settings of Layout Book Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1826 Reserve Publisher Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828 Reserve and Delete Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1830 Reserve Find and Select Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831 Reservation in Interactive Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833 Reserve List Scheme Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838 Reserve Mark-up Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 Reserve All Elements and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1840 Review Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1842 Creating and Sending Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 Assign Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1845 Request Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847 Release Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1850 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852 Request Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1855 Create a New Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856 Receive and Open Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859 Ask for Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860 Add Comment to Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 Libraries in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863 External Files Linked to Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1865 Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866 External Drawings in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868 Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869 About Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1870 Create Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1875 Place Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1878 Place Module from Multistory File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881 Editing Module Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882 Edit Hotlink Source in Separate ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883 Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1884 Display Order of Hotlinked Module Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888 Managing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889 Modules: Multiplatform Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897 Project Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898 Project Reviewer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899 Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907
ArchiCAD 15 Help

23

Contents

About Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up: Basic Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing and Retrieving Mark-Up Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Management with Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork and Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualization Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Align View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multidisciplinary Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Workflow: Architectural-Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Workflow: Architectural-MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Workflow: Architectural-Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Data from ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation of Data for Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Export Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Data to ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge vs. Link vs. Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imported Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collision Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Workflow: Architectural - Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Workflow: Architectural - MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Workflow: Architectural - Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Handling and Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Types Opened by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Types Saved by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Files to ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with PDF Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1908 1909 1913 1914 1915 1918 1920 1922 1925 1931 1937 1940 1941 1943 1945 1952 1953 1954 1958 1959 1960 1961 1970 1975 1976 1978 1981 1984 1985 1987 1988 2006 2013 2018 2019 2027 2038 2040

Visualization __________________________________________________ 1917

Interoperability _______________________________________________ 1951

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Create PDF Output Using the Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2041 Save Document in PDF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2044 3D Content in PDF (WIN only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2046 Working with DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2050 Opening DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2051 Saving DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055 Merge a DXF/DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2058 XREFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2061 Working with IFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2068 IFC Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2069 IFC File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2075 IFC-Related Functions in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2076 Import: Open and Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2077 Export: Save as IFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2082 Detect IFC Model Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2085 IFC Translators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2091 Model Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2104 Advanced IFC Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2106

User Interface Reference ________________________________________ 2125
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2126 Navigator Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2127 Project Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2128 Project Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2129 View Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2130 Layout Book Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2131 Publisher Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2133 Organizer Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2135 Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2137 The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2139 The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2140 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2143 Coordinates Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2147 Search and Replace Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2149 Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2151 Trace & Reference Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2154 Renovation Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2158 Teamwork Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2160 Project Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2165 Project Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2167 Project Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2168
ArchiCAD 15 Help

25

Contents

Session Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Targets and Operators Palette (Solid Element Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classic 3D Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheme Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes and Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection and Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracker and Coordinate Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imaging and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Redraw Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Safety & Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network And Update Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcut Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbox Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Box Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preferences Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Units and Rules Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zones Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction Elements Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Levels and Project North Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Edit Vectorial Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Appearance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Edit Symbol Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2169 2170 2173 2175 2178 2179 2182 2185 2188 2190 2192 2193 2194 2196 2197 2199 2202 2204 2206 2208 2210 2214 2216 2217 2219 2222 2225 2227 2228 2232 2239 2241 2243 2246 2250 2253 2255 2256 2257 2258

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Fill Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2260 Composite Structures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2261 Pens & Colors Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2265 Material Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2268 Material Exposure to Light Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2270 Material Vectorial Hatching Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2272 Material Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2273 LightWorks Shader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2277 Zone Categories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2281 Profile Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2282 Add-On Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2287 Story Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2289 Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2291 Create New Story Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2293 Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2294 Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2296 Grids & Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2298 Linework Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2300 Fill Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2302 Model View Options Combinations Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2304 Model View Options for Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2305 Model View Options Override Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2307 Model View Options for GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2309 3D Document Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2311 Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2316 3D Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2318 Open GL Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2321 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2322 3D Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2324 Parallel Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2325 Perspective Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2328 Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2330 Set Cities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2332 RoofMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2334 TrussMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2344 Grid System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2346 GDL (Geometric Description Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2350 GDL Master Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2351 Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2363 Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2364
ArchiCAD 15 Help

27

Contents

Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Options (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subset Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Views from ArchiCAD Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pasting Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paste Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header/Footer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating PDF Output in MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Dialog Box (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotFlow for MacOS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-Buffer Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlink Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREF Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach XREF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF/DWG Translation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

2365 2368 2373 2375 2378 2379 2381 2382 2384 2388 2390 2391 2392 2395 2396 2397 2399 2400 2402 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2416 2420 2421 2424 2425 2429 2431 2432 2435 2437 2440

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Contents

Open Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2441 Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2444 Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2448 Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2449 Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2453 Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2456 Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2457 Font-Style Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2459 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2460 Custom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2461 Merge DXF-DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2462 Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2463 Import Options for Elements on Paper Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2465 Smart Merge Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2467 Mark-Up Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2471 Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2475 Project Reviewer Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2476 Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2479 Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2481 Wall Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2485 Door/Window Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2491 Skylight Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2497 Roof Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2502 Shell Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2511 Beam Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2518 Column Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2522 Slab Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2527 Stair Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2531 StairMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2539 Mesh Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2551 Zone Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2554 Curtain Wall Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2561 Curtain Wall Settings: System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2562 Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2568 Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom) . . . . . . . . . 2572 Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2574 Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2576 Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2577 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2578 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2580
ArchiCAD 15 Help

29

Contents

Object/Lamp Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Dimensioning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc/Circle Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall End Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspot Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2582 2588 2589 2592 2594 2596 2599 2601 2603 2604 2607 2612 2615 2617 2618 2619 2629 2639 2646 2652 2654 2656 2660 2661 2662 2663 2665 2668 2670

30

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15
Context-Sensitive Help Finding a Help Topic Navigating in Help For More Information Context-Sensitive Help
ArchiCAD is equipped with a context-sensitive Help system. To launch the Help: • Press F1 • Or right-click on any particular ArchiCAD user interface element and choose the ‘What’s this’ command The Help will open to a topic relevant to the ArchiCAD interface item you have clicked. (In some cases, the Help will open to the ArchiCAD main page.) You can also select Help from the ArchiCAD Help menu to bring up the Help main page.

Finding a Help Topic
From the Help main page, you have several ways of navigating to the topic you need:

ArchiCAD 15 Help

31

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15

Use the Contents tab page in the left pane to browse the hierarchical list of topics. You can extend the tree-view by clicking on a topic to see sub-topics. Click on your topic of choice to open it in the right-hand pane. Click the book icon to close an open topic.

32

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15

Click the Index tab, then click the first letter of the topic you are interested in. The list of matching topics will be instantly displayed. Select from the list to access the topic you wish to open.

Click the Search tab, then enter your search term in the field. - Use the * key (asterisk) as a wildcard to denote any string of characters in the search. - Use the parentheses (“...”)to search for a particular phrase. Hit Enter or click the Go button to bring up search results. Click on a selected topic to display it in the right panel.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

33

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15

Navigating in Help
Use the buttons at the top of the Help page to navigate.

Go to the next page in the Help

Click the right-arrow button to move forward to the next topic in the hierarchy.

Go to the previous page in the Help

Click the left-arrow button to move backwards to the previous topic in the hierarchy. 34
ArchiCAD 15 Help

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15

Go back to the Help page you were before
Use the “Back” button of your Internet browser application. (This button may vary depending on your browser.)

Locate the current Help topic in the Table of Contents

Click the circling arrows button to highlight the location of the currently open topic in the Contents hierarchy.

Print out the current Help topic

Click the print button to open the print dialog box to print the current topic from ArchiCAD Help. (Make sure you click with the cursor in the opened Help topic which you want to print.)

Access “Drop-Down” text
Some Help topics include “drop-down” subheadings: to display the text under the subheading, click the arrow.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

35

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 15

Print PDF

Click the PDF icon to display the Help pages in PDF format and to access Adobe’s commands for printing the pages using PDF format. To return to viewing it in HTML format again, click anywhere in the Help’s Table of Contents.

For More Information
To access additional sources of information about using ArchiCAD: • See the links in the ArchiCAD Help menu • See the Getting Started booklet.

36

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide
Design Freedom Interactions Renovation Integrate with Engineering Library Performance Customer Experience Improvement Program

ArchiCAD 15 Help

37

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Design Freedom
Roofs Shells Enhanced Model Element Connections Skylights

38

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Roofs
Multi-Plane Roof: a Single Element with Maximum Flexibility
• • Easily create a complex roof that includes multiple planes and several roof levels. Complex roof element remains an integrated whole and never falls apart.

See Create a Multi-plane Roof.

Integrated Editing of Roof Geometry
• • Edit the roof geometry as a whole: all parts of the roof change in concert. Edit any plane of the roof separately, or move any roof ridge: all connected roof planes will adjust accordingly. • Edit roof contour uniformly for entire roof, or separately for any part of it. • Use familiar pet palette commands for easy polygon editing. See Editing Roofs.

Custom Modeling of Individual Roof Planes
• Individualize any Roof plane to model specialized details: change the pitch or make it a gable; change its material, fill or eaves overhang. The whole Roof remains a single, coherent element.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

39

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

See Customize Roof Plane.

Add Special Roof Features Easily
• Create an Atrium with a pet palette command.

40

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

See Create an Atrium.

• Create a Gable out of any roof plane with a single click. See Gable Roof. • Create a tower from a curved roof plane. See Add a Tower to the Roof.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

41

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Shells
This versatile new tool lets you create a wide variety of shapes. Use the Shell to model elements, ranging from a building’s entire exterior, to a single custom object.

Easy Creation of Shell Geometries
• Create a Shell using one of three basic geometries:

- Extrude a Shell between any two points in space. - Create a Revolved Shell - Make a Ruled Shell between hand-drawn profiles on any two planes in space - In the 3D window, define Shell height graphically by placing it anywhere you want - Fine-tune the Shell parameters as needed See About Shells.

42

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Graphical Editing for Full Design Freedom
• Edit Shell profile graphically in any window: extrude, distort, tilt, rotate or revolve the Shell to fit your needs.

• •

Freely define the Shell outline by drawing its contour by hand. Add skylights, fitting them smoothly to a flat or curved surface. 43

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Create holes of any shape in any part of the Shell.

• Customize any edge of the Shell. See Graphical Editing of Shells.

Accurate Geometric Display on the Floor Plan
Shell display on the Floor Plan reflects its real geometry in 3D.

Flexible Classification
Classify Shell as e.g. Roof or Slab for listing purposes or for export to structural programs.

44

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Enhanced Model Element Connections
Associative Connections for Integrated Model Editing
If you modify any element, all connected elements will be modified too. For example, if you change the pitch of a Roof, any connected Walls will be trimmed automatically. See Model Element Connections.

Precise Element Trimming with Shell/Roof
Trim model elements to Roofs and/or Shells, regardless of their complexity, so even many complex shapes fit together the way you need them. The graphical interface gives you full control over the trimming process. • Automatic trim for standard trim results: By default, ArchiCAD automatically trims selected Shells and Roofs to each other, then uses the resulting structure to trim off the overlap from the other selected elements. The result: just what you would expect. • Create special trim geometries: For more complex situations, trim any model element to a specific Roof or Shell, while deciding which parts of the trimmed element should stay, and which should go. Color feedback guides you each step of the way. • Display the trimming body to see exactly what will be trimmed and how.

• •

Edit the trimming body to shape the trim the way you need it. Merge trimming bodies of separate Roofs/Shells. This way, the entire Shell-Roof complex of a large building structure can act in concert when trimming other elements, such as the walls that run the full length of the building. See Trim Elements to Roof or Shell. 45

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

In-Place Feedback and Management for All Connections
• No more “hidden” connections: for any element, see a list of which elements it’s connected to via: - Roof/Shell Trims - Solid Element Operations - Wall/Curtain Wall Connections Use the connection list to select any connected element, or to clear a connection.

See Managing Element Connections.

46

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Skylights
Skylights have been improved in ArchiCAD 15. • Skylights easier to place: ArchiCAD automatically places them smoothly into curved or flat Roof plane or Shell. • Skylights associative to the “parent” Roof or Shell: they adjust automatically when Roof or Shell geometry changes. • Skylight interface similar to that of Doors and Windows; Model View Options apply to Skylights, which also have a dedicated Marker object. • Skylight display on Floor Plan based on 3D projection. See Skylights.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

47

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Interactions
3D Editing Plane for Accurate Element Placement More Sophisticated 3D Feedback Guide Line Improvements

48

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

3D Editing Plane for Accurate Element Placement
In the 3D window, the new editing plane gives you a sense of where you are in the model. The result: you can place or modify elements in the 3D model more accurately and easily. • Place new elements onto a visible plane, instead of into “mid-air.” • Use Guide Lines in 3D for precise placement. • Grid lines, Snap grid and Rotated grid available in 3D window.

Move the editing plane to a more logical position, or change its orientation, and use it to help define element position through precise numeric input in the plane’s coordinate system. For example, you may need to draw an opening of a particular size, as measured on a horizontal plane, onto a slanted roof plane. Redefine the input plane to be horizontal, then use the

ArchiCAD 15 Help

49

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Tracker to define the hole measurements you need. See the result projected onto the Roof plane.

Project the points of elements outside of the editing plane onto the editing plane horizontally, vertically or perpendicularly, as needed. For example, when drawing a roof opening, you can project the outline of an existing Wall horizontally onto the targeted roof plane.

See Editing Plane in 3D Window.

50

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

More Sophisticated 3D Feedback
• Get a feel for position of selected items in space: Selected items in the background don’t “jump forward” as in previous ArchiCADs.

BEFORE (ArchiCAD 14) •

AFTER (ArchiCAD 15)

Find reference lines easily for graphical editing: In 3D views, special editing lines (e.g. Wall reference line, Roof pivot polygon) are now shown in their own specific colors, so you can pick them out right away. Coordinate axis feedback: Coordinate axes display main (X, Y, Z) directions.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

51

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Guide Line Improvements
Easier Guide Line definition
Guide Lines appear automatically during input, so you can choose one on the fly and keep working. • Guide Line on any edge: Click the Guide Line handle to activate it.

Guide Line at any point: At any point status, press and hold the mouse button to see Guide Lines. Choose one, then continue where you left off.

52

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Drag or Delete Guide Lines
• Click and drag to move a Guide Line to a more useful location. (Or use the Tracker to define its new location numerically.)

If you are done with a Guide Line, just move the cursor to its handle and press Esc.

Better Guide Line Feedback
• • Automatic yellow highlights alert you to main directions (e.g. input parallel or perpendicular to a Guide Line). Automatic feedback on X and Y axes help you stay on track - especially useful in 3D perspective views.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

53

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide

Guide Lines in the 3D Window
• • • Guide Lines appear on the new 3D editing plane. 3D Guide Line remains visible and its status points available even as you navigate around, and even if it ends up in a “hidden” location. To suggest perspective, the line type of a Guide Line will vary as it recedes into the distance.

Simpler Guide Lines Settings
Now that you choose your Guide Lines while you work, there are only 4 Guide Lines settings in the Work Environment (instead of 13). See Guide Lines.

54

ArchiCAD 15 Help

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Renovation Element-level Definition of Renovation Status • No need to create extra layers: just set a default Renovation Status (Existing. New. Switch among Renovation Filters to display the project at various renovation stages. See Assign Renovation Status to Elements. • Switch Renovation Status of any/all selected elements with a single click. To Be Demolished) for all element types. ArchiCAD 15 Help 55 . or override elements depending on their status. Redefine or create new Renovation Filters to fit your office standard. hide. New Construction). Existing Plan. Demolition Plan. Renovation Filters show.g. Renovation Related Plan Types Out of the Box • • • • Renovation Filters available out of the box (e.

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide • Views and drawings graphically communicate the Renovation process. Existing Plan Demolition Plan After Demolition New Construction See Renovation Filters. Planned Status 56 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

• Overrides automatically appear as defined by the current Renovation Filter. Saving in IFC: WYSIWYG logic prevails: if the element is shown in the current Renovation filter. • Customize override styles to match your office standards.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Graphical Highlighting of Elements by Renovation Status • Assign an override style (color. line type) to highlight elements by status (e.g. Simple Export of Different Plan Types • • Saving in DWG: Elements can be automatically sorted onto different layers depending on their renovation status. then it is exported to IFC. See Override Styles. then it is not exported. ArchiCAD 15 Help 57 . demolished or new). fill. If it is hidden.

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Integrate with Engineering With a more straightforward. logical IFC interface. ArchiCAD 15 continues to ease the process of model-based IFC exchange with other disciplines. Easier IFC Property Management New Features of IFC Import/Export 58 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Better support for the “reference model” workflow: when you open an IFC project and hotlink its elements to another ArchiCAD project.Parameter transfer (Pick Up/Inject Parameters) . • • • • • • Show only the parameters you need: display just the core properties. the Settings dialogs open faster. all IFC parameters are retained. Access and edit IFC parameters directly from Element Settings (not just from IFC Manager). ArchiCAD 15 Help 59 .Favorite element settings .mod) file. Build the IFC database easily as you work with model elements in ArchiCAD.Copy/Paste operations Elements saved as a module (. For example. since IFC properties are included in: . even independently of model exchange. use the standard IFC Fire Rating property for an ArchiCAD wall. Use Undo to reverse an incorrect IFC property assignment.the Project template file . More properties available to ArchiCAD elements.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Easier IFC Property Management IFC Properties as Native ArchiCAD Parameters • • Better performance: Since IFC data no longer needs to be synchronized with ArchiCAD data. or display all the derived and standard properties too.

Edit these custom properties by object. This way you can ensure that. Export all used library part parameters as part of the IFC model with a single click. • • • 60 ArchiCAD 15 Help . a door’s fire rating parameter will automatically be converted to the right IFC property.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide More Accurate Assignment of IFC Parameters for Library Parts • Convert ArchiCAD library parts parameters to IFC properties based on conversion rules. Conversion rules can be saved and re-used for subsequent export and import processes. for example.

you can now modify its IFC parameters without having to reserve IFC data. Select any listed element in 3D as well as 2D. Effective IFC Data Handling in Teamwork If you reserve an element in Teamwork. Export to IFC supports Unicode characters. for smoother interchange of data that includes special characters. ArchiCAD 15 Help 61 . Displays the (custom) converted library part parameters as well as standard IFC properties. Improved Localized Text Handling • • Localized texts in IFC files are transferred correctly to different platforms (Windows/ Macintosh) or machines with different localized versions of ArchiCADs.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide More Powerful IFC Manager • • • • Displays IFC elements by type as well as by containment structure. all constituent parts of a Stair are grouped together in the ArchiCAD model and in the IFC Manager. and without requiring any special access rights. Displays sub-element relationships in logical groups: for example.

MEP or structural model) and see them side by side. 62 ArchiCAD 15 Help .such as in a viewer or in an MEP program .ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide New Features of IFC Import/Export Story-Mapping When merging an IFC project. The result: perfect geometric display of element intersections and Solid Operations.and older file versions: the olderversion’s modified elements are shown with the “Corrected” style. This way you can insert your architectural model into a consultant’s IFC file (e. Renovation Elements’ renovation status are saved as part of IFC data. Improved Merge to IFC Function The entire architectural model or a part of it can be added to an existing IFC file while keeping its original content. Renovation status is also taken into account after merging the IFC data back to ArchiCAD. you can define the ArchiCAD story to which the imported IFC model data should be mapped . existing model elements will not be overwritten. Better management of Model Changes entries in the Mark-Up palette: multi-select entries for deleting and zooming. without including all element properties and data.just like in ArchiCAD’s PLN Merge. Distinguish the modified elements coming from the newer. Simplified Model Export If your purpose in model exchange is to display model geometry .g. while the newer-version’s modified elements are shown as “Highlighted”. in a custom property set. Improvements in Detect IFC Model Changes • • • The Detect IFC Model Exchange workflow now allows you to choose and edit the preferred translator as you go.now you can use the simplified BREP (boundary representation) geometry export option.

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Library Easier Library Migration New and Enhanced Objects Door/Window Enhancements ArchiCAD 15 Help 63 .

Backward compatibility supported for library parts When back-saving your ArchiCAD 15 project to version 14. any library parts that were revised for 15 will be automatically replaced by their original counterparts in version 14. Now you can ensure that you won’t embed objects that already exist in other. Automatically use latest library part versions If you consolidate your older ArchiCAD libraries (13 or 14) with the ArchiCAD 15 library. 64 ArchiCAD 15 Help . by using this new Library Manager feature.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Easier Library Migration When you migrate a project to ArchiCAD 15. Avoid duplicates when embedding objects You may wish to embed a particular library’s placed objects into your project. placed objects from the older libraries will automatically be replaced with their latest compatible version in the ArchiCAD 15 library. new features ensure that your ArchiCAD library parts will also be migrated to use the latest available versions. linked libraries.

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide New and Enhanced Objects New Objects Supporting Sustainable Design New Objects Supporting Hospital and Health care Design More Modern Furnishings More Contemporary Sanitary Objects Boats ArchiCAD 15 Help 65 .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide New Objects Supporting Sustainable Design Basic Library / Mechanical / On-site Renewable Systems • • • • • Rain Water Tank Solar Collector Evacuated Tube Solar Photo voltaic Panel Wind Turbine Household Wind Turbine Industrial Wind Turbine Evacuated Tubes 66 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide New Objects Supporting Hospital and Health care Design Furnishing / Medical Equipment • • • • • • Bedside Cabinet Dental Chair Examination Bed Hospital Bed Infusion Stand Medical Cart Dental Chair Bedside Cabinet ArchiCAD 15 Help 67 .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide More Modern Furnishings Basic Library / Furnishings / Cabinets and Shelves • New object: Modular Wardrobe Modular Wardrobe Basic Library / Furnishings / Office Equipment • New object: Office Partition Panel Basic Library / Special Constructions / Fireplaces and Stoves • • New object: Built-In Fireplace Fireplace Freestanding .new types 68 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Urinals • New object: Urinal 04 Basic Library / Mechanical / Plumbing Fixtures / Partitions • New urinal type in the Commercial Bath Stall object New urinal with partitions ArchiCAD 15 Help 69 . Showers. Bidets. Jacuzzis • New object: Shower Cabin Shower cabin Basic Library / Mechanical / Plumbing Fixtures / WC.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide More Contemporary Sanitary Objects Basic Library / Mechanical / Plumbing Fixtures / Bathtubs.

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Basic Library / Mechanical / Plumbing Fixtures / Basins • New object: Multi-Basin Counter Basic Library / Mechanical / Plumbing Fixtures / Taps • New types among the Tap and Wall Mounted Tap objects New taps Basic Library / Mechanical / Plumbing Fixtures / Sinks • More sink types in the Belfast Sink object 70 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Basic Library / Furnishing / Kitchen Cabinets • More sink types in the Cabinet Belfast Sink objects New Cabinet Belfast ArchiCAD 15 Help 71 .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Boats Visualization / People and Vehicles / Vehicles • Three sailing boats and a motorboat Motorboat 72 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Door/Window Enhancements Door Enhancements Window Enhancements ArchiCAD 15 Help 73 .

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Door Enhancements New Doors • • Twelve new doors with raised sidelight on one or both sides New industrial garage doors: High-Speed Door and High-Speed Roll-up Door Other Door Developments • Frame for pocket doors 74 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

) Window names (W1. sash type selection and opening options. W2.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Window Enhancements Basic Windows: New and Updated • • • • Basic Window folder restructured to follow a more logical system New parametrization logic for shape definition.. (Your older W1/W2 Hdiv windows will be migrated automatically.) reflect the number of sashes divided by frame mullions The new W3 window Other New Windows • New sliding window: W4 Horizontal Sliding The new W4 Horizontal Sliding window ArchiCAD 15 Help 75 .. Former W1 Hdiv and W2 Hdiv windows are incorporated into the new W1 and W2 windows.

ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide • Six new historical windows The new Historic Window Triple Arched 76 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

because running the Server takes up less memory than before • Send and Receive response time is slightly faster. ArchiCAD users on MacOS can now take advantage of the increased memory management offered by 64-bit technology. all data modifications are now instantly saved into a background project. you will now see a definite speed improvement. Unlike the earlier Autosave function. Autosave works on the same “delta logic” principle used by the GRAPHISOFT BIM Server. even with large-scale projects. In ArchiCAD 15. Accelerated IFC Usage Enjoy definite performance improvements when using IFC format for model-based exchange. given sufficient memory. 64-bit ArchiCAD on MacOS ArchiCAD for MacOS is now a 64-bit program. we have achieved the following performance-related improvements over ArchiCAD 14. because the BIM Server’s internal processes have been speeded up ArchiCAD 15 Help 77 . Enjoy greater speed even when working with extra-large. Supersafe Autosave The improved Autosave function provides 100% data safety: your changes are continuously saved in the background as you work. Thus. making it so speedy as to be unnoticeable. ArchiCAD can retrieve the very latest state of your project. in case of a blackout. You will notice that the following functions work faster: • modifying IFC data in the Element Settings or the IFC Manager dialogs • exporting model elements to IFC format • importing IFC building models into ArchiCAD Optimized BIM Server The BIM Server’s internal processes have been optimized. For you. If your larger models ran into slowdowns on the 32-bit program. extradetailed models. The IFC data parameters assigned to model elements are now saved using a new technology. Starting with ArchiCAD 15.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Performance Improving performance is an ongoing priority. system error or other crash. only the 64-bit version is available for MacOS. this means: • A single BIM Server will manage multiple projects more efficiently.

we strive to involve our users in our development process. with the aim of improving the user experience. we have created the Customer Experience Improvement Program (CEIP) to allow every user to contribute to improving ArchiCAD. Participation in this program is voluntary and anonymous. usability tests and other research projects. Given the size of our user base. without affecting ArchiCAD’s performance. As of ArchiCAD 15. we could not include all users in this process. the CEIP works in the background to gather information on how users interact with the program. While ArchiCAD is running.com/. until now. Consequently. 78 ArchiCAD 15 Help . we strive to create a product that is easy to learn and meets our users’ real needs.graphisoft. More details are available on the GRAPHISOFT home page: http://www.ArchiCAD 15 New Features Guide Customer Experience Improvement Program At GRAPHISOFT. GRAPHISOFT will use the resulting statistics as part of its product design process. via surveys.

certain features of ArchiCAD 15 will be lost: Changes when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 14 ArchiCAD 15 Help 79 .1 and up) in ArchiCAD 15.1 or 9 If you are working in ArchiCAD 15. click on the link below that corresponds to the project version you wish to migrate. Migrating from ArchiCAD 14 Migrating from ArchiCAD 13 Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8. your olderversion project will. in some respects. To use the Migration Guide. Since ArchiCAD features are developed and improved in each succeeding version.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 You can open older-version files (ArchiCAD 8. you can migrate the project backwards to ArchiCAD 14 only. work differently after you migrate it to ArchiCAD 15. This Migration Guide calls your attention to these changes. As a result. This will take you to a checklist of migration issues you should consider.

13 or 14) to ArchiCAD 15 80 ArchiCAD 15 Help . .aat.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 14 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (. .prf) Migrating the BIM Server Migrating a Teamwork Project (v.xml.

.xml.prf) Migrating the BIM Server Migrating a Teamwork Project (v.aat.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 13 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (. . 13 or 14) to ArchiCAD 15 Minimal Space Extended to Doors ArchiCAD 15 Help 81 .

prf) No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 15 Lost Criteria Sets 82 ArchiCAD 15 Help . .aat.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.xml. .

aat. .prf) No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 15 Lost Criteria Sets Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills IFC Data Review New Model View Options for Fills ArchiCAD 15 Help 83 .xml. .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.aat. .prf) No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 15 Lost Criteria Sets Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills IFC Data Review New Model View Options for Fills 84 ArchiCAD 15 Help . .xml.

1 or 9 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Migrating Libraries and Objects from ArchiCAD 12 and Earlier Changed Renovation Features VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Migration of Exported Options Files (.prf) Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 15 Lost Criteria Sets Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills IFC Data Review New Model View Options for Fills Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 15 ArchiCAD 15 Help 85 . . .xml.aat.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.

all newly placed Roofs and Skylights in ArchiCAD 15 will be displayed on the Floor Plan showing all visible contours.that is.this is a new display mode in ArchiCAD 15. as your preferred display mode. your Roofs will not change. including dome and vaulted Roofs. as if projected from a 3D view . In outward appearance. Display Preference for Single-plane Roof/Skylight By default. and choose “Symbolic (as in ArchiCAD 14 and before)”.you can switch this as a Project Preference: go to Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating Roofs and Skylights Roofs Single-plane Roofs All Roofs. Show on Stories Options for Migrated Roofs 86 ArchiCAD 15 Help . their top surface only . will be turned into a set of Single-plane Roofs in ArchiCAD 15. If you prefer to display Single-plane Roofs (and any Skylights they contain) in ArchiCAD 15 as they were in ArchiCAD 14 and earlier .

their display on the Floor Plan will. although these are not available for Skylights in ArchiCAD 15. In outward appearance. and choose “True 3D projection” as your preferred display mode.” as it was in the earlier project version. they will be automatically converted into ArchiCAD 15 Skylights. The Floor Plan display of new Skylights placed in ArchiCAD 15 is based on a 3D projection. you can switch this as a project preference: • Go to Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Skylights Skylights Placed using the Skylight Tool If you migrate an older-version project containing Skylights placed with the Skylight tool. However. and will lack the full functionality of ArchiCAD 15 Skylights. and their Floor Plan display parameters will be retained. your Skylights will not change. rather than symbolic. remain “symbolic. by default. If you want to use this new display mode for your migrated Skylights. ArchiCAD 15 Help 87 . and capable of all Skylight functionality that is new in ArchiCAD 15. with all their parameters preserved. Skylights Placed using the Object Tool Skylights that were placed using the Object tool will remain objects.

if you stay with your older libraries. In this case. as part of ArchiCAD installation. Migrate to ArchiCAD 15 Library Automatically: Consolidate Libraries Any time you add an additional ArchiCAD library to a project that already has one. ArchiCAD will recognize the presence of older-version ArchiCAD libraries (versions 10 and later). Consolidating ArchiCAD libraries is recommended. Note: The consolidation process and Migration Libraries are available only for migrated projects that use ArchiCAD Libraries 10 and later. Migration Libraries are much smaller than the full ArchiCAD libraries. However. The best way to do this is to go to Library Manager and add the ArchiCAD 15 Library. so this consolidation process will save your project from a great many superfluous objects.has been added to the project. the yellow Consolidate button appears in Library Manager. you will not get the full benefit of library improvements and fixes in ArchiCAD 15. The automatic consolidation process will • load the new ArchiCAD library • load all the relevant migration libraries you need. you also switch to the ArchiCAD 15 Library. a Library which is not the latest one . We recommend that when you migrate a project to ArchiCAD 15. Note: The Consolidate button appears in Library Manager any time that at least one outdated ArchiCAD Library . but also loads the requisite Migration Libraries so that you still have access any now-obsolete library parts you may be using.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15 The new version of ArchiCAD will work perfectly well with any older-version ArchiCAD libraries.) 88 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (These migration libraries will have already been installed on your computer.that is. because it replaces the old ArchiCAD libraries with the latest library. then use the Consolidate function described in the next section.

however. Some objects from older ArchiCAD libraries. you want them available even if after migrating to ArchiCAD 15. and will automatically replace the older versions. however.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 89 . This will ensure smooth migration of your ArchiCAD Libraries together with the Teamwork project. If you do not use the Migration Library. The ArchiCAD Library migration is now complete. you must upload the migration libraries from your hard drive to the BIM Server. Note: If you want to use your ArchiCAD Libraries from the BIM Server (rather than as linked libraries). because a great many of the loaded objects will be duplicates and/or superfluous. For the most part. In this case. 13 or 14) to ArchiCAD 15. A Migration Library is much smaller than full-version ArchiCAD Library.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 • • remove ArchiCAD libraries with lower version numbers automatically replace placed objects from the older libraries (13 or 14 only) with their latest compatible version in the ArchiCAD 15 library For example. have no counterpart in the new ArchiCAD 15 library (typically. The recommended solution. these updated objects are compatible with placed older versions of the same object. ArchiCAD will not be able to locate the migration libraries automatically. In this case. 11. ArchiCAD Migration Libraries (generally available for versions 10 and up) serve this purpose: they contain only those objects from an earlier-version ArchiCAD Library that do not have counterparts in the latest-version ArchiCAD Library. use the Migrate Project process described here: Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. then some of your placed objects from older-version projects may not have a compatible corresponding object in ArchiCAD 15. (See Migrate to ArchiCAD 15 Library Automatically: Consolidate Libraries. if you are migrating an ArchiCAD 10 project to ArchiCAD 15. that some objects in your migrated Teamwork project may be listed as “Temporarily Missing” in the Library Manager or in the Library Loading Report. these are “discontinued” objects deemed obsolete). What is a Migration Library? Each new version of the ArchiCAD Library contains many objects that have been updated since the previous version. During this process. 12. is to Consolidate your libraries. and reset their parameters as needed. if you have placed objects from multiple ArchiCAD libraries and have loaded all the libraries. Migrating Libraries in a Teamwork Project To migrate a Teamwork project. this problem will be solved automatically. But if your project uses such objects. • Keeping your old libraries alongside your new libraries is not recommended. and increase library loading time. As soon as other users do a Send and Receive. Note. In this case: • those incompatible older objects will be “Missing Objects” in ArchiCAD 15 if you have removed your old libraries. issuing the “Consolidate” command will automatically locate and load the Migration Libraries 10. you must replace these missing objects with new ones from the ArchiCAD 15 library. make sure that the Migrate ArchiCAD Libraries checkbox is checked. 13 and 14.

• Other Objects in Hotlinked Modules If you place a hotlinked module from ArchiCAD 12. 12.Embedded Objects “Other Objects” items in the older ArchiCAD projects will appear in the “Embedded Objects” folder of ArchiCAD 15. If your ArchiCAD Libraries are BIM Server Libraries (for example. Note: Available migration libraries may vary. Locate these libraries and add them as linked libraries. using the Library Manager’s “Add” command. You can also download Migration Libraries from the GRAPHISOFT website. In this case. using Library Manager. plus every other available migration library “upwards”. any objects placed from the source file’s “Other Objects” folder will be missing in ArchiCAD 15. using Library Manager. 90 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you must upload the migration libraries from your hard drive to the BIM Server. • Missing Objects Missing objects in the older-version project are also listed as “missing” in ArchiCAD 15. The solution is to embed these objects in your host ArchiCAD 15 project. ArchiCAD will not be able to locate the migration libraries automatically. if you are migrating an ArchiCAD 10 project to ArchiCAD 15. you do not need to find them.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Where to Find Migration Libraries Migration libraries (generally available for ArchiCAD versions 10 and up) are installed on your machine when you install ArchiCAD 15. 13 and 14. you should use Migration Libraries 10. To solve the problem. then the automatic migration process and the Consolidate Libraries functions described above will locate and load the necessary migration libraries automatically. If you want to use your ArchiCAD libraries as Linked Libraries. or to place those objects in a library on the BIM Server. Migrating Libraries and Objects from ArchiCAD 12 and Earlier Note the additional Library-related changes when migrating projects from ArchiCAD 12 and earlier: • Active Libraries . you should use the migration library corresponding to the version of the migrated project.) • Other Objects .Unavailable Libraries Any library “missing” in the Library Manager of the older version will be listed as “unavailable” in the Library Manager of ArchiCAD 15. (They will be listed in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager. for a Teamwork project) and you want to consolidate them. • Missing Libraries .Linked Libraries The active libraries of older-version projects will be loaded in ArchiCAD 15 as linked libraries. both in the Library Manager as well as the Library Loading Report. depending on your localized version. locate the source files of these missing objects and add them to the project. and add that library to the project. For example. In this case. 11.

doors/windows to be demolished are marked on the Floor Plan with an “X”. (For example.g. eliminate the unnecessary. but you want to use the new Renovation function in ArchiCAD 15 instead.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Changed Renovation Features ArchiCAD 15’s new Renovation feature enables you to set a Renovation Status for each element. Use the new ArchiCAD Renovation feature to define the Renovation Status for each element as needed Note: When you first open a project ArchiCAD 15. and the default Renovation Filter is set so that all existing elements are shown. Thus. ArchiCAD 15 Help 91 . all elements’ Renovation Statuses are set to “existing” by default. Make needed changes to the model: e. or are otherwise distinguished. Changed “Demolition” Options for Door/Window Objects (GERMAN or NORWEGIAN library only) Your project from ArchiCAD 14 or earlier may use Door/Window objects that you flagged for demolition. you should use the new Renovation feature to select and assign a “To Be Demolished” Renovation status to the doors/windows in question. renovation-specific layers and model duplicates 2. by choosing the Override Styles that correspond to your local standards. plus project-level Renovation Filters that show or hide elements by status. these “demolition” options in Door/Window Settings are no longer necessary in the AC 15 Library and have been eliminated. since ArchiCAD 15 provides dedicated options for displaying all elements by their Renovation status. Migrating Older-Version Renovation Projects Older versions of ArchiCAD did not include a Renovation feature as such. all your elements will behave and be displayed as usual. Note that you can then choose to display your “To Be Demolished” elements the same way as in earlier ArchiCAD. If your older-version project used a layer system to differentiate elements in the renovation process.) However. you should: 1. even if you do not use any of the Renovation functions in ArchiCAD 15. After migrating your project to ArchiCAD 15.

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 VR Scenes and VR Objects No Longer Supported VR Scenes and VR Objects are no longer supported in ArchiCAD 15. 92 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Any VR Scenes and VR Objects in earlier-version projects will disappear when you migrate these projects to ArchiCAD 15.

you will be able to save image files only to these formats. they will still work in ArchiCAD 15. you can convert these images to other file formats. Any images placed with the Figure tool and any embedded drawings that are in QuickTime based formats are converted automatically into a supported image file format (e. to ensure long-term compatibility for image files on both Windows and MacOS.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Phase-out of Images in QuickTime Formats Starting with ArchiCAD 15. image file formats created with QuickTime are being phased out. Linked Drawings: you can convert and re-link them. ArchiCAD 15 will still read all Quick Time formats. those image files will not be read. However. go to Drawing Manager: these drawings’ icons are shown in red. Figures and embedded drawings: converted automatically. GIF. If you migrate an older-format ArchiCAD project that contains figures or drawings in a different file format than these: 1. 2. then re-link them. a warning appears when you open the project in ArchiCAD 15. PNG. It is recommended to convert these images to a supported file format (e. ArchiCAD 15 Help 93 . to avoid problems in future versions of ArchiCAD. To do this.g. no action is needed. png). The image formats to be supported are: JPEG. As of ArchiCAD 15. PNG or JPG). Note: If you do not convert your linked QuickTime-format drawings. Any linked drawings that are in QuickTime based formats are still supported in ArchiCAD 15. but later versions will not. However. If you have such linked drawings in your migrated project. TIFF and BMP. if you should open the project in a later version of ArchiCAD.g. You can manually convert these linked drawings into a supported image file format.

• If you convert a drawing to PNG format. but the file size will be smaller. • If you convert a drawing to JPG. you will lose some data during the file compression process.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Recommendation It is recommended to convert your QuickTime-format drawings to either PNG or JPG format. you will not lose any data from the drawing. 94 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 Help 95 .aat) • Favorites (. if you have named and stored custom Find & Select Criteria Sets in an ArchiCAD 13 project and want to re-use them in an ArchiCAD 15 project. you should: 1.xml. Then import those data files to the ArchiCAD 15 project you are working on.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migration of Exported Options Files (.prf) • Find and Select Criteria Set (can be imported from ArchiCAD 13 or 14 only) • DWG/DXF Translator In ArchiCAD 15. . it is recommended that you open the older file (e.aat. 2. Open the AC 13 project in ArchiCAD 15. For example. To ensure that the project data is transferred smoothly. and save its project data using ArchiCAD 15. the ArchiCAD 13 project) in ArchiCAD 15.g. 3. and then re-use these data in other projects. Open the ArchiCAD 15 project you want to work on. Save the customized Criteria Sets to a file (Use the Export command from the pop-up in the Find & Select dialog box). Schemes) • Attributes (. . 4. These exportable data types include: • Project Info • Model View Options Combination • Interactive Schedule (Scheme Settings) • Project Index (Index Settings) • Work Environment (Profile. you can use these customized project data files even if they were created in an older-version project. Import the newly saved Criteria Sets (Use the Import command from the pop-up in the Find & Select dialog box).prf) You can export many types of customized project data from ArchiCAD in XML or other special file formats.

you will be running BIM Server version 15. which encompasses Module 15 and any modules installed earlier (e. 96 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating the BIM Server Migrating the BIM Server: Version 13/14 to Version 15 Note: If you are migrating BIM Server 13: You must run the latest available hotfix for BIM Server 13 before you begin the migration process. In essence. Custom Properties and Library databases of all installed server modules are handled uniformly and are always in sync. this means that your BIM Server can now run Teamwork projects in ArchiCAD 15. On the server machine that contains BIM Server 13 or 14. The installer will recognize the presence of a previous BIM Server. The Users. No other server migration steps are necessary. as well as your old Teamwork Projects in ArchiCAD 13 and/or 14. Roles. Once the installation process is complete. begin the installation of BIM Server version 15. and will upgrade your server to version 15. Module 13 and/or 14).g. See also Modular BIM Server.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 97 .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 The BIM Server Control Center lists all the installed modules on the server. Click on the info button to see additional data on each module. This information is view-only.

any Teamwork files that are linked to it (via hotlinked modules or drawings) must also be migrated. This setup . and • Migrate Prepared Project (you do this in ArchiCAD 15). you will need: 1. This can take one of two forms: Either • You have a BIM Server version 15 that also includes BIM Server version 13/14 as module(s). Or • You have BIM Server 13/14 on one machine and BIM Server 15 on another machine.is the simplest way to migrate. 3. This setup . This means that if you migrate a project (either solo or Teamwork) from ArchiCAD 13/14 to ArchiCAD 15.) 98 ArchiCAD 15 Help . that source Teamwork project must have the same version number as the host project. Topics in this section: Migrate Project from one Server Module to Another Migrate Project from one Server Machine to Another Migrate Project from one Server Module to Another In this scenario. Open your ArchiCAD 13/14 Teamwork project. Make sure that all other users send in their changes and leave the project. This migration process entails two phases: • Prepare Project for Migration (you do this in ArchiCAD 13 or 14). Start ArchiCAD 13/14.migrating the project from one server module to another . you have a single BIM Server that has modules 13/14 and 15 installed. (If they do not. Important Keep in mind that if you link a hotlinked module or a drawing from a Teamwork project.is the more labor-intensive method. they will lose any unsent changes. Prepare Project for Migration 1. 13 or 14) to ArchiCAD 15 To migrate a Teamwork Project from ArchiCAD 13 or 14 (henceforth “13/14” in this document) to ArchiCAD 15.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating a Teamwork Project (v. Access to BIM Server version 13/14 and BIM Server version 15.migrating the project from one server machine to another . Both ArchiCAD 13/14 and ArchiCAD 15 installed on your client machine. (See Migrating the BIM Server. 2. 2.

Issue the Prepare for Migration command at Teamwork > Project > Migrate Project > Prepare for Migration. Click Prepare. The project is prepared for migration. 5. ArchiCAD 15 Help 99 . 6. The Migrate Project dialog appears.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 4.

choose Finish Preparation from the next dialog box. Once you have prepared all the projects you need. 100 ArchiCAD 15 Help .To migrate another project. Choose Teamwork > Project > Migrate Project > Migrate Prepared Projects. you prepare all of them in ArchiCAD 13/14 before changing to ArchiCAD 15 and completing their migration there. Start ArchiCAD 15. then Close. choose Open and Prepare another Project. move on to the next phase: Migrate Prepared Project 1. 8. This is the recommended choice if you have several Teamwork projects to migrate.If you do not want to prepare any more projects now.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 7. . 2. instead of switching back and forth between ArchiCADs for each project. You now have two choices: . This way.

If you have not prepared any projects. 6. you can continue in one of three ways: .Leave the migration process ArchiCAD 15 Help 101 . 5. Comments. (These libraries will be uploaded to the BIM Server if they are not there already.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 3.) If you do not check this box. messages and any reservations will be deleted during project migration. it means you cannot complete that project’s migration now . you will continue using the migrated project with its current ArchiCAD libraries. Now that the original project is migrated.Join the migrated project .If the listed project is shown in grey. At this point. The dialog box lists all the prepared projects: select one to migrate it. Users and their roles on this project will be unchanged. Note: The Project Log. plus the necessary migration libraries. because the server is offline. you are prompted to do so. The project content will be uploaded to the BIM Server. you can manually delete it from the old BIM Server module.Migrate another project . . check the Migrate ArchiCAD Libraries box: this will replace the project’s currently used ArchiCAD libraries with ArchiCAD Library 14. Optionally. Click Migrate. 7. 4.for example. .

pln in ArchiCAD 13/14. All hotlinks and drawings linked to Teamwork source projects must be re-linked manually. 6. If the migrated project contains any hotlinked modules or drawings linked from AC 13/14 Teamwork projects. following the steps above. Once the original projects are all migrated. (If they do not. once the source projects are all migrated. 4. you must also migrate each of those Teamwork projects from ArchiCAD 13/14 to ArchiCAD 15. Open the. Make sure that all other users send in their changes and leave the project. you must re-link the hotlinked modules and drawings manually.If those hotlink/drawing source projects were on a different BIM Server than the migrated host project. then the host project will automatically locate and link the source projects. 5. 1.If those hotlink/drawing source projects were on the same BIM Server as the migrated host project. 7. 102 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then opened in ArchiCAD 15 and shared to the BIM Server 15.pln) ArchiCAD 13/14 project. 3.) Just in case. Migrate Project from one Server Machine to Another In this scenario. it is advisable to lock the project on the server to prevent other users from modifying it. Each of these source projects must be saved as. . and BIM Server 15 on another server. You must also migrate any ArchiCAD 13/14 Teamwork projects that are the source projects for hotlinked modules or drawings in the migrated project. Open your ArchiCAD 13/14 Teamwork project. Start ArchiCAD 15.pln file and share it as an ArchiCAD 15 Teamwork project to BIM Server 15. 8. 2. they can be manually deleted from the old BIM Server. you have BIM Server 13/14 running on one server. once those source projects are all migrated.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 8. once they are all migrated. they will lose any unsent changes. Save the project as a solo (. .

This is because the Model View Option (Document > Set Model View) is now extended to doors too: ArchiCAD 15 Help 103 .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Minimal Space Extended to Doors If your ArchiCAD 13 project used the Model View Option to “Show Minimal Space” for furnishings. then the same project in ArchiCAD 15 will also show the Minimal Space parameter for all your doors (provided that you have loaded the ArchiCAD 15 Library).

104 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 No Automatic Home Story Settings There is no Automatic Home Story setting in ArchiCAD 15. you have the option to automatically re-assign those elements’ home stories accordingly. elevate. In ArchiCAD 15. during editing operations that affect the elements’ elevation (e.g. multiply with vertical displacement). Elements from older projects (older than AC13) whose Home Story was set to Automatic will now be assigned Home Stories that correspond to the story they were placed on.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 105 . • The “Object” value in ArchiCAD 15 lists only those objects that are placed using the Object tool. All other object subtypes are listed only if you add those subtypes as separate Element Type criteria.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Interactive Schedule criteria from earlier versions may create unexpected results in ArchiCAD 15 if you are listing Object-type elements: • The “Object” value in earlier versions listed objects from all Object subtypes.

• If the older Teamwork project is the source project of Hotlinks and Drawings placed into other projects. In the appearing file directory dialog box. go to File > Open > Open. 5. 4. Thus. 2. . After all changes have been sent. Then save the . using the GRAPHISOFT BIM Server Manager. these will function without any problems in ArchiCAD 15.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Open Older (pre-13) Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 15 1. use the relink commands in the Hotlink Manager and Drawing Manager. then those links will be broken when the older Teamwork project is opened in ArchiCAD 15. Open the Teamwork project in its original. Click Open. these hotlinks and drawings must be relinked manually to the host project. . 3. In this case.You should upload the Linked Libraries to the BIM Server. As part of the Share process: . In ArchiCAD 15.plp file you saved in Step 2. if the older Teamwork project was created in ArchiCAD 11 or earlier. select the . follow the migration procedure described here: Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks. • If the older Teamwork project contained Hotlinks and Drawings referring to external content.) 106 ArchiCAD 15 Help .plp file. (See Upload a Library to BIM Server.However. older-version ArchiCAD.Project-specific libraries from earlier ArchiCAD versions will be transformed into Embedded Libraries in ArchiCAD 15. (Teamwork > Share).) Important: • All users and workspaces will be lost! Users and roles must be created and assigned for this project on the BIM Server. Share the project to a BIM Server. these Hotlinks and linked Drawings cannot be updated from their original sources. (In the host projects. all users should sign out (except the Administrator).

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Lost Criteria Sets Find & Select criteria sets from earlier (pre-13) versions will be lost when you open the olderversion projects in ArchiCAD 15. ArchiCAD 15 Help 107 .

The “Hotlinked Modules” list (in the top half of the dialog box) displays the hierarchy of modules 108 ArchiCAD 15 Help . open the project in ArchiCAD 15. When you open a project in ArchiCAD 15 which contains hotlinks to source files saved in versions 11 or earlier. you will see the following warning: Open Hotlink Manager to View Hierarchy of Project’s Hotlink Sources • To get a list of all the files that are hotlinked to the current project. Go to Hotlink Manager (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager).Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Note: This process is applicable when migrating older-version projects (11 or earlier) to ArchiCAD 15.

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 hotlinked into the current project. click the “Show hierarchy in browser” button. The “Hotlink Sources” list displays the sources of the hotlinked module files together with their status. This will open your default internet browser in a separate ArchiCAD 15 Help 109 . • For a more comprehensive and printable display of the hotlinked source files.

you will open the hotlinked source files one by one and save them in ArchiCAD 15. showing the hotlinked source files in a hierarchical format.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 window. together with file locations that are hyperlinked. 110 ArchiCAD 15 Help . choose the “Open Hotlink Manager” option. Open the project (A. In the warning dialog which appears. Suppose you have the following hotlinks linked into Project A: 1. Conversion of a project with Hotlink Source files available in their original location In this workflow.pln) 2.

locating missing sources.pln in our example you must open the file in ArchiCAD 15. 5.pln.pln.pln. Then save the opened file (File > Save.pln and D. C. etc.pln as a separate project that contains legacy hotlinks: you must save those hotlink sources in ArchiCAD 15 as described in this document .pln contains nested modules. If these nested modules are in legacy format. ArchiCAD will display a warning when they are opened. 4. In the Hotlink Manager.B. start with D.pln. yet the Hotlink Manager for A. treating B. using the “Open in Separate ArchiCAD” button.pln has checked the “Skip Nested Modules” box). (In our example.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 3. If you have successfully re-saved all the Legacy files from the Source list (as described in Step 4). For each Source file shown as Legacy or Missing . you should continue the conversion process. if the module is placed on a story that is not shown in A. resaving nested legacy source files. then the Source list should not show any files in “Legacy” status. or if B. The Hotlink Manager contains a list of Source files. In this case.by resaving the files.) Note: It is possible that the opened source files contain other hotlinks that are not used in A. (for example. click the “Refresh Status” button.) We recommend that you save the files in this order: go through the hierarchy file by file from bottom to top in the hierarchy. ArchiCAD 15 Help 111 .

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 6. Click Update. 112 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 Help 113 .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Beginning with ArchiCAD 12. Door/Window objects have been reprogrammed to display correctly in light of the partial structure display feature. see Migrating Libraries and Objects from ArchiCAD 12 and Earlier. Doors and Windows migrated from older-version projects (version 11 and earlier) into ArchiCAD 15 will not be displayed properly if you use Partial Structure Display. To address the issue of incompatible library parts. These Door/Window objects are incompatible for the purposes of Partial Structure Display.

114 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (Place Marker at either or both ends of the S/E line. so a given S/E Marker’s appearance will be uniform throughout the project.” you should adjust individual Markers as needed.) The Section/Elevation Marker display option is no longer a Model View Option. When migrating an older-version file in which you used any Section/Elevation Marker Model View Option other than “As in Settings. or place one Marker in the middle.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display For both Section and Elevation Markers. regardless of which view it is saved in. the Marker appearance is set in the Tool Settings Dialog Box for each individual Section and Elevation.

they are converted into Blocks plus a Background-color Solid fill. If you chose “Convert Fill Backgrounds as Additional Solid Hatches”. a new option in the DXF/DWG Translator enables you to manually set up a custom Fill Conversion table. You should check these converted files and make any changes necessary. the results may vary from earlier version conversions (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier).Symbol: if you chose “Convert all fills as Solid”. Possible Differences in Fill Conversion within ArchiCAD 15: • When converting ArchiCAD fills.Image: converted to a solid fill (technically a background-color hatch) . • Also. Fill types in ArchiCAD 15 are converted by default as follows: .Gradient: converted to a solid fill (technically a foreground-color hatch) . symbol fills are converted into Blocks.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills When saving an ArchiCAD 15 file to AutoCAD-compatible format. ArchiCAD 15 Help 115 .

1 through 11 will be lost when you migrate the projects to ArchiCAD 15. 116 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 IFC Data IFC data in ArchiCAD projects in versions 8.

and the display of Zone Fills in the project.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Review New Model View Options for Fills The Model View Options panel. However.” is now called “Override Fill Display. but when you migrate an older-version file to ArchiCAD 15. formerly called “Options for Fills and Zones. Cover.” As in earlier versions (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier). and Drafting Fills. the display of Cut. the program will assign corresponding Model View Options to ensure that fills are displayed correctly in ArchiCAD 15. this panel is used to globally define the Fill Backgrounds. ArchiCAD 15 Help 117 . you should double-check the fill display in ArchiCAD 15 and make any adjustments necessary. The various options have changed somewhat.

For detailed information. these are all automatically set during the conversion so that the same look is preserved in ArchiCAD as far as possible. there are two basic ways to migrate your ArchiCAD 9 Projects and PlotMaker 9 Layout Books to ArchiCAD 15: 1. and the layouts in an LBK (Layout Book) file. In version 9. Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 15: The ArchiCAD 9 Project file should be placed into its own Project File in ArchiCAD 15 (this file would contain only Model Views. the Project Model is always located in a PLN file. To migrate the ArchiCAD 9 Project File. see Converting Model Views to AC15: Floor Plan Display Issues for a detailed list.1 or version 9. Because of new settings in ArchiCAD 15. plus the default Layout Book). 118 ArchiCAD 15 Help . it is possible that some elements will look slightly different than they did in ArchiCAD 9. ArchiCAD 15 (and every ArchiCAD version from 10 up) contains both Model Views and Layouts in an integrated environment in a single file. 2. Although there are several settings which can affect how elements are displayed on the Floor Plan.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 15 This chapter contains detailed information about how to migrate your ArchiCAD 8. Create a Single File in ArchiCAD 15: If the Project is small enough. separate Project File in ArchiCAD 15 (this file would contain all Layouts with no Model information). Option 1: Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 15 1. both the ArchiCAD 9 Project File (PLN) and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book (LBK) can be merged into a single file in ArchiCAD 15.1 or ArchiCAD 9 project files and PlotMaker 8. Note: In this description. version “9” should be understood as either version 8. simply open the PLN file in ArchiCAD 15 and save it. The following sections outline how to carry out both options. Since ArchiCAD 15 Projects can be divided among multiple ArchiCAD PLN files. and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book should be placed into a second.1 or PlotMaker 9 Layout Books into ArchiCAD 15.

select PlotMaker Layout Book (*. To migrate the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book. you will find the counterparts of these in the ArchiCAD 15 Library and you may change the generated Title Types into parametric ones shipped with ArchiCAD 15. Click the Open button to start opening it. 3. use the File > Open command. Since Title Types of PlotMaker 9 have become GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 15. ArchiCAD will place these created Library Parts into its Embedded Library.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 2. displaying the same information as the source Title Type in PlotMaker 9. press Show ArchiCAD 15 Help 119 . However. they will be listed in the Library Manager.lbk) as File Type and select the desired LBK file. the program will convert all Title Types defined in the Layout Book File into Library Objects (GSM Files). When ArchiCAD is finished converting the Layout Book data. For more detailed information. In the Dialog. an Information Dialog will alert you to data that could not be converted because of essential differences between the features of ArchiCAD 15 and PlotMaker 9. if you used default Title Types in PlotMaker 9. 4. Please note that these generated Title Types have become non-parametric GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 15.

you could define custom line weights for each individual drawing element (e. every Project File must contain both Model Views and a Layout Book as default. with their own attributes and settings. plus what you can do about it. Fills. when merging Layout Book data into a PLN file. specific line weights defined in PlotMaker 9 will be converted back to their line weights as specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog of ArchiCAD 15. the procedure follows the usual rules of merging. This means that the PLN file into which Layout Book data is merged will already contain one or more Layouts. Because of this difference. All Layouts will be displayed in the Navigator’s Layout Book. Therefore. and are not overwritten by merged data. etc. In ArchiCAD 15. Please see Conversion Warnings for a detailed list of conversion warnings. to merge both the Layout Book from PlotMaker and Project File from ArchiCAD 9 into a single project file in ArchiCAD 15. you can define line weights only for Pens. and all elements using a certain Pen will be drawn using the line weight defined for that Pen. you will merge Layout Data into a Project File. For this reason. existing data are used.). Lines. 5. which means that if a particular setting already exists in the receiving file. in PlotMaker 9.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Detailed Report in Browser to launch your default web browser containing a fuller explanation of what could not be converted and why. but no model data will exist in any Model Views. One Story will be created as default.g. When creating a single PLN file in ArchiCAD 15. the following settings of the Layout Book are not merged: • Book settings 120 ArchiCAD 15 Help . For example. In ArchiCAD 15. Now your new ArchiCAD 15 Documentation Project File (a file containing only Layout Book information) is ready for use. Option 2: Create Single File in ArchiCAD 15 Use this option for relatively small projects.

use the File > File Special > Merge command to merge data from the other saved ArchiCAD 15 file (the one containing Layout Book data). Follow these steps: 1. Layout-specific settings in the Work Environment of ArchiCAD 15 will not be modified by data of the imported Layout Book. Subsets. In the appearing dialog box. In the latter active Project File (the one containing model data). they will be considered identical by the program. 3. Open the ArchiCAD 9 PLN file in ArchiCAD 15 and save it as another AC 15 PLN file. If the Attribute or Master Layout names in both files are identical. Master Layouts and placed Drawings) is inserted into the existing Layout Book structure of the ArchiCAD 15 PLN file. Open the PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 15 and save it as an AC 15 PLN file. Please note that the program compares only the names (but not content or definition) when checking for matching Attributes/Master Layouts. and the existing files in ArchiCAD 15. You now have two new ArchiCAD 15 files. ArchiCAD 15 Help 121 . The program will compare the names of the Attributes and Master Layouts of the merged file and the host ArchiCAD 15 file. Click the Merge button. The structure of the merged Layout Book (its Layouts. 2. choose Layout Book to merge Layout Book data of the file into your active Project File.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 • Project Info • Grid settings • Default Master Layout setting Also. these two must now be merged. will be kept. along with their settings.

and because Views and certain other data would not come through if you merged the Model data into the file containing Layout Book data. Open the ArchiCAD 15 PLN File containing the Layout Book data. and not the other way around. Note: You should follow the route specified in this guide. 122 ArchiCAD 15 Help . that is. merge the PLN File containing Layout Book data into the PLN File containing Model data. only some of its Layouts. you will see that all Layout Book data has now been merged into the Project File. This is because of the rules of merging. Open the ArchiCAD 15 PLN File containing the Model data. 2.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 If you open the Organizer from the Navigator. In case you do not wish to merge the Layout Book in its entirety. do the following: 1.

The warnings displayed always apply to the file currently being converted. Note: Such drawing links will not be redefined as internal references if the name of the source project file has changed since the drawings were placed. then the Drawing references will automatically switch from external file references to internal references after the Layouts are merged. Printing/Plotting Publisher sets should be reviewed Some Print/Plot Options in PlotMaker 9 have no equivalent in ArchiCAD. The following is a list of all warnings that may be displayed by the program during conversion. 1. ArchiCAD 15 Help 123 . If you have Drawings placed into the Layout Book PLN which point to the Model PLN as their source. the PLN File containing the Model data is on the right.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 3. due to changed feature sets. 4. In the PLN file containing Model data. Conversion Warnings When you migrate a PlotMaker 9 Layout Book file. so these settings need reviewing before Printing/Plotting them. In the illustration below. you should select all such drawings in the Drawing Manager and use the Link To button to re-link these Drawings to their source PLN (the renamed project file). In this case. move the desired Layouts from the Layout Book PLN file (on the left) into the Model PLN file (on the right). Using drag-and-drop. open the Organizer in such a way that you see the Layout Book of both files. ArchiCAD 15 may warn you of some project elements that will not be reproduced in ArchiCAD 15.

Custom line weight is restored to pen line weight In PlotMaker you could assign a custom line weight to lines. Pens. This option has no equivalent in ArchiCAD. Original output color of Elements drawn or pasted into Layouts has been restored In PlotMaker 9. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD. you will see the drawing. Conversion of Other Attributes/Settings Layers. In this case the color of the line came from the assigned pen. so OLE drawings within the LBK file cannot be converted properly. The name of some of these items will change. with no live link to the source application.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 2. (If the OLE drawing was embedded in the LBK file. circles or splines will be set to values specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog. so Text and Markers will be resized according to the scale change. in the Book Settings Dialog box. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD. Text and Markers size changes In PlotMaker. circles and splines. so elements will appear in their original color.) This option does not exist in ArchiCAD. It is recommended to replace these OLE Drawings with PDF files in ArchiCAD 15. just like any other element in the drawing. (You checked the Fix Size option for Text and Markers in the Drawing Settings dialog box. Autotext items: All Autotext entries are converted. output color of elements on Layouts may be set to grayscale or black.) You can identify OLE drawings using the Drawing Manager palette: look for the OLE icon in the Type column. OLE Drawings could not be converted ArchiCAD does not support OLE technology. Fills: The ArchiCAD 15 PLN file will inherit the Layers of the LBK Layout Book. 3. 5. 6. all fills are displayed as defined in the Fill Settings Dialog Box. Edited drawing Layers are restored In PlotMaker you could modify the show/hide status of Drawing Layers. but you cannot update it. 4. These options have no equivalent in ArchiCAD. Pens and Fills come through unaltered. so these drawing Layers will be displayed according to their original show/hide status. Fill-related display and output options could not be converted In PlotMaker 9 you may apply global settings to Fills. The PlotMaker Layer will be renamed to ArchiCAD Layer. but the weight was custom set in the element’s settings dialog box. you could set the size of Texts and Markers to retain their original size even after the Output Scale was modified. 7. so the line weights of lines. The following Autotext items (located in PlotMaker 9’s Book Info Dialog) are now found in the Project Info Dialog of ArchiCAD 15: • Client • Project Name • Street • City • State/Country • Postal Code 124 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Therefore. so they cannot be converted.

This change does not affect either the full size of the Layout (printable area + Margins on all four sides) or the sizes of the printable area or any of the Margins. the size of the Layout means the printable area of the page (the full size of the paper minus margins on all four sides). Some names have changed. the size of a Layout means the full size of the paper. so these are converted into their closest match: • Layout Name • Layout Number (Layout ID in ArchiCAD 15) • Subset Name • Subset Number (Subset ID in ArchiCAD 15) • Page Number (Layout Number in ArchiCAD 15) • Number of Pages (Number of Layouts in ArchiCAD 15) • Book Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 15) • Book Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 15) • Drawing Name • Drawing Name with Extension (Drawing Name in ArchiCAD 15) • Drawing Number (Drawing ID in ArchiCAD 15) • Drawing Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 15) • Drawing Scale (Original Scale in ArchiCAD 15) • Output Scale (Drawing Scale in ArchiCAD 15) • AC File Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 15) • AC File Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 15) • Last saved at • Last saved by • Long Date • Short Date • Time Master Layout: Layout size is defined differently in ArchiCAD 15.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 • Company • Project Number • Architect • Draftsman (CAD Technician in ArchiCAD 15) • Project Status • Date of Issue • Custom1 • Custom2 • Custom3 The following Autotext items are also converted. They will be the same as in previous versions. only the names have changed to better approximate real-world practice. Some no longer apply. So Master Layout sizes are converted ArchiCAD 15 Help 125 . In ArchiCAD 15. They are available in ArchiCAD 15 while editing a Text Block in either a Model View or on a Layout. where a Layout is the whole paper used for printing/plotting. In PlotMaker 9 and earlier versions.

the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 15 will be set to be an auto-update Drawing. Project links are saved with the Layout Book File (Preferences > Cache Folder > Include Cache in Layout Book). Project Preferences: Working Units. The Output Scale setting will be converted into Drawing Scale. If several Drawings in PlotMaker 9 used the same Pen Set. If cache data was stored in the Layout File in PlotMaker 9 (the option is in Preferences > Cache Folder). Book settings: comes through unaltered. and will be saved with the ArchiCAD 15 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog). which will be output. Drawing Status It is recommended that you perform an update of all placed Drawings after opening or merging a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 15. The Grid for Drawing Numbering and Master Layout default come through unaltered. (Since there is no Uniform Pens and Color settings checkbox in ArchiCAD 15. Uniform Pens and Colors setting. Grids: come through unaltered. Note: In ArchiCAD 15. By default. Drawing settings: all settings come through (Title is converted into GDL Object). If a Drawing was saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is checked). Subset settings: comes through unaltered. If a Drawing was not saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is not checked). except for Attributes Update Rules. This Pen Set will have the same name as the first converted Drawing which uses this Pen Set. this means in effect that all Drawings will refer to the same Pen Set). 126 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Publisher preferences. the same Pen Set will be created in ArchiCAD 15 and the Drawing will continue using it. bitmap files) are not saved with the Layout Book File. Layout settings: comes through unaltered. and will not be saved with the ArchiCAD 15 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will not be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog). Drawings placed on Layouts: In PlotMaker 9. Custom line weights do not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 15 . Mouse Constraints.see Warning 7 above). which does not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 15 . the Drawings will be stored in the Project File in ArchiCAD 15 (see Drawings placed on Layout below).see Warning 2 above).g. the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 15 will be set to be a manual-update Drawing. PMK files. external links (e. Warning 6 above is displayed.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 accordingly. which have no equivalent in ArchiCAD 15. Drawing Scale is the scale of the Drawing on the Layout. but all the converted Drawings which used it in PlotMaker 9 will use it in ArchiCAD 15. Miscellaneous settings come through. ArchiCAD 15 will create only one Pen Set for all the Drawings. while “Original Scale” is that of the Drawing’s source view. If the Text and Markers option in PlotMaker has been set to Fix Size. Layer changes are not carried through (see Warning 5 above). If a placed Drawing had its own Pen Set. except Output Color settings.

ArchiCAD 15 can monitor the modification status of each Drawing with a PLN source separately. In PlotMaker 9. could come from the Layout or from the ArchiCAD Viewpoint. which has many customizable columns listing information about Drawings. the Drawing Name was always the same as the name of the View from which it was created. all elements placed on Layouts. the program monitored the last modification date of the Drawings’ source files. the status checking will be performed according to the old method (which assumes all drawings from a modified PLN source require updating). but predefined settings will ensure that files migrated from ArchiCAD 9 will have compatible displays in ArchiCAD 15. For this reason. However. Library Objects When merging an LBK file into ArchiCAD 15. When opening a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 15. If the last modification date of the file had changed. Instead. (This transition state can cause Drawings with “OK” status in PlotMaker to have “Modified” status in ArchiCAD. the View ID value is used. ArchiCAD 15 Help 127 .) In this case. a View Name consists of two parts: View Name and View ID. Drawing Name can be either “View Name” or “View Name + View ID” (or Custom). In ArchiCAD 15. the value of Drawing ID (which was called Drawing Number in PlotMaker 9). are merged. it is highly recommended to use the Drawing Manager of ArchiCAD 15. Therefore it is recommended to review Drawing Names and Drawing IDs to make sure everything came through correctly. or it could be set to a custom value. In contrast. the libraries used by the merged project are not automatically loaded into the ArchiCAD 15 project. In PlotMaker 9. In ArchiCAD 15. Drawing Name and Drawing ID Not all Drawing Names and Drawing IDs coming from a PlotMaker 9 LBK file will have their exact equivalent when opened in ArchiCAD 15. Converting Model Views to AC15: Floor Plan Display Issues ArchiCAD 15 offers more sophisticated Display Options for elements than ArchiCAD 9. Thus. compared to PlotMaker 9.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Background: The modification status checking of Drawings is significantly enhanced in ArchiCAD 15. you should load any missing libraries to resolve the problem. the ArchiCAD Viewpoint option is not available. if after a merge you find that any library parts (such as Drawing Titles) are missing. including library parts. Only after the first update performed in ArchiCAD 15 will the status checking mechanism run on the drawing level instead of the file level. the program assumed that all Drawings coming from that file would need updating. Background: In PlotMaker 9. a transitional state exists: the LBK file does not contain all information necessary for ArchiCAD 15 to decide the modification status of Drawings in the Layout Book file. For checking Drawing Names/IDs and updating Drawings.

but leave the with Contours checkbox unchecked. it will achieve the same result as the Show with Dim. and Interior Elevation. option in ArchiCAD 9. it will achieve the same result as the Reflected Ceiling options in ArchiCAD 9. • If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button. it will achieve the same result as the Hide on Plan options in ArchiCAD 9. just as if there were no Doors/Windows in Walls. you will notice that there is no option to set Bitmap Patterns. Options for Construction Elements Panel. giving you more flexibility in applying model views: • If you choose the Show On Plans radio button. • If you choose the Show On Plans radio button. Elevation. the Door/Window hole will be visible. 128 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and check the with Contours checkbox. but leave the with Markers checkbox unchecked. Regarding the display of Cut Fills (Document > Set Model Display > Model View Options > Override Fill Display).Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 While display options have changed since ArchiCAD 9 (they are now called Model View Options). • The Hide on Floor Plan radio button is a new choice: it means that Doors/Windows will not be shown on the Floor Plan at all. A bitmap display is available for on-screen display only: Bitmap or Vectorial is set globally using the Vectorial Hatching option of On-Screen View Options. If you check Override Cut Fills and click Solid Foreground. In Section. options for Doors and Windows are set separately in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. it will achieve the same result as the Solid w/o Separation Lines option in ArchiCAD 9. it will achieve the same result as the Show on Plans option in ArchiCAD 9. and check the with Markers checkbox. In ArchiCAD 15. When you check Override Cut Fills and the Show Skin Separator Lines box. • If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button. you will achieve the same result as the Separators Only option in ArchiCAD 9. the following information should help you recreate the same display in ArchiCAD 15 for migrated projects.

• Solid Background: A new option. The last area is for Zone Fills and Zone Stamps. If you check Override Drafting Fills and click the Solid Foreground option. The next area in the upper right corner is for Cover Fills. To adjust Cover Fill display. Zone Stamp: Check Hide Zone Stamp to hide it. The next area in the lower left corner is for Drafting Fills. To adjust Zone Fill display. Check this to achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. • Hide Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern Only option in ArchiCAD 9. ArchiCAD 15 Help 129 . • Category Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern on Category option in ArchiCAD 9. check the Override Zone Fills box and choose one of the following options: • No Fill: This replicates the None option in ArchiCAD 9. The options in this area achieve the same as the Zone Polygons Display Options and Zone Stamps fields achieved in ArchiCAD 9. you will achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. this creates a cover fill over the element. displayed in the background color defined for the element’s cover fill. and displays only the contour if any. • No Fill: A new option. the Show Skin Separator Lines checkbox is enabled. • Solid Background: This replicates the Solid Background Colored Fill option in ArchiCAD 9. If you leave the Override Zone Fills box unchecked. this draws no fills at all.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Also. • Solid Category: This replicates the Category Color option in ArchiCAD 9. this corresponds to the Cover Fill Display Option for Zone Polygons from ArchiCAD 9. check the Override Cover Fills box and choose one of the following options: • Solid Foreground: This replicates the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9.

Back-Save Project using a Renovation Filter There is no Renovation feature in ArchiCAD 14. version 14 file (containing a skylight) into another version 14 project. any library parts that were revised for 15 will be automatically replaced by their original counterparts in version 14. so elements will lose their Renovation Status and override displays when you back-save to AC 14. dialog box. along with any attached dimensions. those new features will be lost when you back-save the object to ArchiCAD 14. Exception: You hotlink this back-saved. The following information can help you minimize data loss when you back-save to ArchiCAD 14. no override styles are applied. so you back-save it again to ArchiCAD 14. Then you update the hotlink. 130 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • All elements in the back-saved ArchiCAD 14 project will be displayed using their own parameters. Within the host project. Dimensions of Hotlinked Skylights Lost in ArchiCAD 14 Skylights placed into Single-plane roofs will be saved back correctly to ArchiCAD 14. your project will lose the functions and tools that were new for ArchiCAD 15. You do have the option to filter the elements to be saved in ArchiCAD 14. To minimize data loss: split your Multi-plane roofs into Single-plane roofs in ArchiCAD 15 before saving the file back to ArchiCAD 14. Now. Choose the Renovation Filter with which you want to back-save the project. • Elements hidden in the chosen Renovation Filter will be missing entirely from the project in ArchiCAD 14. the dimensions you placed into the host project (version 14) will be lost. click the Options button. In the Save as. 1. you add dimensions to the skylight. Split Multi-plane Roofs Before You Back-Save Multi-plane roofs will be lost in ArchiCAD 14.. Note: If the object in ArchiCAD 15 has acquired additional parameters or functions compared to the version in ArchiCAD 14.Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 Changes when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 14 As a rule. 2. (Design > Split into Single-plane Roofs). Backward Compatibility Supported for Library Parts When back-saving your ArchiCAD 15 project to version 14. if you back-save an ArchiCAD 15 project to ArchiCAD 14.. Then the original version 15 project is changed. • Elements shown in the chosen Renovation Filter will be back-saved to the ArchiCAD 14 project.

Configuration Configuration Start ArchiCAD Create New Solo Project Open a Solo Project Close a Solo Project Saving from ArchiCAD File Compression Template Files Backup Files Archive Files License Borrowing Opening Projects through a Network Add-Ons and Goodies Working Units Project Preferences Troubleshooting Problem Files Scale Attributes Libraries Favorites The ArchiCAD User Interface Customizing your Work Environment ArchiCAD 15 Help 131 .

In the top section. the “Set up Project Settings” section below offers two choices for the new Project’s settings. “What would you like to do?”. The Start ArchiCAD dialog box appears. choose either: Create a New Project or Open a Project Create a New Project Creates a new blank project in ArchiCAD. If you choose this option. 132 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Configuration Start ArchiCAD Double-click on the ArchiCAD icon in your program folder to start the program.

Note: This can be the perfect solution for you. In the next section of the pop-up list. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD. However. Use a Template: Click the pop-up to choose a template. which contains all preferences settings. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as “Untitled”). then close it and start the new project again: this time. located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. Use Latest Project Settings Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options. ArchiCAD 15 Help 133 . placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template. Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 15\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 15\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file. you may find that your preferred settings are off.Configuration 1. If you do not wish to return to the program’s default settings. if you always work with the same standard definitions. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location. The next section contains any additional template files saved to the “Templates” folder. and a few general preferences. that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. 2. At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person. you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. open a project that you are familiar with.

the “You can” section below gives you three choices: 1. Browse for a Solo Project. Note: If you want to open a Teamwork project from ArchiCAD 12 or earlier (file extension . Choose this button. Thus. then select a recent project from the list below and click the “Open” button at bottom left to open it. See the Migration Guide for more information on converting older Teamwork projects. Browse for a Teamwork Project See Join or Leave a Teamwork Project. 3.bpn. you must first open it as a solo project. Select a Recent Project. use the first radio button above. 134 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Choose this button.plc).plp. “Browse for a Solo Project.Configuration Open a Project If you choose Open a Project. . 2. then click the “Browse” button at bottom left to bring up a file directory dialog box.” for if you are opening an older Teamwork Project. .

To enable it again. Set up Work Environment Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. • Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD. ArchiCAD 15 Help 135 . Do not Display this Dialog Next Time If you don’t want to see the Start ArchiCAD dialog box every time you start the program.Configuration Note: Another way to open a recent project is by selecting from the list at the bottom of the File > Open submenu. disable it by checking this box. use the File > New & Reset All command. including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. • Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile. see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD and Customizing your Work Environment. or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information.

pln). The next section contains any additional template files saved to the “Templates” folder. which contains all preferences settings. At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. The New Project dialog box appears.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 15\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 15\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file. Note: If you press Alt (Opt) key when choosing the New command. (When starting a new project based on a template. 136 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Use a Template Click the pop-up to choose a template. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD. Click either Use a Template.Configuration Create New Solo Project Use File > New > New to create a new solo project (file extension. its name changes to New and Reset All. or Use Latest Project Settings. and ArchiCAD will automatically use the default project settings. you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as “Untitled”). located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates.

you may find that your preferred settings are off. including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. open a project that you are familiar with. Use Latest Project Settings Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options. that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person. ArchiCAD 15 Help 137 . or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD Use File > New to create a new project. • Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD. In the next section of the pop-up list. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location. see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD and Customizing your Work Environment. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you. if any. then close it and start the new project again: this time. • Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile. and a few general preferences. For more information. Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with. If you do not wish to return to the program’s default settings. From the New Project dialog box. However. Setup Work Environment Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. if you always work with the same standard definitions. you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. check the “Launch a new instance” box if you want to open an additional ArchiCAD in addition to the currently running program.Configuration On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates.

Configuration

Open a Solo Project
Use File > Open > Open... to open a solo project.

This command is not available if the active window belongs to an open GDL Object. See also File Types Opened by ArchiCAD. The Open file directory dialog box appears. Browse for the project you need.

138

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

To open a recent project, select from the list at the bottom of the File > Open command.

Related Topics: Join or Leave a Teamwork Project

ArchiCAD 15 Help

139

Configuration

Close a Solo Project
If you use File > Close to close the Floor Plan, you close the entire Project. You will be prompted to save recent changes, if any. External files (GDL Object windows, pictures) will remain open. When you save and close a project with many windows open simultaneously, ArchiCAD will reopen these windows the next time you open the project. Re-opening all these windows may take time, especially if they must be rebuilt. If the number of windows to be re-opened exceeds 20 (not including PhotoRendering windows, which are not saved with the project), then ArchiCAD will show a warning dialog in which you can opt to re-open just the frontmost window (plus the Floor Plan), instead of all of the previously open windows.

Related Topics: Close Teamwork Project

140

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Saving from ArchiCAD
Use File > Save to save your project. Choosing File > Save as allows you to save the Project under a new name, archive it or save the current window’s contents in a variety of file formats. Some of the available options may depend on the set of currently loaded Add-Ons. Some file formats are 2D-only or 3D-only formats. See File Types Saved by ArchiCAD.

Saving From a List Window
• Basic Element, Component and Zone Lists can be saved as Plain Text, Tabulated Text, HTML tables or PDF. Click either radio button to include the file’s Used Column only or All Columns in the file. Formatted lists including graphic information can be saved in.rtf (Rich Text Format), ArchiCAD Project format, or PDF.

Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule)
Schedules can be saved in the following formats: Tabbed text, DWF, .xls and PDF. From a PC, with MS Office, you can also save in.doc format.

Related Topics: File Types Saved by ArchiCAD Close a Solo Project Close Teamwork Project

ArchiCAD 15 Help

141

Configuration

File Compression
When saving certain file types from ArchiCAD (.pln, .tpl, .pla, .mod), the Options button in the Save dialog box presents you with the option to “Compress file.” This option is enabled by default, and is recommended in most cases, since file compression reduces file size considerably (by 60-70%). Using this option also increases download speed if you are working from a slow network, because the files are smaller. However, note that using the Compress file option means increased file saving time (about 30% longer), as a consequence of increased calculation needs. If the saving procedure takes too long, try turning this option off. Note: If you are using a computer with dual processors, file saving time should increase by only 5-10%.

142

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Template Files
A template is a read-only project file with extension tpl. It contains all project preferences settings, placed elements and tool default settings of the project. ArchiCAD 15 is shipped with a default template file together with the default library. Upon installation, the default template is located in the Defaults folder. Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 15\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 15\Defaults\ArchiCAD When you create a new project in ArchiCAD using a template file, this default template is at the top of the pop-up list when you choose a template:

See also Create New Solo Project.

To create a customized template:
1. Open a new empty project file. 2. Edit your project preferences, set up the project structure and/or place elements. 3. Save this project file as a template: use File > Save as, and choose “ArchiCAD Project Template (*.tpl)” as the file type. These files are saved to the “Templates” folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates.

To open a template:
1. Choose the File > New command 2. Select the Use a Template option
ArchiCAD 15 Help

143

Configuration

3. Select the desired template file. When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as “Untitled.” Note: Settings of the Work Environment Profile used to open your project will override Template file settings.

144

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Backup Files
Opening a Backup Project file (.bpn) allows you to recover the latest backup copy of a damaged project file, provided that the Make Backup Copy checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Data Safety & Integrity.

Related Topics: Data Safety & Integrity Backup Options

ArchiCAD 15 Help

145

Configuration

Archive Files
Documents saved as Archives are stored together with their Library Parts (in a Library Container File, with extension.lcf), and properties contained in and defined with the Project. The Archive format is recommended if you want all files referenced in the Project to be included, as when: • Moving a Project to another computer • Storing a completed Project

To save a Project in the Archive format:
1. Use the File > Save as command. 2. From the appearing Save dialog box, choose ArchiCAD Archive Project (*.pla) from the Save as type drop-down. 3. Click the Options button to access the Archive Options dialog box to choose which library parts to include in the Archive file.

Include All Drawings: This will include all drawings placed on layouts, even those which are NOT marked as “Store Drawing in the Project file” in its Drawing Settings dialog box.

Important Notes about Archive Files:
• If any Library Parts are missing from your Project at the time you save the Project as an Archive, these missing parts will not be included in the Archive document either. • If you add a.pla file to your Linked Libraries folder using Library Manager, make sure you add the explicit.pla file itself, not a folder that contains the.pla. Otherwise the parts located within the.pla will not be read. See Library Manager. • Because of the larger volume of information it stores, an Archive file size is somewhat larger than the corresponding Project document. • Archives store the font information used in the project, but not the fonts themselves. This means that if you wish to display textual information the same way as it appears in the original environment, you have to install the appropriate fonts.

146

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Archive files do not store Add-Ons. Therefore, if your project contains elements affected by Add-Ons, these elements may lose certain features or behavior if these Add-Ons are not present.

To Open a File in Archive format:
When you open an Archive type document, the Open Archive Project dialog box appears.

Choose one of the three options: • Read elements directly from archive: this means that the library parts will not be extracted from the archive file. You can place Objects referring to the elements in the Archive file, but you cannot edit the Library parts themselves (unlike the elements in an.lcf file). This also applies to list schemes used in calculations. This method saves a lot of disk space, but limits the modification possibilities. • Extract elements to a new folder: the external library parts required for the project will be extracted from the archive and placed in a new folder that you can name. This solution is recommended if you need to actually work on the project objects. (You cannot extract objects to the Embedded Library.) • Select a library: instead of extracting the library parts saved with the project, you can indicate a folder that houses the required elements. This solution is recommended if you wish to update the Project’s objects with their latest versions.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

147

Configuration

Troubleshooting Problem Files
If you encounter an error in a project that requires technical support, the problem can be resolved much more efficiently if the support personnel can view the problematic project files. The relevant files might be located on a BIM Server as well as on client machines, in various folders. The Support Package function is a utility that automatically gathers the necessary data and stores it in a single file (.support for solo projects or.twsupport for Teamwork projects) that you can easily send to GRAPHISOFT for troubleshooting. In the case of Teamwork projects, certain problems - errors during Send, Receive, or Saving the local copy - will automatically bring up the Support Package interface. (At this point, you can proceed or cancel as you prefer.) To create a Support Package: 1. From the ArchiCAD Help menu, select Create Support Package.

2. You are prompted to close any open projects. (You will also be prompted to Save or Send and Receive changes, where applicable.)

148

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

3. The Create Support Package dialog box appears:

Choose either Solo Project or Teamwork Project. Your most recently closed project is shown in the Project field. To choose a different project, click the Browse (...) button. - For a Teamwork project: You must select a BIM Server, then select the Teamwork Project whose files you want to send. If you are not a Project Administrator, you are prompted to provide a Project Administrator’s user name and password in order to access the projects on the server. (This account will not be stored on your computer.) 4. Select the package content to be sent. Default content is recommended. For a solo project, the Default content includes log files and crash info files. For a Teamwork project, the Default content includes log files, crash info files, and your local copy of the project. To include other items as well, choose Custom, then Package Content. In the appearing dialog box, check the boxes of the items to include. (The Default content is included automatically; here, choose any additional items to include in the package.)

ArchiCAD 15 Help

149

Configuration

The optional content differs for solo and for Teamwork projects:

5. Enter any comments that could be helpful to support staff. For example, describe what happened; list the last few actions you took. 6. Click OK to return to the Create Support Package dialog box. 7. Click Create. 8. Select a destination folder for the Support Package file.

9. Click OK to start the file creation process. 10. Send the file to your local GRAPHISOFT Technical Support.

150

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

License Borrowing
If your firm has multiple (network) licenses to use ArchiCAD or other GRAPHISOFT programs, the License Borrowing feature allows individual users to “borrow” a license key temporarily if they will be going offsite, to enable use of the software even without being connected to the network. License borrowing is available if your firm uses the CodeMeter network protection. To access this feature, ArchiCAD 15 must be running on your machine with a network license. Do one of the following: • Click on Help > License Information • From the Help > About ArchiCAD Dialog, click on License Information. In the License Information dialog box, the Available Products section lists the relevant installed GRAPHISOFT products, by Product Name and License.

Note: It is possible that you have installed MEP Modeler on your machine without a license key. (This means that you can view MEP elements correctly in ArchiCAD, but you cannot create or modify them.) In this case, the License Information dialog box lists MEP Modeler

ArchiCAD 15 Help

151

Configuration

product as Disabled. You can click Enable Product here to start using a license for MEP Modeler: this way, you will have full access to MEP functions.

Below, the Product Information section displays language version and other license information, including expiration date if you have borrowed a license. In any case, borrowing is available only if the selected product’s License is “Network (CodeMeter)”. Click Borrow to borrow a license for that product.

If the process is successful, the program lets you know that you have borrowed a license for the product, with a particular expiration date. In the License Information dialog box: • The selected product’s License information is listed as either “Borrowed (CodeMeter Stick)” or “Borrowed (License file)”, depending on the form of protection used. (This can vary by country.) • The selected product is now shown with a Return button: click here when you are ready to return the license. The expiration date of the borrowed license is shown in the Product Information section. • If your license expires before you return it, the program will automatically return it for you, even if you are not online.

152

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Opening Projects through a Network
If the file that you wish to open is already in use by someone else on the local network, ArchiCAD will warn you about this and let you know the name of the user, that is, the name defined in the Sharing Setup Control Panel (MacOS) or as the User Name (Windows).

You have the following choices: • Open the file as read-only • Open the file with exclusive access • Cancel opening the file If you choose to open the file as read-only, you can see and modify the whole file, but you can only save it under a different name or into another location. If you try to overwrite the original file, you will again be notified that it is in use and that you cannot replace it with your modified Project. You can also choose to open the file with exclusive access. However, you should be very careful about using this option. There are a number of reasons why ArchiCAD may state that a file is in use although it actually is not: • The person who last used the file did not properly open and close the file in ArchiCAD, e.g., because of a system crash. • You have made a copy of a file that was in use at the moment, and the copy of the file also includes the name of the person who was using it during the copying operation. Note: If you do open a file with full access while another person is using it, you will both overwrite each other’s work without getting any further warning message from ArchiCAD. Therefore, be extremely careful when opening a file with exclusive access in any situation other than the emergencies mentioned above.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

153

Configuration

Add-Ons and Goodies
Add-Ons are small applications that extend ArchiCAD’s core functionality. Many add-ons are integrated as ArchiCAD menu commands. Goodies are other Add-Ons that are not integrated into ArchiCAD’s default interface. See Goodies.

Managing Add-Ons
Open the Add-On Manager using Options > Add-On Manager command.

See Add-On Manager. Use the Add-On Manager to • Load Add-Ons from any location. They will be loaded after the next startup of ArchiCAD • Permanently remove Add-Ons while ArchiCAD is running 154
ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

• •

Control which Add-Ons should load automatically when ArchiCAD is started Show information about the loaded Add-Ons

Menu Location of Add-On Functions
You can freely customize visibility and the menu and toolbar location of these integrated add-ons in the settings dialogs of Options > Work Environment > Menus/Toolbars. The location of these additional add-ons in the menu structure depends on where the Add-On Anchor Point is located for that menu. You can move this Add-On Anchor Point to any menu location, again using the controls in Options > Work Environment > Menus and Toolbars.

If the Add-On Anchor Point is not part of your customized menu structure, then the additionally loaded Add-Ons will not be displayed in the menu either.

Goodies
“Goodies” are another source of ArchiCAD Add-Ons. They are not integrated into ArchiCAD’s default interface. To access them, go to ArchiCAD’s Help menu and choose the ArchiCAD 15 Downloads command, from which you can access a web page containing information on available add-ons and how to install them. Once you have installed a Goody into the program, you can then customize the location of the associated menu commands as described above, and manage it with the Add-On Manager. See Add-On Manager.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

155

Configuration

Working Units
To set working units for the current project, use the dialog box at Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.

If you open a Teamwork project from the server, its Working Units will have default values based on the template used to create the Teamwork project. However, you are free to change these Working Units while you work on the Teamwork project. Your Working Units preferences specific to each user, and are not saved to the server when you Send or Receive changes. For details on each of these controls, see:

Working Units

156

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Project Preferences
The Options > Project Preferences menu contains the Project Preferences tab pages where you set standards and working methods specific to the project you are working on, and which are saved along with the project. Note: Working Units and Teamwork Project Settings are separate dialog boxes, also opened from the Options > Project Preferences menu. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. In Teamwork, you must have access rights and must reserve the Project Preference dialog box in order to change these preferences. The Project Preferences dialog box contains a pop-up menu at top left listing each preference category (which you can also access directly from Options > Project Preferences). Clicking the Next and Previous buttons allows you to go from one screen to the other

For details on each of these controls, see:

Dimensions Preferences Calculation Units and Rules Preferences Zones Preferences Construction Elements Preferences Levels and Project North Preferences Related Topics: Working Units Teamwork Project Settings

ArchiCAD 15 Help

157

Configuration

Scale
To set the scale of the currently active window, choose the Document > Floor Plan Scale command. (The name of the command varies depending on which window is active.) You can have a separate scale in effect for each window.

Select either a standard scale from the pop-up list or type a nonstandard scale into the input field. The name of the given window is displayed in the caption of the dialog box.

Standard scales are shown according to either metric or US standards, depending on the Length Unit setting made in the Working Units dialog box. (See Working Units.)

158

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

You can also use the Scale pop-up from the Quick Options Palette to reset the scale of the current window. See Quick Options Palette. After setting a scale, what you see is a preview of the Project if it were printed or plotted at that scale. To make a zoomed view match the view at the currently set scale, choose View > Zoom > Actual Size (or click the zoom button) after setting the scale.

Actual Size is the equivalent of the 100% scale value. The 2D Symbol of some GDL Objects (see the parameter) can be set to be sensitive to the current scale: the symbol varies depending on the current scale. See 2D Detail Level.

Model Size vs. Paper Size Elements
Model Size elements are rescaled along with the model whenever you change the project scale. Model size elements include all construction elements such as walls, objects, slabs etc. Paper Size elements are printed or displayed on the screen at the size you specify, regardless of the scale selected for the Project. For elements that do not have any real size, such as dimensions and arrowheads, you can specify a fixed size defined in either points or millimeters. Either Model Size or Paper Size: The following elements may be either model size (scaled with the plan) or paper size (scale independent): • Text Blocks created with the Text tool: Choose Model or Paper size. See Text Tool Settings. • Dashed and symbol line types: Choose Model or Paper size. See Line Types Dialog Box. • Vectorial, symbol and image fill types: Choose Model or Paper size. See Fill Types Dialog Box.

Set a Different Scale for Each View
As you save views of your project, the scale is saved along with the view. Naturally, you will vary the scale as your project develops and you save multiple views at different scales for different purposes, using the Scale option. See View Settings.

Set a Separate Printing Scale for 2D Document
The Scale options in the Print 2D Document and Plot 2D Document dialog boxes allow you to specify a Custom printing scale each time you print or plot your work from a Floor Plan or other 2D window. See Print 2D Document and Plot 2D Document.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

159

Configuration

The Text and Markers options enable you to reduce/enlarge text and markers as the printing scale is changed, or keep them at a fixed (paper) size.

Drawing Scale
Drawings based on an ArchiCAD view have a Drawing Scale. By default, this Drawing Scale is the same as the Original Scale (the scale of the Drawing’s source view), but you can customize the Drawing Scale in Drawing Settings. See Drawing Settings.

160

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Customizing the Drawing scale has no effect on the scale of objects within the drawing; it is equivalent to a graphical resizing of the Drawing, like the effect of magnifying a document with a copy machine.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

161

Configuration

Attributes
ArchiCAD Attributes are groups of defined settings available to your project. For example, Line Types and Materials are Attributes which you can apply to many project elements as you create them. You will access these attributes in the appropriate dialog boxes: for example, when assigning Wall Settings, you will choose from the project’s Fill set and Line Type set, using the appropriate pop-up menus in the Wall Settings dialog box. What you see in these pop-up menus are defined in Options > Element Attributes.

ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Attributes. For most users, these default attribute sets are amply suited to their design needs. Note: If you have installed MEP Modeler, the MEP Systems attributes are also available. See the MEP Modeler User Guide for more information on this add-on. If you wish, you can customize Attributes or create new ones. For example, you can draw a new fill type, or customize a default material to give it a new look. Attributes are saved with your project, so if you open the project on a different computer, your customized Attributes are available. See also Missing Attributes. To open and (if needed) edit Attribute sets, use the commands from Options > Element Attributes. Each attribute type is described in detail here:

Layers Line Types Fill Types Composite Structures Pens & Colors

162

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Materials Zone Categories Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box Profile Manager Dialog Box Renovation Override Styles Attribute Manager Custom Attributes of GDL Objects Attributes of XREF Files

ArchiCAD 15 Help

163

Configuration

Layers
About Layers Layer Settings Dialog Box Quick Layers Layer Combinations Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book Place All Elements on a Single “Active Layer” (Simulate Autocad Work Methods) Show/Hide Layers of Imported DWG/DXF/DWF Files Attributes of XREF Files

164

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

About Layers
Layers are used to separate elements logically. Related groups of elements, such as dimensions, furniture, electrical symbols and so on, are placed on common Layers. An element can only belong to a single layer. For each layer, you can define the following settings: • lock/unlock • show/hide • 3D view mode • layer intersection group ArchiCAD comes with a predefined set of layers. Each tool has a default Layer assignment, so if you place an element using that tool, the new element is automatically placed on the corresponding layer (e.g. External Wall, Column, Beam). Note: Doors, Windows, Wall Ends and Corner Windows do not have separate layers; they are handled together with the layers of the wall into which they are placed. Cameras do not have layers. Layers can be deleted; in this case, you will delete all the elements on it. However, the ArchiCAD Layer is a special layer that cannot be deleted, hidden or locked, since an ArchiCAD project must always contain at least one layer. In case of a file error, any elements that may have lost their layer definitions will be placed on the ArchiCAD layer. Each ArchiCAD project has a single layer set, managed in the Layer Settings Dialog Box, which is accessible from: • Options > Element Attributes > Layer Settings • Document > Layers > Layer Settings (shortcut: Ctrl+L) • Layer Settings icon in the Info Box of any ArchiCAD tool.

See Layer Settings Dialog Box. The Quick Layers palette contains shortcuts for changing layer states for multiple layers quickly and easily. See Quick Layers. Layers are global, which means that the same layers are available on all stories and in all windows. However, layers used in the Layout book can have different settings than those used in Model views. (The title bar of the Layer Settings dialog box reflects which type of window is active in ArchiCAD - a Model View or the Layout Book.)

ArchiCAD 15 Help

165

Configuration

See Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book.

Use Layers to Lock Elements to Prevent Editing
Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the lock icon to toggle between locked/unlocked status for the selected layer.

If a layer status is locked, then elements on that layer cannot be edited - this is useful if you want to prevent unintended changes.

Use Layers to Show/Hide Elements
Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. To show/hide a layer, toggle the “eye” icon open or shut for the selected layer.

166

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

If a layer is in hidden status, elements on that layer are not displayed on your plan.

Note: If you hide an element’s layer, any associated label is also hidden - even if the label is located on a different layer.

Use Layers to Show 3D Elements in Wireframe Mode

Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the shaded/wireframe icon for the selected layer to toggle between these display mode options for 3D. This setting is independent of the current 3D mode set in the View > 3D View Mode menu. See 3D View Mode.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

167

Configuration

Quick Layers
The Quick Layers palette lets you quickly change the state of the Layers in your Project without having to open the Layer Settings dialog box. To display this palette, choose the Window > Palettes > Quick Layers command. Select the element(s) whose layers you wish to manage. (You can select elements using both explicit selection and Marquee areas.) The toggle buttons, from left to right:

• • • • • • • • •

Show/Hide Toggle: inverts the visibility of all layers. Lock/Unlock Toggle: inverts the state of all protected and unprotected layers. Hide Selection’s Layer: Hides the layer of the selected elements. Lock Selection’s Layers: Locks layer of the selected elements. Unlock Selection’s Layers: Unlocks layer of the selected elements. Hide Others’ Layers: Hides the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be hidden.) Lock Others’ Layers: Locks the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be locked.) The Undo Quick Layer Actions command undoes the last Quick Layer action (up to 10 actions). The Redo Quick Layer Actions command redoes the last undone QuickLayer action (up to 10 actions).

168

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Quick Layers Example
Suppose you want to edit this roof in the Floor Plan:

ArchiCAD 15 Help

169

Configuration

You don’t need the Section and Elevation markers; to temporarily hide them, select all the Section/Elevation markers...

... then click the Hide Selections’ Layers command.

Now the unneeded markers and lines are hidden.

170

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Once you are done working on the roof and want to show the hidden layers again, click the Undo Quick Layers button.

All Section and Elevation markers are now shown again.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

171

Configuration

Layer Combinations
Layer Combinations are named sets of Layer settings. For example, you can set up a “Show All, Lock 3D Elements” Layer Combination, in which all the layers are visible, yet all Layers assigned to 3D model elements are locked, making those elements uneditable. You might use this Layer Combination when working with 2D only functions, such as dimensioning, to prevent inadvertent modifications to the building elements. Each view can have a different Layer Combination, set in View Settings. See View Settings Dialog Box. ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Layer Combinations. Layer Combinations are listed on the left panel of the Layer Settings Dialog Box; individual Layers are listed on the right. The currently active Layer Combination is shown as selected.

Apply a Layer Combination
To apply a Layer Combination to the project, do one of the following: • Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Select a Layer Combination from the list in the left panel, then click OK to close the dialog box. • Use the Layer Combination pop-up control in the Quick Options Palette.

172

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

See Quick Options Palette.

Go to Document > Layers and click on any of the Layer Combinations listed there.

Create New Layer Combination
To create a new Layer Combination: 1. Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. 2. As needed, set the state (locked/unlocked, shown/hidden, solid/wireframe) of the individual layers, listed on the right. Use the sorting and selection controls to set the state of several layer at the same time. (See Layer Settings Dialog Box for details on these controls.) 3. Click the New button (below the list of Layer Combinations) and give the new set a unique name in the appearing dialog box.

Modify Layer Combination
To modify an existing layer combination: 1. Select the Layer Combination from the list on the left 2. Make the necessary adjustments to individual layers on the right

ArchiCAD 15 Help

173

Configuration

3. Click the Update button.

Modify Layer’s Status in Multiple Layer Combinations
By selecting an individual Layer from the Layer list (on the right side of the Layer Settings dialog box), you can modify its state in the various defined Layer Combinations (on the left).

174

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

For example, below we selected the Foundation Layer on the right. In the left, you can now see the layer states for the Foundation Layer as defined for each Layer Combination.

On the Layer Combination side, you can directly change the Foundation layer’s state (e.g. from Show to Hide) in any or all Layer Combinations: just go down the list of Layer Combinations one after the other, and click the Foundation Layer’s status icons as necessary. The Layer Combinations are now redefined accordingly. (You don’t have to click Update.)

ArchiCAD 15 Help

175

Configuration

Find and Select Elements based on Layer Combination
The Find and Select function (Edit > Find and Select) enables you to set up criteria by which to find and select elements in the project. See Find and Select Elements. One such criterion you may use is “Layer Combination”. In the Find and Select dialog box, add the criterion “Layer Combination” and then choose one of the defined Layer Combinations of your project. This means the program will find and select the elements which are visible according to the Layer Combination you have chosen.

176

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections
You can work with Layer states to control Wall/Column/Beam intersection display in 2D. To do this, you can vary their Layer Intersection Group numbers. Intersecting elements that belong to the same Layer Intersection Group will be joined to each other, provided they are drawn correctly. Elements on different Layer Intersection Groups will not be joined.

The numbers under the intersection icon in the Layers panel (Document > Layers > Layer Settings) indicate the number of the intersection group the elements on that layer belong to.

Only elements on the same intersection group will connect to each other. By default, every layer is set to Group 1, so all intersecting elements will be joined according to the regular intersection rules for ArchiCAD. You may want to prevent this intersection - for example, to show the details of composite walls that have not been joined. In this case, place the intersecting walls on different layers, and then give one of these a layers a different Layer Intersection Group number.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

177

Configuration

Wall Layers Have Identical Intersection Group Numbers:

Wall Layers Have Different Intersection Group Numbers:

Note on Intersection with Hidden Layer: Elements having identical intersection groups will intersect even if one of the layers is hidden. This may result in “missing” lines, indicating an intersection with an element on a hidden layer. To avoid this, go to Layer Settings, select one of the layers, and assign it any different intersection group. Exception for Level 0: Elements which are both on intersection group 0 (whether on the same or different layers) will NOT intersect.

178

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book
While each ArchiCAD project has only one Layer set, the settings of any particular layer (for example its show/hide or locked/unlocked status) can be different in the Layout Book and in Model Views. The settings variation you see in the Layer Settings Dialog Box (either Layout Book or Model Views) depends on which window is active when you open Layer Settings. Both the Layer Settings command and the dialog box are labeled accordingly.

See Layer Settings Dialog Box. Important: Layer settings for the Layout Book serve to show/hide elements directly placed on layouts, such as lines, texts and drawings as a whole. Layout Book layers do not affect the drawing content, which is determined by the layers of its associated view.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

179

Configuration

Place All Elements on a Single “Active Layer” (Simulate Autocad Work Methods)
If you wish to simulate AutoCAD work methods, the Active Layer command is an easy way of assigning a single default layer to all tools, instead of than using ArchiCAD’s default layer set-up. Choose Document > Layers > Layer Extras > Active Layer from the menu and choose the One Active Layer for all Element Types option from the appearing palette.

This will set the default layer of all element types to the layer of the currently active tool (regardless of any selection). All Tool Settings dialog boxes will now use the same default Layer definition and successive elements will all be placed on that layer, regardless of type. You can override this setting manually for selected elements. If you wish to return to the previous layer state, choose the Individually Set Layers option. The last set of manually defined layers will be used.

180

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Line Types
Line types are assigned to each ArchiCAD construction element in its own Tool Settings dialog box, depending on the element type. For example, when defining how a Column should be displayed in a 2D window, you will apply different line types for its core outline, for its overhead display and for its crossing symbol.

The line types available in the element Settings dialog boxes are defined and managed as the project’s Line Type attributes, in Options > Element Attributes > Line Types. Use the Line Types Dialog Box to modify the standard line types (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) and define customized line types.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

181

Configuration

See Line Types Dialog Box.

Line Weight Display
By default, all lines will be displayed at Hairline width, at one pixel wide. In addition, you can enable Bold Cut Lines (View > On-Screen View Options); this will show all Cut lines as bold (two pixels wide, regardless of the line’s true pen weight). All other lines will be shown at Hairline width. The alternative to Hairline weight is display each pen’s True Line Weight: enable Line True Weight in View > On-Screen View Options. Each line’s pen weight (depending on its pen weight value as defined in the Pens and Colors dialog box) will be displayed accurately. See On-Screen View Options.

182

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Fill Types
ArchiCAD includes a predefined set of default fill patterns, or fill types. You can access them from the Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types where you can define, edit, duplicate, rename or delete them. Fill types are assigned to ArchiCAD construction elements in their own Settings dialog boxes.

Related Topics: Fill Types Dialog Box Fills

ArchiCAD 15 Help

183

Configuration

Composite Structures
Walls, Slabs, Roofs and Shells can be defined as composite structures.

Related topics: Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Slab, Roof or Shell Define a Custom Composite Structure Components of Composite Structures Composite Structures Dialog Box

184

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Slab, Roof or Shell
1. Select the element, or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. 2. In the Floor Plan & Section panel, open the “Structure” pop-up list, and click on “Cut Fills.” The Structure’s “Cut Fills” pop-up list of Wall, Slab, Roof and Shell Settings includes a number of predefined Composite Structures (in addition to the uniform structures).

Note: Composite Structures are defined for specific element types: Wall, Slab, Roof, and/or Shell, by the “Use With” control, in the Options > Element Attributes > Composites. Therefore, a composite element available from the Wall’s “Structure - Cut Fills” pop-up may not be available in the Roof Settings “Structure - Cut Fills” pop-up. See Composite Structures Dialog Box. 3. Choose the desired composite structure. This composite structure will be applied to the currently selected or created element.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

185

Configuration

Define a Custom Composite Structure
Customize any composite structure, or create a new one, using the Options > Element Attributes > Composites. See Composite Structures Dialog Box.

186

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Components of Composite Structures
The layers of the composite element are called “skins”; a composite structure can have up to 48 skins. The skins are separated by “separator lines”; and the outline of the composite is the “contour line.” All composite elements include structural skins called Core, which play an important role when connecting Walls and Columns. See Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan. The skins you define as “Core” or “Finish” will also affect views in Partial Structure Display. See Partial Structure Display. Assign these definitions in the Options > Element Attributes > Composites.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

187

Configuration

See Composite Structures Dialog Box.

Note: A Wall skin’s Core or Finish status has no relation to its 2D intersection priority (which is set separately in Wall Settings).

188

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Pens & Colors
Each Pen has a specific color and line weight. You assign pens to ArchiCAD elements in their own tool settings dialog box. Note: Your current On-Screen View Options (Bold Cut Lines, True Line Weight) may affect the on-screen display of your lines. See On-Screen View Options. To assign a pen to an element, open the pencolor pop-up (in the element settings dialog box or in the Info Box of a selected element) and choose the desired pen for the element or one of its components - such as the cut line pen assigned to the slab in the following image:

The available pens in these pop-ups are derived from the Pen Set currently applied for this project. See Pen Sets.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

189

Configuration

Pen Sets
ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. These are listed and managed Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. You can just use the default pen set, or you can apply a different Pen Set for your project, depending on the purpose of the current output.

Apply a Pen Set Redefine a Pen Set Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions Pens & Colors Dialog Box

190

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Configuration

Apply a Pen Set
To choose and apply a pen set, use: Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. Both commands open the identical dialog box: See Pens & Colors Dialog Box.

Select a pen set from the “Available Pen Set” list and click OK. For a quick way to change the pen set of your model view, use the Pen Set pop-up in the Quick Options Palette. See Quick Options Palette.

Apply a Separate Pen Set for the Layout Book
You can use a separate pen set for your Model Views and your Layout Book: the name of the dialog box includes either “Model Views” or “Layout Book”, depending on which type of window is active.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

191

Configuration The Pens & Colors (Layout Book) settings are applied only to items placed onto the Layout (such as Autotext and Master Layout items). you can override this pen set in the Drawing Properties Panel of Drawing Settings. the pen set defined for the project’s Model Views).by default. Alternatively. Drawings that have their source in external files . you can change the source view’s pen set: go to its View Settings Dialog Box and choose a different Pen Set from the pop-up: 192 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Apply a Pen Set to a Drawing When you place a view onto a Layout.can be assigned pen sets the same way: click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set. for this drawing only.such as DWG/DXF/PDF files placed using ArchiCAD’s Drawing tool . it becomes a Drawing. By default. the Drawing placed in the Layout Book uses its own pen set (the one saved in the source view’s View Settings . but not to the content of placed Drawings. Click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set. However. for this drawing only. See Drawing Properties Panel.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 193 .Configuration See View Settings Dialog Box.

Configuration Redefine a Pen Set The predefined Pen Sets shipped with ArchiCAD are based on common workflows. Pen numbers remain constant even if you change pen sets. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. The 3D window. However. using the Edit Color control See Pens & Colors Dialog Box. you can use the Pens & Colors Dialog Box to • redefine or rename any pen set together with its description • redefine any pen’s line weight or color. 194 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 3D Document and Section/Elevation/IE/Worksheet windows may require that you rebuild the view. the ArchiCAD construction elements immediately change to the new colors on the Floor Plan. After redefining a color or changing the Pen Set.

Configuration Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project Pen Sets are attributes. Similarly. and can be transferred among different ArchiCAD projects using the Pen Sets tab page of the Attribute Manager (Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager). See Attribute Manager. ArchiCAD 15 Help 195 . each pen set’s individual definitions can be copied among projects in the Attribute Manager (“Pens and Colors” tab page).

To disable this automatic color adjustment. if your background is sufficiently dark . On a white background. 196 ArchiCAD 15 Help .that is.) However. (This is useful if you use a dark or black background to imitate AutoCAD methods. Non-black pens that would be difficult to see against a particular background will automatically shift to a similar. Again. pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. See On-Screen Options. when printed.Configuration Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views When the luminance value of a particular background color falls below a threshold value . when printed.black pens will be shown as white on your ArchiCAD screen. but more easily visible color. pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. uncheck the Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. elements in white pens are adjusted to a light gray to enhance visibility.

color or emphasis. ArchiCAD 15 Help 197 . then switch to the “electrical” pen set to output layouts for a subcontractor. (Or you can simply use the default element pens that are shipped with ArchiCAD. using different pen colors or pen weights each time to meet different requirements for scale. it is worth paying attention to the pen function when assigning a pen to an element. See also Pen Sets. For example.Configuration Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions Architects often wish to output the same model in several versions. ArchiCAD’s default pen indexes assigned to element parameters correspond to the element function. To aid users in this effort. which corresponds to the function “Slabs . and your display and output will get a whole different look. When you change the pen set of a given project.archicadwiki. When you assign a pen to an element. you are assigning a pen index number to that element. but the colors and line weights associated with those pen indexes may change in accordance with the definitions in the new pen set. For more information on pen sets in ArchiCAD.com/Pen_Sets.) If you assign pen index numbers consistent with the function of the element.” Note: Depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD. slabs are assigned a default cut line pen with index 29. you can switch pen sets for the entire project with a single click: you might prefer to use the “architectural plans” pen set when outputting plans for approval. This way. see http://www.Cut Structural. Since each pen index number has a distinct function definition. the pen index numbers assigned to individual elements remain the same. your default pen sets and pen index assignments may vary. then switching from one pen set to the other will ensure a consistent display that is in line with the purpose of your output. ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets.

Configuration Materials About Materials Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window Display of Materials in the 3D Document Display of Materials in Renderings Material Settings Dialog Box LightWorks Shader Settings 198 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Materials defined here can then be assigned to elements in their Element settings dialog boxes (Model panel). See Material Settings Dialog Box. texture and light effects. you can apply materials to your elements. Materials can be displayed in the 3D Window. and in PhotoRenderings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 199 .Configuration About Materials To display your plan realistically. Section/Elevation/ IE and 3D Document windows. Materials can be created or modified in the Material Settings Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Materials). Materials contain color.

can display either a vectorial hatching or a texture: Important: • Vectorial Hatching is only displayed when using the Internal 3D engine. (This step is optional and recommended for advanced users. etc. See 3D Engines. using the material pop-up in the Model panel of the element’s Settings dialog box. choose a Rendering Engine. Assign a Texture to a Material Textures are image files that can be assigned to materials to give them a more realistic look and feel. choose a vectorial hatching from one of the project’s defined vectorial fill types. background. See Material Texture Panel. • Textures are displayed only when using the OpenGL 3D engine. Suggested Workflow for Using Materials 1. In the Vectorial Hatching panel. materials are set in the 3D Representation section of the Parameters panel. See PhotoRendering Settings. Textures are assigned and edited in the Texture Panel of Material Settings. • To switch between 3D Engines. you can access only fills defined as Cover Fills. for example.) 3. Note: When assigning a 3D Vectorial Hatching in the Materials dialog box. effects. This material.) 2. then adjust the relevant settings (transparency.Configuration Some materials have vectorial hatching and/or textures as part of their definition. use the commands in View > 3D View Mode. as indicated by icons. (For Wall Ends.) to define how the materials will be displayed in the final rendering. and in the 3D window using the OpenGL 3D engine. Assign a Vectorial Hatching to a Material Vectorial Hatching is a vectorial fill pattern used with a Material. many ArchiCAD materials have textures assigned to them (such materials will have a texture icon next to their name. By default. Edit the default set of materials and/or create new materials.) You can load additional textures from the ArchiCAD library. Choose a material for each construction element. In the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. They are displayed in PhotoRenderings. 200 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Material Vectorial Hatching Panel. or load other custom images.

For more information. 2. bottom and side surfaces in the 3D window. Choose the desired materials to apply them to the current element. ArchiCAD 15 Help 201 . Use the Model panel to access the available materials for the element’s top. Note: Clicking the Chain icon (“Link Materials”) in this or other element settings dialog boxes means that the group of materials next to the chain icon are linked: each of the linked surfaces will use a single material. or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. Select a placed element. 3. or apply separate materials.) Note: Wall geometry and the direction of its reference line affect the assignment of materials to each surface of the Wall. unlink them by clicking the chain again. as needed. see Wall Model Panel. (Apply a single material to all surfaces using the Chain icon.Configuration Assign a Material to a Construction Element 1. changing the material for one surface will change the material for all surfaces. To set a separate material for each surface.

You can customize the orientation and origin of textures in 3D views.Configuration Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window The 3D Window displays the material’s colors. use the commands in View > 3D View Mode. See 3D Engines. the Vectorial 3D Hatching control in 3D Window Settings (View > 3D View Mode) must be On. To display vectorial hatchings. See Align 3D Texture. if any. • 3D Textures are visible only when using the OpenGL 3D engine. 202 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • Vectorial Hatching is only displayed when using the Internal 3D engine. and if the Textures box is checked in OpenGL options as in the image below: To switch between 3D Engines. vectorial hatching and applied textures. See 3D Window Settings.

Configuration Align 3D Texture Use the commands at Design > Align 3D Texture to set the orientation and origin of construction element textures in 3D views. to define the origin of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. Set Texture Origin Use Set Origin. the first command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu. 2. or typing coordinates into the Tracker. These commands are only available in the 3D Window on selected construction elements whose Material attribute includes a Texture assignment (Options > Element Attributes > Materials). Enter a 3D location by clicking on an element hotspots. In this example. the brick wall texture originally looks like this: ArchiCAD 15 Help 203 . Select one or several elements. 1.

You can snap to element hotspots. Select one or several elements. In the dialog box that opens. (Clicking a Wall.select the wall. 204 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) 4. If you chose to define the angle graphically. then use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Origin. for example. Set Texture Direction Use Set Direction.Configuration To reset the texture origin to the corner of the wall . use a different origin for the inside and outside surfaces of a wall. 1. Use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Direction. 2. Then click OK.so that the brick pattern starts from the corner . choose to either define the texture’s angle graphically or numerically. The texture origin will affect all of the elements’ surfaces. draw the desired vector for the texture orientation. You must click a surface. 5. Click on the corner and view the result. You cannot. the second command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu. Slab or Roof edge will cancel the action. 3. Click on a surface of a selected element. to change the orientation of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element.

do not select any of them and choose Reset All. Click the Reset Texture button to discard the customization. To remove all customization of the elements of the 3D Window.Configuration 6. You can also select several elements and choose the Reset command in the Design > Align 3D Texture hierarchical menu. it will be applied relative to the default orientation of the Texture and measured counterclockwise. If you define the angle numerically. The Custom Texture information text is active. open its Settings dialog box and go to the Model panel. Reset Texture To return to the default Texture settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 205 . select the element.

each material color will be uniform over the whole surface. 2. Open the Model Display panel of the Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog box. Choose “Fill Uncut Surfaces” and activate one of these two options. • Elements’ Own Material Colors (Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements’ own material colors. 3. To display material colors: 1. • Elements’ Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements’ own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects. if any. Check “Vectorial 3D Hatching” to display the material’s vectorial hatching.Configuration Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window The Section/Elevation/IE window can display an element’s material’s colors and/or vectorial hatching on the element’s uncut portion. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects. 206 ArchiCAD 15 Help . as in the image below. Material colors and vectorial hatching can be displayed only on uncut surfaces of elements in the Section/Elevation/IE windows.

See 3D Document Model Display Panel. the 3D Document’s Model Display settings enable you to choose materials. The Vectorial Hatching in 3D and Transparency options for the 3D Document are specific to the 3D Document. Unlike for a Section-type window. for the current 3D Document only. and are not connected to the same options set for the 3D Window. element-specific fills and shaded or non-shaded colors to display cut surfaces.Configuration Display of Materials in the 3D Document A 3D Document has its own Settings dialog box. Use the Model Display Panel to define how materials will be displayed. ArchiCAD 15 Help 207 .

If you intend to render with LightWorks. 208 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Thus. choose the LightWorks Rendering Engine in Material Settings. See LightWorks Shader Settings. some of the available controls may not have any effect on the material’s rendered appearance. The LightWorks Shader Settings panel is now the only one you need to edit in Material Settings. To streamline the process. choose your intended Rendering Engine as the Preview Engine in the Material Settings dialog box and check the Disable unrelated Controls box. See Material Settings Dialog Box. This way.Configuration Display of Materials in Renderings Different Rendering Engines have different capabilities for displaying materials. when editing a Material in the Material Settings dialog box. only those controls will be available in Material Settings that will actually affect the final rendered appearance. and check Disable unrelated controls.

The general appearance of your renderings is defined in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box.Configuration Renderings display all material characteristics except vectorial hatching. See PhotoRendering Settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 209 . whose settings apply to all materials in the rendering.

Displaying the dialog box might take some time.) 210 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Profiles. Note: If you have installed MEP Modeler. This dialog box allows you to copy (append. Composite Structures. Archive or Module) or create a new one in a special format that belongs to Attribute Manager. You have to be extremely cautious when you want to overwrite attributes with similar names but different indexes. overwrite) attributes (Layers. Zone Categories and Cities) between two opened files. The last tab shows all types of attributes in a single list. This rule has to be considered when you import or export attributes between two files. Materials. since it has to list all the attributes of the project. Pens & Colors. the attributes of the currently opened ArchiCAD file are shown by their index number and name. Pen Sets. Note: Be aware that ArchiCAD stores attributes by their index numbers and not by their names. On the right you can either open a second ArchiCAD file (Project. Note: On top of the dialog box. the attribute types’ icons represent tab pages that display one type of attribute at a time. It can also duplicate or delete attributes in either of the two files. Line Types. Layer Combinations. (Use the “Open” command at the bottom right of the dialog box. the MEP Systems tab page appears too. On the left. Fill Types.Configuration Attribute Manager Open the Attribute Manager from Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager.

) ArchiCAD 15 Help 211 . Note. For the current project (whose attributes are listed on the left side).Configuration Here. The buttons between the two parts of the dialog box: • Allow you to copy attributes in either direction.ctb)..Appending an attribute will add it to the list of the other file under a new index. append or overwrite them . but also closes the dialog box. the Fill attributes of two projects are shown. that an attribute shown here as unused (it is listed without a checkmark) may in fact be referred by the GDL script of a placed object. (The Cancel button has the same effect. using the Print to File. however. . On the Pen Set page of Attribute Manager: • Use the Save as CTB button to save any single selected pen set in the format of AutoCAD Plot Style Table (*. a checkmark means that the attribute is used in the project. The Plot Style Table is used by AutoCAD to map each color in your drawing to line widths on printed/plotted output. and delete. • You can select any single attribute from the right-hand list and save it as a separate file to any location.Overwriting an attribute will replace it with another attribute from the other file that has the same index number. • The Revert button restores the attributes to their previous state. At the bottom of the dialog box a number of buttons allow you to perform different operations on the files: • Purge Unused: You have the option of purging the unused attributes from your project: click Purge Unused from the bottom of the current project’s attribute list.. button.

• Line Types: You can modify the name and the scale factor of the selected line type. • Pen Tables: You can copy. • Fill Types: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for the various fill categories. Cover and/or a Cut Fill. • Zone Categories: You can modify the code. • Profiles: You can modify the name of the selected profile as well as its availability for different element types.Configuration • The Apply button applies the changes you have made without closing the dialog box. • Pens & Colors: You can modify the color. • Layer Combinations: You can rename the selected layer combination. See also Missing Attributes. • Materials: You can modify the color. To sort an attribute list by a particular criterion. 212 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you can edit individual attribute names and some of their properties. (See Fill Categories. For example. for fill attributes you can define its type as Drafting. click the top of the desired column. append or overwrite pen tables among the selected projects. the RGB components and the line width of the selected pen. For example. or edit the attribute that is selected in the list. Reserve All Attributes. In the row below the list of the current project attributes. color. latitude and longitude values and time zone settings of the selected location. See the MEP Modeler User Guide for information. • All: You can display all the attribute types of the current project and sort them by types. • MEP Systems: These attributes are available only if you have installed the MEP Modeler program. For Teamwork users: see also Reservation in Attribute Manager. numbers and names. delete. you can display pens by line width or cities by latitude. name and texture assignment of the selected material. • Composite Structures: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for different element types.) • Layers: You can modify the visibility and locking state as well as the name of the selected layer. • Cities: You can modify the name. name and zone stamp assignment of the selected item.

Configuration Missing Attributes Although attributes are saved with the project. it can still happen that your project contains elements which refer to missing attributes. use Find and Select. ArchiCAD 15 Help 213 . You will notice this in the element’s Settings dialog box. as in the case of the missing line type referenced by this door: Missing attributes may occur: • if you have copy-pasted elements from a different project using a different set of attributes • if you have placed objects whose GDL script refers to attributes missing from your project • if you have removed used attributes from your project via Attribute Manager To locate elements referring to missing attributes. See Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes.

) To locate such elements easily. In the Criteria field of the Find and Select dialog box. Add “Attributes” as the next criterion. Click the Plus button to select all the elements that fit these criteria. or All Types.” 3. (See also Missing Attributes. and set its value to “Missing. choose a specific element type.) 1. it can still happen that your project contains elements which refer to missing attributes.Configuration Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes Although attributes are saved with the project. 2. 214 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (See also Find and Select Elements. use Find and Select.

by clicking the Cover Fill attribute pop-up. it becomes clear that the missing attribute is a cover fill. from the fills that are available to the project. Here we have chosen to use the Carpet fill. if you know the location of the missing attribute you need (e.g. ArchiCAD 15 Help 215 . In that Slab’s Settings dialog box.Configuration In this example. The easiest solution is to assign a different cover fill. you can use Attribute Manager to transfer the needed attribute from the other project to the current one. Alternatively. if it is part of another ArchiCAD project). a slab has been identified and selected as using one or more missing attributes.

Configuration See Attribute Manager. 216 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 Help 217 . These attributes may be defined either as part of their individual object scripts or defined in the MASTER_GDL script. Attributes with the same names are not replaced. the attributes are merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes. then . their custom attributes are automatically merged into the project’s attribute set as follows: • If the Attribute definition is contained in the MASTER_GDL script.Material and Texture attributes are not merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes. .Fills and Line types are merged into the ArchiCAD project. then once the library containing the MASTER_GDL script is loaded. When you load such objects into a project.Configuration Custom Attributes of GDL Objects Some GDL object scripts include custom attributes. • If the Attribute definition is contained in the individual library part scripts.

Configuration Libraries About Libraries Library Manager Recommendations for Using Libraries Embedded Library Linked Libraries BIM Server Libraries Reload/Refresh Libraries Remove Library from Project Troubleshooting Library Issues Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report Library Container File Library Updates 218 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

See also Parametric Objects. Property Objects View and manage your project’s libraries in the Library Manager (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager). residential Projects and industrial building design). • Textures are picture files that can be attached to Materials to provide added realism in rendered views.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 219 . When creating a new project. editable objects (also known as GDL objects or Library parts). Each version of ArchiCAD is shipped with a standard object library containing hundreds of preconfigured. you will use ArchiCAD tools to place objects from this standard library. For the most part..g. specialized Libraries for different applications (e. Your project can use additional. (See Library Manager. There are different Libraries corresponding to different national standards. a Library can also contain files of different formats that are referred to by ArchiCAD elements: • Listing Templates are plain text files that are used to customize the content and the look of quantity calculations. and in the 3D Window when using the OpenGL engine. ArchiCAD will load the library contained in the template used for the new project. • Macros. Zone stamps. See Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 15 for recommendations on migration issues. • Background images are additional picture files used to provide the 3D model with a lifelike environment. or Parametric Objects.Configuration About Libraries Libraries contain the external or embedded files of geometric library parts. Each subsequent version of ArchiCAD comes with an updated ArchiCAD Library. In addition to objects.

Additional information is available for some items by clicking on the blue Info icon. If you click on a reservable item in Library Manager. For details on each type of item listed in Library Manager. see the links below: Embedded Library Linked Libraries BIM Server Libraries Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report 220 ArchiCAD 15 Help . only certain of its listed items (such as Embedded Objects and all BIM Server Libraries). For any selected item in Library Manager. Note for Teamwork users: In Teamwork. the control lights appear. This dialog box displays the project’s libraries and objects. view the Properties tab for specific information on the item. you cannot reserve the Library Manager as a whole.Configuration Library Manager Use the File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager command to open this dialog box.

Configuration Libraries with Duplicate Objects Substituted Objects Troubleshooting Library Issues ArchiCAD 15 Help 221 .

Configuration Recommendations for Using Libraries It is recommended to organize your libraries as follows: • The Embedded Library should serve as your project library. See also Troubleshooting Library Issues. 222 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and saved with the project. to enable one-step updates which are then available to all users. use the PLA file format. including solo and Teamwork project users. • When you archive a project. • Any project-specific object that you modify frequently should be placed in the Embedded Library. • Only embed those objects that are project-specific. containing project-specific objects that are always available and editable. • Company Libraries and other standard libraries should be located on a dedicated BIM Server. Try to keep the Embedded Library small. It is NOT recommended to save all objects in the Embedded Library.

If you want to use a custom object in several projects.g. ArchiCAD 15 Help 223 . choose and add to this library. it is better to place it into a Company Library stored on a BIM Server that is accessible to all users. Trusses. project-specific objects in the project itself (rather than in your file system).txt files that function as macros Note: List Schemes (from the Calculation function) will function in Teamwork projects only if you save them to the Embedded Library. Custom Door/Window components) • Image files loaded for use as Material textures or other purposes • any object file that you browse for. Stair. Custom Object. The Embedded Library may contain: • Object files you create and save yourself (e. including Web Objects downloaded through GDL Web Control • loaded.Configuration Embedded Library The Embedded Library stores custom. to ensure that they are always available and editable. rather than save it to an Embedded Library. Patch.

that information is also shown. in the Embedded Library of that particular project. If the object also exists in a linked library.) For any selected object listed in the Embedded Library. Related Topics: Add Objects to Embedded Library Manage Embedded Objects Embedded Objects in Teamwork 224 ArchiCAD 15 Help . it is gone. (In contrast. you can view its properties below.) If you delete an object from the Embedded Library. objects of a linked library can exist in several projects. (See Editing the Script of a GDL Object. If you edit the script of an embedded object.Configuration Embedded objects exist only in that particular project and can be used only in that project. that modification will occur right there.

then click Choose. only objects that are in your current local copy of the project will be embedded. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows. Note: Embedding an object will also automatically load any needed macros along with it.) The chosen object file will now appear in the Embedded Library in Library Manager.Configuration Add Objects to Embedded Library From Library Manager: Embed Placed Objects from a Library By creating a custom Object: By loading an object file: By Creating a Hotlinked Module: From Library Manager: To add any object file to your Embedded Library. because they will be embedded. Embed Placed Objects from a Library Use this feature to embed all the objects placed from a linked library or BIM Server Library into the project. go to Library Manager and do one of the following: • Click Add. (In Teamwork. Browse for the desired object file. Important: Embedding a library does not embed the entire contents of the library. ArchiCAD 15 Help 225 . From any location on your computer. If you use this command.) This function is useful to ensure that the objects you need will always be available in this project. • Click Browse for Embedded Objects from the Add button’s pop-up list. it will only embed those objects which have been placed into the project. click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager. • Use Drag and Drop. the original linked library or BIM Server Library will be removed from the project. select it. When you are finished. drag and drop the file into the Embedded Objects folder of Library Manager. you must double-click the folder.

2. because they are not available to your local copy of the project. those placed objects will not be embedded. since there is nothing to embed. Select the library folder from the Library Manager. If the other users have not yet sent these changes to the server. Click the Embed icon.Configuration If you are in Teamwork: It is possible that other users have placed objects from a BIM Server library that you want to embed. those objects will consequently be shown as “Missing. But since the source library will be removed as part of the embed process. (If no objects from the selected library have been placed. ensure that all users have sent in their changes before you embed a BIM Server Library of a Teamwork Project. this icon is grey. To embed a library’s placed objects into your project: 1.) 226 ArchiCAD 15 Help .” To avoid this situation.

Click Embed. objects saved with the Save Selection as GDL Object will save the resulting files as embedded objects. the Save Library Part dialog box appears automatically and prompts you to save the new stair to the Embedded Library: Similarly. Check this box to embed these parts as well. See Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries. you can either save the object to the Embedded library or to a folder of your choice. 4. zone stamps and property objects. The appearing dialog box gives you two options associated with the embedding process: • Also embed materials. zone stamps and property objects are accessory GDL library parts that have been written into certain objects.Configuration 3.g. Here. In this example. using StairMaker. the Embed command will: • Embed those 24 objects into your Embedded Library • Remove the library container file from your project By creating a custom Object: Most objects created by you (e. your project is using 24 objects from the COL-ITG-LIB. For example.lcf library container file. the Consolidate function is a better technique for streamlining your ArchiCAD libraries. ArchiCAD 15 Help 227 . RoofMaker) will be added to your project’s Embedded library automatically. Materials. if you create a custom Stair with StairMaker and click OK to place it. This is usually relevant only if you are trying to embed objects from an ArchiCAD library. Any objects that already exist in other linked libraries will not be embedded. Note: It is usually unnecessary to embed objects from an ArchiCAD library. With custom-created objects drawn by you and saved from the 3D window. • Do Not Embed Duplicates: Click this to avoid duplicates when embedding objects. TrussMaker.

etc. The newly added Embedded library can be seen in your Library Manager. Such objects are automatically stored as Embedded Objects. 228 ArchiCAD 15 Help .).Configuration By loading an object file: Individual objects not part of the project libraries can be used in your projects via the Load Other Object commands in the corresponding tool settings dialog boxes (Window. See also Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD. See “Embedded Library Parts” under Source File Data Interpretation. inside the automatically created “Hotlinks” folder of your Embedded library. Door. By Creating a Hotlinked Module: Placing a module will add the source file’s entire Embedded library to your host file’s embedded library.

file size. Browse a folder location on your machine to which to save the object. The new object. the object type. Use the icons to: • Duplicate the object. ArchiCAD 15 Help 229 . • Export the object.Configuration Manage Embedded Objects Select any object file from the Embedded Library folder of Library Manager. • Add new folder to the Embedded Library folder. and number of placed instances. you cannot retrieve it unless you earlier saved it to another location (in that case. with a new name and assigned a separate GUID. Important: Deleting an object from the Embedded Library folder deletes that object file for good. shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if an Embedded object is selected. • Delete the object. The Properties panel. gives you feedback on the file name. change the file name by typing into the Name field. appears alongside the original object in the Embedded Library folder. Deleting an object from the Embedded Library means that all placed instances of that object file will disappear from your project and be replaced by an orange-colored dot. If desired. you can Add it again to the Embedded Library).

Browse for the desired library file or folder.pla file to your project as separate files. The Properties panel. choose Reload libraries and apply all changes. you can reload libraries without closing Library manager: from the green “Refresh/ Reload” icon in Library Manager.pla file at the top of the hierarchy will be read. When you are finished. Add a Linked Library To add a linked library to your solo ArchiCAD project.Configuration Linked Libraries Linked Libraries include the standard ArchiCAD library loaded by default.) • Click Link Library from the Add button’s pop-up list. Note: If you add a folder containing a. The solution is to add these . or.pla.lcf. if the folder contains additional. these libraries are linked folders. go to Library Manager and do one of the following: • Click Add. gives you feedback on item’s Path and (in case it is a file) its Last Modified date.pla files at a deeper level of the hierarchy. you must double-click the folder. However. drag and drop the library file into the Linked Libraries folder of Library Manager. From any location on your computer. be aware that the library parts in the. as well as any other libraries you add. there are no linked libraries .pla file to your Linked Libraries folder. and any folder. Library files include. • Use Drag and Drop. Alternatively. 230 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows. those.lcf or. In contrast to the objects of the Embedded Library. shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if a Linked Library (file or folder) is selected.pla files. as well as any libraries that contain duplicate objects. to narrow the available files to Library files. rather than adding the folder that contains them. with the number of placed instances of each. This panel also displays the number of placed objects from this library. In Teamwork mode.pla files will not be read. The chosen library file or folder will now appear in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager. click OK to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager. select it.only an Embedded Library and BIM Server Libraries. then click Choose. .

) See also Embed Placed Objects from a Library. ArchiCAD 15 Help 231 . (See also Unavailable Libraries.Configuration If the selected linked library is unavailable. the number of the project’s missing objects and instances which originate from this unavailable library are also listed.

even when they are working remotely over the internet. both solo (after reloading the library) and Teamwork (after doing a Send and Receive). Related Topics: Add BIM Server Library Manage BIM Server Libraries Upload a Library to BIM Server Upload Individual Objects to BIM Server Embed Placed Objects from a Library Libraries in Teamwork 232 ArchiCAD 15 Help . but added to your project. In Teamwork. The advantage of using server libraries over linked libraries is that whenever a company library is updated and refreshed on the BIM Server.Configuration BIM Server Libraries BIM Server Libraries are libraries located on a server. To use a BIM Server Library in either a Teamwork project or a solo project. this library is updated for all users. the BIM Server Libraries ensure that all users have access to libraries. either solo or Teamwork (provided that you can access the BIM Server). You can add a BIM Server Library to any project. • and then it must be added to the project using ArchiCAD’s Library Manager. • the library must first be uploaded to a BIM Server.

6. Note: If you are in a Teamwork project. a library can be added to any ArchiCAD project. The chosen library will now appear in the BIM Server Libraries folder of the Library Manager. To add a BIM Server Library to your project. The list of libraries uploaded to that server appears. When you are finished. whether solo or Teamwork. as directed above. click OK to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager. 7. Choose a library and click Add. From the pop-up alongside the Add button. You can access libraries on BIM Servers even if you are currently working on a solo project. ArchiCAD 15 Help 233 . see Upload a Library to BIM Server. you must also have the access right of “Libraries . choose Use BIM Server Library. For information on uploading to the server. Click Reserve. 3. this command appears only after you click Reserve. 4. 2.Configuration Add BIM Server Library Once it has been uploaded to a BIM Server. Select “BIM Server Libraries” (either this item or any of the loaded BIM server libraries) from the hierarchy. Choose a BIM Server (enter user name and password as necessary). Note: In a Teamwork project. do the following: 1. the control lights appear. Open Library Manager (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager).Add/ Remove” in order to add or remove BIM Server Libraries from the project. as long as you have a valid user name and password enabling access to the server. In a Teamwork project. 5. The Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box appears.

• If you are working in solo mode. because the library path is too long. Synchronizing with the Server Library • When you add a library to the BIM Server Libraries folder. Note: The operating system has a limit of 256 on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. this copy is synchronized with the server data every time you Send or Receive changes. Consequently. you can reload libraries without closing Library Manager: from the green “Refresh/ Reload” icon in Library Manager. 234 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then click OK to close the Library Manager. See also Libraries in Teamwork. • If you are working in Teamwork mode. choose Reload libraries and apply all changes. For details. this copy is refreshed every time you click Reload libraries and apply all changes in the Library Manager. This reloading also occurs if you have made modifications in the Library Manager.Configuration Alternatively. a local copy of the library will be created on your machine (regardless of whether you are working in solo or Teamwork mode). you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM server library. see Library Path Too Long.

you must be an Administrator (either Project or Server Administrator) to use this dialog box. upload and otherwise manage the libraries on any BIM Server. ArchiCAD 15 Help 235 . Click Upload to add another library to this server (see details below) or Remove to remove it. Click Relocate to link a selected library on the BIM Server to a new source library path location. Note: In a Teamwork project. using the Manage BIM Server Libraries dialog box. Use this dialog box to view. a link to its Source Library is established. click Use BIM Server Libraries to open the Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box. Manage BIM Server Libraries Dialog Box This dialog box is available: • from File > Libraries and Objects > Manage BIM Server Libraries • from the Library Manager: open the Add button’s pop-up list. Source Libraries Whenever you upload a library to the BIM Server. that library must first be uploaded to the BIM Server.Configuration Manage BIM Server Libraries To use a BIM Server Library in a project (either solo or Teamwork). click Manage BIM Server Libraries.

either solo or Teamwork. 5. This can be useful if the source library has for some reason become unavailable. yet you need a copy of the Source library. Close the dialog box. Browse for the Source library you need. Click Upload. Go to File > Libraries and Objects > Manage Server Libraries. only a Server Administrator or Project Administrator can upload libraries to a BIM Server. Click Choose. the date of upload and the last time it was refreshed from its Source library. or if you do not have the access right needed to edit the content of the Source library. 4. 6. For each selected library in the list. However. individual users can add these BIM Server Libraries to projects.Configuration You cannot edit the contents of a library via the BIM Server management controls.g. if changes are made in a Source library (e. Once libraries are uploaded. See also Add BIM Server Library. Upload Individual Objects to BIM Server To upload individual objects to the BIM Server. Tip: It is recommended to upload all your company’s libraries to a dedicated GRAPHISOFT BIM Server. just lcf. 2. Uploaded libraries can include PLA or LCF files. 236 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or any folders. then upload the folder. Extract will extract the contents of the selected library to the location of your choice. See Source Libraries. above. pla. Upload a Library to BIM Server Note: In a Teamwork Project. 1. click Refresh to ensure that these changes are also made on this server. You cannot upload individual gsm files. information is displayed on its source path. new parts added to the Company Library). and regular folders. Choose the BIM Server to which you want to upload a library 3. The library is uploaded and a link to its Source library is established. first place them into a folder.

Configuration BIM Server Library Management Workflow: ArchiCAD 15 Help 237 .

Configuration Reload/Refresh Libraries Reload Libraries Changes made via Library Manager will take place when you click OK to close the Library Manager. clicking OK will reload your libraries (and load the newly added one) and close the Library Manager. choose Refresh status of placed objects: this will refresh the list of missing and substituted objects in the Library Manager tree structure. For example. All libraries will be reloaded. 238 ArchiCAD 15 Help . if you add a library to the project. Refresh Status of Placed Objects From the green “Refresh/Reload” icon in Library Manager. You can also reload libraries without closing Library Manager: from the green “Refresh/Reload” icon in Library Manager. choose Reload libraries and apply all changes. provided that you have made modifications that necessitate a library reload.

Configuration Remove Library from Project Select any Linked Library or BIM Server Library from the Library Manager. If you place objects into the project from a library. and ArchiCAD Library 14 is then removed. then the ArchiCAD 15 Library will automatically replace the missing placed objects from the AC Library 14 with their updated from AC Library 15. they will be represented by fuzzy dots. then the placed objects will be listed in the “Missing Objects” folder of Library Manager. If you subsequently re-link AC Library 14. Removed libraries can be re-linked to your project at any time. ArchiCAD 15 Help 239 . the placed instances which were automatically replaced with AC 15 counterparts will remain as-is. then the missing objects will be found. In the project model. and then remove the library. (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager) Click the Remove icon to remove the library. Note: The number of missing objects is minimized in the following situation: if both ArchiCAD Libraries 14 and 15 are loaded.

from which the missing objects originate. For each missing object. plus the number of placed instances of each missing object. with its last known location. then click refresh. the number of its placed instances is shown in parentheses. re-Add the unavailable libraries to Library Manager. See Refresh Status of Placed Objects).Configuration Troubleshooting Library Issues Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report Find and Select Missing Library Parts Unavailable Libraries Libraries with Duplicate Objects Substituted Objects Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries Delete Unused Linked Libraries Library Path Too Long Missing Objects and the Library Loading Report Items in the Missing Objects folder of the Library Manager are missing from the project • either because they were embedded objects. Missing objects are listed in the Library Manager together with: • the name of the source library if any. • number of missing object. and have been deleted (you cannot retrieve them. 240 ArchiCAD 15 Help . since they no longer exist) • or because they were located in libraries that have been deleted from the project or moved to a different location (to retrieve these objects.

In the Library Loading Report.their source library (or libraries) are not known. The Library Loading Report appears if the project is missing any objects or if objects are duplicated in different libraries.Configuration Objects listed under “Missing from unknown library” are missing objects about which no other information is available . the red folder at the top shows the ArchiCAD 15 Help 241 .

242 ArchiCAD 15 Help . with the number placed instances of each shown in parentheses.Configuration total number of missing objects. The Library Loading Report gives you an overview of problematic libraries (those containing duplicates) and problematic objects (those that are missing or which have several possible substitutes). followed by the total number of their placed instances in parentheses.

click on any library about which you need more information. If those objects are reserved by any user.” This may occur when a user makes changes in a BIM Server Library that result in placed objects being updated in some way. See also Find and Select Elements. then click the Info button. (The place of missing library parts is indicated by fuzzy dots. then all users joined in to the project will encounter the “Temporarily Missing” category. you may encounter a category in the Library Manager or Library Loading Report entitled “Temporarily Missing. Find and Select Missing Library Parts To find and select missing library parts in the active window. the list of placed or missing objects. This will be resolved as soon as the user(s) who have reserved the objects do a Send & Receive. The appearing Information dialog summarizes all available data about the selected library: the total number of objects contained in the library. use the Find & Select function.Configuration In both the Library Manager and the Library Loading Report. lists of placed duplicates. the number of placed instances. then the objects will no longer be missing.) Objects Temporarily Missing In a Teamwork project. ArchiCAD 15 Help 243 . The missing items cannot be displayed on the plan.

then choose Zoom to Selection from the context menu. for the next criterion. except for the ones whose library object is missing. In the first “Criteria” row in the Find and Select dialog box. Note: You may wish to zoom to the selection: right-click in the window. select “Is Missing”.Configuration 1. As the value.” 3. In the next row. Note: You can also choose “Is Not Missing” as the value. Click the Plus button to execute the Find & Select function. 2. choose a GDL object type element. this will select all instances of the defined GDL Object types. 4. 244 ArchiCAD 15 Help . choose “Library Part.

then the next time you open ArchiCAD. For each such pair of libraries. The solution is to click Link Library from the Add button’s pop-up list. (An unavailable source library and its last known path is listed only if it was available to the project at an earlier time. the library folder listed in the Library Manager dialog box will be shown as Unavailable.Configuration Unavailable Libraries If you have modified the name of a library folder. these libraries are listed in pairs. in the project model. Libraries with Duplicate Objects This section of Library Manager is visible if any two project libraries contain one or more of the same objects. or changed its location in the file hierarchy. and browse for the library file under its new name or location. they are represented by fuzzy green dots. the following information is listed: • Number of duplicate objects • Number of placed duplicate objects • Number of placed duplicate instances ArchiCAD 15 Help 245 .) Placed objects from unavailable libraries are listed in the “Missing Objects” folder.

See Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries.) There are several possible strategies to resolve the issue of duplicates: • If the Libraries with Duplicate Objects are ArchiCAD Libraries. click the black arrow to choose the list format you need: • List placed duplicates • List all duplicates • List all placeable duplicates • List all non-placeable duplicates The problem with having a lot of duplicate objects in your projects is twofold: every time you load your libraries. you might consider comparing the two libraries’ contents manually (open the library folder at its source and view the objects). causing unnecessary slowdowns. • If the duplicate placed objects are project-specific. See Embed Placed Objects from a Library. you should embed them into the project. This will also eliminate the library from the project.Configuration Select any library pair and click the Info icon for more information. (See Substituted Objects.e. • If all the placed objects from one of the libraries are duplicates (i. In the Information box. you can remove the first library altogether. you will be loading many superfluous objects and/or libraries. and the presence of duplicates can lead to further ambiguities if you should modify a duplicate library object or save it under a new name. • If the duplicated libraries are not ArchiCAD libraries. and then delete the duplicates from one of the libraries. these objects also exist in the other library). it is best to Consolidate. below. 246 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Configuration Substituted Objects An object in this category has been placed in the project. though they may be named differently) exist in at least two linked libraries. (To do this. you should manually replace the instances of the “substituted object” with a single one of its possible duplicates from the loaded libraries.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 247 . To avoid this situation. ArchiCAD randomly uses one or the other source for the object’s placed instances. objects with the same ID as the placed object. you can use Find & Select to locate the placed instances of the substituted object. Then choose a specific library object from the loaded libraries to replace it. but several possible substitutes for this object (that is.

as part of ArchiCAD installation. because it replaces the old ArchiCAD libraries with the latest library. if it is not yet loaded • remove ArchiCAD libraries with lower version numbers • load the relevant migration libraries (These migration libraries will have already been installed on the computer. Click the Consolidate icon to bring up the following dialog box: Clicking the Consolidate command will: • load the newest-version ArchiCAD library. Consolidating ArchiCAD libraries is recommended.) • automatically replace placed objects from the older libraries (13 or 14 only) with their latest compatible version in the ArchiCAD 15 library See also Migrating Libraries and Objects to ArchiCAD 15.Configuration Consolidate ArchiCAD Libraries The yellow “Consolidate Libraries” icon in the Library Manager should be used if you have loaded multiple ArchiCAD libraries. Migration Libraries are much smaller than the full ArchiCAD libraries. 248 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or if the loaded ArchiCAD library is not the latest version. but also loads the requisite Migration Libraries to make sure that older library parts will be compatible and available. so this consolidation process will save you from a great many superfluous objects.

This solution requires that you have Server Administrator rights.Configuration Delete Unused Linked Libraries Library Manager tells you whether you have actually placed any objects from your linked libraries. select it from Library Manager and click the blue X “Remove” icon.Create a container file (. Next. To remove a library folder. you can remove it. ArchiCAD 15 Help 249 . Consequently. try one of these solutions: • Simplify the library’s file structure at its source. To resolve this problem. you don’t need that library and you can remove it from the project.lcf source file. Library Path Too Long The Windows operating system has a limit of 256 on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. and do one of the following: . go to Manage Server Libraries (File > Libraries and Objects) and use the Relocate command to browse the location of server library’s new. Go to the source file of the BIM Server Library.lcf) out of the library folder. there are no objects placed from the ArchiCAD 10 library. using File > Libraries and Objects > Create Container. In this example. If not. because the library path is too long. you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM Server library.

g. and enter a different location for your Teamwork Local Data folder. 250 ArchiCAD 15 Help . create a different. which is the destination of your local copies of BIM Server libraries. thus making the path shorter. Modify the destination of the local library copy.Configuration • .Alternatively. simplified folder structure for the library (e. Next. move the library folder to a higher position in the folder hierarchy so that the file path becomes shorter). Go to Options > Work Environment > Special Folders. go to Manage Server Libraries (File > Libraries and Objects) and use the Refresh command to update the server library with its newly restructured source. The new location should be at a higher level of the folder hierarchy.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 251 . or extract its contents.lcf. Since the Library Container file is a single file. The default ArchiCAD 15 Library is stored in an. but you can also create your own Library Container file. using the File > Libraries and Objects > Create/Extract a Container command. it lets you keep all the objects used in your projects in one place.lcf identifies a “Library Container file”. yet contains all the objects used in your project. while keeping hierarchies intact within the.Configuration Library Container File The extension.lcf.

This means you will be notified. upon starting ArchiCAD. if a new library version matching your ArchiCAD language version is available.Configuration Library Updates GRAPHISOFT updates its standard library parts on a regular basis. you should enable the Check for Updates option in Options > Work Environment > Network and Update Options. which you can then choose to download if needed. To check for the latest library updates. 252 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Network And Update Options.

Load these Favorite settings as the current default for the active tool to recreate a specific element at any time. wall thickness and height (but not length) • If the Favorites refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project. the name of the Library Part • All of the element’s dimensions that can be entered in the settings dialog boxes for the element. Favorites are saved with your Project file.g.. Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette ArchiCAD 15 Help 253 . • If the Favorites refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project. they will take on the attributes of the target project. including the line type. fill pattern and pen color. those attributes will be missing. A Favorite’s stored settings include: • The element’s attributes.Configuration Favorites The Favorites feature allows you to save sets of configured tool settings by name. as well as surface material choices • In the case of Library Parts. e.

Uncheck the “Show Favorites of active Tool only” checkbox. See Customize Favorite Parameters. Note: You can opt to exclude certain Favorite parameters from being loaded. The Favorites Palette lists the Favorites for the active tool only. go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palette’s pop-up menu.Configuration Load Favorite Settings as Default 1. 2. Favorites Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette 254 ArchiCAD 15 Help . as for the Column tool shown here: Note: If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools. The Default Settings now shown in the Info Box are those of the Favorite you just loaded. Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). Double-click the Favorite name to load its settings as default tool settings.

See also Favorites Palette.) 7.Configuration Save Favorite Settings Save Favorite Settings by using either • • the Favorites Palette. Optionally. Click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette. or the Tool Settings dialog boxes. Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. 3. Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). place element(s) in the project using these settings. Save Favorite Settings using the Tool Settings dialog box: 1. 2. Choose Save Current Default Settings to store these settings as a Favorite. ArchiCAD 15 Help 255 . Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette. select the placed element and choose the Save Last Selection’s command from this pop-up. Save Favorite Settings using the Favorites Palette: 1. Use the Tool Settings Dialog Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. Use the Info Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. 5. (Alternatively. 2. Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. 4. 6.

Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette. Click the Save Current Settings as Favorite button. 4. Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears.Configuration 3. to open the Apply Favorites dialog box. Click the Favorites button. 5. Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette 256 ArchiCAD 15 Help . at the top of the Settings dialog box.

For example. Choose Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palette’s pop-up menu. if you check the “Height” parameter for Walls in the Parameter Exclusion list. and the default Wall Height will remain unaffected. The Favorites Preferences dialog box controls which of the different element types’ parameters are NOT to be saved with Favorites. the saved Height of the Favorite Wall will be disregarded. then every time you load a Wall Favorite as the default settings. Related Topics: Favorites 257 ArchiCAD 15 Help . even after you load the Favorite Settings. 1.Configuration Customize Favorite Parameters Use the Favorites Preferences dialog box to if you want to ignore certain parameters when loading Favorite Settings. Use the Parameter Exclusion list (in the bottom half of the dialog box) to check the names of the parameters that you DO NOT want to apply with Favorites. 2.

Configuration Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette 258 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Click the Favorites button to display the Apply Favorites dialog box. 5. 2. 3. Open its Settings dialog box. Click OK to close the Settings dialog box and apply the Favorite settings.Configuration Apply Favorite to Placed Element To apply Favorite settings to a placed element: 1. Select the element. Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Favorites Palette ArchiCAD 15 Help 259 . 4. Choose the Favorite you need. then click Apply.

• • • • • Delete the selected Favorite (one at a time). Rename the selected Favorite (enter a new name in the appearing Rename Favorite dialog box). To save and manage Favorites. The Favorites Palette lists the favorites for the active tool only.) If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools. ArchiCAD 15 Help 260 . (If the Arrow or Marquee tool is active.Configuration Favorites Palette Access this palette from Window > Palettes > Favorites. Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. by default. This command is inactive if the Arrow. If nothing is selected. then all favorites are listed. Redefine with current Default: Changes the selected Favorite’s definition to the default settings of that tool. this command is inactive. Save Current Default Settings: Saves the currently loaded default settings as a Favorite (regardless of the currently selected Favorite in the Favorites Palette). Save Last Selection: Stores the settings of the last selected element’s current settings as a new Favorite. Uncheck the “Show Favorites of active Tool only” checkbox. Sort Favorites by Name or Type: Click the corresponding caption to sort the list of favorites. This item is inactive if the Arrow. Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette. go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palette’s pop-up menu.

if any Favorites have identical names. Related Topics: Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Customize Favorite Parameters ArchiCAD 15 Help 261 . When merging the two sets. • Favorites Preferences. you will be prompted to skip or overwrite the original definition. You can either merge it. Use this dialog box to define the exclusion of parameters. Save Favorites: Exports the whole set of Favorites in a separate file. See Customize Favorite Parameters. Load Favorites: Load or merge a saved Favorites file. The file will be saved with the *.Configuration • • • Redefine with Last Selection: Changes the selected Favorite’s definition to the settings of the last selected element.prf extension. or replace the current Favorites list.

Toolbox Info Box Menus Toolbars Shortcuts Palettes Pet Palettes 262 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Configuration The ArchiCAD User Interface This section introduces the main customizable palettes and menus in ArchiCAD.

Then store your customized Toolbox settings as part of a Tool Scheme in your Work Environment. Document and More . See Toolbox Customization Dialog Box. Info Box and Tool Settings dialog boxes. the Toolbox shows all tools in all Tool Groups simultaneously. go to Options > Work Environment > Toolbox. (A Tool Scheme includes your work environment settings for the Toolbox. . additional tools can appear in the Toolbox depending on the installation and the available Add-Ons. ArchiCAD 15 Help 263 . 2D drawing and visualization. then click the icon representing the Toolbox customization page.Configuration Toolbox The Toolbox shows a variety of tools for selection. By default. Display the Toolbox If the Toolbox is not visible on screen.) See Saving Your Customized Work Environment. use the open/close arrows at the top of each Tool Group to temporarily open and close these groups as needed. activate the Windows > Palettes > Toolbox command. 3D construction.to make it easier to locate the tool you need. Customizing the Toolbox Use the controls of the Options > Work Environment > Toolbox page to customize the contents and arrangement of your toolbox. Specifically. If the open/close arrows are not displayed. If the Toolbox becomes too unwieldy. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Toolbox context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Toolbox. Design. the Toolbox is divided into Tool Groups -Select. you can customize your toolbox by organizing the tools into groups. How to Open and Close Tool Groups Within the Toolbox By default. Besides the standard set of tools.

264 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Configuration Click on Tool Group Options. then uncheck the “Always Keep Tool Groups Open” option. Now you will be able to open or close each Tool Group in the Toolbox separately.

Configuration Info Box An Info Box is available for each tool in the toolbox. To show it vertically. If several elements are selected. Changes made to Info Box settings will affect the Editable elements. By default. You can use a scroll-mouse or the scrollbar to scroll through the contents of your Info Box. as reflected in the Info Box: • Default Settings. the Info Box displays the controls for the last selected element. Let your cursor hover over an Info Box item to provide a Tool Tip if you are not sure what the icon represents. the Info Box is a quicker way to access these controls. four of them have been locked for editing. While some of these controls are also available in the Tool Settings dialog box. all Walls are selected. its Info Box palette will display current settings for that tool/element. • Selected/Editable: The current Info Box gives you feedback on the number of Selected Elements. the Info Box displays the active tool’s Default Settings. The Info Box contains a condensed collection of input and parameter controls that are specific to the selected tool/element. as well as how many of those are Editable. ArchiCAD 15 Help 265 . because it stays on screen while you work. the Info Box is docked at the top of your workspace in a horizontal position. On the Floor Plan below. If there is no selection. When you activate a tool or select a placed element. dock it at either side of your screen.

Configuration Displaying the Info Box If the Info Box is not visible on screen. See Info Box Customization Dialog Box. Customizing the Info Box You can customize the order and visibility of panels in each Tool’s Info Box: go to Options > Work Environment and open the Info Box Customization Dialog Box. 266 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then click the icon representing the Info Box customization page: Also available from this Info Box context menu: click a display preference for the Info Box Header location: at the left edge of the palette. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Info Box context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Info Box. The Info Box will show controls specific to the active tool or the selected element. activate the Windows > Palettes > Info Box command. or on top.

Configuration Menus About Menus Menu Customization Dialog Box ArchiCAD 15 Help 267 .

see Saving Your Customized Work Environment and Menu Customization Dialog Box.Configuration About Menus When starting ArchiCAD 15 with default settings. you will load the Standard Profile. which along with other Work Environment settings . Use the settings in the Options > Work Environment > Menus dialog box to customize the content of your menus. Exception: Context menus are not customizable. For details. See Default Profiles in ArchiCAD. 268 ArchiCAD 15 Help . there are some commands and menus in ArchiCAD which are not displayed as part of this standard profile.defines the default menu structure. the order of the commands within any menu is entirely customizable. Customizing Menus Use the Menu Customization dialog box to customize any ArchiCAD menu. However. Any command or menu can be placed into or removed from any menu. You can store your customized menu command settings as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment.

Configuration Toolbars About Toolbars Toolbar Customization Dialog Box ArchiCAD 15 Help 269 .

choose its name from Window > Toolbars. Click any toolbar in the list to display it. or customize any of the available ones. You can also set whether a given command is represented on a toolbar by its name. its icon. Displaying Toolbars To display a toolbar. or both.Configuration About Toolbars A toolbar is a collection of commands and/or menus displayed in icon or text form and grouped by topic. Creating or Customizing Toolbars Use the Toolbar Customization dialog box. 270 ArchiCAD 15 Help . accessed from Options > Work Environment > Toolbars. See Toolbar Customization Dialog Box. to create a new toolbar. or right-click the title bar of any toolbar on screen to display the list of defined toolbars.

: You can store your customized toolbars as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details. see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.. ArchiCAD 15 Help 271 . The on-screen display of toolbars is saved in a Palette Scheme.Configuration An easy way to access this dialog box is to open any Toolbar’s context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the Toolbar. then click on Toolbars. The content of named toolbars are saved as part of a Command Layout Scheme..

272 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To customize a shortcut command. then click Assign. and click the Show Shortcut List in Browser button at the bottom of the Keyboard Shortcut Preview Panel. go to Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts. see Saving Your Customized Work Environment. Apart from a few non-customizable shortcuts (listed at the bottom of the Show Shortcut list). use the Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts: choose a command from the list on the left.Configuration Shortcuts ArchiCAD is shipped with several predefined shortcut schemes. see Shortcut Customization Dialog Box. then enter the desired shortcut combination in the field at the right. To view or print out a list of the shortcuts of the Work Environment. Changes to the selected Shortcut scheme are applied when you press OK and close the dialog box. For details. all shortcuts in any scheme are customizable. You can store your customized Shortcut settings as part of a Shortcut Scheme in your Work Environment. For details.

See Scheme Options. The Info Box.the Control Box and Coordinates . To display either of these palettes. • Dock palettes as needed (Windows only) Use the Scheme Options page of Palette Schemes to manage (Store.Configuration Palettes ArchiCAD’s palettes help you construct. They are not displayed by default. Delete. Coordinates Palette and Control Box palettes have shape options . extended or compact . Each palette can be shown or hidden separately using the Window > Palettes command. modify and locate elements. Rename. Redefine. ArchiCAD 15 Help 273 .for example. Export. Import) and apply Palette Schemes: go to Options > Work Environment > Palette Schemes. Customizing Palette Schemes To customize your palette scheme (a saved configuration of palettes).that you can set using the context menu opened by right-clicking the palette on screen. • Change the position and size of a palette by dragging the palettes to a desired position. The main palettes (Toolbox. because their commands are available from other parts of the interface. using the Window > Palettes > Show Main Palettes Only command. Info Box. set up your palettes manually in the ArchiCAD workspace by doing any or all of the following: • Show or hide palettes as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Palettes) • Show or hide toolbars as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Toolbars) • Change the shape of a palette by choosing a shape option from its context menu. Quick Options and Navigator) can be enabled all at once. go to Window > Palettes and choose the desired palette(s). Each of these palettes is described in detail in the ArchiCAD documentation: Toolbox Info Box Quick Options Palette Navigator Palette Control Box Coordinates Palette Two of these palettes .may be familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD.

Note: When dragging a palette in Windows. Palette Schemes settings reflect the way you manually set up your palettes in your workspace. 274 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A docked palette can be made to “float” again at any time. many ArchiCAD palettes can also be docked (in Windows only) at an edge of the workspace. click and drag the second palette onto the title bar of the first. as part of the same group. double-click it again to re-dock. click on its title bar (the drag symbol will appear) and drag it to one side or the top or bottom of the screen until the drag symbol hits either the side or the top/bottom limit. click and drag the second palette to the line at the bottom of the first one. you can either close it or drag it away. • If you resize any palette that is part of a palette group. • To insert a second palette above the first. sitting atop a single palette (or vice versa). Docking Groups of Palettes You can dock several palettes at either side of the screen and snap them to each other. However. • Click and drag to dock the first palette. instead. Docking Palettes (Windows Only) Palettes can “float” over your workspace. the entire workspace is visible.Configuration Palette Schemes differ from the rest of the Work Environment schemes: the settings they contain are defined not in the Work Environment dialog box. • To insert a second palette below the first. How to Un-Dock a Palette To pop a palette out of its dock and into a free-floating position. its content is defined as part of a Command Layout Scheme. and if a floating palette is in the way. To dock a palette. its anchor point is the drag symbol (not a palette edge). if you maximize the active window. Note: While the show/hide status of a toolbar is saved in a palette scheme. forming a palette group. the rest of the palettes in the group will be resized automatically. • You can also place two (or more) palettes side by side. Release the cursor to dock the palette. just click and drag on its header. Alternatively. with no workspace underneath it: this way. A docked palette is fixed at the edge of your screen. double-click the palette.

Solid Element Operations. to the edge of the screen. Find and Select. Library Loading Report. or right/left. Snapping Palettes (MacOS Only) On a MacOS. then both palettes can be dragged as a single object. Palettes will snap to each other if you pull them within a given range of each other. Sign in. The palette edge (not the cursor) is the docking anchor.) Limitations on Docking Palettes • • Not every palette can be docked to all sides of the screen. Pet Palettes. To set how much of each palette should be visible on screen. Text Formatting. Element Information. ArchiCAD 15 Help 275 . press Ctrl (Windows).Configuration • The width of all palettes in the group are resized simultaneously (by dragging the edge to the right or left). (The splitter bars are the lines which divide each palette from the others. for palettes stacked on top of each other. Suspend Docking Function To suspend the docking function while dragging a palette. • If a palette is snapped to the bottom or to the right of another. then they will not “stick together” when you move them. for palettes grouped next to each other. Selections. The following palettes/dialog boxes cannot be docked: Mark-Up Tools. • If a palette is snapped onto the top or to the left of another palette. Profile Manager. you can snap ArchiCAD floating palettes to each other. drag the splitter bars up or down. RoofMaker. Quick Layers.

276 ArchiCAD 15 Help . press Cmd (MacOS).Configuration Suspend Snapping Function To suspend the snapping function while dragging a palette.

To set these preferences. or surface. and left-click. depending on which pet palette movement option you specify. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following: • The selected element • The part of the element you choose to act on (edge. then selected the element for further editing. You cannot customize the contents of a pet palette. but in most cases the pet palette appears after you have placed an element. use the Pet Palette movement controls at Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes. and click on the icon for the function you need. In some cases. or be placed in a preferred spot (and told to “stay”). ArchiCAD 15 Help 277 . The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. The pet palette will either follow your cursor around on screen as you work (like a pet on a leash). the pet palette appears during input (as when inputting a polyline). node. place your cursor on an editable edge. To access the pet palette.Configuration Pet Palettes A pet palette is a collection of icons (representing commands and relevant options) which pops up during graphical input and editing operations. node or surface) • The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one. Use the shortcuts “F” and Shift+F (Opt+F) to move to the next/previous icon in the current pet palette. You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation.

You can store these Pet Palette settings as part of a User Preference Scheme in your Work Environment.Configuration See Dialog Boxes and Palettes. 278 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

see Work Environment Dialog Box. The setting will take effect. ArchiCAD 15 Help 279 . change the setting you need. toolbars and menus on screen. and press OK. You can customize any of these settings while you work: just open the Work Environment dialog box. you will develop personal preferences for using the program’s features and arranging the various palettes. For a brief description of every available setting in the Work Environment Dialog Box.Configuration Customizing your Work Environment As you get used to working with ArchiCAD. You will set most of these options using the Options > Work Environment dialog box.

Work Environment settings are saved not as part of the project.Configuration Use the splitter bars within each page to display the text as needed. but in a local folder on your computer. Work Environment Schemes Saving Your Customized Work Environment Profiles How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer 280 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

3. accessible from ArchiCAD’s Help menu. Company Standard Schemes. a palette scheme saves the current on-screen status of your Palettes. Shortcut Schemes For more information. coordinate input. Palette Schemes. the Info Box and the Tool Settings dialog boxes. These include a wide variety of your preferences for functions such as Guide Line functions. These settings are defined outside the Work Environment dialog box. 2. A tool scheme includes settings for the Toolbox. 1. See details at: • Data Safety & Integrity • Network And Update Options • Special Folders See also Creating a Custom Install Package in Getting Started. 5. See Palettes. Each scheme is a thematic collection of settings. Tool Schemes. User Preference Schemes.Configuration Work Environment Schemes Work Environment settings (Options > Work Environment) are divided into six self-contained schemes. ArchiCAD 15 Help 281 . and how certain dialog boxes should appear. see Shortcuts. 4. These settings are typically standardized within a firm.

282 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Command Layout Schemes.Configuration 6. Click on the name of the settings you wish to alter (for example. the scheme name at the top of the settings page changes to Custom: When you finish making changes. See Toolbars and Menus. However. press OK to close the dialog box and apply current settings. For more information. If you want to keep your modifications saved on the long term. see Saving Your Customized Work Environment. it is advisable to store the settings of your Custom scheme in a named scheme. “Selection and Element Information”). every new settings change redefines the “Custom” scheme according to your latest change. Command Layout Schemes include settings for your Toolbars and Menus. The latest Custom settings will remain intact even after you close and restart ArchiCAD. As soon as you make a change to any Work Environment setting.

You can store any or all of the schemes by name. Store a Customized Scheme To store the settings of a Scheme. See Profiles for more information. Unlike Project settings. Using the ArchiCAD interface (Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles). saving your settings occurs at the Scheme level. There is one Scheme Options page for each of the six schemes. if you have 283 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Work Environment Schemes are saved in a local folder on your computer. and then to combine schemes into profiles. and for individual users who might want to alternate among several different sets of customized settings.Configuration Saving Your Customized Work Environment If you have customized a number of settings in Options > Work Environment. you can just adjust settings as you work. or to keep them after installing a new version of ArchiCAD. The Scheme Options screen appears in the Work Environment dialog box if you have selected one of the six scheme sets from the tree structure at the left side of the dialog box. is useful for CAD managers. for offices working in teams. which are saved with the project file. However. you can also combine any of the schemes into a Profile. choose the scheme set whose settings you want to store. (For example. the option to save settings according to named schemes. and store the Profile under its own name. Individual settings are organized into six Schemes. using the left-hand tree structure of the Work Environment Dialog Box. you can export and import Schemes and Profiles: this enables you to transport your favorite settings to other computers. so that your personalized Work Environment is ready for you when you start to work. It is entirely possible to use ArchiCAD successfully without saving schemes and profiles. See Scheme Options. you may wish to save them for future use in other projects.

available from the ArchiCAD Help menu. Apply a Scheme To apply a stored scheme. export. choose the desired scheme from the Apply Scheme pop-up at the top of any of Work Environment’s settings pages. or click the Apply Scheme button. where you can store. rename. Once you apply the scheme and press OK to close the Work Environment dialog box.Configuration changed shortcuts and want to save them. but also for encouraging consistency among multiple users on a particular project. then either double-click it. see the Getting Started booklet. delete.) This brings up Scheme Options. 284 ArchiCAD 15 Help . You can also apply a scheme using the Scheme Options page of Work Environment: choose one of the defined schemes. your ArchiCAD program will adjust itself to reflect the settings you have stored in that scheme. redefine. CAD managers can create office-standard Work Environment Profiles and install them as defaults when installing the ArchiCAD program at multiple workstations. click on Shortcut Schemes. Creating an Office-Standard Work Environment The ability to save and rename any combination of Work Environment Settings can be useful not only for the individual user. See Scheme Options. For more information. or import schemes.

the default Work Environment Profile is set to Standard. you can export and import Profiles to use on other computers. you can apply schemes one by one. but the Custom scheme will be given a name when the profile is created. • A profile does not have to contain all six scheme possibilities. go to Options > Work Environment and click “Work Environment Profiles” (the top item in the list at the left. Go to Options > Work Environment and click “Work Environment Profiles” (the top item in the list at the left. Using the ArchiCAD interface. you don’t have to apply entire profiles at once. or click the Apply Schemes of Profile button. 3. ArchiCAD 15 Help 285 .Configuration Profiles If you have customized and saved multiple schemes. they are just a collection of schemes. Default Profiles in ArchiCAD ArchiCAD is shipped with three default Profiles: Standard. From the list of Stored Profiles. See Profile Options for details.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page. • Schemes named “Custom” cannot be exported. Click OK to close the Work Environment dialog box. see Profile Options. 2. When you first start ArchiCAD. Notes about Profiles: • Profiles themselves do not contain settings. you may want to store and apply them together: in this case. Visualization and Layouting. and store the Profile under its own name. • Once you start working. combine any of the schemes into a Profile. Double-click to apply the profile. Apply a Profile 1. For details on configuring and applying profiles. choose the desired Profile. • You can save a Custom scheme as part of a profile.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page. Define and Store a New Profile To assemble any combination of schemes into a profile.

and the Navigator/Organizer is located at the left edge of the screen. Naturally. so that all commands related to the 3D window. Two specialized toolbars are now visible: “Layouts & Drawings”.Configuration These predefined profiles are designed to get you up and running with ArchiCAD. and “Standard for Layouting”. you or your office CAD manager can reconfigure these profiles as needed. the Toolbox is minimized to show only the Documenting tools. • The Visualization Profile is useful when you reach the stage of setting up and creating output from 3D images. In this profile. and the Toolbox displays only Selection and Design tools. 3D navigation and 3D output are collected in a single menu. such as Fly-Throughs and PhotoRenderings. The 3D Visualization menu now appears. and your Toolbox displays each tool individually. • The Standard profile is designed to reflect the workflow in common architectural practice. The Standard toolbar and Mini-Navigator toolbar (for easy switching between windows) are visible. 286 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and toolbar visibility are optimized to give you easy access to the tools and functions you need to build up your Virtual Building. Menus. The Layout Book menu now appears. The 3D Visualization toolbar provides quick access to many of these same commands. • The Layouting Profile places commonly used layout-related and publishing commands within reach. palette layout. the Navigator is not displayed. commands.

xml files) contained within them. For details. profiles are. ArchiCAD 15 Help 287 . see Profile Options.xml files which refer to the schemes (also. See Scheme Options. you can export them. Use Options > Work Environment > Scheme Options to export and import schemes (as. Use Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles to export and import profiles to/from folders of your choice. In this operation.xml files) to/from folders of your choice.Configuration How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer To make your schemes or profiles available to a network or other users. or to transfer them to another computer.

Configuration 288 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Interaction Interaction Navigation Origins Elevation Selection On-Screen Input Aids Editing Elements Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows ArchiCAD 15 Help 289 .

Interaction Navigation How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows Zoom Oriented View Fit in Window Pan Navigator Preview (2D) Navigation in the 3D Window Navigator Palette Organizer Palette 290 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

The easiest way to switch among the different windows is to use the maps in the Navigator Palette. The predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar (available from Windows > Toolbars) is another way to quickly switch windows 3. Or use the View > Navigate hierarchical menu. Navigation Shortcuts You can also use keyboard shortcuts to navigate among windows: • go to Floor Plan Window: F2 • go to 3D Window: F3 • go to 3D Window (Perspective): Shift+F3 • go to 3D Window (Axonometry): Ctrl+F3 • go to last Section window: F6 • go to last opened Layout: F7 ArchiCAD 15 Help 291 . Just double-click on the item you want to see.Interaction How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows 1. See Navigator Palette. 2.

Draw a rotated rectangle at the desired angle. Pan. move the cursor upwards to zoom in. The area enclosed by the rectangle is enlarged to the size of the current window. you can zoom in on details. click Ctrl + Zoom In or Ctrl + Zoom Out. double-click the Zoom button. the entire current view is squeezed into the rectangle that you have defined. (A view’s saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View. the program will not only zoom in/out according to this rectangle. There are several techniques you can use to achieve Zoom effects: Zoom with Mouse Scroll Button If you have a mouse with a scrolling button. or use zoom out to display more elements. When you click again to complete the rectangle. If you don’t have a scrolling button on your mouse. 292 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use it for zooming in on (or out of) the area where the cursor is located. The operation is optimized so that no distortion will result. Oriented View. if any. see: View Settings. With Zoom Out. Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window to activate the corresponding shortcut. or else the Fit in Window zoom level. you can opt to save either the current Zoom value in View Settings.) For more information. downwards to zoom out. The greater distance you move the cursor. the greater the scope of the zoom. Zoom with Keyboard You can use numeric keypad shortcuts to achieve the scrolling zoom effect: press the ‘+’ key for zooming in and the ‘-’ key for zooming out. you can still emulate its operation: First click the Scroll-Zoom button on the bottom scrollbar. Draw a rectangle around the detail you want to enlarge with the Zoom In cursor.Interaction Zoom In 2D and 3D windows. but will also rotate the view to reflect the rectangle’s rotation angle. Click again to activate the zoom. The Zoom control on the bottom scrollbar gives you feedback on the current zoom. Then click anywhere in the window. To return to Actual Size (zoom at 100%). To rotate the current view in addition to zooming in/out. When you save the current contents of the screen as a view.

Note: To double the current magnification or reduction level. use the Next Zoom command or shortcut button. Zoom with Menu Commands • Choose View > Zoom > Zoom In or Zoom Out. you can click its shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window. • Zoom to Selection: Use this command (View > Zoom > Zoom to Selection) to move in on only selected elements.) • Previous/Next Zoom: If you wish to move one step back from your previous Zoom In. then choose one of the predefined zoom values. (This is also available from the context menu. Home Zoom If you need to return frequently to a part of your project. To go to the next zoom. Predefined Zooms Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window. rename and delete predefined zooms. Home Zooms are not included in the list of saved zooms. you can use Options > Work Environment > Menus to add them. • Up to 20 previous steps are stored. double-click the appropriate icon. Home Zoom or Fit in Window operations. You can return easily to this view by choosing the View > Zoom > Home Zoom command. if you right-click in an empty space on the screen. Note: If these commands are not available in the View menu. The pop-up menu commands allows you to save. This home zoom is saved with the project. ArchiCAD 15 Help 293 . Zoom Out. you can define it as the home zoom by choosing the View > Zoom > Set Home Zoom command.Interaction See also Oriented View. see Customizing Menus. Pan. access. For more information.

click Across All Stories. give the saved zoom a name. (A view’s saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View. Custom-saved zooms you name here can be applied to any view.Interaction See Home Zoom. By default.) See: Pan and Oriented View. from the Zooming pop-up list in the 2D/3D Documents Panel of View Settings. To have this zoom available in all stories. this zoom will be available only for the current story (here. In the appearing dialog box. Story). 1. if any. Save Zooms You can save different zooms for future use: Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window. 294 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then choose Save Current Zoom.

Interaction See View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel. ArchiCAD 15 Help 295 .

Orienting the view does not rotate the project as such.Interaction Oriented View Use the Oriented View function to rotate the entire view on your screen to a preferred position.) 296 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the project coordinates remain unchanged. rather than at an angle. For example. (You get the same effect if you rotate your monitor. you can orient the view so that the wing you are working on lines up with your screen. It just turns the window contents so that they are displayed at a more convenient angle on your monitor. if you are working on the wing of a building that is at an angle to another one.

Interaction Oriented View (Rotation) in View Settings “Rotation” is included in a view’s Zoom data. draw a rotation vector with two clicks. including its rotation. ArchiCAD 15 Help 297 .) How to Rotate Window Contents Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position Zoom and Rotate Grids in Oriented View Text in Oriented View How to Rotate Window Contents 1. 2. Consequently. Thus. On screen. then the displayed view will not use the saved zoom value. but rather the window’s last-used zoom value. when saving View Settings. together with the rotation. (Views placed on layouts will always display their saved zoom/rotation. Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen. If this is checked. Uncheck the box if you wish to see the saved zoom value in the window. the rotation will not be seen either. There is a checkbox in View Settings: Ignore zoom when opening this view. you save its zoom.

4. Click a third time to complete. To reset the rotation degree to zero. 298 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See also Tracker. click this button.Interaction 3. The degree of rotation is shown on the Reset Orientation button at the bottom of your screen. The pair of arrows in the lower left corner also indicates the rotation. or enter a numerical rotation angle into the Tracker. next to the Rotate Orientation control. Drag your mouse to rotate the screen contents to the desired angle.

Zoom and Rotate To rotate the view and zoom in or out at the same time: 1. which you want to rotate to an orthogonal (horizontal or vertical) position on the screen.) 3.Interaction In the Navigator Preview. Oriented View is available in the Floor Plan. The rotated orientation value is saved as part of the “Zoom” value of every saved view.) 2. Worksheet. 4. such as a slab. 2. Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen. Detail and 3D Document windows. Ctrl+click on the edge. whichever is nearer. Move the cursor to the edge of a project element. and on the published output created from that view. (See also Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons. (The cursor will change to a Mercedes to indicate you have located the edge. the preview itself does not. Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button from the bottom of your screen. Press Ctrl. only the frame representing the monitor rotates. ArchiCAD 15 Help 299 . The window contents will rotate so that the clicked edge moves to either at 0 degrees or 90 degrees. Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position 1.

When you complete the rectangle with the third click. Using three clicks.Interaction 3. the view will zoom in/out and be rotated simultaneously. 300 ArchiCAD 15 Help . draw the zooming rectangle on screen at the desired angle.

Interaction Grids in Oriented View The on-screen Grid. This automatic “flip” occurs if the text is at an angle between 90 and 270 degrees. (pictured below) or with the corresponding controls in the Text Tool Info Box. • The Always Readable option (on by default) means that the program will automatically “flip” the text to make it legible on screen (as opposed to upside down) regardless of the view’s orientation. Text in Oriented View Text blocks The way a Text Block behaves in a rotated view is set in Text Tool Settings in the Text Block Formatting Panel. its project coordinates remaining unchanged after the rotation. if it was orthogonal to begin with. See Text Block Formatting Panel. the Fixed Angle option means that the Text Block will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. ArchiCAD 15 Help 301 . remains orthogonal after the rotation. If it was a rotated Grid. that Grid will rotate along with the view. • If you place a Text Block at an angle.

after rotation: 302 ArchiCAD 15 Help . If Fixed Angle is checked in the Text Label panel. you can also check Optimize Position. This means that ArchiCAD will reposition the Label’s arrow if it ends up in an awkward position after the view is rotated: Not optimized Label.Interaction Text Labels The Label Settings Text Panel (for a Text-type Label) also contains the Fixed Angle option: This means that the Label will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated.

options for Text Orientation on Symbol include: • Readable: As the view is rotated. however. the text will remain horizontal with respect to the screen regardless of any rotation of the view. that angle will prevail.) (If you set a custom angle for fill area text.Interaction Optimized Label. however. that angle will prevail. with no other adjustments. (See Adding Area Text to a Fill. Many such objects have new parameters. the object text rotates too. Fill Area text Will always be displayed horizontally on screen.) Text of GDL Objects in Rotated View GDL Object-type elements may contain text that is affected by a rotated orientation. regardless of the view’s orientation. but is flipped as necessary to ensure text readability. ArchiCAD 15 Help 303 . For example. after rotation: Dimension text Dimension text is automatically adjusted to ensure that it will remain easily legible regardless of the view’s orientation. (If you set a custom angle for dimension text. See Dimension Tool Settings. • Align with Symbol: Text rotates together with the symbol.) For dimensions whose text is set to “Horizontal” in Dimension Tool Settings.

• Align with Marker Line: Text remains fixed in line with the marker line and is automatically readable. following any view rotation. and will flip the text if necessary to ensure readability. and is automatically readable (that is. depending on the marker type: • Standard: Text is always parallel to the wall. without any “flip” adjustment for readability. flipped if necessary after rotation of the view). following any view rotation. Marker Text in Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values. regardless of the view’s orientation. depending on the marker type: • Always Horizontal and Always Vertical values will display text horizontally/vertically on screen. 304 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • Horizontal/Vertical Width/Height/Sill/Fire Rating/Acoustic Rating texts are automatically readable. • Align with Section Line will keep the text lined up with the Section line. Text of Door/Window Markers The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values. • Align with Section Line .No Flip will keep the text lined up with the Section line.Interaction • Always Horizontal: Text remains fixed in a horizontal position on screen. regardless of the view’s orientation.

(See View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel. Choose the View > Fit in Window command or click the corresponding shortcut button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window. you can save a window’s Fit in Window setting as part of any view’s View Settings: choose Fit in Window from the Zooming pop-up in the 2D/3D Documents Panel of View Settings. the rotation remains intact. If the current view has been rotated (see Oriented View). This provides a good way to check whether you have placed something in the far corners of your window by mistake during numeric input or a multiply operation. If you wish.Interaction Fit in Window You can resize your view to accommodate all elements placed in the project.) Listing windows have an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size. ArchiCAD 15 Help 305 . Another shortcut: Double-click the middle mouse button to Fit in Window.

you may experience fits and starts in model display.) The up/down and left/ right keys achieve the same result. while the current zoom level is preserved. • What to Do if Panning Produces “Jumpy” Screen Effect When panning a large and complex project in a 2D window. (Make sure Numbers Lock is off. If you have a three-button mouse. To remedy this. Click into the active window and pan it by moving the Hand cursor with your mouse.Interaction Pan Use the Pan function to scan the project as a whole. • With the Navigator Preview Palette See Navigator Preview (2D). try switching among the choices in Options > Work Environment > Advanced Redraw Options: Model Display in 2D Navigation. usually to see elements that do not currently fit on the screen. 2 (downwards). • With Mouse Scrolling Button: If you have a mouse with a scrolling button. • With the numeric keypad (Windows only): Press the following keys: 4 (left). 306 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you can use it for panning by pressing down the middle button while moving the Hand cursor in the window. you can use it for panning by pressing the scrolling button continuously while moving the Hand cursor over the window. Enable the Pan function. The whole on-screen area will move. 6 (right). 8 (upwards). then move the cursor to “move” the view around in the window along with the cursor. • With Pan Button: Click the Pan button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window.

For 2D Windows.Interaction Navigator Preview (2D) The Navigator Preview Palette makes it easier to locate and zoom in on certain parts of your project.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 307 . The frame inside the Preview Palette represents the active window at its current zoom. this has the same effect as zooming and panning in the active window. or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview. but the frame is rotated to match the angle of orientation. To display the Navigator Preview Palette. click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window. (The two heavier arrows of the frame indicate the bottom left corner of the screen. see The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls. Use this frame to zoom and pan within the Preview Palette. If the current zoom of the active window includes a rotated orientation (see Oriented View). especially when working on larger projects. the Preview Palette displays a miniature copy of the entire contents of the current view. the preview shows the project in its original view. while simultaneously giving you an overview of the entire window contents. For details on these controls.

308 ArchiCAD 15 Help . a pop-up menu contains three options for controlling the zooming techniques of the Navigator Preview. Clicking the buttons increases the zoom level in about 10% increments. drag its sides or corners (this has the effect of zooming in and out within the active window). you have the following zooming and panning options: • To change the location of the frame. Auto zoom will adjust the zoom after you finish moving the cursor.Interaction When previewing a 2D window in the Navigator Preview. • At the bottom right corner. • To change the size of the frame. the plus and minus buttons and a sliding switch are additional zooming techniques: they allow you to zoom the current view in and out. the zoom is adjusted. The default is Real-time zoom: as you move the cursor. • At the bottom of the palette. drag its enclosed area with the Hand Cursor (this lets you pan in the active window).

• Use Redraw Preview if you have made changes in the current window that are not yet reflected in the Navigator Preview.Interaction Double-click to zoom means you must double-click or press the Go button at top right to execute the chosen zoom. ArchiCAD 15 Help 309 .

Zoom. Pan. Zoom The 3D window also contains unique navigation possibilities for exploring the model and orbiting around in it. The 3D window can be navigated using most of the basic 2D navigation methods. and command-based techniques all work the same way as in 2D. mouse scroll button. Fit in Window. These are described in the following sections. see 3D Window. See: Fit in Window.Interaction Navigation in the 3D Window Note: For general information on accessing the 3D window. The keyboard. Pan. Accessing 3D Navigation Commands Explore Model (3D Navigation) Orbit (3D Navigation) Navigator Preview (3D) 3D connexion Enabler 310 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and how to set up Perspective and Axonometric (Parallel) views.

If the 3D window is active.Interaction Accessing 3D Navigation Commands Special commands for navigating in 3D are displayed in the 3D Visualization and the Simple 3D toolbar. ArchiCAD 15 Help 311 . its bottom scrollbar contains icon shortcuts to 3D Navigation commands. and can be assigned shortcuts. The 3D Navigation commands are available only in the 3D Window. Note: The 3D Navigation controls familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD can be accessed by choosing Window > Toolbars > Classic 3D Navigation toolbar. Choose Window > Toolbars > 3D Visualization or Simple 3D to display these toolbars as needed.

) When in this mode. To exit Explore mode. use the mouse and the arrow keys of the keyboard for navigation (as when playing a video game on a PC. you cannot edit the model or use any of the commands. click with the left mouse button or use the Esc key. In Explore mode. an informational dialog box opens to give you a visual prompt on what you can expect from your various actions with the mouse and the keyboard. check Do not show this information next time at the bottom of the dialog box. The “Fly” option and speed slider also appear at the bottom of the screen as long as you are in Explore mode. Note: Exploring the model is optimized for the OpenGL engine. or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.Interaction Explore Model (3D Navigation) In Perspective views only. Note: If you don’t need to see this information every time you enter Explore mode. When choosing the Explore Model command. To enable this or any 312 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you can explore the model either by choosing the View > Explore Model or access the same command from a toolbar.

Interaction other dialog box you have marked as “do not show. ArchiCAD 15 Help 313 .” use the Enable all informational messages command at Options > Work Environment (bottom of menu). “Rotate” camera in Explore mode Moving the mouse around will rotate the camera in the directions indicated by the arrows next to the camera on the picture above.

but this time the Fly mode combines the lifting effect with the rotating and lateral movements to simulate a walking movement on a horizontal plane or in space.Interaction “Walk” forward and backward in Explore mode Pressing the arrow keys. “Fly” around the model In Explore mode. click “F” for Fly mode. Again. Note that the Up arrow brings the model closer to you while the Down arrow moves it further away. 314 ArchiCAD 15 Help . will walk you forward/backward and laterally in the directions indicated by the arrows in the picture above. “Lift” the model up and down Use the PageUp (shortcut: spacebar) and PageDown (shortcut: C) keys to simulate a lifting effect. For a temporary speed increase. Speed Up/Slow Down in Explore Mode Click the Plus and Minus keys on your numeric keypad to change the speed in which you explore the model. or the W-A-S-D keys. use the arrow keys or the W-A-S-D keys to move around. then release it to return to your basic speed. press Shift.

Interaction Orbit (3D Navigation) For Orbit mode. or access the same command from a toolbar or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window. you cannot edit the model. press the left button and drag the mouse to turn the model around its centerpoint (axonometry) or target point (perspective). Temporary “Orbit” effects while in editing mode While in editing mode (not in Orbit mode). If you are in Orbit mode. you can temporarily simulate Orbit mode by pressing Shift together with the mouse scrolling button to orbit the model. ArchiCAD 15 Help 315 . Once you enter Orbit mode. choose View > Orbit. This type of temporary Orbit requires the model to be redrawn and can result in slowed-down navigation. Release the keys to stop orbiting. Click ESC to exit Orbit mode and return to editing mode.

Note: Make sure that Show from Top is chosen from the pop-up menu in the Preview’s lower right corner. edit the camera and target positions directly by clicking them in the Preview window and dragging them to a new location.Interaction Navigator Preview (3D) To display the Navigator Preview Palette. or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview. click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window. The options of the Navigator Preview depend on whether you are looking at a Perspective or Axonometric view. This palette allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projections. For Perspective 3D views. whether perspective or parallel (axonometric). 316 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See 3D Projections.

Interaction In the image below. ArchiCAD 15 Help 317 . we “turn the building around” simply by clicking and dragging the camera represented in the Navigator Preview Window.

in 5 degree increments For Axonometric (parallel) projections. using the sliding switch or the small icons at its ends. From the left button. the 3D Navigator Preview has two pop-up menus at the bottom right. you can easily re-set the camera height relative to the stories of the project: just click in the Navigator Preview and move the camera up or down.Interaction If you choose Show from Side view from the Preview options pop-up. choose one of the 12 predefined projections to quickly switch to that view. (These are the same predefined axonometries available from 3D Projection Settings). 318 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Or you can change the view cone.

then move the small camera icon inside the Preview window to set up a custom view.Interaction To customize the projection. For detailed information. ArchiCAD 15 Help 319 . use the right-side pop-up button. see The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls and 3D Projections.

320 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use one of the two options at View > 3D Navigation Extras > 3Dconnexion: • Camera mode: Move the device to navigate in the model by moving the camera position. the model is moved accordingly. while the model moves. If you are using a 3Dconnexion device. • Object mode: As you move the device. The camera viewpoint is fixed.Interaction 3D connexion Enabler The 3D connexion Enabler is an add-on functionality that allows you to use your 3Dconnexion device for navigating in ArchiCAD’s 3D window.

Interaction Navigator Palette About the Navigator Palette How to Display the Navigator Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows Project Workflow in the Navigator Organizer Palette Navigator Color Codes Navigator Project Map ArchiCAD 15 Help 321 .

Interaction Navigator View Map Clone a Folder in the View Map Setting up a View Saving a View Modifying View Settings Quick Options Palette Navigator Layout Book Navigator Publisher External Projects in the Navigator 322 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Related Topics: Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls Organizer Palette ArchiCAD 15 Help 323 . Finally. which makes it easier to move items from one map to the other. click among the four buttons at the top of the Navigator.Interaction About the Navigator Palette The Navigator Palette (Navigator) is a tree structure that lets you build up the entire logical structure of your project and navigate within it. • The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. The Navigator displays the whole project’s tree structure in four different maps. or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue. drag and drop views and other project items depending on their particular purpose. The Navigator has a special double-tree view. deleting items from a map. plotting. The Navigator also lets you access views and layouts from external ArchiCAD files and place them into the Layout Book of your current project. • The Publisher Sets map is a tree structure in which you define sets of views for various output purposes (printing. then copy. Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps. You can create folders. and are not undoable. or saving to a local disk). • The Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project. To switch from one map to another. called the Organizer. you can configure the outputs for publication using Navigator controls. The Navigator item currently open in the window is shown in bold. • The View Map includes all the predefined and custom-created Views of the Project File. The palette’s title bar indicates which map is currently displayed.

but once you click outside the palette. or click the Navigator icon from the horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the ArchiCAD screen. If it is hidden.Interaction How to Display the Navigator The Navigator is displayed by default. Auto-Hide the Navigator Both Navigator and Organizer Palettes have an Auto-Hide feature: if you turn this on. 324 ArchiCAD 15 Help . it will disappear. choose Window > Palettes > Navigator. you can use the Navigator/Organizer as usual.

) ArchiCAD 15 Help 325 .Interaction The Auto-Hide command is found in the Navigator/Organizer palette’s context menu (right-click in the gray area at the top of either palette.

326 ArchiCAD 15 Help . replacing the previous view in that window. To open a new view in a new window instead.Interaction Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows Double-click the desired item from any map of the Navigator. change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options. If you would rather open a new window by default each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator). use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened. ArchiCAD will open the item in existing windows. By default.

Use the Publisher to set up the items you want to publish. and set the publishing method and format. each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint. but its settings have not been saved yet.Interaction Project Workflow in the Navigator A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project. Each Publisher item refers directly to a View or to a Layout (in effect. The Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project. Every saved view is listed in the View Map. the Publisher item is a shortcut to the View/Layout). The following diagram summarizes the project workflow as reflected in the maps of the Navigator: ArchiCAD 15 Help 327 . and can contain Drawings originating from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. Viewpoints are listed in the Project Map of the Navigator Palette. See Navigator Palette.

It houses essentially the same controls. choose Window > Palettes > Organizer. Auto-Hide Organizer Both Navigator and Organizer Palettes have an Auto-Hide feature: if you turn this on. See also Navigator Palette. or the Show Organizer command from the Project Chooser at top left of the Navigator.) Organizer Modes Click the desired map icons on both sides of the Organizer to bring up one of the three modes of the Organizer: 328 ArchiCAD 15 Help . but once you click outside the palette. it will disappear. but has a double-tree structure to make it easier to move and copy views and files from one map to the other. you can use the Navigator/Organizer as usual.Interaction Organizer Palette The Organizer is related to the Navigator and is opened from the Navigator. The Auto-Hide command is found in the Navigator/Organizer palette’s context menu (right-click in the gray area at the top of either palette. Display the Organizer To display the Organizer.

this enables you to make copies of items within a single map. When you click any item in the Navigator/Organizer. the Add Shortcut button will create a folder in the Publisher Set which corresponds to that Subset: if you change or add items in the original subset.Interaction • View Editor mode (Project Map on the left. • Layout Editor mode (Layout Map on the right): Place Drawings onto Layouts in the Layout Book by selecting a view from the Project or View Map (on the left). However. if you choose the Publisher on the right. Certain combinations are not possible. or drag and drop it into the View Map. or drag and drop it onto a Layout (on the right). View Map on the right): Save views by selecting a viewpoint from the Project Map and clicking Save view. then clicking Place Drawing. the Publisher Set folder will reflect these changes automatically. ArchiCAD 15 Help 329 . if you drag and drop a Subset into the Publishing Set. (For example. and ArchiCAD will always adjust to one of the three possible Organizer modes. because you cannot place items directly from the Project Map to the Publisher.) It is possible to have the same map open on both sides of the Organizer. then the left side will switch from Project Map to View Map. but this folder is not linked to any subsequent modifications to the Subset. Note that the Project Map is available only on the left side. Double-clicking the item activates the corresponding window. • Publisher (Publisher on the Right): To add a view or layout (on the left) to a Publisher set (on the right). a folder is created. If you select a Subset in the Layout Map. select a view or layout and click Add Shortcut. its preview is displayed in the Navigator Preview palette (if applicable).

Interaction Related Topics: Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls 330 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 Help 331 . See Navigator View Map. See also Navigator Icons in the Teamwork Section of ArchiCAD Help.Interaction Navigator Color Codes A color-coding system makes it easier for you to identify items in the Navigator palette. See Navigator Layout Book. See Navigator Project Map. • Items of the View Map are colored yellow. • Items of the Layout Book are colored white. • Items of the Project Map are colored orange.

See also Project Map Controls. .Interaction Navigator Project Map The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. but its settings have not been saved yet. The Project Map Viewpoints are: • Stories • Sections • Elevations • Interior Elevations • Worksheets 332 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project.

and more Paths can be added. In Windows. ArchiCAD 15 Help 333 . At the top level of the project map hierarchy. Worksheets. You can display the contents of each folder by clicking the plus sign in front of it (in Windows) or the little arrow (in MacOS). folders store the available viewpoints of the project (one folder named for each type of viewpoint). Project indexes include view list indexes. All these additions and changes are updated in the Project Map. but if you assign a Project Name in File > Info > Project Info. See Camera Tool Settings. The Schedules folder contains the interactive schedules (Elements and Components) created as part of the project documentation.Interaction • Detail Drawings • 3D Documents • 3D • Schedules • Project Indexes • Lists • Info • Help Double-click a viewpoint to open it in the project. whose names will vary depending on the local version of ArchiCAD being used. • When you place Cameras in the Project. the house icon represents the project and is followed by the project name. The Path can be renamed in Camera Tool Settings. • By default. it becomes a view (listed in your View Map) and can then be placed onto a Layout for editing. Elevations. Once you save a viewpoint’s settings. windows. and other construction elements from the manufacturers and for checking the consistency of elements based on a set of criteria. The Sections. their names appear in the 3D folder of the Project Map. When you first start a new project. grouped under the Path. If there is no plus sign in front of a folder. The Stories folder contains all the Stories defined for the project. See Project Indexes.) Below. (The project gets a name once you save the project file. Details and 3D Documents folders contain the list of corresponding windows. Project Map folders are a fixed list of item types. Interior Elevations. this means that no such viewpoint has been created yet in the project. The 3D folder contains elements for the various projection and camera types. The Project Indexes folder contains three sets of table of contents type items. See ArchiCAD Model Views for information about each of these viewpoint types. your Stories folder contains three items. See Interactive Schedule. double-clicking the folder icon or name also opens the folder. that is the name that will be shown in the Navigator. two items are present on starting the project: Generic Perspective and Generic Axonometry. layout sheet indexes and drawing list indexes based on a set of filtering criteria. you cannot add or delete folders here. The Interactive Schedule serves as a basis for ordering doors.

) See also Quick Options Palette. a viewpoint’s settings change along with edits in the window. When opened. The Info folder contains two items: Project Notes and Report Window. Double-clicking any of the items of the Project Map activates the corresponding window and shows its contents with its last used zoom and display settings. All these items also appear in the Document > Schedules and Lists menu. a set of relevant commands appear in a context menu (for example story-related commands for Stories or 3D-related commands for Perspectives).saving Project Map viewpoints as views with specific settings . see Calculation. For more information. You can make this process automatic . see Project Notes and Session Report Window. Components and Zones. They represent the corresponding windows also available from the Window menu. all three show the list of predefined list schemes available for the project.using the Clone Folder function. (These zoom and display settings can be checked in the Quick Options Palette. If you click an item with the right mouse button. you can save it as a view. For more information. When you have set up the viewpoint settings as desired.Interaction The Lists folder contains three items: Elements. Remember. 334 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

and add new folders as needed. you will display the Navigator View Map: the list of saved Views available in your project file. Every saved view is listed in the Navigator Palette’s View Map. select the view and click Settings at the bottom of the View Map to access View Settings. see Saving a View. use the Project Indexes function. In the View Map. Views can be created within the active project or imported from other ArchiCAD projects. To modify view settings. See also View Map Controls. The Properties section at the bottom of the View Map provides feedback on the settings of the selected view.Interaction Navigator View Map With the second button in the Navigator Palette. See Project Indexes. each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. you can rename or delete these. To gain an overview of View Map items or to sort them by criteria. 335 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint. For more information. several view folders are predefined.

Interaction Even if the project content changes. the settings of your saved views .will remain unchanged unless you expressly modify them. 336 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Note: You can create a dynamic connection between project viewpoints and views if you clone a folder.

How to Clone a Folder Click the Clone Folder at the bottom of the View Map. for each new viewpoint you create in the Project Map.the settings you define when creating the cloned folder. even new ones added after the creation of the clone folder. if you have cloned the Project Map’s Stories folder.Interaction Clone a Folder in the View Map Cloning a folder means that you recreate a Project Map folder inside the View Map. For example. ArchiCAD 15 Help 337 . then the cloned folder in View Map will always show all Stories of the Project. a counterpart new view will be created in its cloned folder in the View Map. Consequently. every view in the cloned folder will have identical View Settings . Moreover. This opens the Clone a Folder dialog box.

Click Clone to create the cloned folder. The resulting cloned folder in the View Map will be identified by a special “clone” folder icon. Another way to create a clone is to drag the folder from the Project Map to the View Map.) Views in regular View Map folders: 338 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The following two diagrams illustrate the difference between views in regular folders in the View Map (which are not affected by changes in the Project Map structure). and views in cloned folders in the View Map (whose contents change in tandem with changes in the Project Map viewpoints. choose the folder whose clone you want to create in the View Map. The rest of the controls are identical to those of View Settings.Interaction The top of the Clone a Folder dialog box lists all the folders of the Project Map. The settings you define here will be applied to every view in the cloned folder. using Ctrl+Shift (Windows) or Opt+Cmd (MacOS) within the Organizer’s View Editor. rather than a regular folder icon.

Interaction Views in Cloned View Map folders: ArchiCAD 15 Help 339 .

Interaction Setting up a View To set up a new view. using the “View Settings and Storing Options” at the bottom of the Project Map View Settings The View Settings are stored with each view. Section/Elevation/ IE. which always show the settings of the currently active (frontmost) window See also Quick Options Palette. See View Settings Dialog Box. Detail. Interactive Schedule. • in the Organizer. it will store the combination of the following settings: • • Layer Combinations Scale ArchiCAD 15 Help 340 . Worksheet. Once you save the view. 3D. using the usual editing commands • changing the options of the Quick Options Palette. in one of the following ways: • in the active window. 3D Document. or List) and adjust any or all of its settings as needed. For example. open the project in the appropriate window (Floor Plan. you can change the scale and layer combination to fit your output needs.

filtered elements in 3D. • Existing selection (3D only) ArchiCAD 15 Help 341 . 3D Cutaway and PhotoRendering Settings. • Dimensions See Dimensioning. 3D cutting planes. 3D window settings. and the Oriented View) See Zoom.Interaction • Partial Structure Display • Pen Set • Model View Options Combinations • Renovation Filter See Renovation. and Oriented View. • Floor Plan Cut Plane See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting). Pan. • Image Settings (for 3D Window views): these include 3D projection settings (including zooming). the Pan. • Zooming (including the Zoom value.

allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view. Click the Save Current view button at the bottom of the View Map. The current settings are saved as view settings. The current settings are saved as view settings. available in the active window’s context menu. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears.) Drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the Layout Book. do one of the following: • • Use the Organizer to drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the View Map.Interaction Saving a View To save the view. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears.) • • • Select the Viewpoint in the Project map. the item’s context menu in the Navigator/Organizer. The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book. The current settings are saved as view settings. then right-click and execute the Save Current View command. and as a command in the Document menu. The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book. 342 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Use the Save View and Place on Layout command. allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.

you can save the current window settings as a view: Click Settings to open the View Settings dialog box. while working in the active window. do one of the following: • • Open the View Settings Dialog Box and make any changes needed Click Get Current Window’s Settings to overwrite the original view settings with the current viewpoint settings (i. a triangular yellow “warning” icon will appear at the bottom of the Navigator. alerting you that “The settings in the frontmost window no longer correspond to the original view settings.e. the image below indicates that the current window’s zoom and layer settings are different than in the saved view. If you have opened a saved view from the View Map. If you wish. then click Get Current Window’s Settings.Interaction Modifying View Settings To change the settings of an already saved view.” For example. you have changed any of its View Settings. and if. those of the active window). ArchiCAD 15 Help 343 . next to the changed settings.

• Model View Options Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Model View Options Combination to the whole project.) See Pens & Colors. • Partial Structure Display: Changing this setting applies a new Partial Structure Setting to the currently active window. (You may have to drag the palette to a new position or stretch it to see all six of the Quick Options. (Not available in the 3D window) See Dimensions Preferences. (Not available in the Layout window. . The Quick Options Palette is displayed by default at the lower right corner of your screen.) To hide/show this palette. they merely provide feedback on what you are currently seeing in the active window. use Windows > Palettes > Quick Options Palette or the corresponding button in the bottom scrollbar of the model window. • Pen Set: Changing this setting applies a new pen set to the model. • Renovation Filter: Choose a Renovation Filter to assign to the view. Use these six sets of pop-up controls as a quick way to change the settings of the project or of the currently active (frontmost) window: • Layer Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Layer Combination to the whole project. and offer a quick way to apply changes among these settings. The current window settings as reflected in Quick Options are the currently effective project settings. but they have not necessarily been saved as part of any view. See Scale. • Dimensions: Changing this setting applies a new Dimensioning standard to the whole project. See Model View Options Combinations. 344 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Layer Combinations. See Renovation. • Scale: Changing this setting applies a new scale to the currently active window.Interaction Quick Options Palette The Quick Options Palette displays the current settings of the active (frontmost) window.

You can view the Layout Book in two formats: Tree by Subset or Tree by Master. To access the Settings of the selected Layout or the selected Drawing. Tree by Subset (the default display) lists layouts according to the Subsets you have created . • ArchiCAD 15 Help 345 .) See Subsets. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. click the Settings button at the bottom of the Layout Book. At the bottom of the Layout Book. See also The Layout Book and Layout Book Controls. some of which are editable directly. Drawings in the Layout Book can originate from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. Click the popup button above the tree to choose a format. the Properties section displays the settings of the current Layout. (The primary function of Subsets is to enable you to assign a customized numbering system.Interaction Navigator Layout Book The Layout Book is a tree view of the Layouts defined for the entire project.a freely defined logic. • Tree by Master lists the Layouts in categories according to their Master Layouts. plus the Drawings on the Layouts.

Interaction Drawings are accompanied by icons that correspond to their file type. 346 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Views imported from ArchiCAD project files retain their icons (for example. floor plan or detail) but are shown in white.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 347 .Interaction Navigator Publisher Use this map of the Navigator/Organizer to set up the items you want to publish. see: Publisher Function and Publisher Controls. Access the Publisher in one of these locations: • the Navigator • the Organizer • the Document > Publisher > Publish menu command. and set the publishing method and format. . For detailed information.

To do this.Interaction External Projects in the Navigator By default. Important: To access the server and its projects. 348 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To place Layouts or views from an external ArchiCAD projects onto a Layout of the active project. See also Project Chooser. you will be prompted to choose a server on which the Teamwork Project is found. accessed by clicking the icon at the top left corner of the Navigator or Organizer. do the following: • Open the Organizer of the active project. • Click the Browse Project or Browse Teamwork Project command in the Project Chooser. you will use the Project Chooser. • • Choose an ArchiCAD project whose content you want to use in the active project. the Navigator and the left side of the Organizer display the tree structure of the “active” ArchiCAD project which you are working on.) Click Open. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server. Note: If you choose Browse Teamwork Project. your user name must be present on the Teamwork project’s User list. You may wish to place views or Layouts from another ArchiCAD project into the Layout Book of your active project.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 349 .Interaction The external project is now displayed on the left side in the Organizer tree structure. it is shown as “Running”. and the active project’s Layout Book on the right: The external project name is now also listed in the Project Chooser. the Project Chooser will list this project as “linked. double-click any of its items in the Navigator. In this case. To open the external project in a separate ArchiCAD. once you have browsed the desired external project and see its tree structure. (If this project is also open.) • Drag the desired item into the Layout Book of the active project. shown on the right side of the Organizer. add any of its views or layouts to the active project by dragging and dropping it directly onto the Layout in the active window. Once your active project’s Layout Book contains views/layouts from an external project.” Note: You can access external projects the same way by using the Project Chooser with just the Navigator open (without the Organizer).

Interaction Origins About Origins in ArchiCAD Reposition User Origin User Origin in the 3D Window 350 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Edit Origin 3. ArchiCAD defines three coordinate system origins: Project Origin 1. the User Origin is located at the Project Origin. This is often helpful when you need to draw elements with respect to existing walls.Interaction About Origins in ArchiCAD In ArchiCAD. (The Coordinates Palette shows the coordinates as (0. ArchiCAD 15 Help 351 . the User Origin can be moved to any location. slabs or other components. The Project Origin of the coordinate system. The User Origin is the place at which element input begins. as in any coordinate system. The location of the origin is always interpreted as (0. The Edit Origin is also temporary. when using the default view of the default template. it appears only during drafting and editing operations and is used to display the distance and angle of a rubber band line from the starting point of a drawing operation. is close to the lower left corner of the Floor Plan window. see Reposition User Origin. By default. User Origin 2. The Project Origin is a constant location which remains fixed for the life of your Project. 0). Y and Z axes are displayed with bold black lines. marked with an X. all measurements are made in reference to an origin. the origins and their X. However. In 3D Views. allowing you to “reset the zero point” to any location. For details. 0). In Floor Plan and other 2D views. the origin is always marked by a bold X.

Hold down both the Alt and Shift keys (MacOS: Opt + Shift) and move the cursor to the construction node where you want the origin located. 352 ArchiCAD 15 Help . By default.Interaction Reposition User Origin The User Origin is the place at which element input begins. • At any location by using the User Origin button from the Standard toolbar (or the Coordinates palette. double-click the User Origin button in the Standard Toolbar. Click the User Origin button. Now your new element input will begin at this newly set User Origin. See also Editing Plane in 3D Window. the User Origin is located at the Project Origin. The origin is instantly relocated there. To return the User Origin to the Project Origin. There are two ways to move the User Origin: • At any node by using the keyboard. if it is displayed). then click at any point in the window.

Interaction User Origin in the 3D Window When placing a new element in the 3D window. Use the Tool Settings dialog box to enter the default elevation (or Base Height) for placement. by simply clicking at the desired elevation on an existing element node. a newly placed element will gravitate onto the Roof/Shell/ Slab/Mesh below it . relative to the User Origin or its Home Story. Note: If you are using Gravity. ArchiCAD 15 Help 353 . you define the Shell base elevation graphically. the default editing plane will be displaced at the given elevation for each tool. Exception: When placing a Shell in the 3D window relative to another element. its default elevation depends on what is defined in its Default Settings. See Gravity. In the 3D Window.and it will be placed at that elevation.

Interaction Elevation About Elevation of Elements Elevation Values in the Tracker Reference Levels 354 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Interaction About Elevation of Elements ArchiCAD offers several ways to determine the elevation of elements and to set the height at which new elements should be created. You can reset the User Origin to any elevation. see User Origin in the 3D Window. by simply clicking at the desired elevation on an existing element node. its elevation value can be set in the Tool Settings dialog box or the Info Box. See Set Home Story. When placing a new element in the 3D window. its elevation. or from the User Origin. When placing a new element in a 2D model window. in the image below): • from the element’s Home Story. defined in the Tool Settings dialog box. ArchiCAD 15 Help 355 . you define the Shell base elevation graphically. then place a new element whose elevation is measured from this level. can be measured either from the Home Story. For more information. This elevation can be measured in several ways: • from the level of the current story (Story 0. . Exception: When placing a Shell in the 3D window relative to another element.

356 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Interaction Note: The elevation of wall openings is strictly determined by the current values in Door/ Window Settings. See also Elevating Elements.

3. Go to the Elevation Value Origin sub-menu. Choose the desired reference level. Beam or Object using the Gravity function. If you switch the Show Tracker control to Always in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Column. If you are inputting a Wall. the Z value will reflect the elevation of the underlying Slab/Shell/Roof/Mesh. just move the cursor to get feedback.). the User Origin) • or one of the two optional Reference Levels defined in Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North. Open the drop-down menu of the Tracker icon from the Standard toolbar. To determine which reference level the Tracker’s elevation (Z) feedback should use: 1. See Reference Levels. refer to the Tracker’s Z field to check the elevation of the newly created element. See Gravity. then the Tracker’s Z field will display elevation values even if input is not yet underway. ArchiCAD 15 Help 357 . You must activate Show Z in Tracker from the Tracker’s drop-down menu in the Standard toolbar. (This command is available during editing/input. 2. The Tracker can display elevation values in one of three different forms depending on your choice: • from the Project Zero • from the current Story (or in 3D.Interaction Elevation Values in the Tracker During input.

358 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) Define Reference Levels at Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North See Levels and Project North Preferences. (See Elevation Values in the Tracker.Interaction Reference Levels You can define optional Reference Levels that will help you position elements when using the Tracker.

Interaction Selection Selecting Elements Selection Feedback Element Information Highlight Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) The Intelligent Cursor Deselecting Elements Find and Select Elements Zoom to Selection Edit Selection Set Store and Access Selection Sets Marquee Area ArchiCAD 15 Help 359 .

To learn about additional Arrow tool selection options. all Walls. see Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon. See Find and Select Elements. Note: Select All will only select elements on the currently displayed story. See also Marquee Area. see Element Information Highlight. To learn how to highlight an element before selecting it. Add/Remove Elements to/from Selection You can add elements to the selection by shift-clicking them. or drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the element you want to select. Select Elements Based on Multiple Criteria Use the Find & Select function to select elements defined by a wide variety of criteria. then use the Ctrl+A shortcut. Select All Elements (in Window or in Marquee) To select all elements on screen (either in the entire window or inside a previously defined Marquee area) with the Arrow or Marquee Tool active. Other topics in this section: Quick Selection of Surface Areas Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon Selection of Overlapping Elements 360 ArchiCAD 15 Help . activate the corresponding tool.Interaction Selecting Elements With the Arrow tool active: Point at the desired element and click. For more information on cursor shapes. or drag the mouse to draw a shaded rectangle around the element you want to select. use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All command. see The Intelligent Cursor. With any other tool active: Press Shift. Select All Elements of a Single Type To select all elements of a single type (for example. or all Windows). then point at the desired element and click. Shift-clicking an already selected element will deselect it.

you need only move the cursor over any part of the roof area. press Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active (or Shift+Spacebar with any other Tool). to use Quick Selection. Move the cursor over any surface of the element you want to select. press Shift. press the Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active. or you must press the Shift key. Now. either the Arrow tool must be active. press Shift to change to the Quick Select cursor). fills and objects. it will change shape. Quick Selection works on all construction and text elements. As shown in this image. and click to select the roof. To use Quick Selection on a temporary basis (while the Quick Selection icon is deactivated in the Arrow Tool’s Info Box). (if the Arrow tool is not active. Click and Drag with Quick Selection With the Arrow Tool and Quick Selection active. without having to use the Drag command. or Shift-spacebar if any other tool is active. turn on the Quick Selection icon in the Arrow tool’s Info Box.Interaction Quick Selection of Surface Areas Quick Selection is the easiest way to select single elements which have a surface area (such as slabs and roofs). Quick Selection is active by default. then click and drag. To temporarily suspend the Quick Selection method while the icon is activated. To activate Quick Selection as the default working mode. (With any other tool active. You will note that every time the cursor hovers over a selectable element. you can drag any element by clicking on it and holding down the button while you drag it. but it can be deactivated in the Arrow tool’s Info Box by releasing the button. ArchiCAD 15 Help 361 . Click to select.) Note: All selected elements will be dragged simultaneously.

then double-click while drawing the polygon to automatically close it. displaying selection dots. press the spacebar to temporarily suspend Quick Selection. Note: To select an area instead of explicitly selecting elements. Choose a selection method from the Arrow Tool Info Box . depending on the selection method used). These will be explicitly selected items. Note: If you use the Polygon geometry method (see Geometry Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon).) 3. Activate the Arrow tool 2. 362 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Marquee Area. and deselect all other currently selected elements.Interaction Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/ Polygon A useful method for selecting multiple elements is by drawing a selection polygon or rectangle around the items. This will select all the elements inside the area (either partially or entirely.this defines your drawing method. then draw the selection polygon keeping the spacebar pressed. (See Geometry Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon. below. The double-clicked point becomes the last apex of the polygon. (See Selection Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon. below. 1. Click on the screen and draw the selection rectangle/polygon. use the Marquee tool. If you keep the Shift key pressed. Note: If you want to use a selection rectangle or polygon within a quick-selectable area. if at least two segments have already been defined manually. enclosed elements will be added to the selection while already selected ones will be subtracted from it. Choose a Geometry method from the Arrow Tool Info Box .) 4.this defines the logic by which elements enclosed by the selection rectangle/polygon will be selected.

then the second selection method is in effect: that is. . you can choose among three selection area shapes. the selection logic will depend on the direction in which you draw the rectangle. • • With the second method.Interaction Selection Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon The Arrow tool’s Info Box offers three selection methods when using a rectangular or polygonal shape.If you draw the selection rectangle from right to left. direction-dependent selection method. any element with all nodes inside the rectangle will be selected. ArchiCAD 15 Help 363 . Geometry Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon In the Arrow tool’s Info Box. With the third. . • With the first (default) Selection Method. any element that has at least one of its nodes.If you draw the selection rectangle from left to right. edges or curves in the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected. only elements with all nodes inside the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected. any element with at least one node inside the rectangle will be selected. then the first selection method is in effect: that is.

Rectangular and Rotated Rectangular. 364 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Interaction The options are Polygonal.

and the Info Tag shows its type and main properties. See Element Information Highlight and Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) Note: The element information highlight pops up if the cursor is over any element (with Arrow Tool active). press Tab until the desired target element is highlighted. click with the cursor. the Info Highlight indicates which element will be selected. To cycle the highlight among multiple elements which overlap or join. press Shift to see the element information highlight. If any other tool is active. When you are satisfied that the appropriate element will be selected.Interaction Selection of Overlapping Elements When the nodes of several elements overlap at a single point. ArchiCAD 15 Help 365 .

Interaction Selection Feedback Selection Dots Selection Highlight 366 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

the number of selection dots depends on the number of hotspots defined in the object. In the case of GDL Object type elements. Note: Elements selected by Marquee do not display selection dots. Selection dots represent the points of the element by which you can modify the element. The location of the selection dots depends on the type and the geometry of the element. ArchiCAD 15 Help 367 .Interaction Selection Dots Explicitly selected elements display selection dots (or reference points).

Locked elements’ selection dots appear in faded form. Elements that belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF are shown with hollow squares. see Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots. Elements are locked (and display “locked” selection dots) in four cases: • The element is placed on a locked Layer. Grouped elements display larger circles. 368 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To change the color of selection dots. For more information. • The element has been explicitly locked with the Edit > Locking > Lock command. whose color is automatically assigned.Interaction Selection Dot Variations Single elements have small solid selection dots which are black by default. Editable selection dots are diamond-shaped and appear on objects whose parameters can be edited using an on-screen parameter palette. use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. whose color is automatically defined.

(You will be informed of this if you try to edit a locked element.) You can open the settings dialog boxes of these elements. locked elements can be selected. In all cases. ArchiCAD 15 Help 369 .Interaction • The elements belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF. but they cannot be edited. but you cannot edit their parameters.

To suspend Selection highlight.Interaction Selection Highlight Selected elements will be shown with a distinguishing highlight. See Selection and Element Information. or you can turn off selection highlights altogether. in addition to selection dots. use the Ctrl/Alt + spacebar shortcut. if you want to see the actual display colors of lines and fills. Even if you leave the Selection Highlight function on. 370 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Selection highlight color (for both element surfaces and their contours) are configurable in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. Note: Surface highlights in 3D are available only when using the OpenGL 3D engine. you may want to disable it temporarily for example.

without your having to press Shift. ArchiCAD 15 Help 371 .Interaction Element Information Highlight ArchiCAD helps you identify elements by highlighting them before you select them (also known as “element detection”). the highlight appears on its own. then press Shift. Just place the cursor on an element node or edge. Note: If the Arrow tool is active.

You do not need to press Shift to see the element detection highlight when using the Parameter Transfer function. Element information highlights can be configured. Note: These highlights (identifying related elements for Parameter Transfer and Dimensioning functions) will appear if the “Highlight contours of related element(s)” checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. 372 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or even turned off entirely. you will notice that the informational highlight acts on the entire outline of the element. Element Information highlights also work when clicking to dimension an element.Interaction When working in 3D. See Selection and Element Information. For these highlights. and with the Parameter transfer functions (Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters commands): the information highlight appears along with the eyedropper/syringe cursors right before you complete the parameter transfer. Grouped elements are highlighted individually. See Parameter Transfer. in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. you need not press Shift. even hidden lines of its contour are shown. that is.

an element information pop-up appears. the element information pop-up appears on its own (along with the highlight).Interaction Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) If you move the cursor over an element and press Shift. edge. and so on) • The element’s elevation (for 3D shapes only) • The element’s Layer • In 3D and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows. or surface if Quick Selection is active). the reservation status of the element (e. name for Objects.g. Free for Reservation. • In Teamwork. Editable.. • If the element is selected. thickness for Slabs. including the time interval before it appears on screen. Some additional information is displayed in the bottom section of the pop-up: • If more than one element has a selectable part at the given location (node. the mention (Selected) appears in brackets. ArchiCAD 15 Help 373 . The Element Information Pop-up displays the following information: • • The element’s type The element’s basic properties (structural fill for Walls. Reserved by). the Story the element belongs to. type for Lines. the caption Multiple Elements (TAB) is shown in the Info Tag to inform you that you can cycle through selected and selectable elements by hitting the TAB key as many times as needed. See also Selection of Overlapping Elements. Element information highlights. without your having to press Shift. can be configured in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. Note: If the Arrow tool is active.

Interaction Deselecting Elements To deselect one or more selected elements. and click or draw a selection rectangle around the elements you want to deselect. 374 ArchiCAD 15 Help . hold down the Shift key. do one of the following: • Press Esc. • With the Arrow tool active. • Click a selected element while holding down the Shift key. • Click with any tool (including the Arrow) on an empty part of the project to deselect all the selected elements at once.

Interaction Find and Select Elements Use the Find & Select Palette to select and deselect elements based on defined criteria. since the Find & Select function finds only elements. Elements will be selected on the visible layers of the currently active window. In the Criteria list. The Selected and Editable values at bottom left give you feedback on the currently selected elements in the project. Note: The controls of this dialog box are similar to those in the Reserve Elements dialog box used in Teamwork. the first line is always Element Type. See Reserve Elements by Criteria. To find and select elements by criteria. follow these steps: 1. or click the Find & Select shortcut from the Standard Toolbar: The Find & Select palette can remain open as long as you wish on top of all windows. ArchiCAD 15 Help 375 . Open this palette from Edit > Find & Select.

Element is Column) are joined as an “or” statement. the element type you want to find). Click Add to define additional elements (such as Columns) to search for simultaneously. Select this first line. 3. Click the Plus button to find and select all elements that fit your defined criteria. 376 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 4. so that when you click the Plus sign. ArchiCAD will Find and Select every element that is either a Wall or a Column.Interaction 2. Note: The two Criteria (Element is Wall. then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose a value for this criterion from the pop-up (that is.

Click the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. 2. then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose the desired criterion from the pop-up. Select the new line. ArchiCAD 15 Help 377 . add more criteria.Interaction Add Additional Criteria To narrow the scope of your search.

Note: Different criteria types (e. find all text blocks that are entirely in bold. See also Find and Select Missing Library Parts.. the text style. See also Find and Select Elements with Missing Attributes.usually.” then the available criteria are those which can pertain to Label (such as “Text Pen” and “Arrow Pen. For example. 3.”) Note: Defining a “Layer” or “Layer Combination” as a criterion means that the program will find and select the elements which are visible according to the given Layer Combination. See also Search for Elements by Label Text. See also Find and Select Text Blocks/Labels. if you have chosen to find the element type “Label. Note: If the element type is Text or Label. click the Plus button to select all the elements that fit these criteria. When you are done setting up the criteria. Layer) are joined to each other by “and” statements. 378 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (e.g.Interaction The list of criteria depends on the element(s) defined in the row(s) above. or find all text blocks that are at least partially in bold).g. Element Type. you can further specify whether all or part of the text or label text should match the criteria .

If you choose one of these. The Criteria Set name is now “Custom. Just choose the desired Criteria Set from the Criteria Set Name pop-up list. or in other projects.Interaction Deselect Elements Click the Minus button to deselect all the elements that fit the current criteria in the Find & Select Palette. Define and Store Your Own Criteria Sets In many cases.” ArchiCAD 15 Help 379 . Predefined Criteria Sets cannot be modified. (See Define Reservation Criteria in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help. then click the Plus button. Set up the criteria as desired. However. both to Find & Select elements and to reserve elements by criteria. you don’t have to define any criteria yourself. it is possible to store these criteria sets for later use.) To store a Criteria Set: 1. Use Predefined Criteria Sets The Find & Select Palette (Edit > Find & Select) has several built-in Criteria Sets. you will define simple Find & Select criteria for one-time use. if you will need to select the same set of elements repeatedly. Note: Your stored Criteria Sets can be made available in Teamwork projects.

3. Your customized Criteria Sets are now stored in the Criteria Set pop-up.” 380 ArchiCAD 15 Help . give a name to the Criteria Set and click Store. under “My Criteria Sets. In the appearing dialog box. Next to the Criteria Set Name field. Click Store as. click the pop-up button to access the relevant commands.Interaction 2.

becomes active.xml files). Click the button to load the settings of the last selected element into the Find & Select dialog box. In the project. Export or Import them (as.g. 4. The Element Type and Layer values of the clicked element are now loaded in the Find & Select dialog box.g. 3. Alt+click an element whose settings you want to load. the second button . This is a quick way to define a Find & Select criteria set. In the Find & Select dialog box. 2. Element Type.Copy Settings . 1.Interaction Use the commands from the pop-up to manage your Criteria Sets: Rename. Layer). Copy Settings If any elements are selected. ArchiCAD 15 Help 381 . Pick Up Settings from Selected Elements Use this feature if you have added a number of criteria (e. Click the Pick up Settings button to activate it. define the criteria you want to search by (e. Layer. Delete. Material) in the Find and Select dialog box and want to define their values based on an existing element. Element Type.

if you right-click in an empty space on the screen. 382 ArchiCAD 15 Help . This command is also available from the context menu.Interaction Zoom to Selection Use this command (View > Zoom > Zoom to Selection) to move in on only selected elements.

Position. all the selected elements will take on the new values. and classifications) for a collection of dissimilar element types simultaneously. • Modify Auto-Labels’ Layer & Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Auto-Labels (i. Note: If not checked. without affecting any other settings of these elements. Note: If not checked. see Listing and Labeling Panels. Every element in ArchiCAD shares two basic attributes with all others: a Layer assignment and one or several Pencolors. elements can be assigned classifications (Element Classification. Structural Function. the labels will retain their individual attributes. • Modify Associated Window & Door Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Window and Doors contained in any selected Walls. In addition. For information on associative labels. and/or element-level Renovation settings) which is useful for mapping settings if you export your ArchiCAD model to other applications. pencolors. Note: The pen setting affects all cut pens of the selected elements (cut fill pens. the openings will retain their individual Pencolors/Penweights.Interaction Edit Selection Set The Edit Selection Set dialog box from Edit > Element Settings > Edit Selection Set makes it possible to edit specific attributes (layers.e.) If you explicitly change any of these attributes in the Edit Selection Set dialog box. (See Classification. “associative” labels assigned in the element’s Tool Settings Dialog Box Listing & Labeling Panel) assigned to any selected elements. cut line pen). ArchiCAD 15 Help 383 .

When editing the object.Interaction The pencolors of GDL Object-type elements can only be changed if the object is not set to be displayed with its own Symbol Pens (defined in the 2D symbol of the GDL Object). • Selected/Editable: This area displays the number of elements of each type currently selected on the Floor Plan and in 3D. not locked). Arrowheads and Text. such as Walls. • 384 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • All components of composite elements. The bottom of the dialog box shows the type of selected elements and whether they are currently editable (that is. every element retains its current settings. Dimension chains or Markers made up of lines. • If you change the Classification settings. the standard Pen Color radio button will be preset to the edited Pen Color. If you do not change them. the new settings will be applied to all selected elements. are modified together.

) The same pop-up contains commands to let you Rename or Delete any of these saved Selection Sets.Interaction Store and Access Selection Sets Use the Window > Palettes > Selections palette to recall previously saved. broken down by element type. using the pop-up menu at top right of the dialog box. in a Section/Elevation/IE window. ArchiCAD 15 Help 385 . • Sort by Original Window: Choose this option to sort the items by the windows they originate in The bottom part of the palette displays the contents of the selection set. If you have selected items in the project. or a Detail/Worksheet drawing. frequently accessed sets of selections that are stored with the Project. • Sort by Name: Choose this option to sort the items by their name. Use the commands in the pop-out menu at top right to manage sets of selected items. The controls of the Selections Palette allow you to save any selection made on the Floor Plan. use Add Selection to save this selection (you will be prompted to name it. You can delete a selection or sort saved selections by name or by window of origin.

g.Interaction The three operation signs (x. in the image below. 386 ArchiCAD 15 Help .. Any other element which is not part of this selection set is deselected. The operation is always performed on the currently active window.function means that the elements of the highlighted selection set will be deselected. “NW Living”): • The X function means that only the highlighted selection set will be selected on screen. -. • The + function will select all the elements of the highlighted selection set. on-screen selection status of the stored selection set you have highlighted in the Palette (e. +) affect the current. • The .

Interaction Marquee Area About Marquee Areas Select All Elements in a Marquee Marquee Area Definition: Single Story or All Stories Place Marquee (Geometry Methods) View Marquee Area in 3D Removing a Marquee Saving the Marquee Area as PDF or DWG Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool Stretching with the Marquee Tool Use Marquee in Find & Select Other Editing Operations within the Marquee ArchiCAD 15 Help 387 .

• You need to move or resize a number of elements of different types at the same time: for example. editing and visualization purposes. • You want to visualize a particular part of the design in 3D. If you click a node or an edge inside the Marquee area. the 3D Window. 3D Document. you must first define a rectangular or polygonal Marquee area. • • If you inadvertently start to draw the Marquee area at an unintended point. the Marquee area will be moved with all the nodes or edges included in it. To use the Marquee tool for selection and editing. A Marquee area does not display selection dots on the included elements. Detail and Worksheet windows. ArchiCAD 15 Help 388 . and the 2D Symbol window of GDL Objects. the marqueed area is shown by a dashed line of “marching ants. press Esc (or the Cancel button in the Control Box). The capabilities of the Marquee tool complement those of the Arrow tool. the only operation available for a marquee selection is Copy. with the Marquee tool active. In image-type windows (PhotoRendering or picture windows) or the GDL Object’s 3D view. The Marquee tool is available in the Floor Plan.” The color of the Marquee is the same as that of Selection dots: set this color at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information > Selection Dots and Marquee color. Layout windows. All construction aids are available. Marquee selection is often used when: • You wish to define a smaller area in which to select all of the elements of a given type. . you can stretch all polygonal and linear elements of a building simultaneously. Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation windows. If you then move the cursor. and are particularly useful in selecting and moving groups of ArchiCAD elements. the cursor will assume the Checkmark or Mercedes shape.Interaction About Marquee Areas The Marquee tool is used to define areas for selection. • You want to save only part of the view in PDF or DWG format.

Interaction • All polygonal or linear elements with a node included in the Marquee area can be stretched simultaneously. moving the cursor will only move the marquee. the cursor will assume the Trident shape. see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. leaving all enclosed elements unchanged. In this case. For a detailed description. • If you click inside the Marquee area without touching a node or an edge. ArchiCAD 15 Help 389 .

390 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you can select elements on the current Story. • With the thin dashed line contour representing the Single Story method. • With the thick dashed line contour representing the All Stories method. you can select elements on all the Stories of the Project. Note: These controls are dimmed when not viewing the Floor Plan.Interaction Marquee Area Definition: Single Story or All Stories The Marquee tool has two definition methods available in the Info Box.

You first draw one side of the rectangle with two clicks. by clicking OK in the context menu to close the polygon. with a third click. At least two segments must be defined manually. the Marquee rectangle will appear. you define the length of the perpendicular sides. Only straight segments are possible. select the Marquee tool from the Toolbox. Completing a segment automatically begins the next one. The Rotated Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle placed at any angle. • • The Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle at right angles to the window. ArchiCAD 15 Help 391 . four options are available. (If you are working in the 3D Window. allowing you to see the area. a rubber band line rectangle will follow the cursor. After the second click at the diagonally opposed corner. • The Polygonal method defines a Marquee area consisting of any number of segments. After the first click. Choose one of the Geometry Methods from the Info Box.Interaction Place Marquee (Geometry Methods) To place a Marquee. or by drawing the last endpoint on top of the first one and clicking when the Hammer cursor appears. otherwise there are three options). Close the Marquee by doubleclicking the last endpoint. and then. since the area must have a minimum of three sides.

Interaction • The first three methods available in the 3D Window are extensions of the Polygonal. (In perspective view.) Then you define the height of the selected space. the marquee base must be underneath the horizon. First the base of the marquee area is defined with the same steps as on the Floor Plan. • The fourth option (3D window only) allows you to draw a 2D marquee in order to copy elements from the 3D Window in the form of pictures. 392 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Rectangle and Rotated Rectangle methods. The coordinate axes are continuously present on screen to help you. see Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window. For more information.

use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All in Marquee command. ArchiCAD 15 Help 393 .Interaction Select All Elements in a Marquee To select all elements inside a previously defined Marquee area with the Marquee Tool active.

or select the same command from the context menu. To further define how Marqueed elements are shown in 3D. this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. see Show Marquee Area in 3D. For more information. Define the Marquee area. then use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command. use the “Marquee Effects” controls of the View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D dialog box.Interaction View Marquee Area in 3D You can use the Marquee to view a selected area of your project in the 3D window. even if there is no selection node or hotspot on this part of the element. Note: If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection. 394 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Any part of an element that falls inside the Marquee area will be included in the 3D view.

in order to save the recent Marquee area for further use. If you choose another tool. and choose the Remove Marquee command in the appearing context menu.Interaction Removing a Marquee To remove a drawn Marquee area. ArchiCAD 15 Help 395 . pressing Esc will deselect these elements in reverse order. • Double-click in the window outside the marquee area with the Marquee tool selected. • Begin drawing a new Marquee. If you have explicitly selected further elements within the Marquee. do one of the following: • • Press Esc. Click with the right mouse button or Ctrl-click (MacOS). and finally remove the Marquee. the Marquee area will not be removed.

rather than the entire window contents. you may use the Marquee to delimit the part you wish to save..Interaction Saving the Marquee Area as PDF or DWG When saving a project view in PDF or DWG format. After placing the Marquee.. Save Document in PDF Format Saving DWG/DXF Files 396 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Only the Marquee area will be saved to the file. use the Save As.. DWG command as usual. PDF or Save As..

use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. If you are copying from the 3D window using the Internal Engine. For more information. ArchiCAD 15 Help 397 . To make editing easier. For more information. Note: If you are copy-pasting construction elements. Use the Marquee tool to select the area you wish to copy (if you are selecting from the 3D window. or a Model Picture Window. a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window. see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. make sure that the 2D Marquee option is active). they will be placed as 2D elements (points. Move to the Floor Plan and choose Edit > Paste. 3. overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. see Copy Dialog Box.) You may find that the “exploded” 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments. If you are copying from the 3D window using the OpenGL engine. Generate the view you need.Interaction Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window You can use the Marquee tool to copy and paste an area of the 3D Window. all images will be pasted in pixel format. 1. a dialog box appears during the Copy operation giving you options for how the image will be displayed on the screen. 4. 2. Choose Edit > Copy. lines and fills.

Elevations are pasted to the Floor Plan as full-sized 2D elements. . Click outside the selection rectangle to complete the operation. but the pasted elements will behave as 2D drawing elements only. 398 ArchiCAD 15 Help . not model elements. 5. .Parts of Model Pictures are pasted as screenshots.Interaction Note: You can paste into other 2D model windows. 6. Position the image on your Floor Plan using the Trident cursor.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 399 . Click and drag (only the Marquee tool is available) to select the desired image area. open any image format file.Interaction Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool You can insert a cropped part of any image file into your ArchiCAD plan. then copy it to the clipboard. For more information. • • With your ArchiCAD project file open. • Close the image file. see Figures. You can modify it like any other figure. then paste the clipboard contents into the open project.

See Find and Select Elements. 400 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then the Find & Select includes the Marquee criterion automatically. You can then opt to search either inside or outside the Marquee.Interaction Use Marquee in Find & Select If you have placed a Marquee.

Detail and Worksheet windows. Rotate. Elevate or Duplicate elements. some editing commands are available only for 2D drawing elements. Note: In Section/Elevation/IE. See also Stretching with the Marquee Tool.Interaction Other Editing Operations within the Marquee If you wish to Cut. 3D Document. Mirror. The edit operations will act on the whole element. Drag. ArchiCAD 15 Help 401 . Copy. one of the Drawing’s corners) inside the Marquee. Clear. include at least one node of the Drawing (i. To use Edit commands on a placed Drawing.e. they must have at least one node inside the Marquee area in order to be selected.

Interaction On-Screen Input Aids The Intelligent Cursor Tracker Ruler Measure Tool Grid System Grid Snap Function Guide Lines Editing Plane in 3D Window Gravity Mouse Constraints Coordinate Constraints Relative Construction Methods Snapping to Existing Elements Special Snap Points Cursor Snap Range 402 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

The possibilities are as follows: • White pencil in an empty space or over any element where there is no hotspot or edge • Striped pencil with black top at a wall’s reference line or a beam’s reference axis. • Heavy Mercedes on the reference line of a wall or the reference axis of a beam. • Striped pencil at any other edge. • Light Checkmark at any other node/hotspot of any element. The ArchiCAD cursor takes on the following shapes when drafting or editing elements. • Heavy Checkmark at a wall node on its reference line or a beam node at its reference axis. the cursor’s shape changes to an empty pencil. • Light Mercedes at any other edge of any element. ArchiCAD 15 Help 403 .Interaction The Intelligent Cursor The following section describes the various shapes of the intelligent cursor in different locations and situations in the project. When you click to start drawing an element whose definition requires more than a single spot. • Intersection at an intersection of edges. It then changes its shape again depending on whether it encounters other elements. with any tool except the Arrow tool active: • Crosshair in an empty area in the window.

• Filled pencil with white top at any other node or hotspot.Interaction • Filled pencil at a node on a wall’s reference line or on a beam’s reference axis. • Pencil point with intersection at an intersection of edges. • Arrow with Heavy Checkmark snaps to nodes on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams. • Pencil point with perpendicular sign at a perpendicular edge. • Pencil point with tangent sign at a tangential edge. When using the Arrow tool. • Arrow with Light Checkmark snaps to Hotspots and nodes other than the ones on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams. the following shapes are available: • Arrow at empty area in the window. • Arrow with Light Mercedes snaps to edges other than reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams. 404 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • Quick Selection (Magnet) appears whenever you move the cursor onto a quick-selectable item. • Arrow with Heavy Mercedes snaps to reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

edges and empty space (including surfaces). ArchiCAD 15 Help 405 .Interaction • Arrow with Intersection snaps to an intersection of edges. It is also used to set the position of curved walls and Curtain Walls placed with the tangential method. It has three different shapes for identifying nodes. • Scissors trims elements (hold down the Ctrl/Cmd key while clicking on an element). Some cursor shapes only appear in special situations: • Cloud indicates empty space over the horizon in perspective views. The Black Scissors appear on top of element edges. • Arrow with Perpendicular sign snaps perpendicularly to an edge or arc while dragging an element • Arrow with Tangent sign snaps tangentially to an arc while dragging an element. • Eyedropper appears when picking up parameters from an element as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut. • Eyeball defines the direction of Roof’s pitch. the side that remains selected when splitting elements. • Sun appears during Curtain Wall input to define the “outside” part of the Curtain Wall. when more than one placement possibility exists. while the White Scissors indicate empty space. • Double Eyeball locates position of edge-placed Door/Window. the depth of Limited Sections and the orientation of Doors/Windows. • Magic Wand used for tracing the contours of existing elements for creating new elements with the active tool.

406 ArchiCAD 15 Help . on top of a normal edge. general nodes or selectable area. • Fill Handle prompts you to draw a vector orientation after a fill is placed. when snapping to Hotspots. Striped. part striped when snapping to a reference line. • Hammer places Dimension chains. Zone Stamps and Fill areas. • Double-Plus when dragging or rotating multiple copies of an element. Part full. Half full. rotating or mirroring a copy of an element. the Elevation Dimension array. when the cursor is in an empty workspace area (visual feedback only).Interaction The Eyedropper is: Full. • Plus when dragging. • Syringe appears when transferring parameters of one element to another as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut. it also appears when closing polygons. Empty. when snapping to a Reference Line or axis node. • Trident moves Marquee area or the Clipboard contents after pasting. Angular Dimensions.

• Mercedes plus parallel dimension icon: During a linear dimensioning operation using Any Direction. this cursor allows you to choose the plane in which to dimension the clicked elements. The dimension will be created parallel to this clicked line/edge. allows you to choose a line or edge. ArchiCAD 15 Help 407 .Interaction During a dimensioning operation: • Magnet plus dimension-line icon: In a 3D Document. after clicking the points to be dimensioned.

Interaction Tracker About the Tracker Parameters Shown in Tracker Defining Tracker Coordinates Coordinate Input in Tracker Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options 408 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Interaction About the Tracker Coordinate values are displayed in the Tracker. Tracker options (including colors. deactivate the Tracker toggle icon on the Standard toolbar. See Coordinates Palette for another method of coordinate input. the Tracker only appears “On -demand”: that is. providing feedback on the cursor position. The Tracker will pop up and display the cursor position. To use the Tracker. To deactivate the Tracker. • Alternatively. or hit the n shortcut. and hotspot values for GDL Object editing. contents and behavior) can be set in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. during coordinate input and editing operations. choose the Always option to display the Tracker continuously. The Tracker gives you a dynamic and constant feedback on such values as edited lengths. angles. By default. This means that the Tracker will follow your cursor even if you are not inputting anything. • ArchiCAD 15 Help 409 . which follows your mouse movements and is available in any editable window type. you must activate the Tracker toggle button on the Standard toolbar or activate the Show Tracker checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. • Another way to show the Tracker if you have not yet begun element input: use the n shortcut.

410 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Interaction Some Tracker options are commands accessible from the pop-up arrow next to the Standard toolbar’s Tracker toggle.

the Tracker will display only the XY or the DA (distance/angle) coordinate pair (switch from one to the other by clicking “Prefer XY Coordinates/Prefer Polar Coordinates” during editing/input). if you select a straight segment and choose the Curve edge command from the pet palette. this command is enabled by default. then the Tracker shows the “Arc Radius” parameter. “Expand Tracker automatically during numeric input. enter the Tracker by pressing Tab. (If you prefer Absolute values. For example. Otherwise. the coordinate values are Relative values. Note: The same option. ArchiCAD 15 Help 411 . then all the parameters will be shown as soon as you enter the Tracker (by entering a value or by pressing Tab). The Tracker always shows one of its parameters in bold. except during editing/input. Hint: To switch between DA and XY coordinates on the fly. By default. As a rule.Interaction Parameters Shown in Tracker The parameters appearing in the Tracker vary depending on the type of editing action that is underway. Y and Z coordinates. the parameters in the Tracker will be listed in order of relevance. with D/A coordinates followed by X. Depending on your choices in the Tracker pop-up menu in the Standard Toolbar.” is also available as a checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. deselect the “Relative Coordinates in Tracker” toggle command. use the / (slash character) shortcut. then click the arrow at the bottom of the Tracker to expand it. if you want to expand the Tracker.) If you have activated the Expand Tracker Automatically option from the drop-down Tracker menu. this is the default parameter. and will show or hide the names of the coordinates (“Show/Hide Parameter Tags”).

distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the last edited point in the window. By default. The horizontal and vertical values correspond to the X and Y coordinates (also called Cartesian coordinates). Coordinates can take on absolute and relative values.Interaction Defining Tracker Coordinates You can enter numeric coordinates directly from the keyboard or use a combination of mouse and keyboard. vertical (Y). • Relative values are measured from the Edit Origin. A temporary dashed line is drawn between the origin and the cursor to indicate that you are using absolute coordinates. they display horizontal (X). that is. • Absolute values are measured from the User Origin (see Origins). see Elevation Values in the Tracker. For information on Elevation values. while the radial and angular values are called polar coordinates. they are shown as relative values in the Tracker. vertical (Y). This means that they always display the horizontal (X). Use the Tracker menu from the Standard Toolbar to toggle the Relative Coordinates in Tracker preference on or off. 412 ArchiCAD 15 Help . distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the User Origin.

Type in the desired number. Note: This input method works if the “Coordinate Shortcuts prefer Tracker” box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. The selected value is highlighted. Another way to enter the Tracker is to press Tab. To enter numeric coordinates. typing the shortcut for a hidden parameter will display it. This is the default setting.) The cursor will automatically jump to the Tracker and enter the value. Note: This input method works if the “Enable direct input into Tracker fields” box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. • To fix the value of a coordinate. You can also perform additions or subtractions from the current value by typing a + or – sign after the value. then enter a value. if Guide Lines are active. Z or D/R or A) immediately followed by the value you intend to assign to it. • Return to graphic input by typing the name of the edited coordinate again or by mouseclicking anywhere in the window. this will also display Guide Lines of the currently available type at this location to help you continue the input. • To cancel the last operation. The + prefix is optional for positive values. Click Tab as many times as needed to activate the required Tracker field. you have several options: • To enter another coordinate value. You can also activate fields by clicking them or typing the shortcut of the corresponding field.Interaction Coordinate Input in Tracker As long as the Tracker is shown during input. The cursor jumps to the default field of the Tracker (the one shown in bold). press Enter or click the checkmark icon in the Tracker. typing x3+ will add 3 to the x value shown in the Tracker box. You can type coordinate values in any order. This is the default setting. • To complete the element you are drawing. type the shortcut of the desired coordinate (X. just type a number for the default parameter (the one shown in bold. The other way to enter coordinates is through the Coordinates Box (enable it using Window > Palettes > Coordinates). Y. For example. press Esc. for example X3 or Y-4.S. The edited element will then jump into this position and. Notes for users of U. click the crosshair icon in the Tracker. dimensions: ArchiCAD 15 Help 413 . type another shortcut for the desired coordinate. At this point. If the Tracker is displayed in its compact form.

Coordinates can be copied and pasted using the clipboard. etc. 3’6’’.Interaction • Two dashes are required for subtraction of whole feet because the first dash is interpreted as an indication that inches are to follow.). As soon as you have finished drawing the first element. 414 ArchiCAD 15 Help . It is possible to enter a whole series of coordinates one after the other in the Tracker when drawing chains of elements (Walls. so you must use the standard shortcuts or the context menu. Copy and Paste menu items are inactive during numeric input. • When 3 is entered. the Edit Origin is immediately transferred to this endpoint. or 3-6 will enter three feet. ArchiCAD assumes you mean three feet. The Cut. Typing 3’6. y=0 value when working with relative coordinates. which becomes the starting point of the second element and is therefore given the x=0. Lines. Beams. You can combine coordinate input by fixing the value of a field and then editing the value of another one. six inches.

Show X-Y Coordinates relative to User origin in Tracker: If you check this box.Interaction Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options Special Tracker options are available to let you further customize the Tracker function. with the horizontal grid line as the zero value.) For information on all these options. Use relative angle measures: If you check this box. and angle values shown relative to this line. (You must first activate a Guide Line for this to work. angle measures in the Tracker will be shown either: • relative to the previous input segment. in case of polygon input. or • relative to the grid. even if you have activated the Relative Coordinates toggle button. the XY coordinates will always be shown as Absolute Cartesian values. using the Coordinate Input Logic checkboxes in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. angle values are shown from 0 to 360 degrees. ArchiCAD 15 Help 415 . angle values in the Tracker will be shown relative to the active Guide Line. and the RA or DA values are shown as relative values. Use angle relative to the active Guide Line: If you check this box. up to 180 degrees. see Tracker and Coordinate Input. This means that X-Y coordinates are shown as absolute values. If this box is unchecked.

416 ArchiCAD 15 Help . click on the Ruler. As you move the cursor on screen. The measurement units are the Model Units you set in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler will be created.Interaction Ruler The Ruler is an editing aid available at the top and left side of the screen in every ArchiCAD window. Use the Ruler as an aid in navigation: it lets you know where you are in the project. Ruler Commands The Ruler’s context menu (right-click anywhere on the Ruler) gives you a quick way to access related commands: • • • Click the Ruler toggle to hide the Ruler Click Cursor Projection toggle to include projection lines from the Ruler to the cursor position.) Click Options > Project Preferences > Working Units to access this dialog box. feedback on the ruler shows you the vertical and horizontal position of the cursor relative to the User Origin (or. (This will also turn on Cursor Projection in the 3D window. See Origins. See Guide Lines. if no User Origin has been created. Every time you create a new User Origin. where the Model Unit option determines the Ruler’s measurement units. the measurements shown on the Ruler change accordingly. To show/hide the Ruler. do one of the following: • use the View > Ruler toggle command • use the Ruler toggle in the Standard toolbar You can also hide a ruler by right-clicking it and clicking the Ruler toggle. at the current zoom. Place Orthogonal Guide Line Parallel to Ruler At any time. relative to the Project Origin). except the 3D Window and Schedules.

on-screen function for quick feedback. To use the Measure Tool. Click on a starting point (the top left corner of the rectangular wall. or use the M shortcut. activate its icon in the Standard Toolbar. allows you to measure distances and areas in the project. vertical and radial distance measured from the starting point. located in the Standard toolbar. The Tracker displays the horizontal. in the image below) and start to trace the wall. ArchiCAD 15 Help 417 . After two or more clicks.Interaction Measure Tool The Measure tool. It is a temporary. The image below shows the Measure tool feedback after three clicks. You can Measure any number of segments in sequence: each click represents a new starting-point from which the next distance will be measured. as well as the angle. the Tracker also shows a cumulative distance and the area (shown by a temporary gray area on screen). as you approach the last corner of the rectangular wall.

for example. you can activate the Measure tool on the fly. measure (or even edit) a value with the fields it displays and then hit Enter to transfer this value into the appropriate field of the Tracker.Interaction You can also use the Measure tool while creating elements. 418 ArchiCAD 15 Help . When you start drawing a Wall.

If Grid Snap is enabled (Alt+S). Snap to Construction Grid. 3D Document. The Construction Grid can also be used to define the foundation footings or the column grid of a building. Note that. and Snap to Snap Grid. the Construction Grid adds a visual orientation and sense of scale to the Floor Plan and the Section/Elevation/IE. See Grid Snap Function. You can set these up in View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. the same Grid settings will be used for all Stories. place and use custom local structural grids of different sizes and shapes using the Grid Tool.g. see Grids & Background Dialog Box. Detail/Worksheet. an easy way to toggle the Grid Snap function is to use the Shift+S shortcut. many of these controls are available in the Standard toolbar and the Coordinates palette.) Construction Grid The Construction Grid is used to reflect any characteristic spacing of your Project. Walls) that coincide with the Construction Grid. This shortcut toggles between: No snap. The Construction Grid is normally visible on the Floor Plan. Snapping to the Construction Grid Construction Grid Snap is useful for inputting elements (e. For more information. depending on what you set as your preferred option. Like the printed grids on traditional graph paper. but you can turn it off with the Grid Display toggle command in the View > Grid Options hierarchical menu or in the Standard Toolbar’s Grid pop-up menu. 3D Document. or Layout window.Interaction Grid System Two grid systems are provided to help you make drafting easier: the Construction Grid and the Snap Grid. (See The Grid Tool. Note: You can also create. ArchiCAD 15 Help 419 . Grids can be defined separately for the Floor Plan and any individual Section/Elevation/IE. and Detail/ Worksheet windows. in Floor Plan window. Grids are not available in the 3D Window. the cursor will snap to the nodes of either your Construction Grid or your Snap Grid. If you alternate between using the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid. As a shortcut.

choose “Set Rotated Grid” from the Standard Toolbar.Interaction Rotated Construction Grid Depending on your project’s layout. which is also visible on the screen and is defined in View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. click the Rotated Grid button in the Standard Toolbar grid menu or the Coordinates Palette. then draw a vector on screen or click on an existing straight segment: this vector will represent the rotated grid angle relative to the horizontal axis. Auxiliary Construction Grid The Construction Grid can be optionally enhanced with an Auxiliary Grid. To display the rotated version of your Construction Grid. The Auxiliary 420 ArchiCAD 15 Help . a rotated version of the construction grid may be more helpful than the default orthogonal one. You can also define a rotated grid by hand: first. Define the Rotation Angle in the View > Grid Options > Grids and Background dialog box.

by having the cursor snap to a predefined distances. allowing you to reflect the unique geometry of your Project. This shortcut toggles between: No snap. you will usually enter the smallest unit of measurement relevant to your Project. If you alternate between using the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid. You can set different horizontal and vertical Snap Grid increments. Snap Grid The Snap Grid is an invisible grid that you can use optionally to make input easier. using a keyboard shortcut. and Snap to Snap Grid. If Grid Snap is enabled (Alt+S).to easily move any element by a small defined factor. depending on what you set as your preferred option. See Grid Snap Function. See Nudging Elements. When defining your Snap Grid in the Grids and Background dialog box. Snap to Construction Grid.Interaction Grid is often used to indicate the thickness of concrete walls or foundation footings. Note: The Snap increments you define here can also be used for the Nudge shortcut . and can be used to create periodic or stepped grids. the cursor will snap to the nodes of either your Construction Grid or your Snap Grid. an easy way to toggle the Grid Snap function is to use the Shift+S shortcut. ArchiCAD 15 Help 421 .

The Snap function will use the last grid type used. This allows you to position the cursor accurately. To disable this feature (for example. A small dot jumping from grid-point to grid-point indicates the current cursor position.Interaction Grid Snap Function The Grid Snap function allows precise graphic alignment of elements at consistent lengths and distances. 422 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See also Grid System. When the Grid Snap function is active. you can only draw from one grid intersection to another. • Use the View > Grid Snap menu command. Deactivate Grid Snap To deactivate the Grid Snap function: • Use the Alt+S shortcut key • Use the View > Grid Snap menu command (deactivate the toggle). it restricts the movement of the cursor to the nodes of either the Construction Grid or the Snap Grid. • Select one of the Snap On buttons (either Construction Grid or Snap Grid) in the Grids and Background dialog box. even at low zoom levels. When grid snap is active. the grid “pulls” the cursor and makes it snap to the grid nodes. The parameters of all grids are defined at View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. to position a piece of furniture at a non-grid location). either Construction or Snap grid. you can suspend or activate the grid snap feature by pressing Alt+S key. or from the Coordinates Box. do one of the following: • Use the Alt+S Shortcut. • Select Snap Grid or Construction Grid from View > Grid Snap Options. • Select the Snap Grid or Construction Grid from the grid menu in the Standard Toolbar. Activate Grid Snap To activate the Grid Snap function.

and Snap to Snap Grid. Snap to Construction Grid. ArchiCAD 15 Help 423 .Interaction Grid Snap Toggle: Construction Grid vs. an easy way to toggle the Grid Snap function is to use the Shift+S shortcut. Snap Grid If you alternate between using the Snap Grid and the Construction Grid. This shortcut toggles between: No snap.

Guide Lines are based on the cursor’s relationship to the input plane and to existing elements. Note: This works if the Instant Guide Lines box and/or Lasting Guide Lines box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods. press Shift during input.Interaction Guide Lines Guide Lines are drafting aids which help you find special points and projections. to ensure precise input in both 2D and 3D windows. (They are checked by default. Once you find the Guide Line you need. Turn Guide Lines on or off Do one of the following: • Use the toggle button in the Standard toolbar • • Use the Q key as a shortcut (toggle Guide Lines on and off) Use the View > Guide Lines toggle command Constrain Cursor to Guide Lines To constrain the cursor to the nearest Guide Line.) Topics in this Section: Working with Guide Lines Guide Line Options 424 ArchiCAD 15 Help . press Shift during input to constrain your cursor to that Guide Line.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 425 .Interaction Working with Guide Lines Topics in this section: Instant Guide Lines During Input Display a Guide Line Along a Particular Edge Display a Guide Line at a Point Change Input Vector into a Guide Line Place an Orthogonal Guide Line using Ruler Make a Guide Line Active Drag/Offset Guide Lines Remove Guide Lines Show Guide Lines at Main (X. Circle Center) Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display Instant Guide Lines During Input Begin your input and see the Guide Lines appear. Angle Bisector. (These are called “Instant” Guide Lines. Parallel. Perpendicular. Y) Directions Show Relative Guide Lines (Tangent. begin drawing a wall and move the cursor around to view the available Guide Lines.) For example.

3. The Guide Line handle (the orange dot) appears.Interaction You will see Guide Lines appear at fixed angle intervals. 2.) To do this: 1. 426 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Display a Guide Line Along a Particular Edge During input. (This will be a “Lasting” Guide Line. constrain the cursor to the Guide Line you need by pressing Shift. Move your cursor to an element edge. you can display a Guide Line on the edge of an existing element to help you when placing a new element. Click on the handle: an active Guide Line appears on that edge. To assist your input. as well as Guide Lines along the X and Y coordinates. Note: This works if the Nearest Instant Guide Line box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods.

) 427 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 3. Now that the Guide Line is in place and active. Display a Guide Line at a Point During input. 1. 4. Click on the handle to activate the Guide Line. Move your cursor to the point at which you want to display a Guide Line. you can display a preferred Guide Line at the status point of an existing element. or until you remove it manually. Move your cursor to the edge of the existing wall and wait for the handle (the orange dot) to appear. For example. you want to draw a wall that aligns exactly with an existing wall. To do this: 1. 2.Interaction See also Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display. (You are temporarily interrupting your element input. you can draw a Wall along it. This Guide Line will stay in place until you complete your next input.

choose it by letting go of the mouse button. When the needed Guide Line appears. using the Guide Line to constrain your cursor as needed. (The cursor turns into a fist. Move your cursor to the corner of the slab. (It is now a “Lasting” Guide Line.Interaction 2.) You want the Guide Line that is aligned with the slab edge: when it is shown. (The cursor changes to a fist. For example. then press the mouse button down to see the potential Guide Lines. your wall input is temporarily interrupted. Then continue input where you left off.) See also Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display.) 4. Press and hold the mouse button to see the available Guide Lines (these are “Multi-choice” Guide Lines that only appear until you choose one of them). let go of the mouse button. 3. and want it to extend it just far enough so that its endpoint is aligned with the vertical extension of the slab’s upper corner. Now the Guide Line is active where you need it. suppose you are drawing this wall. 428 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Draw a vector to one of the endpoints. 2. Place Guide Line between Two Points Suppose you want to place a Guide Line between the endpoints of these two Walls: 1.Interaction Finish your wall input up to the Guide Line. ArchiCAD 15 Help 429 . Press the mouse button down to get the multi-choice Guide Lines (the cursor changes to a fist).

Interaction 3. Move the cursor to the other endpoint. Release the mouse button: a Guide Line is placed between the two points. choose the Place Guide Line (Circle) command from the context menu. the length of the Guide Line is limited to the length of the vector you drew and will not run across the whole screen. Place an Orthogonal Guide Line using Ruler At any time. 430 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A lasting Guide Line (or circle) will appear. 4. See Ruler. Change Input Vector into a Guide Line Independent of your default Guide Line definitions. The cursor changes to a checkmark. Similarly. click on the Ruler at the top or left edge of the screen. After clicking on screen to begin input. In this case. The current vector will be transformed into a Guide Line. you can place a Guide Line (or Guide Circle) at any time during input using the Place Guide Line/Guide Circle command from the context menu. you can use the Convert to Guide Line Segment command from the context menu. and then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler is created.

Circle Center). (Or use the Tracker to define its new location numerically. Consequently. The active Guide Line is relevant for • constraining the input vector in a particular direction relative to this active Guide Line (e. Drag/Offset Guide Lines To move an existing Guide Line to a more useful location. that Guide Line becomes active. Parallel. then move the Guide Line. parallel. Click on its handle (the orange dot). too. Click its handle to offset it to any useful position in the 3D Window. tangential) • defining additional “relative” Guide Lines: these are relative to this active Guide Line. See Show Relative Guide Lines (Tangent. ArchiCAD 15 Help 431 . the edges of the editing plane have an “edges status” (the Mercedes cursor is shown when your cursor hovers on the edge). In the 3D Window. move the cursor to the Guide Line. One Guide Line at a time can be made “active”. a Guide Line is available there. Perpendicular.g.) See also Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display.Interaction Make a Guide Line Active If you click on a Guide Line handle (the orange dot). Angle Bisector. perpendicular.

Note: This works if the “Main-Direction Guide lines” option is turned on in Guide Lines Options. To remove a specific Guide Line. 432 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Y) Directions Automatic yellow highlights on the Guide Lines alert you to the main X and Y axes. Show Guide Lines at Main (X. do one of the following: • Place the cursor on it. Move the cursor over the handle (the orange dot) and press Esc. • Place the cursor on it. activate the context menu and choose Remove Guide Line command.Interaction Remove Guide Lines To get rid of all visible Guide Lines at once: Right-click anywhere in the window to activate the context menu and choose Remove all Guide Lines.

Snap to the tangent Guide Line to ensure precise Wall input. the yellow feedback indicates that this Guide Line is tangent to the active one. Parallel. Two other relative Guide Lines are available: • Angle Bisector (if you begin your input at the intersection of two existing Guide Lines) • Circle centerline (if you intersect an active Guide Circle) (In the case of an angle bisector. a Guide Line along this curved element is currently active. certain Guide Lines will pop up which are relative to the active Guide Line. As you input a Wall. the relative Guide Line is marked with an icon to indicate that it is • Tangent • Parallel • Perpendicular to the yellow Guide Line. Angle Bisector. a relative Guide Line. The active Guide Line is shown in yellow.Interaction Show Relative Guide Lines (Tangent. Note: This works if the “Relative-direction Guide lines” option is turned on in Guide Lines Options. which do not need to be active. appears automatically. tangent to the active Guide Line. ArchiCAD 15 Help 433 . Circle Center) During input.) For example. you should begin your input at the intersection of two existing Guide Lines. Perpendicular.

Interaction Parallel and Perpendicular Guide Lines: Angle Bisector Guide Line: Circle Center Guide Line: 434 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Interaction Guide Line Shortcut: Force Guide Line Display “Force Guide Line Display” is a keyboard shortcut that makes using Guide Lines even smoother. The predefined Shortcut for this command is the ‘ key. to grab the Guide Line and move it. Click this shortcut: • to make multi-choice Guide Lines appear during element input. without having to press the mouse button • to create or activate a Guide Line along an edge. when your cursor rests on any point. without having to click the Guide Line handle ArchiCAD 15 Help 435 . but may vary depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD. without having to click the Guide Line handle • with your cursor over a Guide Line handle (the orange dot).

Guide Line Angles and Colors Use Guide Lines Settings in the Work Environment to define your preferred angle increments and to set default Guide Line colors: go to Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines. • Relative-direction Guide Lines. Activate this to have Guide Lines appear at the increments defined in Guide Line Settings. Use Guide Lines Options to activate/deactivate three categories of Guide Lines (they are all activated by default): • Main-direction Guide Lines. perpendicular) to the active Guide Line. 436 ArchiCAD 15 Help . an angle-bisector Guide Line will appear during input begun at the intersection of two existing Guide Lines. see Guide Line Settings. For more information. Also. • Incremental Angles. Activate this to have Guide Lines appear on the X and Y coordinate axes. Activate this to have Guide Lines appear at defined directions (tangential.Interaction Guide Line Options Guide Line options are available at: • View > Guide Line Options • and from the Guide Lines toggle command in the Standard Toolbar. parallel.

we activate the Wall tool and input the Wall on its default plane. ArchiCAD 15 Help 437 . In each situation. Here. See User Origin in the 3D Window. See About Elevation of Elements. whose default base elevation is 1200 mm above that of the Wall base: the editing plane jumps up to reflect this. but you can reposition it manually. the editing plane has a default position. defined in its Tool Settings Dialog box. Now we switch to the Shell tool. the editing plane shifts accordingly. the editing plane is located at the base elevation for the currently selected tool. If you change the User Origin (Alt + Shift on an element node). Editing Plane for Element Input By default.Interaction Editing Plane in 3D Window When you open the 3D window. an editing plane automatically appears to assist you in placing and moving elements. your Shell input will begin on this plane.

or • Click the square-shaped editing plane “Grip” to access the same commands. For example. Editing Plane Commands Commands for resetting the editing plane are easily reached from one of three places: • Right-click to bring up a Context menu.Interaction Editing Plane during Editing Operations The default editing plane changes as you edit particular elements. the editing plane automatically becomes the vertical plane on which you drag the cursor. as you drag this roof ridge. or 438 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then choose Editing Plane.

Interaction • Access the commands from the Drafting Aids Toolbar Set Editing Plane Orientation You may prefer the editing plane in a different location than the default. Right-click to bring up a context menu and choose Editing Plane. Choose one of the options for your preferred editing plane orientation (the available options vary depending on the orientation of the current editing plane): • Horizontal: Rotates the editing plane to a horizontal position. 2. ArchiCAD 15 Help 439 . • Vertical: Rotates the editing plane to a vertical position. To change the editing plane’s orientation after you begin your editing: 1. or click the grip.

The hole in the Roof must be a projection of a 2x2 meter square as measured on a horizontal plane.Click on an element edge plus another point (in either order) to define a plane Editing Plane Example For example.Interaction • Pick Plane: The grey rectangle “plane chooser” feedback appears. A rectangle will help you see the plane. 440 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Move the cursor onto any plane of an existing element.Click on any three points in space (such as three element hotspots) to define a plane . Do one of the following to pick the desired plane for the editing plane: . . say you need to cut a hole in slanted roof plane.

the horizontal plane at the story level would a more useful editing plane. From the context menu. 1. then Pick Plane. (Or access this command from the editing plane grip. because that is where you want to measure the hole dimensions. choose Editing Plane.Interaction When you select the Roof and the Subtract from Polygon command. however. Here. the editing plane automatically corresponds to the Roof plane.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 441 .

Continue the editing operation by defining the shape of the hole numerically on the Floor Plan. Move your cursor until the grey rectangle “plane chooser” icon indicates the plane atop the slab.Interaction 2. 3. 442 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Click to pick that plane as the editing plane. Note that your editing is projected onto the Roof.

you wish to edit the Slab shown below by dragging its cornerpoint to a new position. 3. at the place where the Wall is one meter high. To offset the editing plane: 1.Interaction Offset Editing Plane You may wish to move the editing plane by offsetting it . if you need to create intersection points between existing elements and the editing plane. 2. and enter the one-meter distance into the Tracker. or define the offset distance numerically. Start moving your cursor upwards. or click the grip. The solution is to offset the editing plane (currently the same plane as the top of the slab) by 1 meter and find the place where the plane intersects the Wall. 2. Choose Offset Editing Plane. You want to drag it so that the Slab corner will be vertically aligned to the Wall above it. Offset Editing Plane Example For example. 1. Use the cursor to drag the editing plane to the desired position. at a different location than the current editing plane. Right-click to bring up a context menu and choose Editing Plane.for example. Choose Offset Editing Plane. ArchiCAD 15 Help 443 .

From the context menu. click on the “Editing Plane Grip” to bring up the same commands. 4. select Editing Plane Projection. 2. While dragging the Slab cornerpoint. find the intersection of the Wall with the editing plane at its new location. The editing plane jumps to the required position. To change the cursor projection with respect to the editing plane: 1. 444 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Begin the editing operation.Interaction 3. Click to place the Slab point. If needed. your cursor is moving on the editing plane. Projection onto Editing Plane By default. you can redefine the direction of this cursor projection. Alternatively. as you perform graphical editing.

Interaction 3. 2. Notice that the projection line is perpendicular to the editing plane. Choose one of the projection options: • • • • Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular to Editing Plane Perpendicular to Result Plane Editing Plane Projection Example For example. 1. here you want to cut a hole in the Roof so the hole is vertically above the four points of the Slab. Select the Roof and choose Subtract from Polygon from the pet palette. Click on a corner of the Slab. select Editing Plane Projection. Change the projection to Vertical: • From the context menu. 4. which is not what you need. Alternatively. click on the blue “Editing Plane Grip” to bring up the same commands. ArchiCAD 15 Help 445 . 3.

you can rotate the grid. so you can use the Tracker to numerically input element geometry. See also Grid System. use Grid Options and the Grids and Background dialog box to set up your grid preferences. and use Grid Snap and Guide Lines to aid in element placement. and reflects the X-Y coordinate plane. 6. The editing is now projected vertically toward the editing plane. Draw the hole in the Roof as desired.Interaction • Choose Vertical. by clicking on the four corners of the slab to project its geometry vertically onto the Roof above. As with the 2D grid. 5. As in the 2D window. 446 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Grid Settings for 3D Editing Plane The 3D Editing Plane has a grid system that is the same as the one on the Floor Plan.

Click its handle to offset it to any useful position in the 3D Window. Consequently. a Guide Line is available there. too.Interaction Create Guide Line based on Editing Plane Edge In the 3D Window. the edges of the editing plane have an “edges status” (the Mercedes cursor is shown when your cursor hovers on the edge). See also Guide Lines. ArchiCAD 15 Help 447 .

Slab or Mesh beneath them. If the Gravity function is on (activate Gravity icon) while you are placing a new element. Beam or Object-type element. Note: Gravity only affects newly created elements and cannot be used for editing existing ones. the Gravity function lets you place it directly on top of an existing Slab. Roofs. If you are using Gravity to place a Wall. use the Gravity controls in the Standard toolbar or the icons of the Coordinates palette. a Wall (with Gravity on) is being placed on top of a Slab whose elevation is 400.Interaction Gravity When placing a new Wall. Shell or Mesh surface. See Tracker. Roof. is shown as 400. newly created elements will be placed on top of (i. Level Dimensions placed with Gravity On on top of Slabs. 448 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the highest elevation value is displayed. To choose an option. depending on which Gravity option you choose. Roof. When several Slabs. accordingly. If Gravity is on (activate Gravity icon). you can monitor the changes in elevation (Z) values in the Tracker (or the Coordinates Palette). Roofs. Shells or Meshes overlap. Shell or Mesh. Shell or Mesh.e. Shell. Beam or any Object-type element onto a Slab. In this image. Column. Roof. then the new element will be placed at the current story’s zero level. but there is no underlying Slab.. the Wall’s Z-coordinate in the Tracker. gravitate to) the Roof. Column. Shells or Meshes are associated to them. thus taking on the elevation of the element it is placed on.

See Guide Lines. In addition. Three orthogonal angles/angle pairs can be specified: • The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the main grid • The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the rotated grid • The fixed angle set The fixed angle set can be set relative to the rotated grid or the main grid. by pressing Shift during input. as indicated by the thick rubber band line shown in the Floor Plan or the ghosted element contour shown in the 3D Window. The angle pairs they define can be used to lock the cursor at a particular drawing angle. The mechanism can only be engaged while drawing or editing an element. It temporarily locks the cursor’s polar angle value in the Coordinates Palette using one of the angle pairs defined in the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods. They are editing aids that can be used as an alternative to Guide Lines.Interaction Mouse Constraints ArchiCAD’s Mouse Constraints are like having a computerized T-square and triangle available while drafting in the Floor Plan. although most users will prefer to use Guide Lines in 2D windows. See Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box. you can check one or both Guide Line constraint options: • Nearest Instant Guide Line • Lasting Guide Lines Using Mouse Constraints Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints ArchiCAD 15 Help 449 . A practical use for the fixed angle orthogonal set would be aligning multiple elements with a roadway.

Click to start drawing an element.) 2. 3. To use the orthogonal direction sets for drawing a new element: 1.Interaction Using Mouse Constraints Constraining the drawing direction helps you precisely align or connect new elements. ArchiCAD will search for the closest enabled constraint direction. (See Grid Snap Function. Move the cursor from this starting point and hold down the Shift key. Make sure the Grid Snap Function is disabled. 450 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

then hold down the Shift key. you can align this endpoint with other elements using the projection mode of the cursor. release the Shift key and move the cursor to a position closer to the desired direction. When you have chosen the appropriate constraint direction. click the cursor again to place the endpoint of the element. If the constrained direction is not what you had in mind. ArchiCAD 15 Help 451 . Since the direction remains locked. 5.Interaction 4.

See Control Box. To switch among these options: 1. 452 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Move your cursor to this popup and choose the cursor snap variant you need. In the Control Box. The Cursor Snap Variants pop-up is now active in the Control Box. you can vary the display of this dotted line among three possible settings (Cursor Snap Variants): • Perpendicular to the constrained direction • Horizontal from the constrained direction • Vertical from the constrained direction These options allow you to best align the element under construction with other already existing elements. Press Shift to enable a constraint. Display the Control Box. a dotted line connects the unfinished element with the location of the cursor.Interaction Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints When the drawing direction is constrained by pressing Shift. Draw an input vector on screen. (Window > Palettes > Control Box) 2. 3.

If Guide Lines are active: • Alt/Opt + X produces a vertical Guide Line. To unlock the constraint. Alt/Opt + X) again. if you have already snapped to a Guide Line. but you will not see the Guide Lines. Another way to lock a coordinate during input is to choose the Lock to Guide Line command from the context menu. If Guide Lines are inactive. ArchiCAD 15 Help 453 . Y. the locking function works the same way. Alt/Opt + A (having defined the Angle value numerically or drawing in a sample direction) produces a corresponding Guide Line. A. • Alt/Opt + R produces a Guide Circle whose radius is determined numerically or graphically. or R/D on the keyboard.g. just press the same key combination (e.Interaction Coordinate Constraints You can lock a cursor coordinate and thereby restrict the movement of the cursor by pressing Alt (Windows) or Opt (MacOS) and either X. • • Alt/Opt + Y produces a horizontal Guide Line.

(See Control Box for more information. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. They are accessible from the Drafting Aids toolbar: They can also be accessed from the third button of the Control Box. the relative construction methods also constrain the element construction direction to a constant angle or offset. choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu.) These Relative Construction Methods are described here: Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints Angle Bisector Constraint Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods) Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector 454 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To show it.Interaction Relative Construction Methods In addition to the Guide Lines feature.

a newly drawn reference line will not remain visible on-screen. Choose the Perpendicular or Parallel icon and click it to make it active. In this case. choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. or draw a temporary reference line using the cursor. To show it. (See Grid Snap Function. 3. The new element you draw will be perpendicular or parallel to the reference line (depending on the method selected). Draw the new element. Select a line or an element edge as a reference by clicking it (the Mercedes feedback will indicate an edge). Note: The reference edge/line will not be shown as selected. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. The cursor icon will indicate which method (parallel or perpendicular) is active. Make sure that the Grid Snap Function is inactive. the drawing operation is frozen until you have either drawn or selected a reference line or edge. 4. ArchiCAD 15 Help 455 .) 1.Interaction Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints Use these commands to draw new elements that are either parallel to or perpendicular to a reference line or existing element edge. Note: You can also select the Perpendicular or Parallel method after you have started drawing an element.) 2. (See Control Box for more information. The Parallel and Perpendicular constraint commands are accessible from the Drafting Aids toolbar: They are also accessible from the Control Box.

Interaction Angle Bisector Constraint Using the Angle Bisector relative construction method.) 456 ArchiCAD 15 Help . make sure that Grid Snap is disabled. or the other way round. you can draw elements bisecting the angle formed by other elements or temporary reference vectors. choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. To show it. This command is accessible from the Drafting Aids toolbar: It is also accessible from the Control Box. Before using Angle Bisector constraint. or drawing two temporary lines. then define the reference vectors by either clicking on two existing element edges or lines. the temporary lines will not remain visible on-screen. Click the Angle Bisector icon. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. (The reference edges/lines will not be shown as selected. While you are clicking or drawing the reference lines. the cursor icon will show that you have activated the angle bisector constraint.) You can either start drawing the new element before activating the Angle Bisector method and defining the reference vectors. (See Control Box for more information.

As for any other constraint. you can use remote cursor snap to define the other endpoint of the drawn line. and you can see a small black dot move along the line that would be drawn at that angle. ArchiCAD 15 Help 457 . Before you actually draw the element. the cursor is already constrained.Interaction The mouse is constrained to the bisecting angle between the two reference lines.

drag the cursor to the final location of the new element. The cursor displays the offset or multiple offset icon. Note: You can. if you wish. or click Cancel in the Control Box. Draw a reference line or an open or closed reference polyline. create this polyline using the Magic Wand. 2. double-click. Double-click to complete the reference line/polyline. If you are using the regular Offset command: Click once to place the element. To draw an offset segment or offset polygonal element: 1. Choose or activate the Offset command using one of the following methods: • the drop-down menu of the Drafting Aids toolbar • the Control Box (see Control Box) 3. If you are using Multiple Offset: drag and click as many times as the number of elements you wish to place. 5. 6. A rubber band outline appears. using any tool that has a linear or polygonal input method. 4.Interaction Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods) The Offset Constraint and Multiple Offset Constraint methods help you create elements that are at a given offset from a reference line. to place the final element. See Magic Wand. Activate the tool with which you want to draw the new element. 7. 458 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Adjust your User Origin if necessary. the cursor’s working plane is angled. only the tangential plane of the surface. for example when moving a hole in a roof plane. The working plane is often horizontal. 2. Click on any surface in the 3D view you want to align your new element to. To use the constraint. However. It is also possible to align to curved surfaces. This method automatically identifies the intersection of a selected plane and the working plane of the cursor. 6. The limitation here is that if the cursor is moving in an angled plane. Using the Constraint when Creating New Elements 1. 5. It enables you to fit elements onto non-horizontal planes when working in 3D views. A black dot will appear on the selected plane at the height of the current User Origin. 4.Interaction Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D The Align to Surface relative construction method is only active when working in the 3D Window. it is not possible to fit to a curved surface. first open the 3D Window. for example when fitting an object to a curved wall. in special cases. ArchiCAD 15 Help 459 . The dot will follow the cursor constrained to the intersection line of your reference plane and the User Origin plane. Choose the tool for the element you wish to add. Choose and activate the Align to Surface Relative Construction method in the Control Box. 3.

For more information. 7. Adjust the User Origin if necessary. Click a reference point or edge to start editing. 460 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 5. Choose the Edit command you wish to execute. Activate the 3D Window. Choose your reference plane.g. Click where you want to start drawing your new element. and activate the constraint as described above. 6. Select the element you wish to edit. Select the Align to Surface icon from the Drafting Aids toolbar or the Control box. 2. Finish editing the element. 4. e. 8. Using Align to Surface with Existing Elements 1. The element will be constrained to the intersection line. 3. stretch an edge of a slab to the intersection of a roof and the User Origin. see Origins. Finish drawing the element in the usual way..Interaction 7.

• The tip of the cursor When one of these selection dots encounters a node. that selection dot becomes larger showing that the element is attracted to the sensitive point. (This command is also available on the Standard Toolbar. If you select an element and then start moving it with Element Snap active.Interaction Snapping to Existing Elements ArchiCAD helps you to move or reshape elements by snapping them to existing ones as part of a move operation.) See Special Snap Points. ArchiCAD 15 Help 461 . Note: Element Snap can only be used when Grid Snap is disabled. The Element Snap function can be enabled and disabled using the Options > Element Snap toggle command.) Element Snap can be toggled on and off while you work using the E shortcut. you will see that its special points change to small squares. You can then click to join the two elements without having to place the cursor at the actual joining point. These special points include: • The selection dot points of the element including anchor points • The division points of the element (if Special Snap Points are enabled. anchor point or edge of another element where the cursor changes its shape to indicate a special relation.

462 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Click when the one you need is displayed with the larger empty square.Interaction If more than one snapping point touches an eligible point on the other element. You can use the spacebar to cycle through possible points. you will see that these turn black.

or in the View menu. Hover your cursor over the element on which you want to see the Special Snap Points. you can opt to have the snap points remain visible until you either place an element or change to another view or story: disable the “Autohide Special Snap points” checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. Their number and position depend on the options set by you. Special Snap Points will disappear after about 5 seconds. (The same commands are available from View > Special Snap Options > Set Special Snap Values menu command.Interaction Special Snap Points Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector Special Snap Points are temporary hotspots that appear at particular intervals (defined by you) on elements. The Snap Points appear. 2. 2.you can snap to them with your cursor. Click the Special Snap Point toggle on the Standard toolbar.) 4. below. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. to help you place and draw new elements more accurately. 3. (See Define Special Snap Points. 463 ArchiCAD 15 Help . choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. Choose the intervals at which to place your special snap points: • Half: Divides an edge into two equal parts. The Snap Points act as a temporary hotspot . Define Special Snap Points To define division points and custom distances: 1.) These controls are also available as commands in the Control Box. Click the Special Snap Values drop-down menu from the Standard Toolbar. Note: Although Special Snap Points will disappear on their own after a set interval by default. See Control Box. 5. To activate Special Snap Points: 1. You can start drawing new elements from these points or use them for editing other elements in relation to them. To show it.

Interaction • Division: Divides an edge into the set number of segments. use the control in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. percentage. Disable Special Snap Points In the Standard Toolbar or the View menu. • Distance: Divides an edge into segments that are the set distance apart. (Range: 3-20) • Percentage: Divides an edge into two parts according to the set percentage.” Special Snap Point Color To customize the color of your Special Snap Points. Distances and percentages are always calculated from the endpoint that is closest to the cursor. and/or distance by clicking the Set Special Snap Values command from this drop-down menu. choose one of two options for setting your Special Snap Points: 464 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Define the values for your divisions. 3. toggle the Special Snap Points command to “Off. Special Snap Points Options From the Special Snap Points menu in the Standard Toolbar (or the View menu).

even if it is intersected by other elements) • Between Intersection Points (snap points are placed on the chosen element only from one intersection point to the next. ArchiCAD 15 Help 465 .Interaction • Along Entire Element (snap points appear at the defined intervals along the whole element.

See Control Box. then type 4 as the number of Divisions. Activate the Wall tool.fourth of the gap between two endpoints of two other Walls. you will draw a Wall that starts at one. 1. 2. you can display Special Snap Points on a temporary vector used while drawing elements. 466 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 3. Start by choosing the Divisions option in Special Snap Point Settings. Make sure that Grid Snap is inactive.Interaction Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector In addition. then choose and activate the Special Snap Point icon in the Control Box. The method can be activated with the Special Snap icon among the relative construction icons in the Control Box. In the following example. Start drawing the reference vector from the endpoint of one of the Walls.

You can start drawing the new Wall. A dashed line is drawn indicating the reference vector.Interaction 4. ArchiCAD 15 Help 467 . The Edit Origin is relocated to the place of the generated special snap point. Click the endpoint of the other Wall to terminate the definition of the reference vector. with small black dots at the locations of the special snap points.

splines. Cursor Snap Range can be set between 1 and 9 pixels.Interaction Cursor Snap Range To help locate hotspots on the screen. If you have good pointing skills. and tangential points of the rubber band line along existing arcs. but at small zoom levels you may hit hotspots that you did not wish to snap to. 468 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the cursor gravitates toward edges and nodes. perpendicular projections from the Edit Origin to existing lines or edges. The cursor’s shape informs you about the type of special point ArchiCAD has found. The attraction of the cursor by elements is defined in pixels in the bottom section of the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods dialog box. curved edges. etc. use 1 pixel and you will not be forced to zoom in. 3-4 pixels is a comfortable setting. Cursor Snap Range will also help you to automatically snap to special points including the section points of existing lines or edges.

Interaction Editing Elements Basic Editing Operations Edit Selection Set Cancel Operations Pet Palettes Move Elements Offset Selected Element Intersect Two Elements Align Elements Distribute Elements Modify Element Sizes Explode into Current View Create Element Duplicates Drag & Drop Parameter Transfer Group Elements Lock/Unlock Elements Display Order Magic Wand Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows ArchiCAD 15 Help 469 .

but the selected elements are not removed from the original document. Note: The Cut command is not available in the 3D Window.Interaction Basic Editing Operations Topics in this section: Cut Copy Paste Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories Copy/Paste Elements Between Projects Delete Undo/Redo Cut The Edit > Cut command removes selected elements from a Project and places them on the Clipboard for future use via the Paste command. or by Shift+clicking. in a model-type Section window. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool. If you cut a construction element from a Model-type Section/Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document. It can also be used for dialog box or Coordinates Palette numeric field contents. the elements are pasted as drawing primitives (points. Paste Use Edit > Paste command to insert the contents of the Clipboard onto the current Project or a text Window. Copy The Edit > Copy command puts the selected construction or text elements on the Clipboard. lines and fills). the element is also cut from the Floor Plan. 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window. (The only exception is if you use the “Drag a copy” command to move a Door/Window. 470 ArchiCAD 15 Help . You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using Copy/Paste. the Copy command is only available with the Marquee tool. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool. you can use the Cut command as in any word processor. or by Shift+clicking.) In the 3D window. In Text type windows. See Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool. When pasting cut elements into a Section/Elevation/IE.

The Paste command is not available in the 3D window. If there are several possible options for locating the pasted Clipboard contents. or if it is possible to locate the pasted elements relative to either the Active view or a Reference view. the Paste Options dialog box appears. an alert appears asking you to identify the copied story to merge to the current one. ArchiCAD 15 Help 471 . (The dialog box appears if the pasted elements cannot appear in their entirety in the Window at the current zoom level. remember that element attributes are identified by name. the contents of the Clipboard are pasted into the same position they were originally cut or copied from. Copy/Paste Elements Between Projects When pasting elements to another project. Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories The Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story. See also Copy-Paste Dimension Text.Interaction You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using either Cut/Paste or Copy/Paste. When you are pasting with a multiple story marquee. If you Cut/Copy and then Paste a selection between stories at the same zoom level with no Panning operations in between.) See also Paste Options Dialog Box.

regardless of the model or drawing view they were performed in. and are not undoable. manually added) elements from a model-type Section/ Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document. you have several options .depending on the type of copied item . chronologically. They are easily retrieved by Undo. Deleting construction elements in any model window (Floor Plan. After redoing a series of steps. deleting items from a map. For more information. All model and drafting operations can be undone step by step. The Clipboard can be used not only to hold ArchiCAD elements for pasting. The number of steps that can be undone and redone (from 1 to 99) is set using in the Options > Work Environment > Data Safety & Integrity dialog box (Undo Limit). or 3D Document) will also clear these elements from all the other windows. model-type Section/Elevation/IE. Project Notes.for pasting them into ArchiCAD. your previously available Undo steps will be cleared. GDL script windows. they will take on the attributes of the target project.e. or any elements from a drawing-type Section/ Elevation/IE window will leave all other windows unchanged. Note: Each time you save the Project. This capability also allows you to test tentative solutions by trying them out until you arrive at the desired result. Undo/Redo The Undo and Redo commands allow you to undo (revert to a previous step) and redo a large number of construction operations. If you have copied items from an external application. 3D. In case of a crash. In text type windows. The name of the command to be undone is displayed in the menu along with the Undo or Redo command. The keyboard equivalent of Delete is hitting the Backspace or Delete key.Interaction • If the pasted elements refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project. only the last editing step can be undone/redone. Note: Deleting any additional (i. Autosave will save your Project. The default value is 20. • If the elements refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project. The deleted elements are not preserved on the Clipboard. the necessary attributes will be appended. or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue. 472 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Delete The Edit > Delete command removes selected items from Project or text Windows. (Text-type windows include all Listing windows created with the Calculation function. Undo will only be available when you complete a new undoable action. see Pasting Dialog Box. You can paste multi-line texts from wordprocessing applications into ArchiCAD.) Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps. Autosave does not clear the undoable steps. but also to import bitmap graphics and other types of information. and Report windows.

Interaction Cancel Operations By successively pressing the Esc key. Remove Marquee selection. Cancel current operation entirely (during input) 2. if any 4. pressing the Backspace key will cancel the operation. Deselect selected item(s). If nothing is selected: Switch to Arrow tool During input. Warning: Pressing Backspace with any items selected will delete those items! ArchiCAD 15 Help 473 . if any 3. you will achieve the following actions: 1.

Interaction Pet Palettes A pet palette with relevant commands appears with most on-screen editing operations. see Dialog Boxes and Palettes. You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation with a second mouse click. For more information on customizing pet palette functions. 474 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. and click on the icon for the function you need. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following factors: • The selected element • The part of the element you choose to act on (edge or node) • The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one.

Nudging Elements Dragging Elements Rotating Elements Mirroring Elements Elevating Elements ArchiCAD 15 Help 475 .as with the selected column in this image: • With any tool active. To move elements. You can “nudge” them in increments. rotate or mirror them along a horizontal plane and through vertical displacement. you can: • Select them and choose the corresponding menu command from the Edit > Move menu (with any tool active in the Toolbox) or the Move commands in the context menu of a selected element. you can drag.Interaction Move Elements You can move elements individually or collectively. by changing their elevation values. click on a node and then choose the desired shortcut in the appearing pet palette. that is.

is the same as the distance entered for your Snap Grid in View > Grid Options > Grids & Background. then use Shift + an arrow key to move the element left.the increment by which you will move the element . right. 476 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Grid System. right. To Nudge a selected element in larger increments. This will move the selected elements by the distance entered for your Construction Grid in View > Grid Options > Grids & Background. forward or backward on a horizontal plane. up or down. The “Nudge factor” .Interaction Nudging Elements A quick way to move elements on the screen is to use the “Nudge” feature: select one or more elements. In the 3D window. Nudge will move the element left. use Shift + Alt/Opt + an arrow key.

and draw a temporary vector anywhere in the active window: the element will be dragged to its new location according to this vector’s length and direction. • Select the Element. See Quick Selection of Surface Areas. then drag the element. ArchiCAD 15 Help 477 . • Select the element. then access the drag command with the context menu or using the Drag command shortcut (Ctrl+D). select the Edit > Move > Drag command. select the Drag icon from the pet palette.Interaction Dragging Elements To drag an element. do one of the following: • With Quick Selection: click on the element’s surface and drag it to its new position. • Select the element.

(The accompanying pet palette shows the “Drag” command activated.) 478 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then take hold of it anywhere on its surface and drag it with the cursor to its new location. select it.Interaction To move a wall.

Selections containing grouped elements appear as a greyed bounding box as you move them. To constrain the movement of the elements to the horizontal plane. These functions will also work when several elements have been simultaneously selected.Interaction All selected elements are moved to a new location. Note: In 3D. make sure the Drag Horizontally icon is active in the appearing pet palette. ArchiCAD 15 Help 479 . In the image below. activate the horizontal-vertical angle pair in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods. and drag them all at the same time to their new position. and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the elements. we select a wall. table and chair. dragging can also change the elevation of the selected elements. All of the selected elements will be dragged along the same vector. Single elements are accompanied by a ghost outline or boundary as you move them.

• Select the Edit > Move > Rotate command (or Move > Rotate from the selected element’s context menu). Alternatively. Click to define the center of rotation of the selected elements.Interaction Rotating Elements To rotate an element: • Select the Element. 480 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then choose the Rotate command. Click to define the starting point of the rotation arc and its radius. • • Or use the Ctrl (Cmd) + E shortcut. click again on a node or edge of the selected element to bring up the pet palette.

3D Document. and drawing elements only in Section/Elevation/IE.Interaction • Move the cursor and click to complete the rotation arc. ArchiCAD 15 Help 481 . rotation is always performed across a horizontal plane. You can rotate selected elements in the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. and Detail/Worksheet windows. Even in the 3D Window.

or choose the Mirror command from the context menu or the pet palette.Interaction Mirroring Elements Mirroring creates a mirror image of selected elements on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. as if you were drawing a Line. at the other side of the room. Here. To Mirror an element: • Select the Element(s) you want to mirror. • Select the Edit > Move > Mirror command. • Define the mirroring axis with two clicks. we want to place the table and chairs in the facing direction. 482 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

click once. Notes: • Any number of Doors and Windows can be mirrored at a time. Select the Door/Window. Line arrowheads and Dimensions will not be mirrored. The mirrored Door/Window will always be in line with the wall that contains the original. • Zone stamps cannot be mirrored. • Mirrored Text blocks. This click is the axis of the mirroring action. Labels. • Text. ArchiCAD 15 Help 483 . only their bounding box. Dimensions and Fill polygon area labels are always readable from the bottom and the left side of the drawing.Interaction The mirrored elements will be placed after the second click.

you can also elevate elements simply by clicking and dragging. It is the best way to preserve the vertical relationships between objects while moving them. and then graphically move the selected elements up and down. or choose By Elevation in the Tracker. landscaping objects.e. • Choose the Edit > Move > Elevate command. click an element node (Arrow tool active) and choose the Elevate icon from the appearing pet palette. or the Elevate command from the pet palette. use the Tracker controls to lock the element’s Home Story. This command is well-suited to changing the elevations of large numbers of similar elements (i. check Set Home Story by Elevation. choose By Elevation in the Tracker. • Click OK. walls. Note: In the Section/Elevation/IE window. • • Type the value by which you wish to raise or lower all selected elements To allow the element’s Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation. and lighting fixtures). To allow the element’s Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation. In the 3D Window. Alternatively. 484 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Interaction Elevating Elements The Elevate command allows you to move selected elements vertically along the Z axis.. floor tiles. To elevate an element in the Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/IE windows: • Select the element. This brings up the Elevate dialog box. Use Edit > Move > Elevate.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 485 .Interaction See Set Home Story by Elevation.

or a reference line endpoint of the selected element). Note: If you want to offset multiple elements simultaneously. an edge. 1. Select the element(s) you wish to offset.including zone and roof polygons. • from the Edit Elements toolbar. 2.Interaction Offset Selected Element Use the Edit > Reshape > Offset command to offset an existing element. Choose the Offset command in one of the following ways: • the offset icon from the Pet Palette (click a node. • from the Edit > Reshape menu. 486 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you must use the menu or toolbar command instead of the Pet Palette. linear or arc-shaped . This function works on all elements that are polygonal.

To create multiple copies: Click the Ctrl+Alt keys (MacOS: Cmd+Opt). Click the Ctrl key (MacOS: Opt) and drag the cursor to the offset location. 2. Click to place the new element(s). Click when you are satisfied with the new element size. ArchiCAD 15 Help 487 . Use Offset to Create One or More Element Copies 1. Offset Constraint See Offset and Multiple Offset Constraints (Relative Construction Methods).Interaction 3. A ghost contour of the proportionally increased or reduced element follows the movements of the cursor. select the original element and activate the Offset command. 3. then drag the cursor. As described above.

Arcs. 2. and their visibility is set to “Home Story Only. and Beams.) Related Topics: Intersect Single-plane Roofs 488 ArchiCAD 15 Help . This command works on Lines.Interaction Intersect Two Elements You can intersect two selected elements with each other by having them meet at their endpoints’ nearest point. (If the elements have different Home Stories. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Intersect command. Walls. Select the two elements. but they must be at least visible on the same story. Note: This command can work only if the two elements are visible on the same story. 1.” this command will not work. They do not have to have the same Home Story.

Interaction Align Elements About the Align function How to Align Elements Special Align ArchiCAD 15 Help 489 .

ArchiCAD identifies an element’s right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. illustrated in red): Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are aligning. and “bottom” is the element with the lowest y-coordinate. “top” means the element with the highest y-coordinate in the current window. use the Special Align options (Edit > Align > Special Align). The Align commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. • Align elements to the top or bottom.Interaction About the Align function Use this menu (Edit > Align) to align selected elements with each other. or to a custom-drawn target line. 490 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The expression “left” refers to the left-hand direction on the x-axis. When using the Align commands. or to a temporary line/arc drawn by you. 3D). For example.g. using a variety of criteria: • Align elements right or left. • “Special”-align elements to any point on an existing element. suppose you want to align the following Corner Table object with other furniture: ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the table’s bounding box (here. Section. Similarly. • Center elements vertically or horizontally. Floor Plan. the expression “right” refers to the rightmost element on the xaxis in the window you are looking at (e.

Go to Edit > Align and choose one of the following operations: Left: If you choose Edit > Align > Left. we want to align the three windows shown in Section view. In this example. Select the elements you wish to align.Interaction How to Align Elements 1. 2. all selected elements will be aligned to the leftmost bounding-box point of the element that is located farthest to the left. ArchiCAD 15 Help 491 .

Top/Bottom: If you choose Edit > Align > Top or Bottom.Interaction Select all three windows and use Edit > Align Left. Right: If you choose Edit > Align > Right. • In the example below. all selected elements will be aligned to the rightmost bounding-box point of the element located farthest to the right. 492 ArchiCAD 15 Help . so that it lines up with other two windows. all selected elements will be aligned to the topmost (or bottommost) point on the element that is the top (or bottom) element of the selected group. we want to move up the window on the left. the rest of the walls (their rightmost points) are aligned to the rightmost point on the arc wall’s bounding box. • In the illustration below. the arc wall is the rightmost element.

we select all the windows. and then align all the elements horizontally (using each element’s centerpoint). ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements’ top and bottom y-coordinates. Center Vertically: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Vertically. along a vertical line halfway between them.Interaction To achieve this. Center Horizontally: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Horizontally. then use Edit > Align > Top to obtain the desired result. • For example. and then align all the elements vertically. in the following Floor Plan. we will center the selected furniture vertically. ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements’ leftmost and rightmost x-coordinates. ArchiCAD 15 Help 493 . along a horizontal line halfway between the top and bottom elements.

and you can choose what to align the elements to: a temporary line/arc drawn by you. Go to Edit > Align > Special Align and choose the Nearest Point option: each tree will line up along the path using each tree’s bounding box point that falls closest to the path. or any existing line/edge. You can choose which point to align. In this example.Interaction Special Align The options in Edit > Align > Special Align give you great flexibility in lining up selected elements. Choose the Click an existing line or element edge option. we wish to align the selected tree objects to the edge of the garden path. 494 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 Help 495 . the edge of the mesh). then click the edge of the path (here. The trees line up along the path.Interaction Click OK to close the dialog box.

496 ArchiCAD 15 Help . For example. suppose you have three windows distributed evenly along a wall. use the Special Distribute options (Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute). illustrated in red): Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are distributing. suppose you want to distribute elements that include the following Corner Table object: ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the table’s bounding box (here. For example. the rest will be evenly distributed between them. ArchiCAD identifies an element’s right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element.Interaction Distribute Elements Use this menu (Edit > Distribute) to evenly distribute selected elements using a variety of criteria: The Distribute commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. Along X: The two selected elements at either end will remain in place.

then use Edit > Distribute > Along Y. the wall is lengthened and you add two more windows. Along Y: The two selected elements at either end (vertically) will remain in place.Interaction As a result of a design change. To ensure they are all distributed evenly. Select them. the rest will be evenly distributed between them. ArchiCAD 15 Help 497 . select all the windows and use Edit > Distribute > Along X. For example. suppose you want to distribute chairs evenly against the back wall of the room.

select a group of 5 desks and use Edit > Distribute > Along XY. you have nine desks in the classroom placed roughly in a V formation. 498 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and the rest will be distributed evenly along an XY diagonal. To distribute the desks precisely. For example. First group: Repeat with a second group of five chairs.Interaction Along XY: The two selected elements at either end (at top left and bottom right) will remain in place.

Interaction Final result: ArchiCAD 15 Help 499 .

or any existing line/edge. Choose the “Draw a line or arc” option. then click OK to close the dialog box. Suppose you want to distribute potted plants in a circle around a hexagonal soil holder object: Use Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute. Click to start drawing and choose the “Arc by centerpoint” pet palette option. the potted plants will be distributed around it. You will create a temporary circle around the hexagonal object.Interaction Special Distribute The options in Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute let you choose which point to distribute and along what to distribute the elements: a temporary line/arc drawn by you. As you complete the circle. 500 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Interaction Modify Element Sizes Overview of Modifying Element Size Stretching Walls Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns Modifying Beams Modifying Complex Profile Elements Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements Stretching with the Marquee Tool Stretch Height Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements Offset Selected Element Splitting Elements Adjusting Elements Intersect Two Elements Create a Fillet or Chamfer Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Adding Element Nodes Move Nodes Curve/Straighten Element Edge ArchiCAD 15 Help 501 .

cannot be modified numerically (for example. Cameras or Detail Markers. while some others need to be fitted exactly to other elements (walls to roofs. Some dimensions. • Stretch is available for most types of selected elements in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. etc. opening angle. the length of linear elements or edges). Some of these are easiest to modify numerically. • The Stretch command cannot be used on polygonal elements. ArchiCAD allows you to modify element sizes using splitting.Interaction Overview of Modifying Element Size Different element types have different characteristic dimensions: length. Only drawing elements can be stretched in the Section/Elevation/IE. • Some GDL Object type elements are programmed to allow only specific sizes. thickness. Most of the operations can be performed in three ways: • Edit menu command • Keyboard Shortcuts • Commands from Pet Palettes In some cases. You may also need to change the overall dimensions of several elements at the same time while keeping their relative proportions. 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. opening its settings dialog box and adjusting the relevant values. for example) which may make numeric adjustment a tedious calculation task. or include smart editing hotspots to edit their shape graphically. stretching and trimming operations. only the pet palette is available. height. In such cases. however. width. by selecting the given element. but you can stretch their edges or displace any of their nodes graphically. 502 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Some general considerations: • You cannot stretch Hotspots.

Interaction Stretching Walls To stretch/shrink the length of straight Walls with the menu command: 1. Select a wall. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. 4. The wall is stretched or shrunk and. rotated according to the new endpoint. Lines and Arcs with overlapping endpoints can all be stretched at the same time with the Stretch menu command. see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. Select a wall. For more information. When using the pet palette: 1. 2. 3. ArchiCAD 15 Help 503 . Note: Multiple Walls. Click the reference line endpoint and move it. if needed. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch menu command. or by using the Marquee. or the Stretch command from the pet palette.

Click one of the wall’s reference line endpoints.Interaction 2. The pet palette appears. See Stretching Curves. 504 ArchiCAD 15 Help . You can stretch a curved wall by using a special angular or radial stretch commands. Choose the stretch icon. Click to define the new endpoint.

See also Stretching or Shrinking Lines. you can use the special Stretch Trapezoid Wall command from the pet palette: this will increase/decrease the width of the wall proportionally as you stretch it from either end. Stretching Objects. ArchiCAD 15 Help 505 .Interaction To stretch a Trapezoid wall.

) In 3D.) As you change the wall height. or Stretch height with fixed angle for columns. you can: • Slant a wall/column or change the inclination angle of a slanted wall/column by selecting a corner point (for a wall) or the center of the top plane of the column. in the pet palette. the Tracker’s “Distance” field provides a way to edit the wall inclination using its offset (e.) 506 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) In Section view. (Columns can also be modified in Floor Plan views.Interaction Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns Slanted walls and columns can be stretched and/or their slant angle can be modified with pet palette commands in 3D and Section views.g. you can use the same functions. In Section view.) • Stretch a slanted wall/column vertically. the wall thickness remains the same but its slant angle is adjusted accordingly. and dragging it along the horizontal plane. (Use Modify Angle in the pet palette) Note: You cannot slant a wall whose reference line is centered. • Stretch a slanted wall/column by moving its top or bottom edge up or down along the wall plane (Use Stretch slanted height for walls. (“Modify Slant Angle” is possible only if the wall’s reference line is perpendicular to the section line. (Use Stretch height in the pet palette. Distance) value.

Interaction

In addition, you can edit double slanted walls: • If you elevate the top or bottom surface of the double slanted wall, the angles of both lateral surfaces will change • If you elevate the height of one side of the wall, both lateral surface angles remain unchanged (and the top surface may be reduced to zero thickness)

The next two methods work on double-slanted walls in Section view only if the Section line is perpendicular to the wall. • If you move the top surface horizontally, both lateral surface angles will change while the top thickness remains constant

ArchiCAD 15 Help

507

Interaction

If you move one of the top nodes of the double slanted wall horizontally, the angle of the surface on that side of the wall will change as will the top thickness, while the opposite surface angle will remain unchanged.

You can modify the slant angle of Columns graphically on the Floor Plan as well as in 3D.

Related Topics: Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Slanted Column

508

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Modifying Beams
To stretch/shrink Beams using the pet palette: 1. Select a beam on the Floor Plan or in 3D. Note: Beams can also be stretched/shrunk in Section view, if the Beam reference line is perpendicular to the Section line. 2. Click one of the beam’s endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the appropriate stretch (or stretch length) icon:

Click to define the new endpoint. To stretch/shrink beams with the menu command: 1. Select a beam. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command. 3. Click the reference line endpoint of the beam and move it. 4. Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The beam is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. To modify the inclination (slant) angle of an inclined beam, select it on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. Choose the Modify Angle command from the Pet Palette.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

509

Interaction

Drag the beam graphically to the desired inclination angle.

510

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Modifying Complex Profile Elements
Profile Walls, Columns and Beams have special stretch and rotate commands in the pet palette.

Related Topics: Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile

ArchiCAD 15 Help

511

Interaction

Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements
Move Polygon Node
To move a node of a selected polygon (including a polygonal wall), click the node and use the pet palette’s Move node option.

The two neighboring edges will follow the stretching movement and the shape of the polygon will change accordingly.

Offset Polygon Edge
To apply an offset on a whole side of a selected polygon, click an edge and use the pet palette’s Offset edge option. This will stretch the neighboring edges. This offset feature is available for chained elements as well as polygons. Selected elements will be treated temporarily as a polygon, and all polygon reshaping pet palette options will be available.

In the example below, the chained Wall on the right needs to be moved a bit further away while keeping its connection to the two horizontal Walls. Select all three Walls, click anywhere on the

512

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

edge of the Wall on the right and choose the appropriate icon from the pet palette. Click when you are satisfied with the new distance.

When you offset a segment of a polygon perpendicularly, new segments are correspondingly created. This can be useful, for example, when tracing a terrace.

Offset All Polygon Edges
See Offset Selected Element.

Adding and Subtracting Polygonal Shapes
You can use the pet palette to add to the shape of a polygonal element, or subtract new polygons from it. To add a new polygon to the existing one:

ArchiCAD 15 Help

513

Interaction

Select the polygon and click it either on an edge or a node. From the pet palette, choose the icon with the + sign (Add to Polygon).

Draw the new polygon shape. It must intersect with the selected one or at least they should have a common edge.

Click to finish drawing the new shape, which will be automatically added to the original one.

514

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

The process is the same for subtracting a shape from a polygon, but you will choose the icon with the - sign (Subtract from Polygon).

You can also use the Magic Wand for adding/subtracting a polygon shape. See Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

515

Interaction

Stretching with the Marquee Tool
You can stretch multiple polygons or linear elements along a particular vector by using the Marquee tool. To stretch elements inside a Marquee area: • Draw a Marquee so that the nodes or endpoints you want to stretch fall inside the Marquee. Any nodes you want to keep intact should be outside the Marquee. • Define a stretch vector: with the Marquee tool active, click on a node or endpoint inside the Marquee area, then click on a second point. • Alternatively, choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command, and then define the stretch vector by clicking any two different points. The shape of all linear elements that have one of their endpoints inside the Marquee area, and polygonal elements that have nodes inside the marquee area, will be stretched along this vector. Note: If you don’t want to stretch an element whose node is inside the Marquee, lock the element (select it, then use Edit > Locking > Lock; or lock the element’s layer.).

• • •

If all the nodes of a polygon are inside the Marquee area, the polygon will be dragged instead of stretched. Stretching nodes in a Marquee area is not available in the 3D Window. Columns, Objects and Lamps cannot be stretched with the Marquee. If any of their hotspots fall inside the Marquee area, the whole object/column will be dragged along when the Marquee area is repositioned.
ArchiCAD 15 Help

516

Interaction

When stretching Arcs or curved Walls with the Marquee, their central angle (i.e. the arc/chord ratio) will remain unchanged.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

517

Interaction

Stretch Height
In the 3D, Section/Elevation and IE windows, you can modify the height of selected elements graphically with Stretch height command of the pet palette.

Click a node of a selected element and choose the vertical stretch icon in the pet palette. A ghost contour of the element follows the cursor. Click to set the new height of the element.

518

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements
The Edit > Reshape > Resize command lets you enlarge or reduce selected elements using numeric or graphical input. This feature is available only in the Floor Plan and 3D windows, and - for 2D drawing elements only - in the Section/Elevation, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Resize dialog box offers additional options for resizing the thickness of Walls/Columns, GDL Objects, text elements, arrowheads and markers. 1. Select the elements you wish to transform and choose Resize.

2. In the appearing dialog box, enter a value into any one of the resize ratio fields. (Make sure the Define graphically checkbox is unchecked.)

• • •

Resize ratio: Use any one of the three ways to define the resize ratio you want. (If you enter a value in one field, the other two will be filled in automatically.) Resize wall, column thickness: For walls, columns and beams, the thickness will be resized as well as the length/height. Resize library parts: Any selected library parts will be resized. 519

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

• • 3. 4.

Resize all text entities: All texts and labels are resized. Resize all arrows and markers: The size of all arrows/markers are modified. Click OK. Click in the window to define which point or edge of the elements should remain in its original location. The transformation will be executed.

To perform the operation graphically: 1. Open the Resize dialog box. 2. Check the Define Graphically checkbox. 3. Draw a transformation vector to define both the resizing ratio and the location of the resized elements. Note: Resizing does not affect grouped elements. To resize grouped elements, ungroup them first or choose Suspend Groups. (See Group Elements for more information.)

520

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Splitting Elements
You can split many selected elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, Slabs, Roofs, Meshes, Fill and Zone Polygons, Lines, Arcs, Polylines and Splines) along a line segment, arc or element edge. The Split command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. Note: You cannot split a polygon - such as a Roof element - with an arc. Note: You can split a Curtain Wall with another Curtain Wall, but you must use the Split Curtain Wall command. See Split Intersecting Curtain Walls. 1. Select the elements you wish to split. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Split command.

3. Draw a temporary splitting line, or click on an existing Line, Arc, Wall or polygon edge. 4. Click on either side of the splitting line/arc/edge with the Eyeball cursor. Note: When splitting walls, the split takes place at the point where the splitting line intersects with the reference line(s) of the selected elements. 5. Elements on the clicked side will remain selected, while elements on the other side will be deselected. The selected group of elements can be edited in the usual ways.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

521

Interaction

If the selected element is intersected by an element in several locations, the Split command will split the selected element at every intersection point.

Splitting is also available in the 3D Window. You can split the selected element with a vertical plane into two segments. This feature works the same way as on the Floor Plan. The splitting line is drawn in the plane of the User Origin. Note: When no elements are selected, the Split command will let you split a wall at the clicked location along any of its sides or reference line.

522

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Adjusting Elements
Use the Adjust command to extend or trim the endpoints of selected Walls, Beams, Arcs and Lines to a Line, Arc segment or element edge. Note: It is also possible to adjust Roof planes to each other or to other elements: see Intersect Single-plane Roofs and Cropping with a Remote Roof. 1. Select the elements you wish to adjust. 2. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Adjust command. 3. Draw a line segment, or click an existing line, wall, polygon edge or arc/circle. The endpoints of the selected walls and lines will be adjusted (lengthened or shortened) to meet the drawn or clicked line or curve. Only those elements will be affected that intersect (or would intersect) with the chosen line/arc/edge.

The Adjust command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. In 3D view, you can adjust the selected Wall or Beam to a vertical plane.

Split and Adjust Shortcut
A simple shortcut lets you adjust short elements and split long ones by the same edge.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

523

Interaction

1. Select all the elements that you wish to split or adjust. The active tool must be one of those that created the selected elements.

2. Press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key and click the edge you wish to use for splitting/adjusting.

3. The operation is immediately performed. All transformed elements will remain selected.

524

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Create a Fillet or Chamfer
Use the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command to fillet or chamfer the intersection of two straight lines or walls, or the corner(s) of a polygon element. To open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box: • Select the two lines, or the polygon element. • Choose the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, or • if the selected element is a polygon, choose the Fillet/Chamfer icon from the pet palette.

Choose either Fillet or Chamfer: • Fillet joins the endpoints of two straight segments endpoints with an Arc.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

525

Interaction

Chamfer joins the endpoints of two straight segments with a straight segment, cutting off corners.

Enter a radius for the fillet/chamfer. (The chamfer does not have a radius, but it will be drawn as the chord of arcs of the specified radius.) Note: If filleting the arc with the current radius would extend any of the neighboring vertices, the radius will be limited automatically so that the filleting arc contains the closer neighboring vertex. Click OK. Note: The Fillet, Chamfer and Intersect commands are not effective on grouped elements, unless Suspend Groups is on (See Suspend Groups.) Lines are adjusted depending on whether or not they intersect; if they do not, a new length is determined in order to make an intersection or to meet the fillet or chamfer.

Apply to All Corners
To apply the Fillet or Chamfer to all corners of the selected polygon, check the Apply to All Corners checkbox.

526

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Note: This checkbox is applicable only if the selected element is a polygon. It is not available if you have selected two separate elements. If you have selected a polygon and then the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, the checkbox is selected by default and uneditable; the fillet/chamfer will apply to all nodes. To apply the Fillet/Chamfer to a single node of the polygon, click on that node and use the pet palette command to open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

527

Interaction

Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s)
You can trim an element by simply removing the part extending beyond its intersection point with another element, or even cut out a part of the element between two intersection points. Trimmable elements are: Walls, Beams, Lines, Circles, Arcs, Polyline and Splines. To trim an element take the following steps: • Choose the Edit > Reshape > Trim command, or press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key. • The Scissors cursor appears. Move it to a trimmable element and click the segment you want to trim. Note: In the 3D window, you can also click on a Wall or Beam surface for trimming. • The clicked part of the element between the two nearest intersection points will be deleted. For example, here we will trim part of the beam - the part that falls between the first two walls on the left.

Trim Elements to Roof or Shell Cropping with a Remote Roof
528
ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Adding Element Nodes
You can add new nodes to elements using the pet palette. Adding a node to a straight linear element creates an additional element. Adding a node to a polygon-type element increases the number of its edges. In the 3D Window, you can add nodes only to polygonal elements. To add a node to an element: 1. Select the element. 2. Click an edge of the element to bring up the pet palette. 3. Choose the Insert new node icon.

4. Click to define the location of the new node.

To insert a new node without moving it, double-click on a polygon edge. (The Insert node option must be active in the pet palette.) Note: You cannot add a new node to a curved element or segment; if you click Insert new node on a curved element, the curved element will be straightened out.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

529

Interaction

Move Nodes
With the Move node icon of the pet palette, you can reposition the node of a polygon type element.

The connected edges will follow. • You can eliminate a node by merging it into one of its neighbors.

If you merge a node to a remote node (that is, not a neighboring one), the smaller part of the polygon will be deleted.

530

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

If repositioning a node eliminates one of the connecting edges, the other node of that edge will also be deleted, together with the corresponding part of its own other connecting edge.

If you reposition a node so that the polygon edges intersect each other (but no connecting edge is eliminated), the polygon will be split.

When repositioning a bent edge’s endpoint, the arc segment will be stretched in a way that its central angle (the arc-chord ratio) remains the same.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

531

Interaction

With the Fillet function (use the Fillet/Chamfer pet palette icon), you can replace a polygon node by a tangential arc whose radius can be set in the Fillet/Chamfer Radius dialog box.

For a detailed description, see Create a Fillet or Chamfer.

532

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Curve/Straighten Element Edge
With the pet palette’s Curve edge function, you can curve a segment of a straight element - such as a wall - by dragging its edge or reference line.

The resulting arc will cross the two endpoints of the clicked edge and the point that has been dragged.

Note: If the bent segment of a polygon intersects any of the other polygon edges, ArchiCAD will regularize the polygon’s shape, which may result in cutting the polygon into several parts.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

533

Interaction

To straighten a curved element edge, select the curved element, then select the Insert New Node command from the pet palette.

534

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Explode into Current View
Choosing Edit > Reshape > Explode into Current View will turn selected elements (Floor Plan and other 2D windows only) into basic elements (Lines without arrowheads, Circles, Arcs, Elliptic arcs, Splines, unframed Fills, single-line Texts). You have the option to delete or retain the original elements.

Note: If Autogroup is On, the exploded elements will be created in grouped mode. Note that exploding a construction element with the first option (Keep drawing primitives only) means that it no longer exists as a construction element. Consequently, it will disappear from other model views (model-type Sections, Elevations, IEs, 3D Documents). A third option appears if the exploded Drawing contains layers (that is, if it is a DWG file or if it is derived from an ArchiCAD view):

Keep Drawing primitives on elements’ original layers (Original layers are the same layer as the Drawing’s layer). If you uncheck this box, you may avoid creating large numbers of unneeded layers in ArchiCAD. After an Explode function, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the “exploded” lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. Some examples: • Slabs, Roofs and Meshes are decomposed into lines

ArchiCAD 15 Help

535

Interaction

Walls and Columns are decomposed into Lines and Fills (Doors and Windows inserted into Walls are also exploded). • Doors and Windows (if selected without the Wall they are placed into) are decomposed like GDL Objects into 2D elements and are replaced by empty hole type openings. • Dimensions are decomposed into Lines, Texts and the basic elements of arrowheads (Lines, Circles, Arcs, Fills). • Polylines are decomposed into Lines and Arcs. • GDL Objects are decomposed into basic 2D drawing elements. Explode has no effect in the following cases: • In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, cut construction elements cannot be exploded • Section/Elevation/IE lines and Cameras • Basic 2D elements.

536

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Create Element Duplicates
You will often need to create exact duplicates of a particular element. Often, the simplest way to duplicate is to use Copy/Paste. See Basic Editing Operations.

Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories
The Story Settings dialog box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story. See Story Settings Dialog Box. It is also easy to use graphical editing to drag, rotate, or mirror one or more copies of a selected element, or to use the multiply function. These are described in the following sections:

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies Multiply Elements Offset Selected Element

ArchiCAD 15 Help

537

Interaction

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies
You can also create exact duplicates of an element inside the same project by dragging one or several copies of the selected element. The selection can be made with either the Arrow tool or the Marquee tool. • To Drag, Rotate, or Mirror one copy of an element, select the element and choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu.

Another way is to choose the plain Drag/Rotate/Mirror command from the pet palette, then press Ctrl (Windows) or Alt/Opt (MacOS). (This adds a small + sign to the cursor; press Ctrl again to undo the Copy feature). A copy of the selected element will be dragged, rotated or mirrored. Click to place the copy, which will now be selected instead of the original.

To Drag or Rotate multiple copies of an element, select the element, choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu (or use Ctrl + Alt (Windows) or Cmd + Opt/Alt (MacOS) as a shortcut). You will see a “++” sign appear. Click the element to

538

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

drag or rotate its copy to its new position. You can place any number of copies. Double-click to finish placing copies.

Note: When rotating copies, they will all be placed along the same rotation axis. This feature works in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. In Section/Elevation/IE windows, the feature works on added drawing elements and Doors and Windows (dragging only). In Detail Drawings, you can use it on any drawing elements. In the 3D Window, Drag/Rotate/Mirror is available only for added Drawing elements. To create one or more copies of an element that are offset from (rather than exact duplicates of) the original: See Offset Selected Element.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

539

Interaction

Multiply Elements
If you need to create a number of identical elements inside the same project following a definite pattern, for example at equal distances from each other, use the Edit > Move > Multiply command, or the Multiply command from the pet palette. (In Section-type windows, you cannot create new construction elements, so the Multiply command is available only for 2D elements such as lines.) Multiply creates any number of exact copies of selected elements on the current story, using one the following methods: • Drag multiplies the copies along a straight path defined by the reference line. • Rotate multiplies the copies along an arc, using the angle specified in the reference arc. • Elevate stacks the copies with a vertical displacement. Note that this option is grayed when working in a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window. • Matrix will place the copies of the selected element(s) to a matrix defined by two perpendicular reference lines. When choosing the Matrix option, you need to define the number of copies for both the first and the second stroke of the matrix. Two parameters for the vertical displacement can also be set.

In the lower half of the dialog box, set the following options: • Number of copies: Enter the number of copies in the multiply operation. • Vertical displacement: If you are multiplying an element in a 2D window, use this field to enter a value (if any) that is added to the elevation of each subsequent copy of the multiplied object, even during dragging, rotating or arraying the copies.

540

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

If you want such a vertical displacement when multiplying the element(s) in the 3D window, click the Vertical Displacement: On radio button.

When you close the Multiply dialog box and then carry out the Multiply operation, you will define the vertical displacement vector graphically, as shown with this multiplied and rotated wall:

If you are using a vertical displacement (in either a 2D or 3D window) as part of the Multiply operation, the Set Home Story by Elevation checkbox appears: if you check it, newly created elements will be assigned a Home Story based on their respective story locations. If you uncheck it, new elements will have the same Home Story as the original element you are multiplying.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

541

Interaction

See Set Home Story by Elevation.

• • •

Increment spaces the copies by an incremental distance equal to the length of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute spaces the copies evenly between the start and endpoints of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute-1 will also space the copies evenly between the starting point and the endpoint of the reference line or arc, but the distance is divided by the Number of copies + 1 and no copy will be placed at the endpoint. Spread will place the copies of the multiplied element to equal distance from each other along the reference line or arc all the way until the reference is drawn. In this case, instead of defining the number of copies, you set the spacing in length or in degrees between two neighboring copies.

542

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

When you have defined your choices, click OK in the Multiply dialog box and perform the operation by dragging the cursor to the desired location.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

543

Interaction

Drag & Drop
The Drag & Drop technique is familiar to both MacOS and Windows users as a shortcut for opening files or for copying and pasting elements of different types into Windows of the same application or between applications. Since ArchiCAD has many different Window types, the smart implementation of Drag & Drop allows you to copy elements from Windows by pasting data in the receiving Window. You can also drag & drop GDL Objects (Library Parts) from GDL Object Web Plug-in enabled web pages directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or to the Embedded Objects list of the Library Manager dialog box. Data can only be dropped into a Window if the receiving Window can accommodate the dragged data type.

Dragging and Dropping Text
The following possibilities exist for transferring text: • From any ArchiCAD Text Window or from a Text Window of any other Drag & Dropcapable application to any other ArchiCAD Text Window • From any Text Window to any 2D Window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, Library Part 2D Symbol) with the default parameters • Moving or copying text within the same Text Window • Creating text type clipping files in the File Manager • Pasting clipping files into a text type Window • Dropping plain text files into a text type Window (with some restrictions)

Dragging and Dropping Drawings
The easiest way to add a Drawing from an external ArchiCAD file is to open the external project structure in the Navigator, select a View or Drawing in the Navigator, and drag it onto the Layout in the Layout Window of the current project. For more information, see Placing Drawings Onto the Layout.

Dragging and Dropping Pictures
The following possibilities exist for transferring picture type data: • Dropping a picture file into a GDL Object Preview Window • Dropping a picture file into the Floor Plan to paste it as a Figure • Creating picture type clipping files in the MacOS Finder • Pasting clipping files into the GDL Object Preview Window

Dragging and Dropping GDL Object Files
You can drag and drop GDL Object files from the MacOS Finder or the file manager directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or the Embedded Objects folder of the Library Manager. Dropping an Object into the Floor Plan activates the corresponding tool in the Toolbox and the newly placed element becomes the default element for the given Object type. 544
ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

• •

It is possible to place several GDL Objects at the same time using Drag & Drop. Windows and Doors can only be dropped into a Wall.

Dragging and Dropping Floor Plan Elements
If there is a selection on the Floor Plan defined either with a marquee area or through individual selection with the Arrow, pressing the mouse button and dragging the cursor out of the ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window will initiate a Drag & Drop operation. The following can be copied: • Floor Plan elements (in module format) • Selected elements on the Floor Plan in picture format (for example, into the Project Preview Window) See Project Preview. • The 2D and/or the 3D script of the selected elements in text format 3D GDL script is only generated if the drop is made into the 3D Script window. The 2D script of the selected element can be dropped into any other text type window.

Dragging and Dropping DWG/DXF Objects
Drag & Drop is available as a way to download DWG/DXF objects from the web. A special “idrop” technique is also available for Windows only. For more information, see Opening with i-Drop (Windows Only).

ArchiCAD 15 Help

545

Interaction

Parameter Transfer
Parameter Transfer is available: • on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Document and 3D windows for most element types • In Section/Elevation/IE and Detail/Worksheet windows, for drawing elements only

Topics in this section:
• Parameter Transfer Commands • Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another • Pick Up Element’s Parameters to Use as Default • Inject Default Settings to Placed Element You can also use a form of Parameter transfer between two library parts of the same subtype. See Parameter Transfer Between Objects.

Parameter Transfer Commands
Use the parameter transfer shortcuts: Pick Up Parameters: Alt Inject Parameters: Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS) Parameter Transfer commands are also available in the Standard Toolbar and at Edit > Element Settings > Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters.

Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another
Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to transfer. (The Element Information Highlight tells you which element you are focusing on.) 1. Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. Note: It makes no difference whether the eyedropper icon is full or half-full, as long as it is not empty.

2. Click the element. 3. Now move your cursor to the element to which you want to transfer these parameters.

546

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

4. Press Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) cursor.

5. Click to transfer the parameters.

Notes: The transferred attributes will also be loaded into the Find & Select Palette’s corresponding fields, provided that the Find & Select Palette is open during the parameter transfer. (See Find and Select Elements.) The transferred parameters will be the default choices when opening any of the corresponding Attributes dialog boxes (Line Types, Pens & Colors, Fill Types, Materials, Composites, Zone Categories).

Pick Up Element’s Parameters to Use as Default
1. Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to pick up. (The Element Information Highlight tells you which element you are focusing on.) 2. Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. The clicked element’s parameters are now the Tool’s default settings. The next such element you place will use these settings.

Inject Default Settings to Placed Element
1. Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to change to the default settings. (The Element Information Highlight tells you which element you are focusing on.)

ArchiCAD 15 Help

547

Interaction

2. Press CTRL+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) icon.

3. Click the element. Its parameters now change to the element’s Default Settings.

548

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Group Elements
To create a Group, select elements and do one of the following: • Use the Edit > Grouping > Group command • Use the shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd + G • Click the Group command from the Arrange Elements toolbar.

Several groups can, in turn, be grouped together into a single higher-level group. Grouped elements can then be selected and modified as a group, (unless you temporarily suspend the group to allow editing of individual elements). See Suspend Groups. Grouped elements are distinguished by their large, empty selection dots. If you select several groups simultaneously, each group’s selection dots will have a different color.

The following element types cannot be grouped: any of the Dimension types, Zones, Labels, Section/Elevation/IE lines, Cameras. Doors and Windows can only be grouped along with the Wall they are placed into.

Suspend Groups
You may need to perform an operation on only one particular element in a group. In this case, ungrouping them all is burdensome, since you will have to select all the elements again to recreate the group after you have finished the operation. The solution is to temporarily suspend groups by choosing the Suspend Group toggle icon in the Standard Toolbar, or at Edit > Grouping > Suspend Groups (shortcut: Alt/Opt+G).

(The Suspend Groups icon is also available in the Control Box.)
ArchiCAD 15 Help

549

Interaction

By activating Suspend Groups, you can select and modify grouped elements separately. Activating Suspend Groups means that ALL groups are temporarily rendered inactive: single elements can be selected and edited individually, even if they are part of a complex group hierarchy. To re-activate the Group function, just toggle Suspend Groups to OFF again. Note: To change the settings of a single element in a group without using Suspend Groups, use Parameter Transfer (see Inject Default Settings to Placed Element). This parameter transfer will affect only the clicked element, and not the rest of the elements in the group.

Ungroup
To make all elements constituting a group independent again, choose Edit > Grouping > Ungroup (shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd+Shift+G). Ungroup is also available from the Arrange Elements toolbar.) • Clicking Ungroup with the Suspend Groups toggle ON will detach any selected elements from their groups and break down all groups into single independent elements, no matter how complex the nested grouping is. • Clicking Ungroup with the Suspend Groups toggle OFF, for a selection consisting of lowerlevel groups, the selected group will first be divided into the sub-groups it comprises. Thus, you may need to repeat the Edit > Grouping> Ungroup command several times before an element can be selected and edited individually.

Autogroup
Edit > Grouping > Autogroup, a toggle command (shortcut: Alt+G), lets you group elements at the same time you create them (instead of creating elements first and then grouping them). The Autogroup toggle command is also available in the Standard Toolbar and in the Arrange Elements toolbar. If the Autogroup command is on, chained polygonal and rectangular elements will automatically be created as a group. Components of exploded elements will also be grouped. Autogroup is activated by default.

Operations on Grouped Elements
The following operations can be performed simultaneously on all the elements constituting the group: • Selection • The following Edit menu functions: Drag, Rotate, Mirror, Multiply • Delete Note: If any elements in the selected group are on a hidden layer, they will also be deleted! Other operations (such as Unify and Fillet/Chamfer) can be performed on individual elements only, after the elements are ungrouped or the group is suspended.

Groups and Layers
Grouping elements does not change their attribute assignments, which means that each element remains on its own Layer. 550
ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

If some elements of a Group are on a hidden Layer: • Elements on the hidden Layer will be invisible. • When editing the group (by drag, rotate, mirror, multiply, delete), elements on hidden layers will also change their position - or will be deleted - along with the rest of the group.

If some elements of a Group are in a locked Layer (see Lock/Unlock Elements): • Elements on the locked Layer will be visible on the Floor Plan, but they will cause the entire group to be locked. The group will not be affected by drag, rotate, mirror and multiply. • When selecting the group, all of its elements will be selected, but with grey dots. Use the Suspend Groups command to edit those grouped items that are not in a locked layer.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

551

Interaction

Lock/Unlock Elements
The Edit > Locking > Lock command locks the selected items to prevent them from being accidentally modified. Locked elements can still be selected and used for relative construction; Guide Lines are still available; and you can pick up their settings through parameter transfer (see Parameter Transfer Between Objects). Note: Locking a layer will have the same effect - it locks all elements which are located on that layer. The Edit > Locking > Unlock command unlocks the selected item(s). With the Unlock All command, you can unlock all locked elements, even if they are not selected. You can also use the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar for these actions.

552

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

Display Order
When drawing a Project with ArchiCAD, overlapping elements will be drawn according to a specified stacking order. By default, elements are stacked in an order typically used in architectural drawings. By default, stacking order is determined by element classes, of which there are six. Regardless of the sequence in which elements are placed, those in the first class will be placed in the foreground, second class in the level behind it, and so on.

The element classes are in descending order of class: 1. Annotation (Text, Labels, all Dimension types, Zone Stamps) 2. 2D artwork (Lines, Circles, Splines, Hotspots) 3. Library Parts (Objects, Lamps, Stairs) 4. 3D structures (Walls, Beams, Slabs, Doors, Windows, Columns, Roofs, Meshes) 5. 2D polygons (Fills, Zone Polygons) 6. Figures

Display Order of Overlapping Elements
Overlapping within the same class depends on the order in which you place the elements, although walls with the same fills will display clean intersections. When selecting overlapping elements within the same class, you can select them in sequence using Tab. See Selection of Overlapping Elements.

Custom Stacking Order
ArchiCAD’s default stacking order is appropriate in most cases, but you may wish to place elements in a different overlapping position. For instance, for a Fill to overlap a 2D element or an Object, a set of commands in Edit > Display Order hierarchical menu or the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar let you override the default stacking order element by element.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

553

Interaction

On newly placed elements, the commands work as follows: • Bring Forward: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all the unchanged elements of their own and any lower classes, but will still stay below the elements of higher classes. • Bring to Front: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all other existing elements. • Send Backward: On this command, selected element(s) will be overlapped by (sent behind) all the unchanged elements of their own and higher classes, but will overlap the elements of lower classes. • Send to Back: On this command, selected element(s) will become overlapped by all other existing elements. • Reset Default Order: This command restores the default overlapping order described previously.

Mechanism of the Stacking Order
Both the default stacking order and the customization commands are based on two ordering mechanisms: classes and stack levels. ArchiCAD places elements in 14 stack levels. Each level can contain any of the element types. The final stacking order you see on screen and on printouts is based on stack level and element class. All elements on a level will overlap elements on lower stack levels, regardless of class. New elements are always placed into the preferred stack level of their own class. Stack level preference is as follows: 1-4: Void by default 5: Annotation 6: 2D Artwork 7: Library Parts 8: 3D Structures 9: 2D Polygons 10: Figures 11-14: Void by default By default, the upper and lower 4 stack levels are empty. You can bring or send elements of any type into these stack levels with the Edit > Display Order commands detailed above. For example, bringing a Fill forward from level 9 to level 8, which is the default level of structures, means that the Fill will overlap all the unchanged fills remaining on level 9, but will still be overlapped by all the unchanged structures on level 8.

554

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

If you bring it forward again, it will overlap all the remaining structures. However, it will still stay below all of the unchanged Library Parts on level 7. This way, you can move it forward until it overlaps the higher levels.

Of course you can bring other elements forward as well, which will again overlap the changed Fill.

The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands move the selected elements until they overlap (or are overlapped by) all of the existing elements. This is not necessarily the 1st or the 14th level, which means that in most cases it will still be possible to place other elements above or below them. Text or Dimensions brought up to the top stack level cannot be overlapped. For example, if you want a Fill to overlap them, you will have to send the Text one level backwards. If you attempt to move elements forward that are already placed on the top level, or to move elements backward from the bottom of the stack, you will be alerted. When moving several elements placed at different stack levels forward or backward, each element will only move one level. When bringing to front or sending to back elements of different types, they will overlap (or be overlapped by) all existing elements, and will retain their stacking order in relation to each other. Zones and Fills are compound elements consisting of components of two different classes (Zone Polygons and Zone Stamps, Fills and their area texts). These two components always keep their order according to their classes, for instance area texts always overlap their fills. Although you can change their overlapping order separately, Fills and Zone Fills can never overlap their own area texts and zone stamps and vice versa, forcing the other component to move with them if necessary. The stacking order will be preserved on printer or raster plotter output. In DXF/DWG output, all elements will be transparent, meaning that hidden or partially overlapped elements will be entirely visible.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

555

Interaction

Magic Wand
About the Magic Wand How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings

556

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

About the Magic Wand
The Magic Wand saves you work by finding and tracing a linear or polygon shape from among existing elements, and then generating a new element based on the polygon. The Magic Wand lets you create special shapes that are not available for that particular tool type or would be tedious to construct segment by segment. Since it creates polygonal shapes by nature, the Magic Wand will ignore geometry method settings (such as Rotated Rectangle) for the current tool. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is defined in Magic Wand Settings. The Magic Wand works in both the 2D and 3D Windows and recognizes the following element types: Wall, Beam, Slab, Roof, Curtain Wall, Fill, Mesh, Line, Arc, Polyline, and Spline. (In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Magic Wand recognizes only 2D drawingtype elements). The Magic Wand recognizes elements that are locked, displayed from remote stories or a Trace Reference, reserved by others or outside your workspace.

Related Topics: How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings

ArchiCAD 15 Help

557

Interaction

How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand
1. From the Toolbox, select the type of the new element you want to create. 2. Activate the Magic Wand by doing one of the following: • Press the Spacebar • Click the Magic Wand icon in the Control Box Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. • Choose Design > Outline Polygon with Magic Wand The Magic Wand has three different shapes for identifying: • nodes

edges

empty space and surfaces

3. Click with the Magic Wand active. It will automatically find and trace a polygon shape. • If you click on an edge or node, the Magic Wand creates a polygon by tracing that element and/or finding an element chain: it runs along that edge and traces the element chains whose endpoints fall within that edge. For example, activate the Roof tool (Multi-plane method) and click with the Magic Wand on the edge of the Wall to instantly create a Roof that matches the Wall polygon.

558

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Interaction

If you click in empty space or on a surface, the Magic Wand searches for and traces the closed geometric area formed by the nearest elements (whether chained together or merely intersecting), and generates the resulting polygon. For example, activate the Fill tool, then click with the Magic Wand inside the empty area denoted by the curved line, to create a Fill of that shape.

You can refine the Magic Wand function by selecting one or more elements. In this case, the Magic Wand will only take the selected elements into account when searching for chained elements or a bounded area. 4. The new elements are generated. • The new elements are not linked to the originals and can be manipulated independently. • If the original shapes are superfluous, you can delete them. • If Offset or Multi-Offset has been activated, you can complete the offset function after the Magic Wand has created the new polygon. • If you are creating a single Roof, you must first draw a pivot line and define the pitch before creating the polygon with the Magic Wand. • If you are creating a Fill with a custom origin, you will first generate the polygon with the Magic Wand, then draw the fill orientation vector. All of the characteristics of the new elements are determined by the current default settings of the corresponding tool. You should always check that these are correct either before or after using the Magic Wand, especially if the elements are intended to have a specific relationship to each other, such as a roof resting on a Wall.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

559

Interaction

Using the Magic Wand in 3D
In 3D, the Magic Wand feature works as in the Floor Plan, but instead of using only the top view of the elements, each element is considered the way it lies in space. When searching for the contours of the new element, ArchiCAD will only look at the elements that are actually intersected by the clicked plane. The clicked plane is always the horizontal plane through the clicked surface point or through the User Origin (e.g., when clicking inside polygon walls or beams into space).

560

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Subtraction always creates a valid shape. Choose the “Subtract from Polygon” icon in the pet palette. Select the polygon from which you wish to subtract another shape. Verify that the operation has been performed by deleting or dragging away the other polygon or viewing the shape in 3D. see Magic Wand Settings.Interaction Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Instead of defining a new polygon. 2. Or select the polygon and note the contour around its hole. For more information. you can use the Magic Wand to add or subtract the shape of an existing polygon (of the same or a different element type). Move the cursor onto the polygon that you want to subtract and activate the Magic Wand (press the spacebar). but it lets you temporarily create a self-intersecting shape. 1. 4. Note: Drawing a polygon hole by clicking inside the selected element’s boundary with its tool active is similar to subtraction. ArchiCAD 15 Help 561 . 3. Click to complete. In this example we want to subtract a complex polygonal shape from a slab.

Interaction Magic Wand Settings Use the Options > Magic Wand Settings command to open this dialog box. Circles and Splines. In this case. 562 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • Best Match: Curved segments (when applicable) will follow as best as possible the natural form of Circles. • Segments Along Circles: Define the number of segments along a Circle. Arcs and Splines. • Segments Along Arcs: Define the number of segments along an Arc. • Deviation from Curves: Enter a value to define the maximum deviation of the polygon from the original curved element. • Segment Length: Enter a value to define the segment length for transformations resulting in segments of uniform length. Note: If you choose the Best Match method and real curves cannot be created. • Prefer Linear Segments: Only linear segments are used. arcs will be transformed into a number of segments corresponding to the part of the circle they represent. With the two radio buttons on the right. ArchiCAD will try to approximate curves in the hierarchical order represented in this dialog box. The four radio buttons on the left allow you to choose from a set of options to approximate curves with linear segments. you can choose between two tracing methods. the approximation is based on the state of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs.

Interaction Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings About Trace References Choosing a Trace Reference Show/Hide Trace Reference Set Display/Element Visibility Options for Trace Reference Move Reference Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying Activate Reference Rebuild Trace Reference Compare Reference with Active Trace & Reference Palette ArchiCAD 15 Help 563 .

you can opt to display two different views concurrently in any model or layout window: • the Active Content . Views. Three item types can be chosen as a Reference: 1. 2. Any view in the Navigator’s View Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The Reference Viewpoint will always reflect the current settings of the active window. the Reference won’t change. The Reference’s view settings are independent of the active window. Worksheet And in the Layout Window: • Layout. The Trace Reference is essentially a temporary editing aid that is tied to the currently active window. on top of or underneath the currently Active content. if you change the layer combination in the active window. This acts as a kind of underlay. Viewpoints. Any item in the Navigator’s Project Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. you will use any of the following as a Reference: • Floor Plan • Section. its Reference is no longer available.Interaction About Trace References In ArchiCAD. in Model Windows. Layouts (and their drawings). making it easy to compare multiple model views/drawings on the same screen. Elevation. If a view is deleted from the view map. optionally placed alongside. 3. For example. Interior Elevation. The chosen Reference appears in a predefined default position (appropriate to the type of the Active Content and the Reference item). Typically. 3D Document • Detail.the actual model or drawing you are currently working on (“Active”) • the Trace Reference (“Reference”). Master Layout 564 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Detail. as you navigate among your project windows. 3D Document. ArchiCAD 15 Help 565 . each Section in your project can have a Reference of a different color and filter different elements). Layout and Master Layout can have its own unique Reference. Worksheet. Elevation. A Section shown as a Reference next to another Section: A Floor Plan shown as a Reference beneath a Detail: Any given window can display only one Reference at a time. However. Interior Elevation.Interaction For example. Reference settings are saved along with the window (for example. you can draw a roof detail in a Detail window (the Active Content) while seeing the relevant wall section as a Reference. you can display a different Reference in each: • The Floor Plan window has a single current Reference for all stories • Each Section.

and snap points with elements in the Reference to edit Active elements. then transfer the parameters to an element in the Active. Consequently: • You can use the Pick Up Parameters command (Alt +C) on Reference elements. such as the list of recent References and recently chosen Reference colors. though logical default Reference settings for each combination of Active/Reference views will usually align them correctly for the particular context. 566 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The cursor is sensitive to elements in the Reference. When you place a Drawing onto a Layout. On-Screen View Options (View menu) affect the Reference just as they affect the Active. you can opt to print the currently visible Reference as well. All user-defined Reference-related parameters. When using the Print command to output a model window or a Layout. are saved together with the project file. • You can use the Trim command. The user can offset and rotate the Reference as needed. the Magic Wand.Interaction References are also saved with the project file. the Drawing content will not include the Reference.

Select the item from the Navigator and right-click to bring up its context menu. Browse for Trace Reference Click the “Browse for Trace Reference” sub-command from one of these locations: • View > Trace Options > Choose Reference > Browse for Trace Reference • the “Choose Reference” command in the Trace Reference drop-down menu of the Standard Toolbar ArchiCAD 15 Help 567 . Choose Show as Trace Reference.Interaction Choosing a Trace Reference Use one of the following methods to activate and choose a Trace Reference. Topics in this section: Show Navigator Item as Trace Reference Browse for Trace Reference Choose Trace Reference from Menu Choose Reference from Trace & Reference Palette The “Choose Reference” List Show Navigator Item as Trace Reference 1. 2.

) Choose the desired Trace Reference and click OK to display it as a Trace. This is a Navigator-like structure.Interaction • the chooser button at the top of the Trace & Reference Palette. View Properties are also displayed. 568 ArchiCAD 15 Help . with only those items available which are eligible to use as a Trace. The Choose Trace Reference dialog box appears. (In the View Map.

Activate the Trace Reference function in the Standard Toolbar by clicking the Trace button. (Click the menu’s Trace icon to activate it. See also The “Choose Reference” List. then choose an item from the Choose Reference list.) 2. Click the drop-down Trace Reference menu from the Standard Toolbar. The same commands are available by right-clicking in the window to access the Trace commands: ArchiCAD 15 Help 569 . The same commands are available from the View menu: 1. Activate the Trace toggle in the View menu.Interaction Choose Trace Reference from Menu 1. Access the Choose Reference list from View > Trace Options. 2. See also The “Choose Reference” List.

Click the one you need to show it as a Trace Reference.: This command is at the top of the list.If the active window is a Model-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited). .If the active window is a Floor Plan: the Choose Reference list includes three possibilities that are relative to the current story. Other relevant References. Browse for Trace Reference. .If the active window is a Drawing-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the relevant Model Section/Elevation. The Choose Trace dialog box appears. Recent References are listed next.. 2. 570 ArchiCAD 15 Help . .If the active window is an Interior Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes all viewpoints of the IE group (if any).Interaction Choose Reference from Trace & Reference Palette Click the button atop the Trace & Reference Palette to access a list of possible Reference items. Previous Story will always show the last story you were on as a Reference. then click OK to show it as a Trace Reference. if any. . showing the eligible Navigator items..If the active window is a Detail or Worksheet: the Choose Reference list includes their source viewpoints. Click the one you need. The “Choose Reference” List The “Choose Reference” list is dynamic . 3. . Use this if the Trace you need is not shown in the list. so that the Reference will change as you navigate among stories: Above or Below Current Story will always show the story above (or below) the current story as a Reference. See also The “Choose Reference” List. follow. plus the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited).the appearing choices depend on the content of the active window: 1.

Detail or Worksheet) have no model source. ArchiCAD 15 Help 571 . 5. their “Choose Reference” list shows the viewpoint itself. it will include any manual transformations (drag.Interaction Note: Independent viewpoints (e. Elevation. an independent Section. .g. Entire Model Display: This option will display the current view/viewpoint as a Trace Reference in Entire Model Display form.If the active window is a Layout: the Choose Reference list includes the source view (if available) of the placed Drawings. rotate) which the user applied the last time he/she showed this Reference. If you choose a recent Reference. Next in the “Choose Reference” list: any Layouts containing drawings that originated with the current viewpoint. 4.

• in the View menu • in the Trace & Reference Palette See Trace & Reference Palette.right-click in an empty space. The Trace toggle button is available: • in the Standard Toolbar • in the context menu of any window .Interaction Show/Hide Trace Reference Click the Trace toggle button to show or hide the Trace Reference in the current window. 572 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

See also Trace & Reference Palette.) Use the controls in the top half of this palette to set the Reference’s color and element visibility options. Change you make here apply to the Reference of the current window only. However. or choose Trace & Reference from the list of Trace Reference commands. to apply the settings in this pop-up to all References in the project. first open the Trace & Reference Palette. ArchiCAD 15 Help 573 . (Use Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference.Interaction Set Display/Element Visibility Options for Trace Reference To set the color of the Reference and the visibility of elements on the Reference. click the Apply Settings to All References button.

or from the Trace & Reference palette. not the Reference’s. • Use this icon to drag the Reference to another location.Interaction Move Reference These commands are accessible from the list of Reference commands. • Use this icon to rotate the Reference. See also Trace & Reference Palette.) 574 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and from the Standard Toolbar’s pop-up list of Reference commands. Note: The same commands are available from the context menu by right-clicking into any window showing a Reference. In the image below. • Use this icon if you want to reset the Reference to its original default position after you have moved it. a Section viewpoint is displayed as a Reference and rotated alongside the Floor Plan that contains the Section marker: Drag/Rotate commands applied to the Reference will be reflected in the Tracker’s coordinate data (coordinate data are calculated according to the Active’s coordinate system.

and paste into the Worksheet window. copy the updated parts you need. construction elements will be “exploded” into their 2D components. edit and/or copy the required elements. Note: This command is not available if a Drawing Section is active and its own Model-based Section is the Reference. use the Switch Reference with Active command (from the list of Trace Reference commands. Select. display the Floor Plan as the Reference. identify the differences. However. use the “Switch Reference with Active” command and return to the original Active content. To update your Worksheet. This changes the Reference into the Active (now you can edit its elements).) See Trace & Reference Palette. Note: When pasting into a drawing-type window (such as a Worksheet). If you copied elements to the clipboard. by switching the Reference and Active views temporarily.Interaction Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying Elements on the Reference cannot be selected or edited. now you can paste these into the Active. ArchiCAD 15 Help 575 . For example. 6. switch Reference with Active. you can use the Switch Reference with Active command if you need to paste certain Reference elements into the Active view: First. for example. and the Active into a Reference. while the Floor Plan model has changed. you can select and edit elements in the Reference. 8. or the Trace & Reference palette. This workflow can be used. 7. if you are working in a Worksheet window. switch Reference and Active (again). Once again.

For example: The South Elevation is shown as Trace Reference under the Ground Floor Plan. 576 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the View menu or the context menu of an ArchiCAD window.) Activate Reference will change the active window to the Viewpoint that is currently the source of the Trace Reference. the program will switch to the South Elevation Viewpoint and no Reference will be shown. and from the list of Trace Reference commands (accessible from the Standard Toolbar. then no Reference will be shown. and Second Floor will be shown as Trace Reference. then the First Floor will be the active. If the current Reference definition has no meaning in the activated viewpoint. If you use the Activate Reference command.Interaction Activate Reference The Activate Reference command is available from View > Trace Options. If you activate the Reference. in turn. IF it applies and makes sense. This active window. will use the same Trace Reference definition that was previously set. For example: Ground Floor is active and Floor Above (First Floor) is set to be the Trace Reference.

See Trace & Reference Palette. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed. editing a model view will not necessarily rebuild the Reference. such as navigating to another window and panning inside a window. you must use the Rebuild Reference button. to avoid slowing down the program. because to avoid slowing down the program . it is possible that you make changes in the Active. However.Interaction Rebuild Trace Reference Use the Rebuild command (available from the Trace & Reference Palette or among the Trace Reference commands) to rebuild the Reference to reflect any changes in the source view. • If the Reference contains an Auto-update Drawing. the Reference will be rebuilt automatically as a result of certain other user actions. such a Reference will not be continuously rebuilt. ArchiCAD 15 Help 577 . even after you navigate or pan. yet these are not reflected in the Reference. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed.you have unchecked “Update Autorebuild Model Viewpoints continuously” in Options > Work Environment > More Options. In some cases. Note the following: • If the Reference is an Auto-Rebuild Model.

and you need additional help to see the differences clearly. You may want to set two sharply different. To access these functions. All the Compare functions can be used “on the fly” while editing your Active content. with no effect on output. Try them out to see which works best. For details on each control. Tip 1: Use Separate Colors for Active and Reference You can set separate display colors for the Reference and the Active content: a custom color for each. red and blue . or else retain the original colors. 578 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Each of the techniques below can be useful in visually comparing the Reference with the Active.Interaction Compare Reference with Active ArchiCAD provides several functions to help you identify and understand differences between the Reference and the Active content. especially when the Reference is on top of the Active content. from Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference. use the Trace & Reference Palette. see Trace & Reference Palette. custom colors for each of the views . You can use several of these functions at the same time to get the most accurate information. They are on-screen only functions.say. The best way to compare the two will depend on your particular task.to make it easy to distinguish one from the other. or vice versa.

This way you will “uncover” information that otherwise might have been covered up by a fill in the top view. use the pop-up icons (one each for Reference and Active) in the middle of the Palette. Note: Even if you’ve set separate colors. ArchiCAD 15 Help 579 . it may help to switch their display order. the background fills of one view may obscure the underlying elements in the other view. This switch has only a temporary effect and does not affect the settings of the model elements. Tip 2: Make Fills and Zones Transparent Note the Make Fills and Zones Transparent toggle at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette: activate this to make fills and zones transparent in both the Reference and Active views. Tip 3: Reverse Display Order of Reference and Active When comparing the Reference to the Active.Interaction To set the colors.

placing the Reference on top of the Active. with the Reference on one side and the Active on the other. Tip 5: Use the Splitter Bar to “Turn the Page” This function is useful for identifying differences between the Reference and Active when they overlap.Interaction Click the “Reference on Top” button at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette. Tip 4: Optimize Intensity of Reference vs. the effect will be to flash the Reference “on” and “off”. 580 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Then you can zoom in on these locations and analyze the differences. Active A simple way to make an initial visual comparison is to use the Intensity sliders of the Reference and Active. On screen. If your Reference was previously underneath the Active. and the Reference in a different color. Pull the Reference intensity slider back and forth. You will drag a Splitter bar across the window. The effect is like turning the “page” of an overlay to see what is beneath. allowing you to identify places on screen where there are differences from the Active View. this command will change them around. Note: This method works best if the Active is shown in its original colors.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 581 . click the Splitter icon from the Trace & Reference Palette. to create either a horizontal or vertical splitter bar.Interaction To activate the Splitter function. Four “splitter handles” appear. Choose any one of them and move it in a perpendicular direction. one on each edge of the screen.

and you want to quickly check what is on the view underneath. 582 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The cursor changes to the familiar hand shape. Click again. to move it “out of the way”). the content on either side of the splitter changes dynamically. Tip 6: Move the Reference Over Temporarily (Displace Reference) Use this function when you have zoomed in to an area where the two views are different. and the Reference jumps back to its original position. Click in the window. allowing the user to nudge the Reference temporarily (i.e.Interaction As you drag it. Click the Temporarily Displace Reference button in the Trace & Reference Palette. the splitter bar returns to its original position. Once you let go of the mouse button.

Interaction Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows Why Consolidate? Linework Consolidation Fill Consolidation ArchiCAD 15 Help 583 .

You will find. Worksheets and Drawing Sections create 2D elements (lines. To make editing easier. first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. fills) out of the model construction elements. overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. Select the elements. that the “exploded” lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments. as a large collection of lines and fills. Line and Fill Consolidation are separate functions and are executed independently of each other. then execute either the Linework Consolidation or the Fill Consolidation command. Also. Model-based Details. In these Drawing-type windows. imported DWG drawings appear in ArchiCAD in 2D form.Interaction Why Consolidate? Several ArchiCAD features involve the creation of “exploded” elements. (Edit > Reshape > Linework/Fill Consolidation). 584 ArchiCAD 15 Help . however.

see Linework Consolidation Settings. For details.Interaction Linework Consolidation In the window. listing the number of elements (if any) that have been deleted or merged for each type of line consolidation. arcs and circles. a checkbox gives you the option of using the simplified Linework Consolidations Settings (rather than the Wizard) the next time you issue the command. a report appears. Following the linework consolidation. On the last screen. The Linework Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Linework Consolidation) brings up the Linework Consolidation Wizard. click “Consolidate” to execute Linework Consolidation. select at least two line-type elements you wish to include in the Linework Consolidation process. Note: Linework Consolidation does not affect any line-type element having an arrowhead. Line-type elements are straight-lines. ArchiCAD 15 Help 585 . This command is also available from the Edit Elements toolbar. Now page through the wizard (click “Next” at the bottom of every screen) and check the boxes of every Line Consolidation option that you wish to execute as part of the consolidation process. At the bottom of this page. polylines.

Interaction Linework Consolidation Settings contains the same options as the Wizard. 586 ArchiCAD 15 Help . but all options are accessible in a single dialog box.

The Fill Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Fill Consolidation) brings up Fill Consolidation Settings. select at least two fills that you wish to include in the Fill Consolidation process. See details at Fill Consolidation Settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 587 .Interaction Fill Consolidation In the current window.

Interaction 588 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Solid Element Operations Model View Options On-Screen View Options Partial Structure Display Renovation ArchiCAD 15 Help 589 .Virtual Building Virtual Building ArchiCAD Model Views Construction Elements Parametric Objects Dedicated Object Tools: Doors. Stairs Custom Stairs with StairMaker Element Extras: TrussMaker. Wall Ends. Skylights. Windows.

Virtual Building ArchiCAD Model Views About Model Views in ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window Stories Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan 3D Window Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) 3D Document Details Worksheets Managing Markers in ArchiCAD Interactive Schedule Project Indexes 590 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

• In Floor Plan.” You can navigate among them. You can have only one Floor Plan and one 3D window open at a time. Every time you activate a window. your input will modify the Virtual Building and can be output as documentation. you see the Virtual Building as it will look when actually constructed. The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. • In 3D perspective. When you work on each of these aspects of the model. you cannot create new model elements here. The available commands and functions vary depending on the window that is active. the Virtual Building is expressed in lists and figures .Virtual Building About Model Views in ArchiCAD You can approach the Virtual Building model from several different model views. • The 3D Document window is generated from the 3D window. • In the Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation (IE) windows. the Virtual Building is shown as a two-dimensional blueprint. see Project Workflow in the Navigator. each model view shows a very different aspect of the same Virtual Building. see Summary of Rebuild Commands. Second.g. and save them as views. but you can view and modify them. several Section/Elevation/IE windows). its contents are rebuilt to reflect any modifications you made to the plan. While it is possible to keep several windows open for other types of viewpoints(e. First. saved model views are the basis for creating architectural drawings (placed onto Layouts) for the final documentation of the Virtual Building. elements are generated from the 3D model.here. replacing the ArchiCAD 15 Help 591 . but is a 2D-type document that allows for annotations and dimensions. For more information. For more information. Model views have two main uses. and can display the sections of composite elements in their 3D aspect. As you will see. you are working on a “viewpoint. • In the model window known as the Interactive Schedule. too. you will work in model views to modify the Virtual Building. by default ArchiCAD will open subsequent viewpoints in existing windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window.

592 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To open a new viewpoint in a new window instead. The Window > Full Screen & Hide All Palettes does the same. including palettes. If you would rather open a new window each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator). without showing any palettes. see Navigation. use the Window > Full Screen command to have your active window. For more information.Virtual Building previous one. occupy the entire workspace on your monitor. use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened. by using the shortcut icons next to the bottom scrollbar or the commands of the View > Zoom menu. change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options: You can pan and zoom the window within the full drawing space to obtain the best view of the work you are currently doing. To maximize working space.

See the sections below for how these options work. Detail/Worksheet and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows. Modifications to the model in the Floor Plan window will be updated accordingly in the 3D. see Updating Sections and Updating the Detail Window. ArchiCAD 15 Help 593 . • • the Floor Plan Cut Plane Layer Settings (elements on invisible layers will not be displayed. but rather symbolic depictions. that these Floor Plan projections are not true 3D projections. It shows a representation of the current project as a traditional architectural drawing. The visibility and accessibility of elements on the Floor Plan depends on: • chosen options in the element’s Tool Settings dialog box. however. Note. Consequently. Each story of the Virtual Building has its own Floor Plan. For more information. The converse is also true: changes made in other windows are automatically displayed on the Floor Plan when activated. automatic intersection of complex or multi-story elements (on the Floor Plan only) may have some limitations in replicating the true model. When you start ArchiCAD.Virtual Building Floor Plan Window The Floor Plan Window is the basic construction area where most editing operations take place. especially. or to project parts of the element that are above or below the cut plane. using Cut Plane settings and element-level display and projection options. the display and. The updates can take place either manually or automatically depending on the Detail or Section/Elevation/IE update settings you choose. including multi-story display and projection settings. the first window you see is the Floor Plan. elements on locked layers cannot be edited). These options let you visualize parts of multi-story elements that are located on a different floor plan. ArchiCAD gives you the freedom to replicate 3D-like aspects of construction elements in the Floor Plan window.

Virtual Building Stories About Stories Set Home Story Show On Stories Navigate Among Stories Defining Story Display in 3D Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE Create or Delete Stories Story Settings Dialog Box Story Level Lines 594 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

The current Story name appears in the title bar of the Floor Plan Window. serve to divide space vertically and replicate the story structure of your real building. Double-click on the story name to display it in the Floor Plan window. Stories are typically used for drawing each Floor Plan of multistory structures separately. The elevation (or relative base height) of construction elements placed in 2D windows are calculated relative to a chosen Story: either the element’s defined Home Story. just as in real buildings. as in the following image. by name and number.) For more information. or the current story. (See the Base Height setting in the Settings dialog box of construction elements. Each story in the project is displayed. see Set Home Story.Virtual Building About Stories Stories in ArchiCAD. in the Navigator’s Project Map. ArchiCAD 15 Help 595 .

Virtual Building Navigate Among Stories To navigate among stories. the field will revert to the top or bottom Story of the valid range. If you enter a Story number outside the existing range. If you attempt to go to a story that does not exist. Go Down a Story takes you to the Story below the current one. Activate a story from the Story Settings dialog box (Design > Story Settings. then click OK to close the dialog box and display the selected story on the Floor Plan. double-click the Story you wish to open. the Create New Story dialog box appears. Go Up a Story activates the Story above the current one on the Floor Plan. Use predefined keyboard shortcuts to jump among stories Use the Mini-Navigator (see below) • • Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator Use the story shortcuts located in the predefined “Mini-Navigator” toolbar. do one of the following: • • In the Navigator Project Map. The Go To Story command in the Mini-Navigator toolbar opens a dialog box allowing you to jump directly to an existing Story and provides you with a range indicator of how many Stories currently exist. 596 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or right-click any story from the Project Map): click on its name.

and there is no visual clue as to which elements belong to which story. The Trim Elements to Story checkbox (in the same dialog box) means that the model will be clipped at the story range boundaries. and all elements that fall at least partially inside the story range will be displayed. will naturally affect the 3D Documents created from this 3D source. as set in the Filter Elements dialog box. The 3D Window always displays the range of Stories defined in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D. all Stories are projected by default. The story display in the 3D window. but you can limit the projection using the “Stories to Show in 3D” controls at View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D. If this box is not checked. ArchiCAD 15 Help 597 . see Filter Elements in 3D. the model will not be clipped. For more information. Choose the range of stories you wish to display in 3D.Virtual Building Defining Story Display in 3D In the 3D window.

Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE 598 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Also. Story Level Lines can be optionally displayed in these views.Virtual Building Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE In Section/Elevation/IE views. you define a vertical range that can include entire Stories or only parts of them.

Select a Story in the Navigator’s Project Map.Virtual Building Create or Delete Stories Use Story Settings (Design > Story Settings) to create and delete stories. ArchiCAD 15 Help 599 . • from the Mini-Navigator. Click “Insert Above” or “Insert Below” to insert a new story above or below the story name selected in the dialog box list. See Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator. Alternatively: 1. Story Settings and story-related commands are also available: • from the context menu if you have selected a Story in the Navigator’s Project Map or View Map. 2. Create a New Story 1. Go to Design > Story Settings.

Click OK.Virtual Building 2. you may wish to copy elements onto it which already exist on another Story. Copy/Move Elements Between Stories When creating a new Story. There is no limit to the number of stories. where you can add “Name”. Click an option for where the new story should be placed in the project structure: Insert Above: The story will be inserted above the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). The new story appears above or below the selected story. • Create New Story from the Mini-Navigator Toolbar If you choose the Mini-Navigator toolbar’s Go up a Story/Go Down a Story command. and that story does not exist. 3. The numbering is automatically updated. type a name for the new story. Go to Design > Edit Elements by Stories. See also Create New Story Dialog Box. or right-click a Story in the Navigator Project Map. 4. In the appearing dialog box. • Insert Below: The story will be inserted below the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). Use the context menu’s “Create New Story” command. See also Story Settings Dialog Box.) 600 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use the Work Environment Menu Customization controls to add the command to any menu. (If this command is not available. “Elevation” and “Height to Next” values for the new story. 5. the Create New Story dialog box appears.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 601 . For more information. see Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box. use the commands to Cut. and/or Paste all elements or selected element types from one story to another.Virtual Building In the appearing dialog box. Copy.

Go to Design > Story Settings. To set these options. uncheck the “Story Level Line” box. Note: It is possible to turn off story level line display on a story-by-story basis. In this case. and use the “Show Story Levels” pop-up.Virtual Building Story Level Lines Story Level Lines indicate the vertical location of stories in Sections. and for any selected story. For more information. open the Section/Elevation/IE Settings Dialog box. go to the Story Levels panel. The Story Marker parameters and position can be edited in Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog boxes. Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE For each individual Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation. Story Levels can be set to appear in Section/Elevation/IE views. 602 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The story line markers are library parts. you can hide. Elevations and Interior Elevations. see Section Story Levels Panel. show and/or output Story Level Lines. This story’s level line will henceforth not appear in any model window in the project. each story level line included in the Section/Elevation/IE range will appear in the window.

or the same command from the context menu that appears by right-clicking inside the Section window. ArchiCAD 15 Help 603 .Virtual Building Edit Story Levels You can edit the elevation of any given story or set of stories using Story Editing Mode: 1. Choose the Design > Edit Story Levels command.

3. you are in Story Editing mode and can move the story level lines. • • • • 4. 5. As long as the palette remains open on screen.) Click and drag the story level line to edit its elevation.Virtual Building 2. Choose a mode from this palette by clicking one of the four buttons: Adjust only the selected story Adjust the selected story and all stories below Adjust the selected story and all stories above Adjust all stories Move the cursor onto the Story Level Line you wish to move. The cursor will assume the Mercedes shape. The Story Editing Mode palette appears. (Make sure you move the cursor onto the line itself. Click OK to apply changes and exit Story Editing Mode. 604 ArchiCAD 15 Help . not the markers at either end.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 605 . as you will see when the view is updated after you click OK.Virtual Building The elements that are on the given stories will retain their elevation respective to their home story.

” If you wish to display all construction elements in their entirety. go to Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane See also Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box. this is the Floor Plan Cut Plane. The Relative Floor Plan Range and Absolute Display Limit . but you can set any Floor Plan Cut Plane for the current window using the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box. Curtain Walls. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are global. Columns. 606 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Columns. depends on local architectural conventions. the current settings apply to all the stories of the project. Enter a value for “Cut Plane Height to Current Story. Stairs and other GDL Objects can be programmed to display themselves according to the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. However. measured from the base of the current story. The default height of the Cut Plane. Note: The Cut Plane does not affect the display of Mesh. For more information. the rest of the settings in the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box are not relevant. you can further fine-tune the Floor Plan display of individual construction elements (Walls.are only relevant if any of your construction elements are defined as having a limited projection. Beams and Roofs only) in their element Settings dialog boxes.the other Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings . Once you set the global Floor Plan Cut Plane. Slab or Object elements.Virtual Building Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) 3D construction elements on the Floor Plan (Walls. To set the Cut Plane. including Stairs. Beams and Roofs) are displayed as if they were cut horizontally along a theoretical plane. on all stories (the default settings for construction elements).

Virtual Building Set Separate Floor Plan Cut Planes in Different Views For every view. if required. ArchiCAD 15 Help 607 . using the Floor Plan Cut Plane controls accessible from View Settings. you can define a unique Floor Plan Cut Plane.

The settings described below (Home Story. Floor Plan Display and Show Projection) are found in the element’s Tool Settings Dialog Box.Virtual Building How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan While the current Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are applied globally to the whole project. you can set a separate display preference for each individual construction element. Show on. Set Home Story Show On Stories Define Element’s Floor Plan Display Define Range of Element’s Projected Display (Show Projection) Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings 608 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

rather than the story on which the wall’s reference line is located. Once you place the element. or the Info Box. Home Story Controls In each element’s Tool Default Settings dialog box. choose a home story setting for elements placed with this tool. not the subfloor. you may have placed the base of a multistory wall on the subfloor.Virtual Building Set Home Story Each construction element and object-type element has a Home Story. Most often. In the Geometry and Positioning Panel of the element’s Tool Settings. you can define its Home Story. reference plane or other characteristic point is located on that story. slightly below the current story level. ArchiCAD 15 Help 609 . In this case.) The Home Story setting acts as a point of reference for: • defining which parts of an element will be displayed (as defined with the Show on Stories control) • defining listing criteria • expressing an element’s Relative Base Height (in the Relative Base Height field in Tool Settings) For example. Yet you want to measure its elevation from the current story. An element is located on a story if its reference line. an element’s Home Story is the story on which it is located. you can define the current story to be the Home Story of this wall. it will be “linked” to this home story. or its Info Box. as follows: Wall: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Roof: pivot line Curtain Wall: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Beam: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Column: lowest point of its axis Slab: top surface of the slab Object/Stair: vertical location of its insertion point Mesh: location of its Mesh Reference Plane. (See Mesh Geometry and Positioning Panel. Current: The placed element’s Home Story will be the current Story.

a new element’s home story doesn’t exist in the project. 610 ArchiCAD 15 Help . In this case. controls in the Tracker allow you to either lock it to a particular home story regardless of the element’s elevation (as in the first image below)... of course. The Home Story dialog always shows the home story defined in terms of the Current story. Note: In some instances. you define the default home story as “Current + 2” in a 3-story project. For example. as in the image below. the “Current + 2” story doesn’t exist. Now. Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. depending on the story you are currently working on. Choose a home story to which to link the element when you place it. Note: The “Current” story in a tool’s Default Settings will vary. ArchiCAD redefines the element’s home story as the topmost story.Virtual Building Select Story: Use this option if you want to tie the element to a particular story. then you go up a story before input. Set Home Story by Elevation If you change a placed element’s elevation so that it is now located on a different story.

or else let the home story change to match the element’s new elevation... ArchiCAD 15 Help 611 . by checking the Set Home Story by Elevation box: See also Elevating Elements and Multiply Elements.Virtual Building . by setting the Tracker’s Home Story control to By Elevation. the element’s Home Story as set in the Tool Settings (Info Box) will remain in effect regardless of the elevation change. you can automatically reset an element’s Home Story as its elevation changes if you use the Elevate or Multiply functions. If you leave the box unchecked. as in this image: Similarly.

The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears. Home Story Only: The element will be shown only on its home story. Column. Roof • • • • • Home Story Only: The Roof will be shown only on its home story. Overhead all. plus one story up and/or down. When available. then the only way the element will be shown on the Floor Plan is if you set its Floor Plan Display to one of the symbolic options: Symbolic Cut. Wall. (If the element is drawn so that it does not physically intersect its home story. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set separate display combinations for the Roof’s outline and fill.Virtual Building Show On Stories Use the Show on Stories pop-up in the Floor Plan and Section Panel of Tool Settings to control the display of construction elements by story. or only on selected stories. this will be your preferred option most of the time. Choose whether to show the element on every story it intersects. All Relevant Stories: The Roof will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects. The available “Show on Stories” options differ depending on the construction element. Outlines only. All Stories: The Roof’s outline . as discussed below.regardless of its actual location .) Home & One Story Up and/or Down: The Roof will be shown on its Home Story. where you can ArchiCAD 15 Help 612 . Curtain Wall.will be shown on every story of the project. Shell: • • All Relevant Stories: The element will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects.

(Once you set these Custom Settings. where you can set separate story display options for the roof’s outline and its fill.Virtual Building set separate story display options for the Roof’s outline and its fill. (Once you set these Custom Settings. Home story plus one story up and/or down All Stories: The outline of the entire Slab or Mesh will be displayed on every story of the project. use the Edit Custom option to edit them. the following options are available: ArchiCAD 15 Help 613 .) Slab.) Beam For Beams. since there are no multi-story versions of these elements): • • • Home Story Only: The Slab or Mesh will be shown only on its home story. use the Edit Custom option to edit them. Mesh For a Slab or Mesh. the following options are available. See also Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories. (There is no All Relevant Stories option. • Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set separate display combinations for the Slab/ Mesh outline and fill. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears.

Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories For Slabs. This way. Meshes.Virtual Building Object/Stair Objects and Stairs have a unique display option: One Story up and One Story Down. you can opt to not display these elements on their Home Story at all. 614 ArchiCAD 15 Help . certain Library Parts and Stairs: The element’s outline on remote stories will be displayed using the line type chosen in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.

Curtain Walls. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Beams. and Windows and Doors. plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. 1. Cut Only: displays only the cut part.e. 2. plus the element’s overhead part (i. This option is available only for simple straight walls or columns. Note: “Projected with Overhead” is the default display setting for slanted or complex columns and walls. This pop-up control is located on the Floor Plan & Section panel of the element’s Tool Settings dialog box. ArchiCAD 15 Help 615 . not available for windows or doors. you can then further define the extent of the projection.g. Projected: shows cut part of element. and only if the Show on Story control is set to Home Story only. 5. See Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel. Symbolic with Overhead: This display option is available for Curtain Walls only. and for all roofs and beams.) The whole floor plan projection of non-slanted. or for complex columns. using their cut line and cut fill attributes. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings do not affect the display of these elements. 3. using the Show Projection options. Columns and Roofs. For more information. If you choose either of these “projected” options (Projected with Overhead or Projected). (Available for construction elements.. Symbolic Cut: (Available only for non-slanted and non-complex walls and for vertical or complex columns. regardless of the elements’ vertical position. Symbolic 6.Virtual Building Define Element’s Floor Plan Display Use the Floor Plan Display pop-up to display Walls.) Some additional abstract display options are available: 4. in one of several representations. Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element (e. non-complex walls or vertical (simple or complex) columns will be displayed as cut. see Define Range of Element’s Projected Display (Show Projection). as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane). as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane.

) 8. Overhead All: the entire element’s outline is shown using its overhead attributes. (Overhead attributes are set for each element using the “Outline” controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.Virtual Building 7. You can reset any element’s Floor Plan Display setting as needed. Outlines Only: the entire element’s outline is shown using its uncut attributes. (Uncut attributes are set for each element using the “Outline” controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box. 616 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the Floor Plan display of construction elements will automatically be set to predefined Floor Plan Display settings which correspond to traditional architectural standards for these elements.) Note: When opening projects from an earlier format of ArchiCAD.

” • Entire Element (default setting): The element will be displayed on all relevant stories. this element will be shown on the stories defined as the Relative Floor Plan Range (i. Curtain Wall. In this case. Column. plus a given number of stories above and below it. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane. the lower limit will be considered as both the lower and upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (which will also equals the Cut Plane level.) If you choose this option. if the Cut Plane would fall below the lower limit).Virtual Building Define Range of Element’s Projected Display (Show Projection) The Show Projection pop-up provides options for setting the range within which a multi-story element (Wall. an extremely small story height as compared to the default Cut Plane level). you have two other ways to set its display in the Show Projection pop-up: 1. In this case. as described in (1) above. and an optional offset. In this case. by Relative Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story.g. Beam.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 617 . the Cut Plane will be automatically relocated to the upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (or to its lower limit. Roof) should be displayed. the current Floor Plan Cut Plane and Relative Floor Plan Range settings may conflict: • The Cut Plane level may be outside the current Floor Plan Range (e. In certain situations. However. you may prefer not to show the entire element. • The lower Floor Plan Range limit may be higher than the upper limit. This control is therefore only available if the element’s Floor Plan Display is set (using the Floor Plan Display pop-up) to either “Projected” or “Projected with Overhead.e.

this is Project Zero). so that anything below this level is not shown on the Floor Plan. The Absolute Display Limit option enables you to ensure that the Floor Plan will never display any part of the model that falls below the level you define here in absolute terms (independent of story levels). by Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default. If you choose this option. Or.Virtual Building 2. enter the terrace level as the Absolute Display Limit. 618 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then show all parts of the element above this limit. you can enter the level of the terrain or the water level. if you want to show a rooftop terrace without displaying the garage below it. then the Absolute Display Limit set in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings determines this element’s lower display limit. For example.

Virtual Building Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings Suppose your settings are as follows: Show on Story: Automatic This means that each multi-story construction element will be displayed on each relevant story of the Floor Plan. its cut portion. • Floor Plan Display: Projected with Overhead This means that each construction element will be displayed in its entirety. Consider the following building with slanted walls: • ArchiCAD 15 Help 619 . and its uncut portion. with the line types and pen colors you set in the dialog box for each of these parameters • Show Projection: Entire Element This means that the displayed projection is not limited by either an absolute display limit or by a defined vertical range. its overhead portion.

its Floor Plan appearance changes accordingly: although the entire wall is indicated on every story. the cut and overhead segments are different on every story.Virtual Building As you view the building on its various stories. 620 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

made of columns . the structure is shown on 3 stories: • the Curtain Wall is set to “Projected with Overhead” and “Entire Element” • the mullions .Virtual Building Non-Standard Projections for Construction Elements In the example below.are “Cut Only” ArchiCAD 15 Help 621 .

Virtual Building • the round structural columns are set to “Projected with Overhead” and “Floor Plan Range” (on each story. only their relevant section is displayed) 622 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

you can redefine the 3D Document accordingly. Open the 3D Window To open or activate the 3D window. The 3D window is directly linked to the Floor Plan and to the Section/Elevation/IE windows: any changes made on the Floor Plan or in a Section/Elevation/IE window will be visible in the 3D window and vice versa. do one of the following: • press the F3 key • use the Window > 3D Window command • press the 3D window control on the 3D Visualization toolbar or the Mini-Navigator toolbar. using any of the construction tools. ArchiCAD 15 Help 623 . The 3D display of individual construction elements is controlled by the options of the Model panel in their Settings Dialog box. you can directly edit your model. see Navigation in the 3D Window. inside and out. These commands are also accessible in the 3D Visualization toolbar. In the 3D window. in either perspective or parallel view. the cutting planes. and create new construction elements. Special navigation techniques in the 3D Window let you explore the model much more freely than in other windows. The commands that affect the set of elements displayed in 3D are in the View > Elements in 3D View and the View > 3D View Mode hierarchical menus.Virtual Building 3D Window The 3D window displays your model in real perspective or axonometry: this gives the best overall view of what the final building will really look like. All 3D Documents are derived from a 3D Window source. If you change the projection. See 3D Window Settings. General settings affecting the parameters for displaying the 3D window are in 3D Window Settings. For more information. the zoom level or the selected/marqueed/filtered items of the 3D source window.

Virtual Building • use context menu commands from right-clicking on blank space in the current window: The following sections provide details on working with the 3D window. Show All in 3D Show Selection in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Default Display in 3D Filter Elements in 3D Save Contents of 3D Window as a View 3D Engines 3D View Mode 3D Projections Navigation in the 3D Window 3D Navigation Extras 3D “Cutaway” Sections Editing Plane in 3D Window 624 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

The full model display resulting from the Show All command may be limited by filtering criteria in the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. regardless of any current selection. use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show All option. This command’s shortcut is Ctrl + F5. See Filter Elements in 3D.Virtual Building Show All in 3D To show the entire model in 3D. ArchiCAD 15 Help 625 . or use the same command from the context menu.

) If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection. this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements.Virtual Building Show Selection in 3D For a 3D display of only the explicitly selected items. Show Selection/Marquee in 3D also works if you are already in the 3D Window and make an explicit selection there. (Or use the 3D Visualization toolbar control for this command. use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command from any type of editable window. The caption of the 3D 626 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then execute the Show Selection command.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 627 . If the 3D Window’s content is based on explicit selection and you add elements to it.Virtual Building Window will include the “Selection” mention and the name of the home story of the selected element(s). these will be preserved in the 3D Window as long as you continue to work in it.

will display the last 3D view generated by the Show Selection/Marquee command.Virtual Building Show Stored Selection in 3D This command. 628 ArchiCAD 15 Help . also in the View > Elements in 3D View submenu.

use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command. you can adjust the Marquee effect to show the elements outside the marquee instead of those inside: use the Marquee Effect controls in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D. However. The caption of the 3D Window will include the “Marquee” mention. If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection. and choose the Outside Marquee radio button. this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements.without cropping them uncheck the Trim Elements to Marquee checkbox (also under Marquee Effect. To show the entirety of elements that fall partly inside the marquee . For more information on defining a marquee area. the elements inside the Marquee will be displayed and they will be cropped to the marquee area. See Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box. see Marquee Area. Marquee Effect: By default. in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D). ArchiCAD 15 Help 629 .Virtual Building Show Marquee Area in 3D To show only the marqueed element(s) in 3D.

some elements will be only partially visible.Virtual Building Elements in a Marqueed 3D Window If you create an element in the 3D Window which is delimited by a marquee. 630 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the new element will only appear in the 3D Window if you draw it inside the marquee area. a temporary ghosted image of the whole element will be visible. resulting from either a Marquee area or a 3D Cutaway. you will see the elements. however. Change your marquee area (or remove it) and return to the 3D Window to check it. but selection dots of the whole element will be displayed and all the nodes and edges can be found with the cursor. If edited. If you select one or more elements in a trimmed 3D view. that element will disappear immediately from the 3D Window. or drag an existing element outside the Marquee boundaries. If you place a new element outside the boundaries of a Marquee-based 3D view. When you go to the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 631 . irrespective of what might be selected in any other window. without using any specific 3D display command.Virtual Building Default Display in 3D If you simply switch to the 3D window. the 3D window will display the contents last shown in the 3D window.

If you are displaying a Marquee area in 3D.Virtual Building Filter Elements in 3D Go to View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D to open this dialog box. See also Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box. 632 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Activate or deactivate the checkboxes of the different elements: only those elements whose checkbox is active will be displayed in the 3D window. The Stories to Show in 3D part of this dialog box lets you define a range of stories for display. the Marquee Effect part of this dialog box provides options on what to include in the 3D window.

and all other elements types in wireframe mode. ArchiCAD 15 Help 633 . To achieve this effect (a default setting in earlier ArchiCAD versions). apply the predefined “Show 3D Zones as Solid” Layer Combination.Virtual Building Note: You may wish to display 3D Zones as solid bodies in shading mode.

3D view settings include: 3D projection settings (including zooming). 3D window settings.Virtual Building Save Contents of 3D Window as a View If you save the contents of your 3D window as a view (see Saving a View). filter elements in 3D. 634 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then use the 3D Only panel of View Settings to redefine the view accordingly. 3D cutting planes. the 3D Only panel of its View Settings dialog box will provide feedback on whether that view is a result of a filter or a marquee selection. 3D cutaway and photo rendering settings. You can redefine a 3D view by changing these settings in the 3D window.

By default. The internal engine is optimized for simple. go to: View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings and use the 3D Engine pop-up. 2. and for direct output from the 3D window without using photorendering. It produces a simple. nonphotorealistic architectural representation. or use the Engine commands at the bottom of the View > 3D View Mode menu. clean. without textures. 1. such as vectorial 3D hatching and saving the contents of the 3D window as ArchiCAD 15 Help 635 . navigable 3D view. OpenGL engine The OpenGL engine for 3D is recommended if you have a high-performance OpenGL display card. but usually results in slower navigation and access to the model on most machines. two engines are offered: • Internal 3D Engine • OpenGL Engine To choose an engine. The internal engine features more visualization effects than OpenGL. Some effects. Internal 3D engine The internal 3D engine is most useful for working in the 3D window: views generated by the internal engine show vectorial patterns and are easy to print.Virtual Building 3D Engines 3D Engines are built-in configurations which control the generation of the 3D model in ArchiCAD.

OpenGL is a bitmap-based technology. 3D views created using the OpenGL engine will be placed as image files.Virtual Building a vectorial 2D drawing. but features fewer model effects. 636 ArchiCAD 15 Help . For more information. OpenGL’s output capability is more limited than that of the internal engine. are not available with OpenGL. provided that the supporting hardware is available. Consequently. since it is based on bitmap technology. It displays textures correctly. Additional options for OpenGL can be accessed by clicking the Options button from 3D Window Settings. OpenGL will produce significantly faster on-screen navigation on most machines. see Open GL Options. smooth navigation during model development. it can be considered an interactive preview of the rendering. Important: Open GL is optimized for fast.

Virtual Building The following image uses OpenGL with the Transparency effect enabled in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings: ArchiCAD 15 Help 637 .

It is also suitable for hard copy output on a printer. The colors of the surfaces are determined by the material attributes of the construction elements (regardless of the color of light set in the Sun dialog box). only the Wireframe and Shading modes are available. Note: When using the OpenGL engine. Choosing the Shading method causes your 3D model to appear with all of its visible surfaces shaded according to the light direction set in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. Note that if you have many elements one behind the other. This type of view is the best choice for easy interpretation. and Shading.Virtual Building 3D View Mode When using ArchiCAD’s Internal 3D engine. either as 2D or 3D files. They can be chosen from the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings dialog box or using the commands of the View > 3D View Mode menu. this type of view can be hard to interpret. Hidden Line. Hidden Lines can be saved in many file formats. those lines which are blocked from view by solid objects are removed. In Hidden Line mode. three 3D viewing modes are offered: Wireframe. if you do not want a shaded view. The icons of the 3D Modes are also accessible if you display the predefined Window > Toolbars > Simple 3D toolbar. Choosing Wireframe mode creates a view showing all the edges and lines of your Project. See also Sun dialog box. Shading is recommended for: • Fast on-screen feedback • Easy checking of surface colors • Any presentation for which photorealistic quality is not a requirement 3D Projection Settings Materials 638 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Axonometric projections automatically show the entire model in the center of your view.Virtual Building 3D Projections ArchiCAD can display parallel (axonometric) projections and perspectives. This allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projection Settings. or open this dialog box from the MiniNavigator’s pop-up menu. you can adjust the view cone or change the axonometry while retaining an overview of the whole project. the 3D Navigator Preview Palette contains a miniature representation of the entire project view. Perspectives are defined by a viewpoint and a specific target. whether perspective or parallel (axonometric). How to Switch Between Axonometric and Perspective Views You can switch between the 3D Window’s “Perspective” and “Axonometry” views by using the: • Predefined shortcuts: Ctrl+F3 = Axonometry Shift+F3 = Perspective • commands available from View > 3D View Mode: ArchiCAD 15 Help 639 . When the 3D window is active. You can easily switch from one settings dialog to the other with the button at the top right corner. The projections you define here remain valid only until the next time you open the dialog box and modify them. 3D Projection Settings Go to View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings. See Navigator Preview (3D). The name and contents of the dialog box depend on the projection type: • Parallel Projection Settings or • Perspective Projection Settings.

• Add the current axonometric (parallel) projection to the series of Pre-Set views. using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Add Current Projection command. The new view will be added to your Navigator View Map. This will create a view (perspective or axonometric) based on the currently set up projection in the 3D window. using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Place a Camera into the path command.Virtual Building • 3D Visualization toolbar: • Mini-Navigator toolbar: • Navigator Palette: How to Store a 3D Projection To store projections that you set up in the 3D Window. you can: • Use the Save Current View command from the context menu of the Navigator palette. Related Topics: Parallel Projection Settings Perspective Projection Settings Cameras Pre-Set Projections 3D Navigation Extras 640 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • Add the current perspective to your Project Map. A camera capturing the current perspective will also appear on the Floor Plan.

the selected item in the Navigator Project Map also changes accordingly. This command adds the current perspective to the Project Map. Use this when you have changed the view in the 3D window. the following commands are also available from View > 3D Navigation Extras: Note: As you use these commands to change the camera selection. with a camera selected. • Go to the previous/Go to the next: Use these commands to navigate to the perspective views of the previous and next cameras in the active path. • Insert a new camera after the selected one: A new camera is added to the path to define the current perspective view. • Revert view to the selected: Discards all changes you made manually and shows the 3D model as the selected camera sees it. • Put a camera into the path (for perspectives). If you are in perspective view. • Switch to a view perpendicular to a given point (Look to perpendicular). These controls allow you to: • Interactively set the target point for the perspective (Look to). if no camera is selected on the Floor Plan. and will be selected. which is marked by its view cone on the Floor Plan.Virtual Building 3D Navigation Extras Other controls useful in modifying the 3D view are available from the View > 3D Navigation Extras (or a toolbar containing 3D window commands). the new camera will be added after the active camera in the active path. • Modify the selected: The selected camera will be updated to reflect the perspective view that you currently see in the 3D window. Related Topics: Navigation in the 3D Window Cameras Pre-Set Projections ArchiCAD 15 Help 641 . • Reset the roll angle to zero to rapidly return from a bizarre view obtained during navigation (Reset Roll Angle). • Return with a single command to a horizontal view of the model (Horizontal View). • Edit pre-set projections and Add current projection: These commands are available if you are viewing an axonometric (parallel) projection. If you have cameras on the Floor Plan already that define an animation path. and to select the camera.

) If the View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway command is active. activate View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway. you can save it in a variety of formats for additional work. These cutting planes are defined at View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutting Planes. 642 ArchiCAD 15 Help . With 3D Cutaway active. these cutting planes are applied to the model every time it is rebuilt. 3D Cutaway can be useful for special 3D visualizations allowing an insight into building spaces. press the command again. you can produce either ordinary cross sections or special sections to visualize the project in new ways. Once the sectional 3D model has been created. Separate Model Display Settings for the 3D Document allow you to define materials for the surfaces cut by 3D Cutaway. The 3D section cuts you define are stored within the project document and can be recreated after opening the Project in a future session. 3D Cutaway settings will also take effect in the 3D Document.Virtual Building 3D “Cutaway” Sections 3D Cutaway is an imaging mode in ArchiCAD. (To deactivate 3D Cutaway. How to Create a 3D Cutaway 3D Cutaway works by applying cutting planes to the 3D model. See 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box. After defining 3D Cutting Planes.

Virtual Building Sections About Sections Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Open a Section Viewpoint Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Summary of Rebuild Commands Display of Section Lines and Markers Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines ArchiCAD 15 Help 643 .

you can view and modify elements but you cannot create new construction elements. view or drawing in the project. Section. in a model-type Section window. in the “Sections” part. it will be reproduced as drawing primitives (points. 644 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A Model Section contains editable construction elements linked and updated with their counterparts on the Floor Plan. which are not linked to the Floor Plan and do not reflect its changes. defined in Section Settings. without using the Section tool.for easy navigation and identification. The Section marker can take one of three different forms: 1. which generates a new viewpoint in ArchiCAD. viewpoint or drawing. you draw a Section line on the Floor Plan and place a Section source marker. You can set this marker to display a variety of reference information . In the Section window. the contents of a Section window can also be published directly. Elevation. which is activated by default at View > On-Screen View Options. but acts as a reference to any other view.) If you paste an element into a Section window. A Drawing Section contains drawing primitives. Detail. which does not generate a section viewpoint. an unlinked marker containing custom text Note: An easy way to distinguish between source-type and linked/unlinked markers is to use the “Highlight Source Markers” option. Worksheet. To generate a Section. Such a marker is a linked marker. Each newly created Section viewpoint is listed in the Navigator Project Map. which generates a section viewpoint 2. and you can use it to link it to any viewpoint. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. as well as any 2D elements. To place a linked or unlinked Section marker. Objects can be placed in a Section window. 3.) Sections can be saved as Views and placed on a Layout as Drawings. You can choose and format the Section Line and Marker object in Section Settings. (No corresponding 3D model element is generated. Elements in the Section viewpoint depend on the Section Status. Note: It is possible to create an Independent Section (with or without a marker). but they are considered as graphic symbols only. Interior Elevation. See also Source Marker Highlight. fills). A linked marker is for reference purposes only. lines.Virtual Building About Sections The Section tool is used to place a Section marker.such as the first drawing that is created out of this Section viewpoint . use the Section tool in any of the following windows: Floor Plan. a linked marker. See an example at Place a Linked Section Marker. a source marker. (The only exception is if you use the “Drag a copy” command to move a Door/Window.

See Place an Unlinked Marker. ArchiCAD 15 Help 645 .Virtual Building An unlinked marker can be useful in your published documentation. if you want to refer (with a page number) to the location of an external drawing that is not integrated into the ArchiCAD project. for example.

To create a section with its source in the model. The Eyeball cursor appears. having no model source. 2. you must place a section marker on the Floor Plan. Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Double-click to complete the input line. In the Info Box or Section Default Settings. Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the Floor Plan.) Note: Another type of Section viewpoint is the Independent Section. Activate the Section tool. 1. (This is a “source” section marker. make sure that “Create new section viewpoint” is selected.Virtual Building Create a Section Viewpoint Note: The creation process is identical for Elevations. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. 3. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. • • 646 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Virtual Building 4.can be defined in Section Settings. if you have chosen a “Limited” horizontal range in Section Tool Settings. (If you are placing a Section of limited horizontal range. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. A new Section viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. 5.its Markers and Reference information. ArchiCAD 15 Help 647 . Other information about the new Section viewpoint . With the eyeball cursor. the limit line is also placed automatically.) 6. See Section Tool Settings. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the Section.) Note: Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. The place where you click also defines the Section’s limit line. The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed. and Story Lines . Model Display.

648 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (For Elevations. Editing a Section’s Horizontal Range and Distant Area Limit You can change the depth (horizontal range) of a selected section by moving the limit line: make sure that the Section tool is active. at the cut location only. Once it is placed. use the toggle control in View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range. The Distant Area limit line is then displayed as part of your Section. • To show or hide the Section limit line (horizontal range) and the Distant Area limit line on the Floor Plan. see Horizontal Range (for Source Section markers only). enter the elevation values corresponding to the vertical range of the model you wish to include in the Section. which is placed automatically. you can select the limit line and move it. • A zero-depth range shows only the parts of the model cut by the Section line. with separate colors/effects. if such a limit has been defined in Section Settings. use the control in Options > Work Environment > OnScreen Options. A limited Horizontal range shows the model between the Section line and its limit.) For more information. Both the Section limit line and the secondary “distant” line are on-screen-only elements. Vertical Range • • A Section with an infinite Vertical Range shows all stories of the model. if necessary. is created if you check the Marked Distant Area box in the Model Display panel of Section Settings. Use the controls in the General Panel of Section Settings to define the Section geometry. See Section Model Display Panel. then move the line by clicking it and dragging to the desired position. there is no “zero depth” option. You can also move the Distant Area limit line. • To change these line types/colors. If you choose limited Vertical Range. Horizontal Range • • An infinite Horizontal Range shows the full extent of the visible model from the Section line. Note: An optional “distant” area of your Section viewpoint.Virtual Building Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Note: This process is identical for Elevations.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 649 .Virtual Building For more information. see Display of Marker Range Lines.

the following Section has been defined to display the information of the first placed drawing created out of this viewpoint. Interior Elevation. because the viewpoint may already have multiple drawings or views created out of it: 650 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the marker will display autotext (such as #DrgID).” and no drawing has been placed yet. Elevation. When placing a new source marker on the Floor Plan to create a viewpoint.) For example. the tool’s Default Settings gives you two choices for defining the Marker Reference: • the viewpoint. and once the drawing is placed. or to the first drawing created from this new viewpoint. the marker will display information pertaining either to the viewpoint you are currently creating. If you choose “first placed drawing. Detail and Worksheet markers. or • the first placed drawing of the viewpoint In other words. (“First” means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. you have two additional choices.Virtual Building Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Follow these steps to define reference information for source-type Section. this autotext will be replaced by the relevant information. If you select an already placed source marker and open the tool’s Selection Settings or Info box.

See Import View(s) from External ArchiCAD Project (Solo or Teamwork). you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). ArchiCAD 15 Help 651 . Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different project’s Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the “Define Marker Reference” dialog box).. #Drawing Name. those which have been created from the selected Section viewpoint). #DrgID). The link information that will appear in the marker is previewed in the Reference to text field. Eligible drawings/views are available for selection (i.g. as long as the referred item (such as a drawing) already exists in the project. Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker. the marker will fill in the correct drawing data.Virtual Building • the selected drawing • the first placed drawing of the selected view Choosing either of these two options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the Navigator Layout Book or the Navigator View Map. The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.e. other items are greyed and cannot be selected. Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing. Note: The same marker information is shown in the Marker Panel in the Section Settings dialog box.

you can add 2D graphics. construction elements are decomposed into 2D fills. Regardless of a section’s status. update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model. Even by copying construction elements and pasting them back you can only obtain plain. you assign it a status in the General panel of Section Settings. annotation and dimensioning. A Section can have one of three statuses: Auto-rebuild Model. see Updating Sections. arcs and lines.Virtual Building Assign Section Status Note: The process for assigning a status is identical for Sections. 652 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • In a Section of Drawing status. and vice versa. however. with the exception of duplicating existing Doors and Windows. but no new construction elements can be created within them. and Drawing. 3D Document status can be either Auto-rebuild or Manual Rebuild. any changes made in a Model Section window can be updated in the Floor Plan window. the window consists of construction elements. Elevations and Interior Elevations. additional drawing elements. Changes made in this kind of window are not updated in other windows. as well as in the 3D window and in other Section windows. Construction elements are editable in both Autorebuild and Manual-rebuild Model status windows. When creating each new Section. • In the two Model statuses (Auto-rebuild and Manual-rebuild). Warning: Clearing a construction element from a Section Window of model status (either Autorebuild or Manual-rebuild) will also clear it from both the Floor Plan and the 3D model. Each Section’s status defines the link between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan. Manual-rebuild Model. You can. and its rebuild method. For more information. but not Drawing.

Related Topics: Section Model Display Panel Story Level Lines ArchiCAD 15 Help 653 . Controls of the Model Display panel in Section Settings define the appearance (fills. All related controls are described individually in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings. materials) of: • Cut Elements • Uncut Elements • Sun and Shadows • Marked Distant Area • Boundary Contours in the Section window. The following are brief descriptions of these display features.Virtual Building Model Display in the Section Window Note: The controls for the display of elements is nearly identical for Elevations and Interior Elevations. contours.

) 654 ArchiCAD 15 Help . You can customize the appearance of cut elements in a Section window by checking the Uniform Pen for Cut Elements checkbox in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings. Uncut Elements These options in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings enable you to apply materials (shaded or unshaded) to the uncut elements shown in the Section window: Sun and Shadows The following section window is displayed with Vectorial Hatching “on” (as shown by the roof tiles) and with Sun Shadow “on” (as shown by the shadow cast by the roof overhang.Virtual Building Cut Elements By default. then assigning the lines and colors. cut elements are shown using their element-level line and pen definitions. for the display of cut elements in this Section only.

Virtual Building Another effect is to display the materials of uncut surfaces in “shaded” mode .that is. to reflect rounded contours: You can combine the two effects (cast shadows and shaded effect) in a single Section display: ArchiCAD 15 Help 655 .

as well as parts of the far end of the building that extends northward. close to the section line. check the Marked Distant Area box in the in the 656 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To do this.Virtual Building Marked Distant Area Consider the following Section line on the Floor Plan: Note that this Section includes the west face of the building. so you cannot tell which is which: To differentiate the “close” from the “distance” elements. In this Section view. reconfigure the section so that it contains a Marked Distant area. the close and distant areas are displayed identically.

See also Display of Marker Range Lines. not the Section line): Note: The Distant Area line is a “Marker Range Line”. then choose the icon shown in the pet palette to make sure you drag the Distant Area line. ArchiCAD 15 Help 657 .Virtual Building Model Display Panel of Section Settings and specify a different color for the contours of the “distant” elements. Select this line and drag it as shown (select the section marker. Return to the Floor Plan and notice that a new line segment representing the Distant Area has appeared.

Boundary Contours “Boundary Contours” refer to elements shown in the Section. 658 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Now re-open the Section. Use Boundary Contours in the in the Model Display Panel of Section Settings to define the display of this boundary. Here. the left edge of the wall on the left does not fall within the section. and the displayed parts are shown as unfinished. The distant elements are distinguished from the closer ones. without contours. Elevation or Interior Elevation window which extend beyond the horizontal limits of the Section (in other words. the entire element does not “fit” in the section window).

or “Override Contours” to use a pen of your choice.that is. to draw a line at the element’s boundary as it is shown in the section. you can choose to display boundary contours . At Boundary Display. like the blue dashed line in this example: ArchiCAD 15 Help 659 . choose “Uncut Contours” to display these contours using the uncut pen chosen for these elements in their own Settings dialog boxes. even though the element does not really end there.Virtual Building However.

replacing the previous opened Section. To open multiple Section windows at a time. open each new Section from the Navigator.Virtual Building Open a Section Viewpoint To open a Section viewpoint. each Section is opened in a single window. By default. or use a menu command. (View > Navigate > Sections > Open Section). using the Open in new window context menu command. 660 ArchiCAD 15 Help . double-click its name in the Navigator. Another way to open the viewpoint is to select the Section line on the Floor Plan and use the “Open Section” command from the context menu.

Elevation. To place a linked section marker: 1. Interior Elevation. Detail. Linked section markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint.Virtual Building Place a Linked Section Marker Note: This process is identical for Elevations. then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint. You can place a linked Section marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan. Activate the Section tool. Details and Worksheets. place a source Detail marker in the Section window. view or drawing whose information is displayed in the marker. Instead. Worksheet. For example. This linked Section marker points you to the Detail of this wall’s Section. ArchiCAD 15 Help 661 . they are placed in the project. 3D Document. you might create a Wall Section that functions like a Detail: First. Section. then place a linked Wall Section marker on the Floor Plan which is linked to this Detail.

• • Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. 4. Note: The Staggered line option is not available for Elevations.Virtual Building 2. Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the plan. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. Double-click to complete the input line. Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed. click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the linked Section marker. The Eyeball cursor appears. make sure that “Place Linked Marker” is selected. 6. 3. 5. In the Info Box or Section Default Settings. With the eyeball cursor. 662 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Virtual Building Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Follow these steps to define reference information for linked Section. Thus. or Layout Book). #DrgID). click the Browse button to bring up the Define Marker Reference directory. After the marker is placed. Elevation. Choose the desired viewpoint. you can still go back and change its marker information at any time.”). “First” means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. or to redefine an already placed selected marker. • Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different project’s Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the “Define Marker Reference” dialog box). Detail and Worksheet markers. view or drawing.. the first drawing created from the view you select from the directory list after choosing “Browse..g. and choose the item whose information you wish the marker to refer to. View Map. you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). the first drawing created from the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing “Browse. a linked marker can refer to any viewpoint.e. #Drawing Name. See Import View(s) from External ArchiCAD Project (Solo or Teamwork). If you are redefining a selected marker. ArchiCAD 15 Help 663 .”). view or drawing in the project. Choosing any of these reference options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the relevant view of the Navigator (Project Map. you have these choices: the selected viewpoint (i. the drawing you select from the directory list after choosing “Browse”) • the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint (i..e. the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing. Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker. “First” means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e. For a new linked marker. • the first placed drawing of the selected view (i.e. the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing “Browse”) • the selected drawing (i.e. The chosen item’s information will be displayed in the linked marker..

choose “Placed Unlinked Marker. Worksheet. Detail or Worksheet tool. 3D Document. 664 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Elevation. 1. Define any custom text for the marker using the Custom text fields in the parameter list in the Marker Panel of the Settings dialog box.” Such a marker displays no linked information.Virtual Building Place an Unlinked Marker Follow these steps to place an unlinked marker with the Section. Detail. Elevation. Section. Draw a line or boundary (depending on the tool) and place a marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan. Interior Elevation. 2. In Default Settings or the Info Box. 3.

Right-click on this folder and choose the “New Independent Section” command from the context menu • • or from the Document > Documenting Tools submenu or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map. ArchiCAD 15 Help 665 . they are listed as “Independent” viewpoints in the Navigator. “Independent” sections. This command is accessible: • from the Section part of the Navigator Project Map. use the “Create New Independent Section” command. These viewpoints have no model source. a Section) determines which kind of new viewpoint will be created. Use copy-paste to transfer selected items from a Trace Reference into the drawing window in 2D form for further editing. In an independent section. the selected Project Map item (in this case. This creates an empty viewpoint without a marker. To create an independent Section without a marker. with or without a marker. place a linked Section marker into the project and link it (“Marker Reference to”) to the existing independent Section.Virtual Building Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Note: This process is identical for Independent Elevation Viewpoints. but listed in the Navigator. If you wish this independent Section viewpoint to be linked to a marker. you can use 2D tools to create or add new content. can be created in some windows.

any additional drawing elements you have added to the Section window will remain unchanged. In this case. For a Manual-rebuild section.. see Assign Section Status. is not available for Autorebuild Model windows.. for an Autorebuild section. modifying a Library Part) do not appear automatically in Model Section Windows. 2D elements added to either the Floor Plan or Section window will not be reflected in the other window. If you are in Autorebuild status and you are editing elements inside the Section window. used to refresh 2D drawing elements. the rebuild function is continuous and immediate within this window. in large plans. Updating a Drawing Section Not applicable for 3D Documents.” checkbox. If the Floor Plan has changed. Changes to existing construction elements in the Section window (including associative dimensions) will automatically be updated in the Floor Plan Window. fixing any potential temporary display errors. in any other Section Window and the 3D Window. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command in the menu. 666 ArchiCAD 15 Help . If you prefer that your Section window be rebuilt only when it is opened or brought to the front of the screen (the way it worked in ArchiCAD 9). which are either Autorebuild or Manual-Rebuild type documents. go to the Options >Work Environment > More Options tab page and uncheck the “Update Auto-rebuild Model. For further information.Virtual Building Updating Sections Note: The updating process is identical for Sections. However.. use View > Refresh > Rebuild. • To rebuild a Drawing-status Section.) Note: Some complex changes to the plan (e. These commands refresh the view as a 2D drawing. Updating a Manual-Rebuild Section A Section having Manual-Rebuild Model status is not rebuilt automatically. when activated. The update process works on construction elements only. Interior Elevations and 3D Documents. and. continuous auto-rebuild can cause slowdowns. use the View > Refresh > Rebuild command. use View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model to see these changes reflected properly. Elevations. the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command is available. Updating an Autorebuild Model Section An Autorebuild Model Section is linked to the Floor Plan model and can be edited interactively. (The plain View > Refresh > Rebuild command. Each Section’s status defines the link (and rebuild method) between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan. If you nevertheless need to Rebuild manually. a Section in Autorebuild Model status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen.g.

2D artwork added to the drawing manually will be kept intact. choose View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model. In the process.Virtual Building • For a complete refreshing of a Drawing-status Section window. all 2D elements originating from the model will be removed and an up-to-date view will be generated. This will refresh the contents of these windows to fully reflect the current state of the Virtual Building model. ArchiCAD 15 Help 667 . This means that any previous manual editing of this artwork will be lost.

Rebuild from Source View: This command is available only in the Detail and Worksheet windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. or a Detail or a Worksheet. 3D Document. You can customize your menu (Options > Work Environment > Menus) to include these commands if needed. Rebuild from Model: Use this command to rebuild the active window. See Customizing Menus. Rebuild All Model Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all the Section windows of Model status (either Autorebuild Model or Manual-Rebuild Model). The following commands might not be visible in the View > Refresh menu by default.Virtual Building Summary of Rebuild Commands The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. Rebuild All Drawing Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Drawing-status Section windows. Additional Rebuild commands in the View > Refresh menu are available if the active window is a Section/Elevation/IE. Rebuild All from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Section/Elevation/IE windows in your project. these commands are available from the context menu of the folders in the Navigator Project Map and View Map. this will refresh the window information to reflect modifications in the Floor Plan. 668 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Also.

See Section Marker Panel and Section Marker Head Panel.Virtual Building Display of Section Lines and Markers Note: This information also applies to Elevations. ArchiCAD 15 Help 669 . To customize the attributes of a Section’s line marker. use the controls in the Marker and Marker Head panels of Section Settings.

then move the newly created half-segment to a new position. you can use the Arrow tool. However. then use the pet palette’s Move Section line segment icon to move it.Virtual Building Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines Note: This process is identical for Elevations. • Click to break the segment in half. To manipulate a selected Section line as a whole. select the Section Marker. select the Section line. To eliminate a break in a staggered Section line. select it. then pull the break line (perpendicular to the Section line) out of the section range. Elevation lines cannot be segmented. To break a Section line or line segment: • Select the line’s midpoint. as well as their counterpart commands from the pet palette. To move a segment of a Section line. or Edit menu commands. • Choose the Break Section/Elevation Line icon from the pet palette. then click the pet palette’s stretch icon to stretch the line at either of its endpoints. To change the length of a Section line. the Marquee tool. Click to place. 670 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

the Marker options in Elevation Settings vary from their counterparts in Section Settings. • The Elevation Settings Model Display Panel defines the display of the Elevation viewpoint. Interior Elevation. but rather create a cross-section view of the structure from a distant point. can be placed in the Floor Plan. See Display of Marker Range Lines. the Elevation Tool works the same way as the Section Tool. In all other respects. you must place a source-type Elevation marker on the Floor Plan. In contrast to Sections: • Elevations generally do not “slice through” the structure. • A linked-type Elevation marker. containing reference information only (without creating a viewpoint). • Unlike the Section Line. 3D Document. while the Marker and Marker Head panels determine the content and display of the Elevation marker. • Unlinked Elevation markers can also be placed. • Elevation markers are conventionally different from Section markers.Virtual Building Elevations ArchiCAD has a separate tool for creating Elevation viewpoints and linked or unlinked Elevation markers. • The resulting Elevation viewpoint has a Status (Model or Drawing) which determines its update process. • To create an Elevation viewpoint. see the following topics: Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Display of Section Lines and Markers ArchiCAD 15 Help 671 . • There is no “zero depth” option for the Elevation’s horizontal range. Elevation. consequently. and is not shown on the Layout. For more information. the Elevation line is an on-screen-only Marker item. Detail or Worksheet Window. Section.

the marker will be selected and will display a node. 672 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines Moving an Elevation Marker This option is available only for Elevation and Interior Elevation markers. Select the Elevation line. then drag the marker to the desired position. The marker will retain this position even if the elevation is dragged or rotated to a new position. Click on this node and choose the Move Elevation Marker command from the pet palette.

Virtual Building Interior Elevations (IE) About Interior Elevations Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint Create Multiple IE Viewpoints Interior Elevation IDs and Names Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation Interior Elevations and Zone Shape Display of Elements in Interior Elevation ArchiCAD 15 Help 673 .

(Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. you cannot place a linked. and place a marker with custom-defined marker reference information. Dimensions are associative. define the view and its limits graphically.Virtual Building About Interior Elevations ArchiCAD has a dedicated tool that is optimized for creating interior elevations of interior spaces. Unlike the Section and Elevation tools. Note: As source markers. Interior Elevations (IEs) work similarly to Sections and regular Elevations: choose an input method. Each Interior Elevation is a separate viewpoint in the Navigator Project Map. Edits made on an Interior Elevation can be reflected in the Model. reference-only IE marker. IE markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill.) 674 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the Interior Elevation tool is used to create new viewpoints only. and vice-versa: model changes can be reflected in the Interior Elevation following an update. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

to fine-tune the appearance of IE views on the Layout. each view is created perpendicular to the segment. four IE’s created by placing a foursegment polyline around a single room). Since Interior Elevations are typically created in groups (e. Each new IE viewpoint is assigned to an IE Group. (Typically.) For more information. Trace functions. and placement on a layout.in Master Layout Settings . ArchiCAD 15 Help 675 . see Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout. you will use the Master Layout’s “Auto Arrange Setup” options . even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. display. You cannot move individual IE viewpoints from one Group to another.Virtual Building An IE created using one of the polyline or rectangle input methods will have a separate IE view for each segment of the line. IE’s are handled as a group for purposes of numbering. These IE groups are automatically listed together in their own subsets in the Project Map.g.

even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. Move the cursor to the desired view position. Click once to begin the limit line. see the following topics: Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections 676 ArchiCAD 15 Help .status. For more information. marker reference. when creating an Interior Elevation you start by defining the limit of the view (e. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel.Virtual Building Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint Draw the IE limit line using the single line method to create a single IE viewpoint.g. 5. A new IE viewpoint is created and listed in the Project Map. Note: In contrast to Sections/Elevations. 2. It is assigned its own IE Group. and updating . Click a third time to place the IE marker. 3. the wall you want to see). Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints . 4.work the same as in Section viewpoints. display. then click to define view line (the place from which you view the wall). use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. 1. Click a second time to complete the line. To define the Marker style and position.

• • With the rectangular method. click once for each segment of the polyline. ArchiCAD 15 Help 677 . click to define the rotation vector. 1. The resulting line/polyline/rectangle represents the limit line of the Interior Elevation group. With the rotated rectangular method. Click to begin drawing the limit line.Virtual Building Create Multiple IE Viewpoints Use the polyline or one of the rectangle methods to create multiple viewpoints in a single IE Group. double-click to complete the polyline. click again to define the length of the rectangle. • With the polyline method. The resulting Interior Elevation group contains the same number of viewpoints as the number of segments on the polyline/rectangle. click a second time to define the opposing corners.

use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. Move the cursor to the desired view position. a GDL object with editable parameters. The new group of viewpoints is created and listed in the Project Map. The Interior Elevation Group has its own Clone folder in the Navigator View Map. IE marker(s) are placed at the middle of each segment of the IE line or at the center of the room. For any or all of the viewpoints. 3. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel.Virtual Building 2. 5. 4. 678 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Click once more to place the IE marker(s). Interior elevations use a dedicated IE marker. by choosing the No Marker option in this panel. you can opt not to show a marker. To define the Marker style and Position.

the settings of any single segment are accessible individually. display. and updating . For more information.work the same as in Section viewpoints. marker reference. However. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints .status.Virtual Building The viewpoints within a single IE group share certain settings (such as Show on Stories and Layer settings) which can be applied only to the group as a whole. see the following topics: Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections ArchiCAD 15 Help 679 . See Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints.

The IE Group is assigned a default ID of IE-01. Subsequent IE Groups receive their IDs accordingly..Virtual Building Interior Elevation IDs and Names To assign IDs and names to IE Groups and their viewpoints. The options in the General Panel vary depending on whether you are defining Settings for an IE Group: or for an individual IE viewpoint: Each new IE viewpoint is automatically assigned to an IE Group (even if there is only one viewpoint in the group). ArchiCAD’s default IE Settings further define the ID and Name of each IE viewpoint to include Autotexts. use the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. This way. IE-03. (IE-02. This means that each IE viewpoint will have the same ID and Name as its parent IE Group.. each individual Interior Elevation contained in the group will display a logical Autotext value that can vary for each elevation. Use Autotext to Create Meaningful IDs/Names for Interior Elevation Group You can define a logical naming convention for your IE Groups by including an Autotext in the parent IE Group’s ID and Name. 680 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the Reference ID and Name fields are set to “By IE Group” by default.) In each individual viewpoint’s IE settings.

).. In the image below. in this case) contained in the Interior Elevation. the default IE Group Name adds an Autotext of <Orientation> to each viewpoint Name. 03. East. • Open Interior Elevation Settings.. ArchiCAD 15 Help 681 . Also. (Naturally. South.) Customize IDs and Names You can give a customized ID and/or Name to any IE Group or individual viewpoint: • Select the IE limit line. you can set the Interior Elevation Group’s ID to be the Zone Number: 1. Consequently.). each viewpoint ID includes the Group ID (IE-01) plus an automatically assigned number (01. Use the General Panel of IE Settings to define any other Autotext to include in the IE viewpoints’ name and/or ID. each viewpoint name consists of its specific orientation. In the Navigator. 2. For example.Virtual Building By default. West. Click the Autotext button next to the ID field in General Settings and choose Zone Number from the list.. assigning a Zone Number autotext works only if the Interior Elevation includes a zone. ArchiCAD’s IE Group ID adds an Autotext of <Number> to the ID of each viewpoint in the IE group. which automatically assigned using Autotext (North. note that the ID of the Group is now equivalent to the number of the zone (007. This ID is inherited by all of the viewpoints in the Group.. 02.

make sure the pop-up is set to Custom. • Enter the desired ID and/or Name. 682 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building If it is an individual IE Viewpoint. You can also change IDs and Names for any IE Group or viewpoint in the Navigator.

The pet palette and context menu commands opened from this segment affect that viewpoint only. select the viewpoint: • • select any individual Interior Elevation marker. Delete/Restore IE Viewpoint If you have selected an individual IE viewpoint. To edit the selected viewpoint: • Open Interior Elevation Settings. First. Note that certain options in IE Settings are greyed if you are editing a single viewpoint rather than an IE group. (Use the context menu or the Info Box). or select any individual line segment of the Interior Elevation line. • Use the pet palette’s options to manipulate the selected IE segment or its marker. ArchiCAD 15 Help 683 . you can delete that single viewpoint using the context menu’s Delete command. Any changes you make here will apply only to the selected viewpoint.Virtual Building Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints Each viewpoint of an Interior Elevation group can be edited separately.

684 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building You can restore this viewpoint even after deleting it: select the IE group to which it belongs (select any part of the IE Limit Line) and use the Restore all Interior Elevations in Group command from the context menu. Note: This command regenerates the IE viewpoint. but any 2D edits you made in this viewpoint before deleting it have been lost.

then selecting the marker also selects the entire IE group. common marker. Inserting a node will create a new IE viewpoint in the IE group. ArchiCAD 15 Help 685 .Virtual Building Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line Selecting any segment of the IE limit polyline selects the entire IE group. If the IE group uses a single. use the pet palette’s line editing options. As when editing other polylines in ArchiCAD.

the IE limit line represents the horizontal range of the resulting IE view. if desired: choose the Limited option as the Vertical Range and enter the desired elevation limits.e. Horizontal Range By default. or from the Interior Elevation’s Home Story (the story onto which it was placed). Each IE view (i. 686 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation Vertical Range An IE viewpoint’s vertical range is set manually by the user in the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. The Horizontal Range option of Interior Elevation Settings (see the General Panel) is set to By Limit Lines by default. Use the pop-up to define whether this vertical range should be measured from Project Zero. custom vertical range value. each segment of the IE limit polyline) can have a separate. See Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings. or the Info Box.

Virtual Building To adjust the horizontal range. (Stretch/shrink modifications to this segment will affect the neighboring line segments accordingly.) To include connected enclosed areas in the Interior Elevation viewpoint. ArchiCAD 15 Help 687 . as when editing any polyline. select the limit line and stretch or shrink it using the commands of the pet palette. choose Add bounded areas the Horizontal Range option in IE Settings.

as in this image: 688 ArchiCAD 15 Help . but still fall inside the room. the IE viewpoint will include structures that fall beyond the Limit Line. if the room contains an odd-shaped alcove.Virtual Building This way.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 689 . a single zone trimmed to a slanted roof will have several different zone heights.Virtual Building Interior Elevations and Zone Shape If you want the Interior Elevation to correspond to a zone. If a zone is detected. its height will be used as the vertical range of the selected Interior Elevation viewpoint. provided that you also check the Consider Solid Operations box. For example. Note: The zone’s height is the difference between its Level value and its Height value as set in Zone Settings): Zones edited by Solid Element Operations are also calculated accurately. These are accurately reflected in each viewpoint of the Interior Elevation group. choose the Detect and Fit to Zones Vertical Range option from the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings.

any intervening walls which “block the view” in the Interior Elevation will not be displayed. These options are largely identical to those in the Model Display panel of Section Settings. Interior Elevations do not have a “Marked Distant Area” display option. 690 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Interior Elevation Model Display Panel. elements that are cut by the Interior Elevation Line will not be displayed. See also Model Display in the Section Window. Hide Cut Elements: If this option is checked.Virtual Building Display of Elements in Interior Elevation Use the Model Display controls in Interior Elevation Settings to define the appearance of cut and uncut elements in the view. Two special display options are available for the display of cut elements in Interior Elevations: Exclude View Blocking Walls: If this option is checked.

Virtual Building 3D Document About the 3D Document Create a 3D Document The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source Redefine the 3D Document Model Display of the 3D Document ArchiCAD 15 Help 691 .

shadow and sun effects. the 3D Document is analogous to the Section viewpoint: it is an integral part of the ArchiCAD model. In the 3D Document. to which you can add dimensions. like other model views. The 3D Document is a viewpoint which appears in the Navigator Project Map. The 3D Document has its source in the 3D window. and its model elements are rebuilt automatically or manually. you can convert a 3D view of a building into a document that shows detailed structural information in 3D . For example. optionally using the cut fill and line attributes defined at the element level. Note: The display of composite elements in the 3D Document window also depends on the Partial Structure Display settings. depending on its status.such as intersection of composite walls in space. 692 ArchiCAD 15 Help . However. transparency. To add dimensions. where you can set parameters that are specific to the 3D Document: these include fill/pen display of element surfaces (including cut composite elements) and contours. plus certain dimensioning functions that are available only for 3D Documents. the 3D Document has its own 3D Document Settings dialog box. you can select model elements and access their settings dialog boxes to make changes in the model. In many respects. labels and additional 2D drawing elements. but you cannot edit them graphically or create new model elements. 3D hatching. shading. This is possible because the 3D Document can display cut surfaces in a 3D model structure. just use ArchiCAD’s dimensioning tools. you can redefine the 3D Document after adjusting these 3D window settings. Specific parameters and options affecting 3D window display (such as projection and filtering/selection of elements) will affect 3D Document display.Virtual Building About the 3D Document The 3D Document allows you to use the 3D view of the model as the basis for creating a document.

you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures: Related Topics: 3D Document Settings Model Display of the 3D Document Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source ArchiCAD 15 Help 693 .Virtual Building See also Partial Structure Display. In particular.

. or perform solid element operations. 694 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use 3D Cutting Planes.. filter or select elements. set up a 3D view of the model: the view you want to see in your 3D Document: Set up the perspective or projected 3D view. 2. Create a new 3D Document by doing one of the following: With 3D window open: • Use New 3D Document. use Marquee as needed. In the 3D window.Virtual Building Create a 3D Document 1. command from the context menu of the Navigator’s 3D Document folder.

The 3D Document is listed in the 3D Document folder in the Project Map of the Navigator. ArchiCAD 15 Help 695 . • Use a menu command (Document > 3D Document > Create New 3D Document. click Create. 4. or Document > Documenting Tools > Create 3D Document). 5. The 3D Document is created and opened in its own window. Enter a Reference ID and Name for the new 3D Document. The New 3D Document dialog box appears. 3.Virtual Building • Use Capture Window for 3D Document command from the context menu of the 3D window (with nothing selected).

Rebuild for a 3D Document works the same as for other model views (e. edit certain settings of this 3D Window source. In other words: each 3D Document stores the settings (projection. If it is Manual-Update. For more information. is rebuilt every time you open it. shape and relation to the rest of the model elements.g. Your 3D Document. including zoom • Filter Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) • Selection/Marquee limitations • Cutting Planes Note the difference between Redefine and Rebuild. There is no Drawing-type 3D Document. if set to AutoRebuild. (View > Rebuild > Rebuild from Model). filtering. Related Topics: 3D Projections Filter Elements in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Show Selection in 3D 3D “Cutaway” Sections 696 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Redefine refers to specific settings of the 3D window that affect how the 3D Document appears in the window. Section). it is rebuilt only upon command. cutting planes etc. Rebuild refers to the model elements: their size. You can.Virtual Building The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source The contents of the 3D Document are defined out of the 3D Window. These settings are: • The current 3D projection.) of its own 3D window source. each 3D Document can have its own 3D window source. at any time. and then Redefine the 3D Document to reflect these edits. see Assign Section Status. that 3D window is the source of your 3D Document. Although there is only one current 3D window at any given time (you cannot open multiple 3D windows simultaneously).

Each method is described below: Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit 3D Source Redefine 3D Document Based on Current 3D Window Command Redefine Using 3D Document Settings Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit 3D Source If the 3D Document window is in front: use the Open 3D Source command from the context menu to open the source 3D window. ArchiCAD 15 Help 697 .Virtual Building Redefine the 3D Document There are three ways to redefine a 3D Document after you have created it.

Then use the Redefine command: 698 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then click the Open Source View command: Make your changes in the 3D window: • Edit elements • Adjust the projection • Change element visibility using Selection/Marquee • Change the Filter Elements settings.Virtual Building Or: right-click the 3D Document viewpoint or view from the Navigator.

with the 3D window in front and nothing selected. • Alternatively.Virtual Building • Select the 3D Document from the Navigator Project Map and right-click to access the Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D command. ArchiCAD 15 Help 699 . use the Redefine 3D Document command.

Choose the 3D Document which you want to redefine based on the current 3D window. including zoom • Filter Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) • Selection/Marquee limitations • Cutting Planes 700 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Note: The current 3D window is not necessarily the same as the original source of your 3D Document. Redefine 3D Document Based on Current 3D Window Command This command will redefine your 3D Document based on the status of the latest instance of the 3D window (the one currently open. A warning reminds you that this Redefine operation is not undoable. You do not need to open the 3D window. Your 3D Document will be redefined according to the following settings of the current 3D window: • The current 3D projection. or the one that was last open). Click Redefine Anyway to proceed.Virtual Building This brings up the Redefine 3D Document dialog box.

an easy way to do it is to use its 3D Document Settings. use the Redefine based on the Current 3D command from the context menu with nothing selected: Another way to get the same result: In the Navigator Project Map. ArchiCAD 15 Help 701 .Virtual Building With the 3D Document in front. Redefine Using 3D Document Settings If you want to redefine an existing 3D Document without having to open the source 3D window. right-click the 3D document which you want to define and use Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D window.

Virtual Building Open 3D Document Settings (select the 3D Document in the Navigator Project Map. The controls in the General panel allow you to access dialog boxes to modify the 3D Document and its 3D window source. without having to open the 3D window itself: Make any or all of the following changes: 702 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or click Settings at the bottom of the Navigator or from the context menu. or from the Document > 3D Document menu).

Make any adjustments needed. see 3D Document General Panel. and click OK to leave the projections dialog box. and click OK to leave the dialog box. • Click Redefine Filter Elements to access the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. For details on these controls. ArchiCAD 15 Help 703 . Changes in your 3D Document will take effect when you click OK to leave 3D Document Settings. This is where you can redefine Sun settings for your 3D Document: click Redefine 3D Projections. and visible elements of the 3D Document based on the current 3D window. cutting planes. Make any adjustments needed. • Check the box to redefine the projection.Virtual Building • Click Redefine 3D Projections to bring up the Perspective or Parallel Settings dialog box which reflects the 3D Document’s source 3D window. then More Sun to adjust the sun position.

several important settings for the 3D Document’s model appearance are derived from 3D Document Settings. See 3D Document Model Display Panel. you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures. Use the 3D Document Settings Model Panel to set: • Fills and pens for element surfaces and contours. 704 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and for cut elements • Transparency • Vectorial 3D hatching • Shaded materials • Sun and Shadow effects Important: These settings apply to the 3D Document and are independent of its 3D source window. In particular.Virtual Building Model Display of the 3D Document While the 3D Document derives many of its settings from its 3D window source.

Virtual Building Details About Details Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source Contents of the Detail Viewpoint Place a Linked Detail Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary Updating the Detail Window ArchiCAD 15 Help 705 .

overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. You will find. Section. as a reference to any viewpoint. The Detail Marker (a GDL object) is displayed according to the settings you made in the Detail Settings dialog box. You can also create an independent Detail drawing. Detail viewpoints are displayed in a dedicated Detail Drawing Window and listed in the Details part of the Navigator Project Map. view or drawing. To make editing easier. Detail viewpoints generated from existing elements in the project are 2D-only copies of these elements. To open the Detail Drawing in its own window. For more information. 706 ArchiCAD 15 Help . It is also used to place linked Detail markers. that the “exploded” 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments.Virtual Building About Details The Detail tool is used to generate a Detail drawing viewpoint from the model by placing a Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan. text. The viewpoints can be updated to reflect changes in the plan. 3D Document. with or without a marker. Interior Elevation. however. Worksheet. You may wish to fine-tune the Detail Drawing before final output. labels and objects to a Detail Drawing. first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. You can add additional 2D elements. Detail window. Elevation. double-click the detail view name in the Navigator. see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows.

Rectangular.Virtual Building Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source To create a Detail with its source in the model. After drawing the detail boundary. Draw the Detail boundary and click to complete. (The first. Note: Source-type Detail markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. 5. creates a marker linked to an independent viewpoint having no model source. 3. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. Worksheet or Detail. “No Boundary” geometry method. place an area-based Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan. Activate the Detail tool. click with the hammer cursor to place the Detail Marker.) 4. In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings. Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation. or Rotated Rectangular. 2.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 707 . 1. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. Choose an area-based geometry method from the Info Box: Polygonal. make sure that “Create new detail viewpoint” is selected. The X represents the Detail’s origin. 3D Document.

Virtual Building 6. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. A new Detail Drawing viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map.can be defined in Detail Settings.its Markers and Reference information . See Detail Tool Settings. 708 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Other information about the new Detail viewpoint .

Section Details (Detail viewpoints created from a Section) reveal the elevation of the original construction. Text. only construction elements are transferred.Virtual Building Contents of the Detail Viewpoint The source-based detail drawing consists of only 2D lines/fills. Figures. Fills. All types of 2D information can be added to the Detail Drawing: Lines.) For information on what happens to annotation elements cut by the Detail boundary. Detail ArchiCAD 15 Help 709 . see Annotations. The Detail Drawing will include a line representing the Detail Boundary you drew on the plan. including the 2D exploded representations of all construction elements inside the detail boundary. which means that Elevation Dimensioning placed on Detail viewpoints shows correct elevation values. annotations and dimensions are not transferred to the Detail viewpoint. Hotspots. By default. Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary. (The same is true for Elevation Dimensions in Details generated from Elevations and Interior Elevations. Only 2D tools are available in the Detail window.) Related Topics: Worksheet vs. See Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary. (You can change this setting using a checkbox in the General Panel of Detail Settings. Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. unless you displace drawing elements vertically.

• • If you use the No Boundary geometry method: click once to place the marker If you use any of the area-based methods: draw a Detail boundary. make sure that “Place Linked Marker” is selected. Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box.Virtual Building Place a Linked Detail Marker To place a linked detail marker without creating a viewpoint: 1. Activate the Detail tool. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. 4. In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings. Choose any of the Detail geometry methods to place the marker. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. then click with the hammer cursor to place the marker. 2. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. 710 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 3.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 711 . choose “Create New Detail Viewpoint. This viewpoint has no model source. You may wish to create an Independent Detail for your documentation which depicts something that does not otherwise exist in the model . Choose the single-click geometry method (the first icon among the Info Box geometry methods) and click to place a detail marker on the plan.Virtual Building Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint An Independent Detail drawing is one whose content you create yourself. 4. After the marker is placed and the new Detail is created. Use the available 2D drawing tools. place objects. starting with an empty detail viewpoint. An Independent Detail drawing is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. or paste an existing drawing into the detail drawing window. double-click its name in the Navigator or access it with the “Open Detail Drawing” in the marker’s context menu. but they exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator.for example. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. Independent unmarked details do not have a detail marker on the plan. empty Detail viewpoint is created (“independent marked detail”) and listed in the navigator. Create an Independent Detail viewpoint with a marker 1. To open the independent Detail viewpoint. Define the Marker Reference: • the viewpoint. you can still go back and change its marker information at any time. A new. or • the first placed drawing of the viewpoint The link information of the chosen viewpoint/drawing will appear in the “Reference to” text field.” 2. They can be marked or unmarked: Independent marked details have a corresponding detail marker on the plan. 3. In Detail Settings or the Info Box. detail of a fence. labels. These independent Detail Drawings always appear in the Navigator tree structure. text.

Independent unmarked details are listed in the Navigator. Later. though they have no associated marker. You can also access this command from the Detail folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator.Virtual Building Create an Independent Detail viewpoint without a marker Use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Detail command. you can attach a Independent Detail viewpoint to a marker: place a linked marker and point the marker to your Detail viewpoint. if a Detail or the Detail folder is selected. 712 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map. if needed.

the resulting drawing will show the Boundary as a dashed line. ArchiCAD 15 Help 713 . If you do not want this boundary included in the Drawing window.Virtual Building Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary When you create a new Detail or Worksheet viewpoint using a polygon input method. disable the relevant checkbox in Options > Work Environment > More Options.

any markers linked to this marker’s viewpoint will not be updated until you issue the Update Linked Markers’ Boundaries command from the Detail/Worksheet viewpoint item’s Navigator context menu. not any associated model content.Virtual Building Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary If you redraw the boundary of a source detail or worksheet marker. 714 ArchiCAD 15 Help . This command affects the shape of marker boundaries only.

update its contents with the Rebuild from Source View command (from context menu of the detail drawing listed in the Navigator. see Summary of Rebuild Commands.Virtual Building Updating the Detail Window If the source view of a Detail viewpoint has been modified. or from the View > Refresh sub-menu). ArchiCAD 15 Help 715 . For more information.

Detail Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source Contents of the Worksheet Window Editing in the Worksheet Window Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint Place a Linked Worksheet Marker Place an Unlinked Marker 716 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Worksheets About Worksheets Worksheet vs.

You can also place a Detail marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type Detail. text.g. such as partial floor plans and partial sections. Only 2D tools are available in the Worksheet window. You can place a Section marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type section. 2D lines and fills). overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. You may find that the “exploded” 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments. place objects. To open a Worksheet window. which is totally independent of your model. see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. ArchiCAD 15 Help 717 . The Worksheet tool is active in any window. Use the available 2D drawing tools. You might want use a Worksheet to add a diagram or organizational chart. yet useful for your documentation. elements on the Worksheet consist of 2D-only duplicates of any construction elements in “exploded” form (e. Worksheets can be used as a dedicated environment for finishing drawings using 2D tools. first use the Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. To make editing easier. It has marker and linking options similar to those of the other ArchiCAD marker tools (Section. Detail). and for drawings created entirely in 2D. For more information. double-click its name in the Navigator. The user can link any type of marker to the Worksheet.Virtual Building About Worksheets The Worksheet window provides a dedicated environment for 2D model-based drawings. and for working with consultants limited to 2D methods. Such Drawing Sections and Drawing Details cannot be refreshed based on the content of the Worksheet window. or paste an existing drawing into the drawing window. As in the Detail window. labels.

Virtual Building Worksheet vs. (In contrast. at half the scale of the original. a Detail viewpoint created from the model will . in addition to construction elements exploded into 2D components. by default. without the source model’s annotation/dimension elements. by default. Detail While creating a Worksheet based on the source model is similar to creating a model-based Detail. Unlike the Detail tool. a Detail is created. the Worksheet is optimized for creating partial floor plans and partial sections. the Worksheet tool has a single-click “capture” geometry method which reproduces the entire contents of the current window as 2D elements in the Worksheet viewpoint. appear in the resulting Worksheet.) 718 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) • The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source. when transferring all or part of a source model view to a Worksheet window: • Annotation elements and dimensions will.contain the 2D-only copies of construction elements only. Consequently. (In contrast.by default .

Worksheet or Detail.its Markers and Reference information are defined in Worksheet Settings. Note: Source-type Worksheet markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. After drawing the Worksheet boundary. 5. place a Worksheet marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan. Draw the Worksheet boundary and click to complete. Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation. Choose this icon. Capture Screen input method: Use the single-click method: the first input method in the Worksheet info box. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. 3. In the Info Box or Default Settings.Virtual Building Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source To create a Worksheet with its source in the model.) 6. Other information about the new Worksheet viewpoint . 4. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Worksheet marker. Activate the Worksheet tool. • Area-based input method: Use one of the polygonal or rectangular/rotated rectangle geometry methods to define the Worksheet area. 1. See Worksheet Tool Settings. make sure that “Create new Worksheet viewpoint” is selected. then click anywhere in the active project window. See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. You will create a Worksheet based on the entire contents of the window. click with the hammer cursor to place the Worksheet Marker. A new Worksheet viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. • ArchiCAD 15 Help 719 . 2. Choose any of the geometry methods from the Info Box.

the entire marker is included in the Worksheet. the Worksheet will be shown at a default scale value. by default. (However. check the “Copy construction elements only” box in Worksheet Settings.) If the Worksheet boundary intersects annotation elements. unless you uncheck “Copy Construction elements only” in Detail Settings. • Dimension chains will be transferred by segment: if both endpoints of any segment are within the boundary. by default. annotation elements and dimensions will. Door/Window markers: If any part of the Wall falls within the boundary. that segment is included in the Worksheet. lines and fills. Dimensions: The relevant reference point(s) or the dimension’s endpoints must be inside the boundary. the Section/Elevation marker (a GDL object) will be included in the Worksheet. also appear in the resulting Worksheet. Detail/Worksheet markers). or 3D Document. are cut by the boundary and appear in the Worksheet as exploded line/fill components. Note: Interior Elevation markers. Detail drawings do not include annotations or dimensions at all. These originate from the construction elements on the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation/IE. then these will be transferred to the Worksheet window if they meet the relevant criteria. without annotations/dimensions. To copy construction elements only.Virtual Building Contents of the Worksheet Window A project-based Worksheet only contains drawing primitives. 720 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Section and Elevation Markers: If any part of a Section or Elevation line is included in the boundary. and Door/Window markers in that Wall are also included in the Worksheet. Labels: Arrowhead must be inside the boundary. dimensions or marker-type elements (Section/Elevation markers. When transferring all or part of a model view to a Worksheet window.) Figures and Drawings: if at least one reference point is inside the worksheet boundary. if any. as follows. • Dimensions with two endpoints must have both endpoints inside. unlike Section/Elevation markers. (If the source has no scale. the entire Figure or Drawing will be included in the Worksheet. Windows. then all Doors. The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source. Detail markers: If a detail viewpoint’s origin (the “X”) or endpoint of a marker falls within the boundary. that is. although the line’s geometry may be different (the line may be shorter) if the boundary includes only part of the Section/Elevation line. Section/ Elevation and Detail/Worksheet markers within the Worksheet boundary are “live” markers: they continue to function as markers. Note: The following also apply to Detail drawings.

by default. unless you uncheck “Copy Construction elements only” in Detail Settings. then all Doors. Detail/Worksheet markers). (However. dimensions or marker-type elements (Section/Elevation markers. the entire marker is included in the Worksheet. Related Topics: Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary ArchiCAD 15 Help 721 . although the line’s geometry may be different (the line may be shorter) if the boundary includes only part of the Section/Elevation line.Virtual Building Annotations. • Dimensions with two endpoints must have both endpoints inside. Section and Elevation Markers: If any part of a Section or Elevation line is included in the boundary. • Dimension chains will be transferred by segment: if both endpoints of any segment are within the boundary. Dimensions: The relevant reference point(s) or the dimension’s endpoints must be inside the boundary. as follows. unlike Section/Elevation markers.) Figures and Drawings: if at least one reference point is inside the worksheet boundary. that segment is included in the Worksheet. are cut by the boundary and appear in the Worksheet as exploded line/fill components. then these will be transferred to the Worksheet window if they meet the relevant criteria. the entire Figure or Drawing will be included in the Worksheet. Detail markers: If a detail viewpoint’s origin (the “X”) or endpoint of a marker falls within the boundary. Note: The following also apply to Detail drawings. the Section/Elevation marker (a GDL object) will be included in the Worksheet. Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary If the Worksheet boundary intersects annotation elements. If any part of the Wall falls within the boundary. Labels: Arrowhead must be inside the boundary. Note: Interior Elevation markers. Windows. and Door/Window markers in that Wall are also included in the Worksheet. Detail drawings do not include annotations or dimensions at all.

All elements. will be pasted in 2D form. including construction elements. Drawings. Text. first switch the Reference with the active window. Hotspots. then copy-paste from there into the Worksheet (in exploded form) • Draw all new 2D elements into the Worksheet window. You can add content to your Worksheet window in several ways: • Select any element(s) from any window and paste them into the Worksheet window. Figures.Virtual Building Editing in the Worksheet Window Only 2D tools are available when the Worksheet window is active. 722 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • To transfer elements from a Trace Reference. All types of 2D information can be added to the Worksheet: Lines. Fills. Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects.

starting with an empty worksheet viewpoint. or not. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An independent worksheet is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. ArchiCAD 15 Help 723 . However. These independent Worksheets always appear in the Navigator tree structure. Independent Worksheets without a marker are also listed in the Navigator.Virtual Building Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint An independent worksheet is one which you create yourself. if a Worksheet or the Worksheet folder is selected. You can also access this command from the Worksheet folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator. Independent worksheets without a marker in the project exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator. To create an independent Worksheet without a marker. or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map. They can either have a marker. you can subsequently link a marker to such a Worksheet as needed. use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Worksheet command.

3. Choose any of the Worksheet geometry methods to place the marker. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Worksheet marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. make sure that “Place Linked Marker” is selected.Virtual Building Place a Linked Worksheet Marker To place a linked Worksheet marker without creating a viewpoint: 1. 724 ArchiCAD 15 Help . In the Info Box or Default Settings. 2. Activate the Worksheet tool. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint.

Virtual Building Managing Markers in ArchiCAD About Markers Display of Marker Range Lines Source Marker Highlight Changing Marker Type Transfer Marker Parameters Copying a Marker Navigation Using Markers Find Linked Markers Check Markers Palette Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker Deleting a Marker ArchiCAD 15 Help 725 .

Instead. then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint.can optionally be defined as a linked marker. but you can define any custom text for it. they are placed in the project. 726 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A source marker creates a new viewpoint (e. Elevation. Worksheet.g. a Section. An unlinked marker has no model source and displays no linked information. you can opt to place a source marker. which can be used to navigate to the referred item. Detail) involving the model as their source.Virtual Building About Markers Markers can be placed using any of the following tools: Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) Worksheets Details With any of the Marker tools. You cannot use it to navigate among markers. view or drawing. Any of the Markers . This information is displayed in the marker. Such markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint.except Interior Elevation .

and never present on printouts. To customize the line type/color of these Marker Range lines. Marker Range items include: • Elevation. Related Topics: Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary ArchiCAD 15 Help 727 .Virtual Building Display of Marker Range Lines After you draw an input line or polygon with the any of the marker-type tools. use the controls in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. You can choose to show or hide Marker range items of all types using the View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range toggle. these input lines will remain displayed on screen when you place the Marker. Interior Elevation Line • Section/Elevation Limit Line (for Sections and Elevations of limited depth) • Distant line (for Sections and Elevations with a Marked Distant Area) • Interior Elevation Limit lines • Polygons defining area-based Details and Worksheets These Marker Range items are on-screen elements only.

This option makes it easy to tell at a glance which of your markers on screen are source markers. To change the color of the source marker highlight.Virtual Building Source Marker Highlight Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. use the View > On-Screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers command. Related Topics: Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary 728 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To toggle this highlight on or off for all source markers.

g. (If the original linked marker had no boundary. This function is available for: • Linked markers which are linked to a viewpoint/view/drawing that is located within the current project. the viewpoint’s defining polygon will change to reflect the new source detail marker’s polygon. The independent viewpoint is deleted and replaced by a source viewpoint.Virtual Building Changing Marker Type You can change the type of an already placed marker. or • Open the marker’s Settings dialog box and choose the Linked Marker option The original source marker becomes a linked marker containing the same reference information as before. The linked marker must have been placed using the same tool as the item to which it was linked (e. so long as all the Marker references point to items that originate with a Marker tool. that marker’s cut/model attributes are now applied to the viewpoint. a Section marker linked to a Section viewpoint). • Use the “Set as Source Marker” command from its context menu. To change a linked marker to a source marker: • Select the marker. while the original source marker becomes a linked marker. • Linked markers linked to an independent viewpoint of the same type. the source will take on a default boundary value.) Markers linked to an external drawing cannot be changed to a source marker. To change a source marker to a linked marker: • Select the marker. • Use the “Set as Linked Marker” command from its context menu. ArchiCAD 15 Help 729 . Note: A viewpoint’s cut/model attributes are defined by its source marker. If a linked marker becomes the source of a section. Note: If you change a linked detail marker into a source detail marker. or • Open the marker’s Settings dialog box and choose the Source Marker option The linked marker becomes the source marker.

and containing the identical reference information. 730 ArchiCAD 15 Help .g. and except for its geometry (e. the range of a section marker. the second marker will take on all of the first marker’s parameters except its link information. as the first.) If you Pick Up Parameters from a linked marker and inject them into another marker. If you Pick Up Parameters from a source marker and inject them into another marker. See also Parameter Transfer. the second marker will become identical to the first: a second linked marker with the same parameters.Virtual Building Transfer Marker Parameters You can use the Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters commands between markers.

will be different.Virtual Building Copying a Marker Any interaction (Copy/Paste. ArchiCAD 15 Help 731 . The new viewpoint’s name. Moreover. which is linked to the original detail viewpoint. Drag/Rotate/Mirror Copy/Copies) that results in creating a new copy of a marker will have the following results: Copying a source marker (Section/Elevation/IE or Worksheet) results in a second source marker. Copying a source Detail marker will create a new linked Detail marker. the Marker Link information is not copied. which creates a new viewpoint having the same parameters as the viewpoint associated with the original marker. however.

Use the “Open” command to go to the referred item. use the context menu (Go to Drawing) to open the layout containing the referred drawing.Virtual Building Navigation Using Markers To navigate using a marker. The linked detail marker in the image below refers to the first placed drawing of a selected Interior Elevation view. From the same context menu. the Open/Open in new window commands will open the source viewpoint/view of the linked drawing. select the marker and open the context menu. Its context menu allows you to • Go to the Drawing • Open the Interior Elevation view in the current or in a new window 732 ArchiCAD 15 Help . If the marker is linked to a Drawing.

Use the Find Linked Markers command from the item’s context menu. then open the context menu. For Drawings placed on Layouts.Virtual Building Find Linked Markers To find all the markers linked to a particular viewpoint/view/drawing. select the item from the Navigator. The Find Linked markers dialog box lists all the linked markers: 733 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the Find Linked Markers command is also available if you select the Drawing itself.

(The button is disabled if multiple markers are selected. the viewpoint name is underlined.) • • 734 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Click Marker Settings to open the Tool Settings dialog box of the selected marker. Click Go to Selected to zoom to the selected marker.Virtual Building By marker subtype (shown as an icon) Placed to: ID and name of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed. (If it is a source marker.) Clicking either column header will sort the list accordingly.

An icon at the bottom of the palette allows the user to zoom to the selected marker. If this referenced item has been deleted from the project. Markers are listed. The user may decide that the marker is OK the way it is (even though it continues to display undefined Autotext). (For example. (In this case. check the box for these markers. the user can click Marker Settings to re-link the marker(s) or otherwise modify them.Virtual Building Check Markers Palette The Check Markers function lists which marker-referred items are missing from the project. click the Check Markers button at the top of the palette. the marker will display Autotext in place of the missing data. You can then perform a secondary sorting function: clicking a second column header will further sort within the hierarchy obtained by the first sorting. this column will show “N/A”.) If no such marker exists. In this case. drawing or view. The Check Markers Palette is available from Window > Palettes > Check Markers. You can sort items by any of these properties by clicking on its column header. the Approve checkbox can be used as a sorting criterion. • Approve: Editable checkbox for each marker.e. The palette lists all the markers in the project which the user has automatically or manually linked a viewpoint. but whose referred viewpoint/drawing/view has since been deleted from this project.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 735 . the Palette will display this message: No undefined marker references in this project. according to the following: • Marker subtype: Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet/Interior Elevation (shown as icon) • Placed to: ID and Project Map path of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed • Selected item: Name and ID of the marker’s referenced item (i.) For each problematic marker listed (or multiple selected markers). To list undefined marker references. the viewpoint/view/drawing one you chose when defining the marker reference). and can be sorted. (The zoom button is disabled if multiple markers are selected. if you know that the undefined Autotext refers to an external project that has not yet been loaded.

736 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use the Hide Approved Markers option from the pop-up at top right of the dialog box. Otherwise. use the List all items option.Virtual Building If you don’t want the palette to re-list these approved markers as problems the next time you click the Check Markers button.

If you delete a view.Virtual Building Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker If you delete a viewpoint. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with “first drawing from viewpoint” will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint. then the program displays a Warning dialog box informing you that proceeding with the Delete procedure will delete all of the following: • The viewpoint (even if its source marker displays the data of a different viewpoint) • Any views created out of the viewpoint • All the source/linked markers listed above. These markers include: • The viewpoint’s source marker • Markers linked to the viewpoint • Markers linked to views created out of the viewpoint. These markers will be listed as problematic the next time you run the Check Markers function. they will no longer display any linked information. or whether the marker elements themselves have been locked. the program will first check whether its source/linked markers are located on a locked layer or in a different Teammate’s workspace. they will no longer display any linked information. any markers linked to that view will remain in place. any markers linked to that drawing will remain in place. However. just an undefined Autotext. just an undefined Autotext. If none of these markers is locked or reserved. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with “first drawing from view/viewpoint” will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint. If you delete a drawing. ArchiCAD 15 Help 737 . However.

but keep the viewpoint as an independent viewpoint with no model source. 738 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the same dialog box gives you a different option: delete the source marker.Virtual Building Deleting a Marker If you delete a source marker. However. a dialog box appears informing you that deleting a source marker will also delete the viewpoint and any markers linked to it. Deleting a linked marker has no effect on any other element.

Virtual Building Interactive Schedule About Schedules Open and View a Schedule Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items Editing and Updating Schedule Items Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule Format a Schedule Schedule Headers Add Annotations to Schedule Previews Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts ArchiCAD 15 Help 739 .

Virtual Building About Schedules ArchiCAD’s Interactive Schedule function allows you to automatically generate schedules. the Interactive Schedule not only displays quantities and other parameters . If you find that this was a mistake. For example. slabs. Similarly. You can then select this door directly from the schedule and check whether there is a reason for this inconsistency. This makes it possible to notice and correct inconsistencies resulting from a data entry error or from the merging of the work of several people on different parts of the same project.you can actually edit it. roofs and/or multi-component profile elements 740 ArchiCAD 15 Help . There are two categories of Interactive Schedules: • Element Lists show characteristics of simple construction elements • Component Lists are optimized to list information about each component of composite elements (composite walls. the schedule may allow you to detect that all but one of the thirty or forty doors placed in your building have the same height and width. it’s easy to double-check how many of the doors open to the right or the left. Unlike simple lists created with the commands of the Document > Schedules and Lists menu. then you can correct the setting in the schedule and automatically update the door in all views.

which you can freely edit. The contents of the schedule. length. See Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule). A formatted schedule can be placed into any 2D window (typically a Worksheet). you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Scheme Settings button at top right. after pasting. see Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings. Click the name of a defined Schedule to open the Interactive Schedule window and update its contents. See Calculation Units and Rules Preferences. by using Copy/ Paste. The units of the listed values (e. For Teamwork Users: See Reservation in Interactive Schedules. You can access Schedules from either the Navigator palette or the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules submenu. but will no longer be associative to the model. will consist of lines and text. For more information on defining schedule content. ArchiCAD 15 Help 741 . To adjust these. Schedules are viewpoints.g. or save in various other file formats. volume) are set in Project Preferences.Virtual Building The content of the Schedule is based on Schedule Scheme Settings. which you can save as views and output as drawings on a Layout.

Wall List. showing the schedule.Virtual Building Open and View a Schedule See also Navigating in the Interactive Schedule Window. (You can also access Schedules through the Go command of the Mini-Navigator Toolbar. double-click the Schedule name in the Navigator. such as Door List. For information on formatting the schedule. . To display the schedule only. click the black arrow on the dividing line.) The Schedule window opens. 742 ArchiCAD 15 Help . along with formatting options in the left column. see Format Options (Interactive Schedule). or from the Window menu. Window List. ArchiCAD comes with predefined Schedules. To open any of these schedules to list the elements in the current project. without the formatting panel.

make sure you click the appropriate “Override Fill” checkbox in the Override Fill Display panel of Model View Options (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options). use familiar keyboard shortcuts: Move right or left: Enter. manually drag the tabs on the top and left side of the schedule. Double-click any tab to fit the cell to its contents. Navigating in the Interactive Schedule Window To navigate among fields in the Interactive Schedule window. like other Listing windows. Shift+Tab ArchiCAD 15 Help 743 . has an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size. remember that the display of this preview is affected by the Model View Options. Note: To display previews using lines only (no shaded materials). To adjust individual row or column heights.Virtual Building The Interactive Schedule window. If your Schedule includes “3D Front View” as a field. Shift+Enter Move down or up: Tab.

Virtual Building Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items You may wish to view an Element Schedule for only certain items on the Floor Plan. then find the desired Element Schedule in the Navigator Project Map or View Map. Select the desired elements (on the Floor Plan only). by taking advantage of the Interactive Schedule capabilities. for the purpose of interactively editing these elements. You cannot save a view out of the displayed data. This is a quick way to filter elements for editing as a group. 744 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Right-click the schedule name and choose “List Floor Plan Selection Only” to view schedule data for the selected items only (as opposed to the items defined in the Schedule Scheme criteria).

Conversely. use the Select on Floor Plan icon to go to the Floor Plan window and view the selected item. Select in 3D. ArchiCAD 15 Help 745 . You will see that some of the cells of this column become editable. If you have selected an item in the Schedule Window. all changes made on these elements in the Floor Plan or another editable view are updated in the Schedule when you return to it. click its column (or row). Any changes you make in these fields of the Schedule are automatically and instantly reflected in the Floor Plan and in other views. In the example below. when activated. you can see that while the Library Part Name field is locked. while others cannot be modified. The icon to its right. it is possible to overwrite the width and height fields.Virtual Building Editing and Updating Schedule Items To work on an item of the Interactive Element Schedule. takes you to the 3D Window and zooms onto the selected item.

Virtual Building Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings The contents of your Interactive Schedule are defined in the Scheme Settings dialog box. you define (1) the criteria for selecting the items to be listed in the Schedule. choose the scheme you want to edit.e. rename. 746 ArchiCAD 15 Help . . Choose the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules > Scheme Settings command from the menu. In the top Schemes Panel. import and export schemes. Here. delete. or the Scheme Settings button from the opened Schedule window. or use the buttons at the right to create. the particular information about the chosen items) to be listed in the Schedule. and (2) the fields (i. For details. see Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule).

you must define whether the new Schedule will be an Element Schedule or a Component Schedule. Related topics: Define Schedule Criteria Define Schedule Fields ArchiCAD 15 Help 747 .Virtual Building If you choose Create New.

select the first line. then choose a criterion for the items you wish to include in the Schedule.Virtual Building Define Schedule Criteria In the Criteria panel of the Interactive Schedule Scheme Settings. to create a Door List we have chosen “Element Type is Door” as the only criterion. select the desired element. 748 ArchiCAD 15 Help . For simple Element lists. For example. choose “Element type”. In the Value column.

To narrow the scope of a schedule. add additional criteria. ArchiCAD 15 Help 749 .Virtual Building Add New Criteria To add a new criterion. add a new criterion by clicking the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box. if you want a schedule of only those doors and windows which are on Story 2 and above. You can now choose a second Element Type criterion.” The two values (Door. choose “or. such as Window. and complete the row with the desired Story value (>=2). so that the resulting schedule will include every element that is either a Window or a Door. For example. Then choose Story from the Criteria list. Window) are joined as an “or” statement. click the Add button. The “and/or” field in the first row (“Element Type is Door”) is now editable: in this case.

then click “Add.g. and you want to use one of its particular parameters as an additional criterion. For example. Load-Bearing or Non-Load-Bearing. and also fit the Story criterion: to be on the list. 750 ArchiCAD 15 Help . browse the loaded libraries to find the library part whose parameters you need.Virtual Building In this example.” This parameter will then be listed in your Criteria list. Add as many criteria as needed to define the Interactive Schedule. you can narrow the elements listed according to their Structural Function Classification (e.) If you have chosen an object-type Element as an Element Type. and it must be located with the defined Story range. click the Additional Parameters button at the bottom of the dialog box. the schedule will list all elements that fit either of the Element Type Criteria. In the appearing dialog box. the element must be either a window or a door. Choose the parameter.

Virtual Building Complex Criteria Definition If needed. or no parenthesis. click on the pop-up under the parentheses column to choose a parenthesis. Each “open” must have a corresponding “close” in order for the scheme to be logical. use the Open Parentheses and Close Parentheses columns of Scheme Settings to set up nested criteria for more complex schemes: in any selected row. the Criteria invalid! warning appears at the bottom of the panel. ArchiCAD 15 Help 751 . If there is a mistake in your parentheses logic.

choose the desired items. An illustrated list of the parameters. Sort Schedule Fields To change the order in which fields are listed in the schedule. You can further set the order in which items are listed within each field. divided by element type. and click “Add” at the bottom of the dialog box to add them to the Schedule Fields on the right.Virtual Building Define Schedule Fields In the Fields Panel of Schedule Scheme Settings. is available here: See Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule. For example. in the Wall List scheme pictured here. See also Schemes Fields Panel. we want the Wall Layer to be included in the schedule. From the list of Available Parameters on the left. you will choose which fields should be displayed in your schedule. Choose “Layer” from the Available Parameter. by using the three buttons at the right: 752 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use the up/down arrows at the left edge of each row to move the field up or down. then click “Add” to add it to the Schedule Fields on the right.

Click the second button to add a schedule cell which displays the sum of the items in the selected field. The second button contains an icon for a second option: to list a quantity for this field. ArchiCAD 15 Help 753 .) In the example below. we will have the schedule add a sum to the schedule’s Volume column. Here. we will have the schedule add a Quantity to the schedule’s Wall Type column.Virtual Building • • Click the first button to sort walls in this field in ascending/descending order. walls will be listed by Wall Type (the name of the schedule column that lists walls by Cut Fill type. inasmuch as several walls are of the same type . (You can also leave this field blank. the first schedule field). Here. for “None”. “None” means that this field will not be taken into consideration when sorting.the walls will be listed in order of their volume.such as Masonry Block.

) The flagged field will display a separate sum or quantity for each group of identical elements in that field.19 m3). Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sums/quantities. the Wall Type field already has a “Quantity” row. 754 ArchiCAD 15 Help . we have added a flag to the Cut Fill Type field.Virtual Building The result: Wall Type shows a Quantity at the bottom of the column (a total of 8 walls). the formatting options will apply to this row/column of the schedule only. (You cannot flag more than one field at a time. to show a Quantity for each type of wall in that field. which is called Grand Total. The third button lets you add a flag to one of the fields in the list. If you choose “Grand Total” from the Apply to pop-up list. and the Volume column shows a total sum of all the volumes at the bottom (65. For example. showing the total number of walls.

Moreover. the Volume column also lists the corresponding volume sub-totals. which is called Total.Virtual Building The result: Wall Types show a separate quantity for each separate wall type. ArchiCAD 15 Help 755 . Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sum/quantity subtotals.

Virtual Building Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule Wall Listing Parameters Roof Listing Parameters Shell Listing Parameters Roof/Shell Edge Listing Parameters Beam Listing Parameters Column Listing Parameters Slab Listing Parameters Door-Window Listing Parameters Skylight Listing Parameters Object/Stair/Lamp Listing Parameters Mesh Listing Parameters Curtain Wall Listing Parameters Zone Listing Parameters 756 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Maximum height of the Wall Height of Wall at its highest point. or its composite structure. Maximum Height of the Wall Skin on Side Opposite to the Reference Line Height of Wall skin. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/ Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). Height Height of Wall (as set in Wall Settings).Virtual Building Wall Listing Parameters WALL FIELD Cut Fill Type/ Composite/Profile DESCRIPTION Name of the Wall’s cut fill. at its highest point. on the side of Line Side the Wall’s reference line. or its profile. on the side opposite the reference line. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/ Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). at its Wall Skin on Reference highest point. Maximum Height of the Height of Wall skin. taking into account Roof crops (but not Roof/ Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). ArchiCAD 15 Help 757 .

as center measured from end to end along Wall’s centerline. at its lowest point. at its lowest point. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). as the Reference Line Side measured from end to end along Wall’s reference line. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Length of the Wall on Length of the Wall. Height of Wall at its lowest point. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/ Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). 758 ArchiCAD 15 Help . on the side of the Wall’s reference line. Value takes into account Roof crops (but not Roof/ Shell trims or Solid Element Operations). Minimum height of the Wall Minimum Height of the Wall Skin on Reference Line Side Height of Wall skin. on the side opposite the reference line. Length of the Wall at the Length of the Wall.Virtual Building WALL FIELD Minimum Height of the Wall Skin on Side Opposite to the Reference Line DESCRIPTION Height of Wall skin.

Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. Edge Material Name of material assigned to the edges of the Wall ArchiCAD 15 Help 759 . as measured from end to end along side of Wall opposite the reference line. Conditional length of the Length of Wall along the Wall on side opposite to side opposite the reference the Reference Line line. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall length by…”). Conditional length of the Length of Wall along its Wall on the Reference reference line side. Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. subtracting the length of any openings that exceed a given length.Virtual Building WALL FIELD Length of the Wall on the side opposite to the Reference Line DESCRIPTION Length of the Wall. Line Side subtracting the length of any openings that exceed a given length. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall length by…”).

Virtual Building WALL FIELD Opposite Side Material DESCRIPTION Name of the material assigned to the Wall on the opposite side of the Reference Line Reference Side Material Name of the material assigned to the Wall on the Reference Line side Number of Columns Number of Columns that intersect the Wall Number of Doors Number of Door elements in the Wall Number of Holes Number of Empty Opening Objects in the Wall 760 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Analytic surface of openings on the reference line side Combined Width of doors Combined Width of windows Sum of the nominal widths (as defined in Window Settings) of all windows placed in the Wall ArchiCAD 15 Help 761 . doors. doors. Surface calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall. Surface calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall.Virtual Building WALL FIELD Number of Windows DESCRIPTION Number of Window elements in the Wall Analytic surface of openings on side opposite to the reference line Surface area of all Wall openings (windows. empty openings) on the side of the Wall opposite the reference line. Surface area of all Wall openings (windows. empty openings) on the side of the Wall having the reference line. Sum of the nominal widths (as defined in Door Settings) of all doors placed in the Wall.

) Slant Angle 1 Slant Angle 2 Second angle of a doubleslanted Wall. Projected with Overhead) Wall intersections have no effect on the perimeter value. 762 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations. as it is displayed on the Floor Plan. Angle of a slanted Wall.Virtual Building WALL FIELD Perimeter of the Wall DESCRIPTION Perimeter of the horizontal cross section of the Wall. (One angle of a doubleslanted Wall. Cut Only vs. Wall perimeter can thus vary depending on its Floor Plan Projection settings (e.g.

Value ignores Roof/Shell trims and Solid Element Operations Surface of Wall along its reference line side. Takes trims and SEO’s into account. Wall intersections have no effect on the area value.including the surfaces of any openings . Gross surface area of the Wall . subtracting the surface of any openings that exceed a given area as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall surface by…”). Projected with Overhead).Virtual Building WALL FIELD Area of the Wall DESCRIPTION Area of the horizontal cross section of the Wall element. Conditional surface on the reference line side Conditional surface on the side opposite the reference line Gross surface on the reference line side ArchiCAD 15 Help 763 .on the Wall’s reference line side.g. as it is displayed on the Floor Plan. Take trims into account. Takes trims and SEO’s into account. SEO’s are ignored. Area of a Wall can thus vary depending on its Floor Plan Projection settings (e. Cut Only vs. Surface of Wall opposite its reference side. subtracting the surface of any openings that exceed a given area as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall surface by…”).

as well as trims and Solid Element Operations. Takes into account any openings. as well as trims and Solid Element Operations.) Net surface on the side opposite the reference line Thickness 764 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Takes into account any openings.including the surfaces line of any openings .on the opposite side of the reference line. Surface area of the Wall on side opposite the reference line. Takes trims into account. Net surface of the edges Sum of the areas of all Wall edges. Net surface on the reference line side Surface area of the Wall on the reference line side. Thickness of the Wall as defined in Wall Settings.Virtual Building WALL FIELD DESCRIPTION Gross surface on the side Gross surface area of the opposite the reference Wall . Takes into account any trims or Solid Element Operations. SEO’s are ignored. (Displayed in dimension units.

) Wall Skin Thickness on Skin Thickness value of the the Reference Line Side skin on the Wall’s reference line side.) End Thickness of the Wall End thickness of Wall. (Second thickness. Wall Skin Thickness on Skin Thickness value of the the Side Opposite to the skin on the side of the Wall Reference Line opposite the reference line. Each skin thickness is defined in Options > Attributes > Composite Structures. Each skin thickness is defined in Options > Attributes > Composite Structures.Virtual Building WALL FIELD Air Skin Thickness DESCRIPTION Thickness of Wall skin whose structure is defined as “Air skin” (in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules.) Insulation Skin Thickness Thickness of Wall skins whose structure is defined as “Wall Insulation” (in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules. assigned in Wall Settings to a trapezoid Wall. ArchiCAD 15 Help 765 .

Takes trims and SEO’s into account. subtracting the volume of any openings that exceed a given size. Volume of Wall skin that is on the side of the Wall opposite the reference line. (Does not take SEO’s into account. doors. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall volume by…”). and subtracting the volume of openings if any. empty openings). Volume of all Wall openings (windows. Analytic volume of openings in the Wall Conditional volume Conditional Wall Skin Volume on Side Opposite to the Reference Line 766 ArchiCAD 15 Help . subtracting the volume of any openings within that skin that exceed a given size. Takes trims and SEO’s into account. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall volume by…”). Volume calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall. and subtracting the effect of trims and Solid Element Operations.Virtual Building WALL FIELD Net volume DESCRIPTION Net volume of the Wall: height * length * thickness.) Volume of Wall.

Volume is reduced by any trims but does not take SEO’s into account. Line Side subtracting the volume of any openings within that skin that exceed a given size. doors and windows). and subtracting the effect of trims Solid Element Operations on the skin. Double-slanted. and subtracting the effect of trims or Solid Element Operations on the skin. Wall Complexity Displays the Wall’s complexity as defined in Wall Settings: Straight.Virtual Building WALL FIELD DESCRIPTION Conditional Wall Skin Volume of Wall skin that is Volume on the Reference alongside the reference line. Gross volume Volume of Wall (including volume of openings. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Wall volume by…”). Wall Skin Volume on the Net volume of the Wall skin Side Opposite to the that is on the side opposite Reference Line the Wall’s reference line. Takes trims and SEO’s into account. Slanted. This value subtracts the volume of openings within the skin if any. This value subtracts the volume of openings within the skin if any. or Complex ArchiCAD 15 Help 767 . Wall Skin Volume on the Net volume of the Wall skin Reference Line Side that is on the Wall’s reference line side.

Thickness value is set in the Geometry and Positioning panel of Roof Settings or the Info box.Virtual Building Roof Listing Parameters Notes on Listing of Multi-plane Roofs Each plane of a Multi-plane Roof is listed separately (so that the holes. Vertical Thickness Roof Level Displays number of the Roof level. of each plane including each separate level. 768 ArchiCAD 15 Help . ROOF FIELD Geometry method DESCRIPTION Single Plane. etc. measured perpendicularly from the reference surface. rather than the single plane. so you can sort and sum the listed components by ID to see the totals for a particular Multi-plane Roof. Roof Level numbers can be seen in the Geometry and Positioning panel of Roof Settings or the Info box.is listed separately. Each listed component uses the ID of the original Multi-plane Roof.) Exception: When listing the Edge surface and the Perimeter of a Roof plane. indicates the Roof Level to which the listed Roof plane belongs. Multi-plane Thickness Roof thickness. In case of a multi-level Roof. pitch. in case of a multi-level Roof . ArchiCAD takes into account the geometry of the Multi-plane Roof as a whole. Only those plane segments that are part of the outside edge of the Multi-plane Roof will be counted in the values for Edge surface and Perimeter. Roof thickness measured vertically from the reference surface. Thickness value is set in the Geometry and Positioning panel of Roof Settings or the Info box.

Trimming Body Either Pivot Lines Down or Contour lines Down.Virtual Building ROOF FIELD Pitch DESCRIPTION Pitch of the Roof.) Cut Fill/Composite Name of the Cut Fill or Composite structure assigned to this Roof. Displays checkbox status. Determines the geometry of the Trimming Body which acts upon other elements when they are trimmed by this Roof. ArchiCAD 15 Help 769 . (This setting affects the behavior of Skylights. Skylights treat segments Checkbox activated by as curves default in Multi-plane Geometry panel of Roof Settings. This indicates that Skylights placed in this Roof plane will consider the curved segments as genuinely curved rather than as a series of flat planes. This is set in the Geometry and Positioning Panel but can be customized for any Roof Plane. as set in the Model Panel of Roof Settings.

placed into the Roof with the Skylight tool. Openings Surface Total surface of all Skylights placed in the Roof. 770 ArchiCAD 15 Help . and 2. “Openings” in Roofs can be Skylights only.Virtual Building ROOF FIELD Insulation Skin Thickness DESCRIPTION Thickness of the Skin defined as “Roof Insulation Skin type” in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules. the holes cut by Skylights. Holes and Skylights Holes include: 1. Number of Holes Number of holes created in the Roof manually. plus the number of holes cut by Skylights placed in the Roof. Number of Skylights Number of Skylights placed into the Roof. the holes added manually to the Roof.

in the Model panel of Roof Settings. Note: If the listed Roof plane has a customized material. the custom material is listed. Edge Material Name of the Material assigned to the Roof edge. Name of the Material assigned to the Roof bottom. reduced by the surface of any holes and taking SEO’s into account Top Material Bottom Material Net surface of the top ArchiCAD 15 Help 771 . Note: Even if the listed Roof edge has a custom material. in the Model panel of Roof Settings. the listed material is the Roof’s edge material as shown in the Model panel of Roof Settings. Name of the Material assigned to the Roof top. in the Model panel of Roof Settings. Note: If the listed Roof plane has a customized material. the custom material is listed.Virtual Building ROOF FIELD Holes Surface DESCRIPTION Total surface of all skylights plus all manually drawn holes in the Roof. Surface of the top of the Roof.

Gross surface of the top Surface of the top of the Roof. including the surface of any holes. Gross surface of the edges Total surface of the edges of the Roof. 772 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Surface is reduced by any trims. including the surface of any holes. including the surface of any holes. Surface is reduced by any trims. reduced by the surface of any holes and taking trims and SEO’s into account Net surface of the edges Total surface of all edges of the Roof. but does not take SEO’s into account. but does not take SEO’s into account. but does not take SEO’s into account. Gross surface of the bottom Surface of the bottom of the Roof. reduced by the surface of any holes and taking trims and SEO’s into account.Virtual Building ROOF FIELD Net surface of the bottom DESCRIPTION Surface of the bottom of the Roof. Surface is reduced by any trims.

and takes trims and SEO’s into account. The value is reduced by the surface of holes only if a hole exceeds a given area. taking trims and SEO’s into account. Conditional surface of the bottom Net volume Conditional volume Conditional Volume of the Roof. taking trims and SEO’s into account. taking trims and SEO’s into account. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Roof surface by…”) Net Volume is reduced by the surface of any holes. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules. The value is reduced by the surface of holes only if a hole exceeds a given area. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Roof volume by…”). (“Reduce Roof surface by…”). The value is reduced by the surface of holes only if a hole exceeds a given volume. ArchiCAD 15 Help 773 . Surface of the bottom of the Roof.Virtual Building ROOF FIELD Conditional surface of the top DESCRIPTION Surface of the top of the Roof.

774 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building ROOF FIELD Gross volume DESCRIPTION Volume of the Roof. including the volume of any holes. but does not take SEO’s into account. Holes Perimeter Total perimeter of all holes in the Roof. Perimeter Total perimeter of the 3D shape of the Roof. including the perimeter of any holes. Volume is reduced by any trims.

Thickness value is set in the Geometry and Positioning panel of Shell Settings or the Info box. Angle of the Shell profile. Start angle value is set in the Extrusion Properties panel of Shell Settings or in the Info box. Angle of the Shell profile. measured perpendicularly from the reference surface.Virtual Building Shell Listing Parameters SHELL FIELD Geometry method DESCRIPTION Geometry method used to create the Shell: • Extruded • Revolved • Ruled Shell thickness. measured to the Shell’s inclination angle. Thickness Start Angle For an extruded Shell only. at the second end of the extruded Shell. End angle value is set in the Extrusion Properties panel of Shell Settings or in the Info box. measured to the Shell’s inclination angle. End Angle ArchiCAD 15 Help 775 . For an extruded Shell only. at the starting end of the extruded Shell.

• Editable • Upward Extrusion • Downward Extrusion This value is set in the Model Panel of Shell Settings.Virtual Building SHELL FIELD Distortion Angle DESCRIPTION Distortion angle value is set in the Extrusion Properties or Revolution Properties panel of Shell Settings or in the Info box. Revolution angle value is set graphically. By default: 90 degrees. For a Revolved Shell only. measured to the Shell plane angle. Determines the geometry of the Trimming Body which acts upon other elements when they are trimmed by this Shell. For an Extruded Shell: Angle of the Shell profile. Revolution Angle Trimming Body 776 ArchiCAD 15 Help . when creating the Shell. For a Revolved Shell: Angle of the axis of the revolved Shell. or in the Revolution Properties panel of Shell Settings or in the Info box. but changing it enables you to extrude the Shell profile at a angle. creating a distorted Shape Shell. Angle by which the Shell is rotated around its axis. measured to the Shell plane.

placed into the Shell with the Skylight tool. “Openings” in Shells can be Skylights only. Number of Skylights Number of Skylights placed into the Shell. and 2. Holes and Skylights Holes include: 1. Number of Holes Number of holes created in the Shell manually. the holes cut by Skylights. Insulation Skin Thickness Thickness of the Skin defined as “Shell Insulation Skin type” in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules. the holes added manually to the Shell.Virtual Building SHELL FIELD Cut Fill/Composite DESCRIPTION Name of the Cut Fill or Composite structure assigned to this Shell. plus the number of holes cut by Skylights placed in the Shell ArchiCAD 15 Help 777 .

Does not take SEO’s into account.” Edge Material Name of the Material assigned to the Shell edge. in the Model panel of Shell Settings. including the surface of any holes.” Material of the Shell on the Opposite to Reference Side Net Surface of the Reference Side Surface of the Shell on the Reference Side. Note: Even if the listed Shell edge has a custom material. Material of the Shell as defined in the Model Panel of Shell Settings. in the control for “Material on the Reference Side. in the control for “Material on the Opposite Side.Virtual Building SHELL FIELD Material of the Shell on the Reference Side DESCRIPTION Material of the Shell as defined in the Model Panel of Shell Settings. (Reference side: where the profile line is drawn. the listed material is the Shell’s edge material as shown in the Model panel of Shell Settings.) 778 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Holes Surface Total surface of all skylights plus all manually drawn holes in the Shell.Virtual Building SHELL FIELD DESCRIPTION Net Surface of the Surface of the Shell on the Opposite to Reference side opposite to the Side Reference Side. but does not take SEO’s into account. Surface is reduced by any trims and the Shell contour. Gross Surface of the Reference Side Surface of the Shell on the Reference Side. reduced by the surface of any holes and taking trims. including the surface of any holes. ArchiCAD 15 Help 779 . Openings Surface Total surface of all Skylights placed in the Shell.) Net surface of the edges Total surface of all edges of the Shell. Shell contour and SEO’s into account. (Reference side: where the profile line is drawn.

as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Shell surface by…”) 780 ArchiCAD 15 Help . but does not take SEO’s into account. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Shell surface by…”) Conditional Surface of Surface of the Shell opposite the Opposite to to the Reference side. Surface is reduced by any trims and the Shell contour. Conditional Surface of Surface of the Reference side the Reference Side of the Shell. The value is reduced by the surface of holes only if a hole exceeds a given area. but does not take SEO’s into account. including the surface of any holes. Surface is reduced by any trims and the Shell contour. taking Reference Side trims. Side including the surface of any holes. Shell contour and SEO’s into account. The value is reduced by the surface of holes only if a hole exceeds a given area. taking trims. Shell contour and SEO’s into account.Virtual Building SHELL FIELD DESCRIPTION Gross Surface of the Surface of the Shell opposite Opposite to Reference to the Reference Side. Gross Surface of the Edges Surface of all edges of the Shell.

and takes trims. ArchiCAD 15 Help 781 . Volume is reduced by any trims and the Shell contour. Shell contour and SEO’s into account. including the perimeter of any holes. Conditional Volume takes trims. Holes Perimeter Total perimeter of all holes in the Shell. including the volume of any holes. but does not take SEO’s into account. Shell contour and SEO’s into account. Conditional Volume Conditional Volume takes holes into account only if they exceed the minimum as set in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rule.Virtual Building SHELL FIELD Net Volume DESCRIPTION Volume is reduced by the surface of any holes. Gross Volume Perimeter Total perimeter of the 3D contour of the Shell. Volume of the Shell.

Valley or Hip. ArchiCAD automatically assigns an Edge classification where it can be inferred. as in the illustration below (e. Valley. Eaves Gables Hips Ridges Valleys Other Roof edge classifications must be assigned manually. When ArchiCAD logically “splits” a Multi-plane Roof into separate planes (for listing purposes only). every Shell edge is “Undefined”).g.Virtual Building Roof/Shell Edge Listing Parameters What You Need to Know about Edge Classification 1. where two planes are joined in a Ridge. Dome or Hollow. Hip. to the edges of either Multi-plane or Single-plane Roofs. All Shell edge classifications must be assigned manually in Custom Edge Settings (by default. or when the classification is otherwise obvious: as in Eaves or Gable). the edge lengths are listed at half their actual value. If a Roof or Shell edge is classified as Ridge. and the two together constitute a single length.) If all the involved Roof planes are listed (as with 782 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Roof edge classifications are assigned in Custom Edge Settings. 3. 2. (These edge types are assumed to have a “pair”.

the edge of two adjacent Roof planes that meet to form a ridge. the edge of two adjacent planes (or Shell elements) that meet as a hip Length of edges whose Type is set to “Ridge” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. Gables Length Total length of all edges whose Type is set to “Gable” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. Hips Length Length of edges whose Type is set to “Hip” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. I. An edge that forms part of the eaves.Virtual Building Multi-plane Roofs). the gabled edge of the element.” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. the total lengths of these parameters will be correct. EDGE PARAMETER Eaves Length DESCRIPTION Total length of all edges whose Type is set to “Eaves. Typically. Typically.e. and all involved Shells are listed. Ridges Length ArchiCAD 15 Help 783 .

the edge at the top end of a single-plane Roof. Typically. 784 ArchiCAD 15 Help . End Wall Connection Length Total length of all edges whose Type is set to “End Wall” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. Valleys Length Length of edges whose Type is set to “Valley” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. A Roof or Shell edge which joins a Wall and slopes down along the Wall.Virtual Building EDGE PARAMETER Peaks Length DESCRIPTION Length of edges whose Type is set to “Peak” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. A Roof or Shell edge which joins a Wall and runs along the Wall horizontally. Side Wall Connection Length Total length of all edges whose Type is set to “Side Wall” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box.

Hollow Connection Length Length of edges whose Type is set to “Roof-Shell Transition Hollow” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box. Typically. Typically. ArchiCAD 15 Help 785 . the edge of two adjacent Roof planes forming a concave angle. the edge of two adjacent Roof planes forming a convex angle.Virtual Building EDGE PARAMETER Dome Connection Length DESCRIPTION Length of edges whose Type is set to “Roof-Shell Transition Dome” in the Custom Edge Settings dialog box.

in case of a profiled or composite Beam. Hole Level Hole Number 786 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Name of the cut fill assigned to the Beam (or the name of the Composite or the Profile.) Cut Fill Type/ Composite/Profile Height Height of the Beam (difference between its base elevation and its top elevation) Hole Height Height or diameter of the firstplaced hole in the Beam (same value as Hole Dimension 2 or diameter on the Hole panel of Beam Tool Settings).Virtual Building Beam Listing Parameters BEAM FIELD Cross Section DESCRIPTION Shape of the Beam’s crosssection (either “regular” or “complex”) as defined in the Beam Settings dialog box. Distance of the centerpoint of the first-placed hole from the edge of the Beam (same value as “Position” on the Hole panel of Beam Tool Settings.) Total number of holes in the Beam.

as calculated on one side of the Beam. The axis direction is the direction in which you drag the cursor to draw the Beam. (“Left” and “Right” are determined based on the direction of the Beam’s reference axis. Holes Surface Total area of the 2D surface of all holes. Holes Volume Total volume of all holes in the Beam (multiplying Beam width by the holes surfaces). Length Left Length of the Beam on its left side. (“Left” and “Right” are determined based on the direction of the Beam’s reference axis.) Length of the Beam on its right side.Virtual Building BEAM FIELD Hole Width DESCRIPTION Width of the first-placed hole in the Beam (same value as Hole Dimension 1 on the Hole panel of Beam Tool Settings. The axis direction is the direction in which you drag the cursor to draw the Beam.) Name of the material assigned to the bottom surface of the Beam. Length Right Bottom material ArchiCAD 15 Help 787 .

The axis direction is the direction in which you drag the cursor to draw the Beam.) Name of the material assigned to the right surface of the Beam. (“Left” and “Right” are determined based on the direction of the Beam’s reference axis.) Name of the material assigned to the two end surfaces of the Beam. Right side material End material Top material Name of the material assigned to the top surface of the Beam. Offset Reference line axis offset. By default. this value is zero (the reference axis runs down the center of the Beam). User may assign any other value as offset in Beam Settings: this offsets the reference axis by the given amount from the center line.Virtual Building BEAM FIELD Left side material DESCRIPTION Name of the material assigned to the left surface of the Beam. The axis direction is the direction in which you drag the cursor to draw the Beam. (“Left” and “Right” are determined based on the direction of the Beam’s reference axis. 788 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

The axis direction is the direction in which you drag the cursor to draw the Beam. Right side surface End surfaces Top Surface Area of the surface of the top of the Beam.) Area of the surfaces of both ends of the Beam. reduced by any SEO’s or holes. reduced by any SEO’s or holes. Left side surface Area of the surface of the left edge of the Beam. reduced by any SEO’s or holes. ArchiCAD 15 Help 789 .Virtual Building BEAM FIELD Slant Angle DESCRIPTION Angle of an inclined Beam Bottom Surface Area of the surface of the bottom of the Beam. reduced by any SEO’s or holes. (“Left” and “Right” are determined based on the direction of the Beam’s reference axis. (“Left” and “Right” are determined based on the direction of the Beam’s reference axis.) Area of the surface of the right edge of the Beam. reduced by any SEO’s or holes. The axis direction is the direction in which you drag the cursor to draw the Beam.

Width Width of the Beam as entered in Info Box or Beam Tool Settings 790 ArchiCAD 15 Help . reduced by any SEO’s or holes. Takes SEO’s into account.Virtual Building BEAM FIELD Volume DESCRIPTION Volume of the Beam. subtracting the volume of any holes that exceed a given size. as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Beam volume by…”). Conditional Volume Volume of Beam.

including the area of the veneer. circular or profiled) as defined in the Settings dialog box. if any. (The other dimension is “Core 2nd Size.Virtual Building Column Listing Parameters COLUMN FIELD NAME Area of the Column DESCRIPTION Area of the Column’s cross section on the Floor Plan. For a rectangular or profiled Column: One of the dimensions of the Column in cross-section. Core 2nd Size For a rectangular or profiled Column: One of the two dimensions of the Column in cross-section. Shape of the Column’s crosssection (rectangular. (The other dimension is “Core Size.”) Not applicable to circular Columns. Core Size Cross Section ArchiCAD 15 Help 791 .”) For a circular Column: the diameter of the Column in cross-section.

For a Column cut e.Virtual Building COLUMN FIELD NAME Cut Fill/Profile DESCRIPTION Name of the cut fill assigned to the Column core (or the name of the Profile. Minimum height of the Column For a straight or slanted Column: equivalent to Height. due to a Roof trim. (If the top of a Column is uneven and thus has two heights. See also “Maximum/Minimum” height parameters. 792 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Height = Maximum Height. by a slanted Roof: the highest point of the Column. e. by a slanted Roof: the lowest point of the Column.) Height Height of the Column.g.g. For a Column cut e.g. in case of a profiled Column.) Maximum height of the Column For a straight or slanted Column: equivalent to Height.

Net surface of the core (without top/bottom) Net Surface area of the Column core on all sides. Takes Solid Element Operations into account. not including the surface of the Column top or bottom.Virtual Building COLUMN FIELD NAME Material DESCRIPTION Material assigned to Column (in Settings dialog box) Perimeter of the Column Perimeter of the Column’s cross section. ArchiCAD 15 Help 793 . Slant Angle Slant angle of a slanted Column.

not including the surface of the Column top or bottom. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account. Surface area of the cross section of the veneer at the top (or bottom) of the Column. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account.Virtual Building COLUMN FIELD NAME Gross surface of the core (without top/bottom) DESCRIPTION Gross surface area of the Column core on all sides.Takes Solid Element Operations into account. Gross surface of the veneer top (or bottom) Net surface of the core bottom Surface area of the cross-section of the core at the bottom of the Column. not including the surface of the veneer at the top or bottom of the Column. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account. Gross surface of the core top (or bottom) Surface area of the crosssection of the core at the top (or bottom) of the Column. 794 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Gross surface of the veneer (without top/ bottom) Gross surface area of the Column veneer on all sides.

Takes Solid Element Operations into account. Net Surface of the Veneer Net Surface area of the Column veneer on all sides.Takes Solid Element Operations into account. Takes Solid Element Operations into account. Net surface of the veneer bottom Surface area of the crosssection of the veneer at the bottom of the Column.Virtual Building COLUMN FIELD NAME DESCRIPTION Net surface of the core top Surface area of the crosssection of the veneer at the top of the Column. Net surface of the veneer top Surface area of the crosssection of the veneer at the top of the Column. Takes Solid Element Operations into account Veneer Fill Name of fill assigned to veneer (in Column Settings dialog box) ArchiCAD 15 Help 795 . not including the surface of the veneer at the top or bottom of the Column.

which is determined by the Partial Structure Display Settings. Net volume of the Column core. Net volume of the core Gross volume Gross volume of the Column. Veneer Type will affect the display of the Column. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account 796 ArchiCAD 15 Help . if any. Finish or None. as defined in the Settings dialog box (Geometry and Positioning Panel).Virtual Building COLUMN FIELD NAME Veneer Type DESCRIPTION Definition of veneer as either Core. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account Gross volume of the core Gross volume of the Column core. Takes Solid Element Operations into account. including the volume of both the core and veneer.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 797 . if any). Net volume of the veneer Net volume of the Column veneer on all sides.Virtual Building COLUMN FIELD NAME Gross volume of the veneer DESCRIPTION Gross volume of the Column veneer. Net volume Net volume of the Column (including the volume of the core and of the veneer. Takes Solid Element Operations into account. Takes Solid Element Operations into account. Does not take any Solid Element Operations into account.

Virtual Building Slab Listing Parameters SLAB FIELD Cover Fill DESCRIPTION Name of the cover fill (if any) assigned to the Slab Cut Fill Type/ Composite/Profile Name of the Slab’s cut fill or its composite structure. 798 ArchiCAD 15 Help . measured according to the Slab’s 2D polygon. Gross volume of the Slab Volume of Slab. Value is reduced by any trims. subtracting the volume of any holes. Holes Perimeter Total perimeter of all holes in the Slab. Does not take SEO’s into account. but does not take SEO’s into account.

SEO’s or holes. Name of the material assigned to the top surface of the Slab. the listed material is the Slab’s edge material as shown in the Model panel of Slab Settings. Top Material Perimeter Perimeter of the Slab. measured according to the Slab’s 2D polygon.Virtual Building SLAB FIELD Bottom Material DESCRIPTION Name of the material assigned to the bottom surface of the Slab Edge Material Name of the material assigned to the edges of the Slab. Net surface of the bottom Area of the surface of the bottom of the Slab reduced by any trims. ArchiCAD 15 Help 799 . Note: Even if the listed Slab edge has a custom material. including the perimeters of any holes.

800 ArchiCAD 15 Help . subtracting the surface of any openings that exceed a given area as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Slab surface by…”). Takes trims and SEO’s into account. but does not take SEO’s into account.Virtual Building SLAB FIELD Conditional surface of the bottom DESCRIPTION Surface of the bottom of the Slab. Conditional surface of the top Edge Surface Gross surface of the bottom Area of the surface of the bottom of the Slab. Takes trims and SEO’s into account. Area of the surface of the edge of the Slab. subtracting the surface of any holes. but does not take SEO’s into account. Surface of the top of the Slab. SEO’s or holes into account. taking any trims. subtracting the surface of any openings that exceed a given area as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Slab surface by…”). Value is reduced by any trims. Gross surface of the edges Area of the surface of all the Slab edges. Value is reduced by any trims.

Does not take SEO’s into account. Net surface of the top Area of the surface of the top of the Slab. measured according to the Slab’s 2D polygon. Net volume Net volume of the Slab. SEO’s or holes.Virtual Building SLAB FIELD Gross surface of the top DESCRIPTION Area of the surface of the top of the Slab. subtracting the volume of holes if any. subtracting the surface of any holes. Thickness Thickness of the Slab (as defined in the “Thickness” field of Slab Settings). Holes Surface Total top surface of all holes in the Slab. and subtracting the effect of trims and Solid Element Operations. ArchiCAD 15 Help 801 . but does not take SEO’s into account. reduced by any trims. Value is reduced by any trims.

802 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Takes trims and SEO’s into account. subtracting the volume of any openings that exceed a given size as defined in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units & Rules (“Reduce Slab volume by…”).Virtual Building SLAB FIELD Conditional volume DESCRIPTION Volume of the Slab.

if any. in axonometry. Value of acoustic rating.) 3D Front Axonometry 3D Symbol of the door/ window.) Acoustic Rating Acoustic rating value (if any).Virtual Building Door-Window Listing Parameters DOOR-WINDOW FIELD 2D Symbol DESCRIPTION 2D Symbol of the door/ window (as it appears on the Floor Plan). (“Back” indicated by direction of opening lines. (“Front” indicated by direction of opening lines. (“Front” indicated by direction of opening lines. if any.) 3D Front View 3D Symbol of the door/ window. as defined in the Listing Parameters section of the Parameters panel of the Settings dialog. ArchiCAD 15 Help 803 . 3D Back View 3D Symbol of the door/ window. if any.

Height of the window/door. Displays value of Fire Rating. Name of the Zone from which the Door or Window is opened. as defined in Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel). 804 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) Width and height of leaf. as defined in Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel). as defined in the “Height” field of the opening’s Settings dialog box or Info Box.) Width and height of egress.Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD Egress Dimensions DESCRIPTION (For Doors only. From Zone Displays name of Zone. From Zone Number Displays number of Zone. Number of the Zone from which the Door or Window is opened. Height Leaf Dimensions (For Doors only. as defined in the Listing Parameters section of the Parameters panel of the Settings dialog. Fire Rating Value of Fire Rating parameter (if any).

Nominal W X H Size Nominal W X H x T Size Displays opening dimensions as “Height x Width x Wall Thickness”. Nominal W/D opening height on the reveal side ArchiCAD 15 Help 805 . less the head+sill of the reveal. but a custom text may be assigned here. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON.Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD Marker Text DESCRIPTION The Marker Text specified in the Settings dialog box.Marker Texts parameter. and the thickness of the Wall in which the opening is located. Use it with windows from the ArchiCAD 10 library. These are the height and width parameters of the opening size defined as “nominal” in the opening’s Settings dialog box. under Customize Texts. Displays marker text. in the Dimension Marker Panel.) Wallhole height. These are the height and width parameters of the opening size defined as “nominal” in the opening’s Settings dialog box. This text is equivalent to the element’s ID number by default. (Same as the W/D Opening Nominal Volume. Displays opening dimensions as “Height x Width”.

806 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Nominal W/D opening Wallhole width. Use it with windows from the ArchiCAD 10 library. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON.Use it with windows from the ArchiCAD 10 library.Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD Nominal W/D opening height on the side opposite to the reveal side DESCRIPTION Wallhole height. Use it with windows from the ArchiCAD 10 library. Nominal W/D opening surface on the reveal side Height between sill and head x width between side jambs. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON. less the side width on the reveal side jambs of the reveal. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON. Nominal W/D opening surface on the side opposite to the reveal side Wallhole height x Wallhole width. Use it with windows from the ArchiCAD 10 library. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON.

as defined in the Reveal Dimensions fields of the Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel). Predefined preview picture of the Door/Window. Displays orientation. Orientation is also indicated by the opening line on the Floor Plan. ArchiCAD 15 Help 807 . if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON.) Width and height of the window. Orientation L for Left. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. The direction in which the door or window is opened (toward the left. or R for Right.Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD Nominal W/D opening width on the side opposite to the reveal side DESCRIPTION Wallhole width. Preview Picture Reveal Dimensions (For Windows only. or toward the right).

as defined under Window Frame or Door Frame parameters of the Parameters panel in the Settings dialog box. The “unit” is the opening’s frame. (Value measures the distance from the header or from the sill. Unit Dimensions 808 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Number of the Zone into which the Door or Window is opened.) Frame thickness. To Zone Number Displays number of Zone. it is the equivalent of the Wallhole less the tolerance value. Displays name of Zone. to the Wall Base or to the current Story.Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD Sill/Header Value DESCRIPTION Sill/header value as defined in Preview and Positioning panel of the Settings Dialog box. as defined in Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel).) Thickness To Zone Name of the Zone into which the Door or Window is opened. Width and height of opening unit. (Can also be defined in the Custom Settings panel. as defined by the user.

taking the reveal geometry into account. Defined as the sum of the sill height plus the opening height. Includes the sill value plus the sill height (if any) of the reveal. taking the reveal geometry into account. W/D head height on the Distance from Wall base to side opposite to the the header. Listed as: Window head height. taking the reveal geometry into account. W/D nominal sill height ArchiCAD 15 Help 809 .Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD DESCRIPTION W/D head height on the Distance from Wall base to reveal side the header. Defined as the sum of the sill height plus the opening height. Defined as the sum of the sill height plus the opening height. W/D nominal head height Distance from Wall base to the header. Distance from Wall base to the top of the sill. taking the reveal geometry into account. taking the reveal reveal side geometry into account. taking the reveal geometry into account.

calculated by “Height x Width x Wall Thickness”. W/D opening height on Wallhole height. and the thickness of the Wall in which the opening is located.Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD DESCRIPTION W/D opening height on Wallhole height. Use it with the side opposite to the windows from the Archicad reveal side 10 library. (Same as the W/D Opening Nominal Volume.) 810 ArchiCAD 15 Help . if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is OFF. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. less the the reveal side head+sill of the reveal. These are the height and width parameters of the opening size defined as “nominal” in the opening’s Settings dialog box. W/D opening nominal surface Wallhole height x Wallhole width. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is ON. W/D opening nominal volume Volume. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is OFF.

less the side the reveal side jambs of the reveal. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. W/D opening width on Wallhole width. W/D opening surface on the side opposite to the reveal side Wallhole height x Wallhole width. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter in OFF. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is OFF. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter in OFF. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. W/D opening width on Wallhole width. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. Use it with the side opposite to the windows from the Archicad reveal side 10 library. ArchiCAD 15 Help 811 .Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD W/D opening surface on the reveal side DESCRIPTION Height between sill and head x width between side jambs. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is OFF.

Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD W/D opening volume DESCRIPTION Volume of the opening cut by the Door/Window. 812 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Volume calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Wall. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is OFF. W/D opening width on Wallhole width. W/D opening width on Wallhole width. if the “Nominal Size = Jamb Inner Size” parameter is OFF. Use it with windows from the Archicad 10 library. less the side the reveal side jambs of the reveal. W/D sill height on the reveal side Distance from Wall base to the sill. taking the sill jamb depth of reveal into account. Use it with the side opposite to the windows from the Archicad reveal side 10 library.

Width ArchiCAD 15 Help 813 . This is the width parameter of the opening size defined as “nominal” in the opening’s Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel). and is composed of the dimensions of the unit (frame) plus any tolerance values. Wallhole Dimensions Width and height of the opening’s Wallhole as defined in Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel).Virtual Building DOOR-WINDOW FIELD W/D sill height on the side opposite to the reveal side DESCRIPTION Distance from Wall base to the sill. regardless of sill jamb depth of reveal. The “Wallhole” is the opening that is cut into the Wall. Nominal width of the window/door.

in axonometry. 3D Back View 3D Symbol of the Skylight.) Acoustic Rating Acoustic rating value (if any).) 3D Front View 3D Symbol of the Skylight.) 3D Front Axonometry 3D Symbol of the Skylight. 814 ArchiCAD 15 Help . if any. as defined in the Listing Parameters section of the Parameters panel of the Settings dialog. (“Front” indicated by direction of opening lines. if any. if any. (“Back” indicated by direction of opening lines. Displays value of Acoustic Rating.Virtual Building Skylight Listing Parameters SKYLIGHT FIELDS 2D Symbol DESCRIPTION 2D Symbol of the Skylight (as it appears on the Floor Plan). (“Front” indicated by direction of opening lines.

) Curb Height Fire Rating Value of Fire Rating parameter (if any). Displays value of Fire Rating.Virtual Building SKYLIGHT FIELDS Constraint in Roof DESCRIPTION Either “Horizontal” or “Vertical”. as shown in the Preview and Positioning Panel. Height of the Skylight header. Number of the Zone from which the Skylight is opened. as defined in the Listing Parameters section of the Parameters panel of the Settings dialog. Defines how the Skylight will be constrained as it shifts position if the underlying Roof geometry is modified. Name of the Zone from which the Skylight is opened. From Zone From Zone Number Header Height Displays name of Zone. as set in the Preview and Positioning Panel of Skylight Settings. Displays number of Zone. Distance by which Skylight frame extrudes out of the Roof/ Shell plane. (A value of 0 means the Skylight lies flat on the plane. ArchiCAD 15 Help 815 . as measured from the Vertical Anchor defined in the same panel.

These are the height and width parameters of the opening size defined as “nominal” in the opening’s Settings dialog box. under Customize TextsMarker Texts parameter. Value taken from the Height field of the Preview and Positioning Panel (or the Skylight Settings Panel) Nominal WxHxT Size Displays opening dimensions as “Height x Width x Shell/ Roof Thickness”. (Same as the W/D Opening Nominal Volume. in the Dimension Marker Panel. Nominal Dimensions Width x Height. p Nominal Height Height value. Displays marker text. Values taken from the Width and Height fields of the Preview and Positioning Panel (or the Skylight Settings Panel).Virtual Building SKYLIGHT FIELDS Marker Text DESCRIPTION The Marker Text specified in the Settings dialog box. and the thickness of the Shell/ Roof in which the opening is located.) 816 ArchiCAD 15 Help . This text is equivalent to the element’s ID number by default. but a custom text may be assigned here.

Shell/Roof Opening Height Height of the opening cut by the Skylight. Shell/Roof Opening Surface Surface of the opening cut by the Skylight. Shell/Roof Opening Dimensions Width x Height of the opening cut by the Skylight. Value taken from the Width field of the Preview and Positioning Panel (or the Skylight Settings Panel) ID of host Shell/Roof ID of the Roof or Shell in which the Skylight is located. Preview Picture Predefined preview picture of the Skylight. ArchiCAD 15 Help 817 .Virtual Building SKYLIGHT FIELDS Nominal Width DESCRIPTION Width value. Displays ID of the Shell/Roof.

as measured from the Vertical Anchor defined in the same panel.) 818 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building SKYLIGHT FIELDS Shell/Roof Opening Volume DESCRIPTION Volume of the opening cut by the Skylight. Shell/Roof Opening Width Width of the opening cut by the Skylight. as defined by the user. to the Roof Pivot Lines. Sill/Header Value Sill/header height value as defined in Preview and Positioning panel of the Settings Dialog box. (Value measures the distance from the header or from the sill. Sill height Height of the Skylight sill. as shown in the Preview and Positioning Panel. to the current Story or another story. Volume calculation based on hole that results from cutting the GDL openings out of the Shell/Roof.

Displays name of Zone. Vertical Anchor Vertical Anchor as defined in the Preview and Positioning Panel. ArchiCAD 15 Help 819 . Width and height of the Skylight unit.Virtual Building SKYLIGHT FIELDS Thickness DESCRIPTION Thickness of the parent Roof/ Shell in which the Skylight is placed. Header and Sill heights are measured to the vertical anchor. as defined in Settings dialog box (Parameters panel or Custom Settings panel). To Zone To Zone Number Unit Dimensions Name of the Zone into which the Skylight is opened. Displays number of Zone. Number of the Zone into which the Skylight is opened.

3D Left Side View Shaded 3D Symbol of the Object. 3D Right Side View Shaded 3D Symbol of the Object. 3D Front View Shaded 3D Symbol of the Object. 3D Back View Shaded 3D Symbol of the Object. 820 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 3D Front Axonometry Shaded 3D Symbol of the Object.Virtual Building Object/Stair/Lamp Listing Parameters OBJECT/STAIR/ LAMP FIELDS 2D Symbol DESCRIPTION 2D Symbol of the Object.

Virtual Building OBJECT/STAIR/ LAMP FIELDS Height (Z Size) DESCRIPTION Height of the Object as defined in the Height field of the Preview and Positioning Panel of Object Settings. Material Material of the Object as assigned in the Model tab page of Object Settings. Length (A) Length of the Object as defined in the “Dimension 2” field of the Preview and Positioning Panel of Object Settings. Width (B) Width of the Object as defined in the “Dimension 1” field of the Preview and Positioning Panel of Object Settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 821 .

Virtual Building OBJECT/STAIR/ LAMP FIELDS Preview Picture DESCRIPTION Predefined preview picture of the Door/Window. Surface Volume Volume of the Object. based on its 3D parameters as defined in the GDL script. as set in the Color field of the Parameters Panel of Lamp Settings. Rotation Angle Rotation of the Object from its default position (rotated either by entering a rotation angle in the Preview and Positioning Panel of Object Settings. Lamp Color Green 822 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) Surface area of the Object. as set in the Color field of the Parameters Panel of Lamp Settings. Green component of the lamp light. or by rotating it graphically in the project. based on its 3D parameters as defined in the GDL script. Lamp Color Blue Blue component of the lamp light.

as set No) with the lightbulb icons of the Parameters Panel of Lamp Settings. Lamp Light Intensity Lamp Light is on (Yes/ Light’s on/off setting.Virtual Building OBJECT/STAIR/ LAMP FIELDS Lamp Color Red DESCRIPTION Red component of the lamp light. as set in the Color field of the Parameters Panel of Lamp Settings. Light intensity value. as set using the slider in the Parameters Panel of Lamp Settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 823 . Affects PhotoRenderings.

Does not take SEO’s into account. Cut Fill Name of the cut fill assigned to the Mesh Holes Perimeter Total Perimeter of all the holes in the Mesh. displayed on the Mesh polygon in the Floor Plan.Virtual Building Mesh Listing Parameters MESH FIELD Cover Fill DESCRIPTION Name of the cover fill assigned to the Mesh. 824 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Side Material Name of the material assigned to the side of the Mesh.

Perimeter of the Mesh.) ArchiCAD 15 Help 825 . the height of the skirt (difference between the base and top values as shown in the Info Box.Virtual Building MESH FIELD Bottom Material DESCRIPTION Name of material assigned to the bottom of the Mesh. • With Skirt without Bottom. • or Without Skirt (Solid Bodies). including the sum of any hole perimeters. Perimeter Skirt Level For Meshes with a skirt. Top Material Name of the material assigned to the top of the Mesh Mesh Type Construction method used to create Mesh: • With Skirt (Superficies).

subtracting the surface area of any holes. (Skirted and superficies meshes do not have a bottom.) Surface of the Mesh Edge Surface area of the edge of the Mesh. subtracting the area of any holes.Virtual Building MESH FIELD Holes Surface area DESCRIPTION Total top (2D) surface area of all the holes in the Mesh Surface of the bottom of the Mesh Surface area of the bottom of the Mesh. (Superficies meshes do not have an edge. Surface of the top of the Mesh 826 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Listed for Solid and Skirted meshes only.) Surface area of the top of the Mesh. if any. including the sum of the surfaces of all hole edges. Listed for Solid only.

This angle is defined in the Curtain Wall Scheme Settings/Grid Pattern panel. Length Length of the Curtain Wall Number of Panels Number of panels in the Curtain Wall. ArchiCAD 15 Help 827 . defined in Curtain Wall System Settings or the Info Box.Virtual Building Curtain Wall Listing Parameters CURTAIN WALL FIELD Height DESCRIPTION Height of the Curtain Wall. under Secondary Gridlines. Pattern Angle Rotation angle of the Secondary Grid Lines measured clockwise from the Primary Grid Lines.

• If you use an Invisible type Frame for your Boundary Frames (Curtain Wall Settings/Curtain Wall System/Frames: Boundary).Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL FIELD Slant Angle DESCRIPTION Slant angle of the Curtain Wall. then the value of this parameter will exceed the general Surface parameter. then the value of this parameter will be less than that of the general Surface parameter. including the surface of its Boundary Frames. defined in Curtain Wall System Settings or the Info Box. because the Boundary Frames hang out over the boundary line. • If the Boundary Frames are placed “Outside Grid” or “Centered on Grid”. Surface Including Boundary Surface of Curtain Wall. • If the Boundary Frames are placed “Inside Grid” (Curtain Wall Settings/Curtain Wall System/ Member Placement: Place Boundary Frames “Inside”). 828 ArchiCAD 15 Help . then this parameter is equal to the general Surface parameter for the Curtain Wall.

The distance from the Reference Surface to the opposite side of the Curtain Wall. If the shape of the Frame is not uniform. Total Panel Surface is seen if you look at the Curtain Wall in Edit mode. ArchiCAD 15 Help 829 . with just the Panels visible. then the value of the Frame length is calculated by taking the average of its shortest and longest lengths. Total Length of Frames Total of the lengths of all frames in the Curtain Wall. This value does not include the surface of the frames between the panels.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL FIELD Thickness DESCRIPTION Defined in Curtain Wall System Settings or the Info Box. Total Panel Surface Total surface of all the Curtain Wall panels.

3D Front View 3D Symbol of the Frame (from the front. that is. in axonometry.Virtual Building Curtain Wall Frame Parameters CURTAIN WALL FRAME FIELD 2D Cross Section View DESCRIPTION Drawing of the 2D Cross-section of the Frame. 3D Back View 3D Symbol of the Frame (from the back. the inside of the Curtain Wall). 3D Front Axonometry 3D Symbol of the Frame. the outside of the Curtain Wall). 830 ArchiCAD 15 Help . that is.

) Lengths can be affected by the respective Intersection priorities of intersecting Frames.) Frames from the “Custom” class have been individually customized using Frame Settings. Additional frames are placed along the gridlines . (Boundary Frames are placed on the Curtain Wall boundary.) Frame Depth Frame Length Length of each Frame. defined when you first create the Curtain Wall. Depth of the Frame profile.defined in CW Scheme Settings . accessible through Curtain Wall Edit Mode. ArchiCAD 15 Help 831 . or on the boundary: See Member Placement Settings of Curtain Wall System Settings.or drawn manually. (Value defined in the Frame Type and Geometry panel of CW Frame Settings.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL FRAME FIELD Frame Class DESCRIPTION Each Frame belongs to one of the following classes: • Boundary • Mullion • Transom • Custom Frames are automatically assigned to a class depending on its location on the grid (primary or secondary gridline.

832 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Width value is defined. Material Preview Picture Slant Angle Slant angle of the Frame measured to the horizontal plane. for each Frame Class separately. (For Frames which are GDL Objects. in the Model panel of CW Frame Settings.) Predefined Preview Picture of the Frame. the material is defined in its GDL script. or on the Secondary Grid. or on the Primary Grid. in the Frame Type and Geometry panel of CW Frame Settings.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL FRAME FIELD Frame Width DESCRIPTION Width of Frame profile. Location Location of the Frame: either on the Boundary. for each Frame Class separately. Material defined for the Frame.

the inside of the Curtain Wall). the outside of the Curtain Wall). that is. ArchiCAD 15 Help 833 . 3D Front Axonometry 3D Symbol of the Panel. in axonometry. that is. 3D Front View 3D Symbol of the Panel (from the front.Virtual Building Curtain Wall Panel Parameters CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD 3D Back View DESCRIPTION 3D Symbol of the Panel (from the back.

“Distinct”. accessible through Curtain Wall Edit Mode. or “Custom.) 834 ArchiCAD 15 Help . by clicking the panels in the Preview window of the Grid Pattern and Preview panel of Curtain Wall System Settings Scheme Page. Name of the Panel Type as chosen under the Panel Type and Geometry in Curtain Wall Panel Settings. the material is defined in its GDL script.” Each Panel can be assigned to a predefined Panel Class (“Main” or “Distinct). Panels from the “Custom” class have been individually customized using Panel Settings. Panel Type Inside Material Material of the Panel inside surface as defined in the Model Panel of CW Panel Settings. (For panels which are GDL Objects.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD Panel Class DESCRIPTION Lists the panel’s Class as “Main”.

) Height Height of the panel. (For panels which are GDL Objects. not including the panel’s extrusion into the surrounding frames. the material is defined in its GDL script. Width Width of the panel. ArchiCAD 15 Help 835 . the material is defined in its GDL script.) Outside Material Material of the Panel outside surface as defined in the Model Panel of CW Panel Settings. (For panels which are GDL Objects.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD Edge Material DESCRIPTION Material of the Panel edge as defined in the Model Panel of CW Panel Settings. not including the panel’s extrusion into the surrounding frames.

not including the panel’s extrusion into the surrounding frames. not including the panel’s extrusion into the surrounding frames. based on its nominal width and height. this value can be defined in the panel’s parameters. Nominal Width Width of the panel.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD Gross Surface DESCRIPTION Gross surface of the panel. calculated by multiplying its height and width values. 836 ArchiCAD 15 Help . For GDL panels. including the panel’s extrusion into the surrounding frames (the “depth” value defined in the Frame Type and Geometry panel of CW Frame Settings. this is the same as the regular Width parameter. Perimeter Nominal Height Height of the panel.) Perimeter of the panel. For generic panels.

Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD Nominal Surface DESCRIPTION Surface of the panel. Does not include the depth to which the panel is extruded into the surrounding frames. Orientation Angle from North Rotation angle of the panel in degrees measured from North. or Door. lists the direction (Left or Right) of opening. Window. depending on the Panel Type chosen (under Panel Type and Geometry in Curtain Wall Panel Settings. Abbreviation of Orientation Orientation of the rotation angle. For Panels that act as Doors/ Windows and are assigned an opening angle. ArchiCAD 15 Help 837 . Function Either Fixed. calculated by multiplying its nominal height and nominal width values.

Slant Angle Slant angle of the Panel measured to the horizontal plane. From Zone Name of the Zone (if any) from which the Panel faces outward.) From Zone Number Number of the Zone (if any) from which the Panel faces outward. (The Zone that abuts the panel’s inside surface. (The Zone that abuts the panel’s inside surface.) 838 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD Preview Picture DESCRIPTION Predefined Preview Picture of the Panel.

(The Zone that abuts the panel’s outside surface.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL PANEL FIELD To Zone DESCRIPTION Name of the Zone (if any) toward which the Panel faces outward. ArchiCAD 15 Help 839 . (The Zone that abuts the panel’s outside surface.) To Zone Number Name of the Zone (if any) toward which the Panel faces outward.

3D Right Side View Cross-section of the Junction viewed from its right side 840 ArchiCAD 15 Help . that is. 3D Left Side View Cross-section of the Junction viewed from its left side. in axonometry.Virtual Building Curtain Wall Junction Parameters CURTAIN WALL JUNCTION FIELD 3D Back View DESCRIPTION 3D Symbol of the Junction (from the back. 3D Front View 3D Symbol of the Junction (from the front. the outside of the Curtain Wall). the inside of the Curtain Wall). that is. 3D Front Axonometry 3D Symbol of the Junction.

Junctions from the “System” class use the settings at the Curtain Wall System Settings level. accessible through Curtain Wall Edit Mode. Junction Type Preview Picture Predefined Preview Picture of the Junction. ArchiCAD 15 Help 841 . Name of the Junction Type as chosen in Curtain Wall Junction Settings.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL JUNCTION FIELD Junction Class DESCRIPTION Either “System” or “Custom”. Junctions from the “Custom” class have been individually customized using Junction Settings.

Virtual Building Curtain Wall Accessory Parameters CURTAIN WALL ACCESSORY FIELD 3D Back View DESCRIPTION Back view of the Accessory. 3D Left Side View Left side view of the Accessory. 3D Front Axonometry Axonometric view of the Accessory. 3D Front View Front view of the Accessory. 3D Right Side View Right side view of the Accessory. 842 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

g. Name of the Accessory Type as chosen in Curtain Wall Accessory Settings. Height parameter as set in the Junction’s settings (e. “Arm height” of the sun shade).Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL ACCESSORY FIELD Accessory Class DESCRIPTION Either “System” or “Custom”. accessible through Curtain Wall Edit Mode. measured along the plane of the Curtain Wall. Accessory Type Height Length Length parameter of the accessory. ArchiCAD 15 Help 843 . Accessories from the “Custom” class have been individually customized using Accessory Settings. Accessories from the “System” class use the settings at the Curtain Wall System Settings level.

844 ArchiCAD 15 Help . its perpendicular extrusion from the plane of the Curtain Wall).e. Width Width parameter of the Accessory (i.Virtual Building CURTAIN WALL ACCESSORY FIELD Preview Picture DESCRIPTION Predefined Preview Picture of the Accessory.

A Door is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. Name of the Cover Fill assigned to the Zone. as seen in the Listing and Labeling panel of Zone Settings. Columns. the Zone’s 2D polygon. This value takes into account any area reductions from Walls. This is set in their individual Wall/Column/ Fill Settings dialog boxes Listing and Labeling Panel. This value is defined in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 845 . or Fills inside the Zone . Calculated Area Zone’s Calculated Area. or coincides with the edge of. Cover Fill Doors Surface Total surface of all Doors in the Zone.Virtual Building Zone Listing Parameters ZONE FIELD Base Level DESCRIPTION Value of the reference level of the Zone.but only for those Walls/ Columns/Fills which are set to reduce Zone area. measured from the Story’s elevation.

Holes Perimeter Total perimeter of holes in the Zone. Floor Thickness Subfloor Thickness value. Height Height of the Zone body measured from the Zone’s bottom elevation.Virtual Building ZONE FIELD Doors Width DESCRIPTION Total width of all Doors in the Zone. the Zone’s 2D polygon. 846 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A Door is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. This value is defined in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings. or coincides with the edge of. This value is defined in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings.

Measured Area Returns the total area of the Zone polygon as measured automatically by the program. or coincides with the edge of. this value includes the area of the enclosing Walls up to the inner side of their Reference Lines. A Beam is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. For Zones created with the Reference Line method. A Column is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. ArchiCAD 15 Help 847 . the Zone’s 2D polygon. or coincides with the edge of. Number of Beams Number of Columns Number of Columns in the Zone. the Zone’s 2D polygon.Virtual Building ZONE FIELD Material DESCRIPTION Material assigned to the Zone. Number of Beams in the Zone.

the Zone’s 2D polygon. each part is counted separately. A Lamp is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. the Zone’s 2D polygon. or coincides with the edge of.Virtual Building ZONE FIELD Number of Doors DESCRIPTION Number of Doors in the Zone. or coincides with the edge of. A single Wall can have multiple distinct parts which form the Zone geometry. the Zone’s 2D polygon. 848 ArchiCAD 15 Help . A Door is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. or coincides with the edge of. Number of Wall Parts Number of Wall parts which surround the Zone and determine the Zone polygon in 2D. Number of Lamps Number of Lamps in the Zone. An Object is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. Number of Objects Number of Objects in the Zone.

Zone Name Name of the Zone as defined in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings. Perimeter Perimeter of the Zone. Perimeter of the Zone. measured along the inner edges of the surrounding Walls (regardless of the position of the Walls’ Reference line). A Column is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. or coincides with the edge of. ArchiCAD 15 Help 849 . For a Zone created with the Reference Line method. Displays name of Zone. the Zone’s 2D polygon. corresponding to the Zone polygon at the bottom of the Zone body.Virtual Building ZONE FIELD Number of Windows DESCRIPTION Number of Windows in the Zone. the perimeter is measured along the boundary Walls’ Reference Lines. Net Perimeter Walls Perimeter Perimeter of the Walls bounding the Zone.

This value is set in the Model Panel of Zone Settings.Virtual Building ZONE FIELD Zone Number DESCRIPTION Number of the Zone as defined in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings. then the Zone surfaces inherit the materials of the surrounding Zone boundaries. A Wall is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. Volume Walls Surface Surface of Walls in the Zone. If the checkbox is checked. 850 ArchiCAD 15 Help .” Volume of the 3D Zone body. or “Inherit Boundary Wall and Trimming Element Materials. Uniform Material Displays checkbox status. Displays number of Zone. If it is unchecked. the Zone uses a uniform material. or coincides with the edge of. the Zone’s 2D polygon. Select a material for the Zone. then choose either: “Use this Material on All Zone Surfaces”. This is a toggle (yes/no) value expressed as a checkbox in the Schedule field.

the Zone’s 2D polygon. (Assigned in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings).Virtual Building ZONE FIELD Windows Surface DESCRIPTION Surface of Windows in the Zone. A Window is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. Displays name of Zone Category. or coincides with the edge of. Windows Width Total width of all Windows in the Zone. or coincides with the edge of. A Window is in the zone if any part of its 2D polygon is inside of. Number of the Zone Category assigned to this Zone. the Zone’s 2D polygon. ArchiCAD 15 Help 851 . (Assigned in the Name and Positioning Panel of Zone Settings) Zone Category Codes are assigned to Zone Categories at Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories. Zone Category Code Displays number of Zone Category. Zone Category Name of the Zone Category assigned to this Zone.

For more information on each of these options. see Format Options (Interactive Schedule).Virtual Building Format a Schedule Use the formatting controls at the left side of the Schedule Window to format the current schedule. 852 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Choose Insert Header Cell Above from Header Options. then choose text formatting options. See also Header Options. ArchiCAD 15 Help 853 . Type in any header text and format as usual.Virtual Building Schedule Headers Each field of the schedule has a header.) 2. at the top of the Schedule window. To show or hide headers and/or the main header. You can add an additional header field above existing headers: 1. A new cell is inserted above the selected cells. just click into the field and type. make sure that “Header” is selected from the Apply To pop-up. To format it. use Shift-click. These headers are shown at the top of the schedule (for column-style schedules) or at the side (for row-style schedules). Select multiple headers (use Shift-click. To change a header text. use the commands from Header Options. To select multiple fields. showing the text “merged”. Each schedule also has a single “main header”. 3.

make sure you click the appropriate “Override Fill” checkbox in the Override Fill Display panel of Model View Options (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options). 2. 1. or Select the cell. then click on Annotate. Double-click the cell of the preview which you wish to annotate. you can add dimensions to these preview pictures in the Schedule. Note: To display previews using lines only (no shaded materials). doors and windows. 854 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Add Annotations to Schedule Previews If your Interactive Schedule includes previews of objects. The preview picture opens in a separate 2D window entitled Element Preview.

its dimensions as shown in the Interactive Schedule will be modified accordingly.Virtual Building 3. 4. You can also add annotations from available libraries. using the Object tool. Dimensions in the Interactive Schedule preview cells can be associative: if you modify the object size in the project. Use the available 2D tools to annotate the preview picture: dimensions. labels. text. Click OK in the drawing window’s menu to close this window and apply the annotations to the selected preview. ArchiCAD 15 Help 855 . or click Cancel to close the window without applying any changes.

in the appearing Automatic Dimensions dialog box. 856 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the Schedule Options include the Add automatic dimensions option. Check this box to add automatic door/window dimensions to the selected preview picture. Below the checkbox. click Dimension Settings to set dimensioning options for the preview picture.Virtual Building Automatic Dimensioning of Door/Window Previews If the selected preview cell contains a Door or Window.

Note: If the selected Drawing is set to Split Drawing into Multiple Layouts. Click the command. but instead of placing the Schedule parts onto a single Layout. each new part will be placed onto an additional Layout. Use the Restructure Table command to automatically split large tables which exceed the Layout size into parts and lay them out next to each other.Virtual Building Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout Note: This function is also available for Project Indexes placed on Layouts. ArchiCAD 15 Help 857 . The result: the Schedule is split in two portions which are placed under each other. The Restructure Table command is available in the Pet Palette. The Restructure Table command is used to define a new enclosing rectangle for the Schedule table. In this case. The following image shows a Window Schedule that does not fit onto an A4 sized sheet. then the Restructure Table command will enable you to define a new enclosing rectangle. ArchiCAD recalculates sizes and lays out the Schedule so it best fits the new geometry. then manually resize the Drawing frame. from the node of a selected Schedule placed as a Drawing.

Virtual Building See Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts. 858 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

This feature is available only for Drawings created from Element Schedules and Project Indexes. use the Restructure Schedule command to define a new enclosing rectangle for the Schedule. 1. Whenever you place a Drawing based on an Element Schedule onto a Layout.Virtual Building Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts Note: This function is also available for Project Indexes placed on Layouts. ArchiCAD 15 Help 859 . Now ArchiCAD will create as many Layouts as needed to display the entire contents of the Schedule. this checkbox becomes available in Drawing Selection Settings. 2. to enable it to fit on the Layout. located on the Frame Panel of Drawing Tool Settings. See Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout.use this feature to quickly and easily split up a long Schedule and place it onto multiple Layouts.as can easily happen with a long Schedule . If a Schedule-based Drawing does not fit onto a single Layout . the checkbox is grey. so that all data on the Schedule can be published. Check the Split Drawing among Multiple Layouts checkbox. First.) 3. (For Drawings with any other source.

The Split Drawing feature has placed the total Window List onto two Layouts. Layout is drawn to indicate that it consists of multiple pages: 860 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building In this example. the Window List has been placed on the Layout. In the Layout Window.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 861 . Click this to access additional navigation options among just the Layouts that display the current multi-page Drawing. using the navigation arrows at the bottom of the Layout Window. only one Layout is shown. you can navigate between Layout pages as usual. “First Page” and “Last Page” here refer to the Layouts of the multi-page Drawing. but it has a “multi-page” icon.Virtual Building In the Navigator Layout Book. the Window’s title bar shows the range of Layouts which display the Drawing. different from the single Layout icon. However. and the total number of Layouts used for this Drawing is displayed after the Drawing Name. if you open a Layout Window which contains a multi-Layout Drawing. If a Layout Window displays a multi-Layout Drawing. the navigation button at the bottom of the screen displays a small black arrow. In the Layout Book.

Then you place another long Schedule onto the first of those Layouts. If you place any other type of Drawing (i. then that Drawing will appear on every one of that set of Layouts. which is neither a Schedule nor a Index) onto a Layout that contains a multi-page Drawing. For example. and generates any additional Layouts needed to display the full Schedule. This can be an advantage if the additional Drawing serves as a Title on the Layout. 862 ArchiCAD 15 Help . suppose you place a long Schedule onto a Layout. ArchiCAD fills up the three existing Layouts with the second Schedule (alongside the first Schedule).e. ArchiCAD generates a total of three Layouts to display the entire Schedule. on the same Layouts.Virtual Building Place Additional Drawings Next to Multi-Layout Drawing It is possible to place several multi-page Drawings (Schedules or Indexes) alongside each other.

Virtual Building Project Indexes About Project Indexes Index of Published Items ArchiCAD 15 Help 863 .

delete. Project indexes have their own special icons in the Navigator. layout sheets and drawings based on a set of filtering criteria. rename. • Layout sheet lists allow you to filter and list layouts by their master layouts. 864 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Project indexes are based on schemes defined with the Document > Project Indexes > Project Index Schemes command. dimensioning standard and publishing status. import and export schemes • Choose the filtering criteria (depending on the type of the index) • Select the parameters and other information to display for the items that match the set criteria. Once the new (or modified) scheme is defined. For more information. their scale. meaning that you can add it to a view map. its name appears in the Navigator and you can use it like any other view. publish it or place it on a layout. They allow you to display and access lists of views. • View lists allow you to filter and list views by their location in the Project Map. subsets and publishing status. layer combination. see Index Settings Dialog Box.Virtual Building About Project Indexes Project Indexes are table of contents type items listed in the Project Map of the Navigator palette. model view option combination. The dialog box that appears allows you to: • Create.

• The format of the index (including fonts. ArchiCAD 15 Help 865 . update status and zoom information.Virtual Building • Drawing lists allow you to filter and list drawings by their location (layout and subset). cell and heading styles) can be fully customized with the controls on the left of the displayed list. go to the Navigator palette and double-click its name. colors. To open an index.

you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Index Settings button top right. which means that you can edit some of the fields: for example. The modifications are carried out immediately. the name or the ID of a layout or a placed drawing. If you need to adjust them.Virtual Building • The content of the index is based on the choices you made in Project Index Schemes. Project indexes are interactive. you can change the scale or the layer combination of a view. You can move Index Settings among projects by exporting and importing them (use the Import/ Export commands in the Index Settings dialog box). 866 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

One way to do this is to add the field “Published” to the Index. Thus. see Index Settings Dialog Box.Virtual Building Index of Published Items Suppose you are publishing a number of Layouts in a Publisher Set. the Index as viewed in the ArchiCAD window will be empty. set this criterion to Off while you format the list. and you want to include a Sheet Index which indicates which items have been published. if you publish Foundation and Roof plans. For more information. then set it to On before you publish the Sheet Index. then the published Sheet Index Layout will look like this: If you want the published Sheet Index to list only published items. add “Published” as a criterion to your Index Settings. on a Layout. ArchiCAD 15 Help 867 . For example. as well as this Sheet Index. Note: As long as the “Published” criterion is set to “On”. but only in the published copy of the Index (not while you work in ArchiCAD). The published Sheet Index will then consist of a list of published index items. The checkboxes will be activated for those items which you have published.

Each of these elements has a dedicated tool in the ArchiCAD Toolbox. Slabs. Elements are displayed as solid building components in the 3D Window. Zones and Curtain Walls. Meshes. Shells. Roofs.Virtual Building Construction Elements Construction Elements are the virtual equivalents of actual three-dimensional building components. They include Walls. How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD Walls Columns Beams Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Roofs Shells Slabs Meshes Zones Curtain Wall: A System Tool Model Element Connections 868 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Their cut or elevated view can be projected in Section and Elevation windows. Columns. Beams.

You can choose a Favorite . • Use the Magic Wand to create new elements that automatically match the shape of an existing element (e. Draw the element in the Floor Plan or 3D window. Cut Surfaces. 2. See Favorites. curved. Solid Element Operations. see the descriptions of individual panels for each Tool Settings dialog box in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. create a Roof that fits exactly over your exterior Walls). define one or two alternative Reference Levels in Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North. See Element Extras: TrussMaker. you define its absolute and relative base height in the Geometry and Positioning Panel of its Settings dialog box. • Create duplicates of existing elements • RoofMaker and TrussMaker from the Design > Design Extras menu. 3. See Magic Wand. Positioning Construction Elements For any of the construction elements. Select the element’s tool in the Toolbox and open its settings dialog box. and other parameters where applicable. See also Display Order. ArchiCAD 15 Help 869 . rotated or polygonal variations of the elements. See Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. Where applicable. To do this.g.a predefined element configuration . Other methods of element creation include: • Use the Favorites Palette: double-click on stored Favorite settings for the relevant tool.Virtual Building How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD The typical steps in element creation using the Toolbox are: 1. 5. 4. Outlines. choose a Geometry Method from the Info Box allowing you to create plain. The panels of the Settings dialog boxes provide lists of pen. then click to place an element with those settings. For more information. These newly defined reference levels will then be available in the Geometry and Positioning panels of all elements’ Settings dialog boxes.using the button on top of the Tool Settings dialog box. in some projects you may want to define the input elevation to with reference to some other level. See also Reference Levels and Elevation. chained. material and line options for the element’s Core Structure. However. Adjust the settings offered by default to suit your particular situation or purpose. Positioning Construction Elements to a Custom Elevation Level The actual elevation of elements is always calculated to Project Zero.

Column. Beam and Object type elements directly onto a Slab. Shell or Mesh To make placement more accurate. you can use the Gravity function to place Wall. Shell or Mesh. Roof. See Gravity. Roof. 870 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Gravitate Elements onto a Slab.

Virtual Building Walls About Walls Create a Straight Wall Create a Curved Wall Create a Chain of Walls Create a Rectangle of Walls Create a Trapezoid Wall Create a Composite Wall Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Log Wall Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Wall-Wall Intersections Walls and Other Elements Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) Wall Tool Settings ArchiCAD 15 Help 871 .

and create complex walls (Profile Wall) of any custom shape and with a combination of materials. and Wall Ends can only be placed into Walls. and a direction.Virtual Building About Walls In ArchiCAD. the reference line of a selected Wall is shown in a separate color: you can change this color using the “Reference Lines in 3D” setting at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. You can even go a step further. They can be simple. The reference line is a heavy black line (including the arrow that shows the Wall’s direction) that appears when you draw the Wall on the Floor Plan. See Curtain Wall: A System Tool. Windows. Wall Reference Lines Each Wall possesses a reference line at the base of the wall. A Curtain Wall is constructed with a separate. Certain parametric objects such as Doors. It also establishes hotspots and edges for selecting. or composite. provided that the View > On-Screen View Options > Walls & Beams Reference Lines feature is switched on. In the 3D window. Some Pet 872 ArchiCAD 15 Help . composed of several materials. of a single material. dedicated Curtain Wall tool. curved. The reference line helps you achieve the precise connection of Walls for clean intersections. you can draw walls that are straight. trapezoidal and polygonal. moving and transforming Walls.

to determine which parts of the placed wall should be displayed. the wall body protrudes on either or both sides of the reference line. you can choose to display or hide the separator lines. the Reference Line position and the direction of selected wall type elements. See Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On). Display of Walls Use Wall Settings to choose attributes for the display of your wall in the various 2D and 3D windows. • Wall & Beam Intersections can be set on and off. combined with element projection preferences. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane. as shown in the two images here: The reference line is also relevant for determining which side of the wall is which. See Wall Tool Settings.g. The direction of the wall is defined by the order in which you define the wall’s endpoints. Other display options for a wall’s fill patterns are set in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. cut surfaces. Depending on the chosen Construction and Geometry Method. overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Note: With the commands at Design > Modify Wall.Virtual Building Palette editing commands are accessible only from the reference-line side of the selected Wall. ArchiCAD 15 Help 873 . for assigning materials to the 3D model (in the Model panel of Wall Settings). you can modify the thickness. See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting). See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. In the case of composite walls. Some aspects of Wall display depend on the current settings in View > On-Screen View Options. Attributes for each part of the representation (e. • Fill patterns can be shown as Vectorial Hatching or bitmap.

Virtual Building See Model View Options Override Fill Display. 874 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

a ghost contour appears and it follows the cursor until you click at the second endpoint. Walls can be stretched using either menu commands or pet palette commands. Note: This CAD-like drawing method is the default method of drawing segments in ArchiCAD.Virtual Building Create a Straight Wall The Single Straight Wall method produces one straight wall element at a time. See Stretching Walls. With the Wall Tool selected. ArchiCAD 15 Help 875 . In both Floor Plan and 3D. but you can change it in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods. you define the length of Wall segments by clicking at their endpoints. The moment you start drawing the Wall. choose the Straight Wall Geometry method from the Info Box and draw the wall segment on the plan.

876 ArchiCAD 15 Help . grid intersections or special snap points. After that. The second option defines the curved wall by three points on the arc’s circumference. If you need a full circular wall. only a partial ghost curved segment is shown.Virtual Building Create a Curved Wall With the Wall Tool selected. double-click when defining its radius. After that. choose one of the three Curved Wall Geometry Methods from the Info Box. A ghost contour of the circular wall follows your cursor until you click a second to time to define the radius. • The first option defines the curved wall by the arc’s or circle’s centerpoint and radius. When all three points are defined. The first two clicks define two points that you will probably locate on points connecting other elements. Your first click defines the centerpoint. the ghost contour is replaced by the fully displayed wall contours and hatches. until you click a third time to define the length of the arc wall’s circumference. a ghost circle follows the cursor until you click a third time to define the third point.

Double-click the third point to define a full circular wall. so a maximum of two endpoints are allowed. etc. In this process. the circular Wall is automatically drawn. The next step depends on the geometric situation.) An endpoint cannot qualify as a tangent edge when using this method. If you click a radial edge with the Mercedes cursor. the process will revert to the second method described above.Virtual Building A fourth click is needed to define the length of the arc segment. or a free-floating point (indicated by the Crosshair cursor. Note that the second and the third points do not need to be actually part of the arc wall. you select three initial points: these can be a tangent edge (indicated by the Mercedes cursor). Lines. a node (indicated by the Checkmark cursor). Walls. When the arc length is defined. • The third option only defines full circular shapes based on three tangential edges or points. If more than two are selected. the ghost arc is replaced by the fully displayed wall contours and hatches. the resulting Circle will pass through that point rather than being a tangent to the curve. Only linear tangency is allowed: all tangent points must be on the straight edges of Slabs. If there is only one solution. • ArchiCAD 15 Help 877 .

Note: Since Walls need to have two endpoints. Related Topics: Stretching Curves Curve/Straighten Element Edge 878 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • If there is no solution. Click when it is at the right place to complete the circular wall. no circle will be made. if you define three parallel edges for tangency). the Eyeball cursor appears and the ghost contour of the Wall flips from one position to the other as you move the cursor around. (for example. the fully closed circular Wall that you draw will in fact consist of two half-circles. Walls in the forms of full ellipses.Virtual Building • If there are two or four solutions. but you can trace the shapes of plain drawing elements with the Magic Wand. elliptic arcs or splines cannot be created directly.

not just the last segment. (Pop out the small black arrow on the Straight Wall Method button.Virtual Building Create a Chain of Walls A chained wall is a sequence of connected straight or curved wall elements with automatically coincident reference line endpoints. choose the Chained Wall method from the Info Box. radius and length Place the cursor on the option that suits you best and define the endpoint of the first segment using the methods described above for single Wall segments. offering you geometry options for drawing a straight or a curved segment. and no elements will be created. Throughout the process. The options are: • A straight wall segment • A curved segment tangential to the previous one (cannot be used for the first wall segment) • A curved segment tangential to a line you define before actually drawing the segment • A curved segment passing through two points • A curved segment defined by its centerpoint. a pet palette appears. With the Wall Tool selected. • Clicking the Cancel button in the context menu or the Delete key at any time during drafting will abort the process. This endpoint automatically becomes the starting point of the next Wall segment. • Hitting the Backspace key allows you to undo the previous segment and continue the creation of the Wall chain. • Choosing Edit > Undo command will remove the entire new chain of Walls. When you want to finish drawing Wall chain segments. double-click the endpoint of the last segment. a ghost contour of the Wall segments is shown. ArchiCAD 15 Help 879 .) As soon as you start drawing the first Wall. The full Walls are only displayed when you are finished.

880 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you can switch methods on the fly with the pet palette. material. • If necessary. the chained Wall segments will be created as part of a group. fill color. see Group Elements. all created Wall segments will have the modified attributes (reference line position. line type.). etc. For more information.Virtual Building • If you change the Wall’s attributes in the Info Box during the creation process. • If the Edit > Grouping > Autogroup function is switched on.

Virtual Building Create a Rectangle of Walls The Rectangle Wall method produces four Wall elements with coincident nodes by defining the diagonal line of a rectangle. The rectangle wall is created. choose the Rectangle Wall method from the Info Box. The Rotated Rectangle Wall method produces four wall elements as with the previous method.) Draw the diagonal of the rectangular wall and click to define its length. except that you first define a rotation vector for the rectangle’s base reference line. Its four sides are always aligned orthogonally with the Normal Grid and are not affected by the use of a Rotated Grid. (Pop out the small black arrow on the Straight Wall Method button. Then drag the cursor to define the rectangle. ArchiCAD 15 Help 881 . With the Wall Tool selected.

You draw this type of Wall as a straight Wall. 882 ArchiCAD 15 Help . except that you will first enter the thickness of the Wall at its two endpoints. using the Wall Thickness fields in the Info Box or in Wall Settings.Virtual Building Create a Trapezoid Wall The Trapezoid or Non-Parallel method allows you to draw straight Walls whose thickness is not constant.

In the image below.has a trapezoid shape. two of the skins are marked as Core. only the outermost Core skin’s thickness reflects the trapezoidal shape of the Wall. but only the Insulation core skin .the outermost Core .Virtual Building Composite Trapezoid Wall When drawing a trapezoid Wall with a composite fill. See also Composite Structures. ArchiCAD 15 Help 883 .

Slab. 884 ArchiCAD 15 Help . If the structure of the Wall is a composite. Roof or Shell. and equals the sum of the skins’ thicknesses. see Composite Structures and Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall. (Remember that the model’s Partial Structure Display settings will affect the display of composite walls. then the Wall’s thickness is defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites.) See Partial Structure Display.Virtual Building Create a Composite Wall You can apply or customize a composite structure for a wall. For more information.

click with the hammer cursor to complete the wall. choose the Polygon Wall Geometry Method in the Info Box.Virtual Building Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) To define a polygonal wall block of free shape. Once you have closed the polygon. only simple fills are available (no composites). ArchiCAD will warn you about this. but the wall will still be drawn. If you define a polygon whose edges intersect themselves. Now use the Pet Palette commands to model the wall shape as desired. For Polygon Walls. using pet palette segment options as needed (as when drawing a chained wall). Polygon Walls can contain Doors or Windows. Draw the contour of the Polygon Wall. ArchiCAD 15 Help 885 . You can also transform a regular wall into a polygon wall: select the wall. Both straight and curved edges are allowed. then choose the Polygon Wall geometry method.

Virtual Building The wall’s edges will include one reference edge (like a straight wall’s reference line). in red. • The “Side Material” is assigned to the two surfaces adjacent to the reference edge. When you assign materials to the surfaces of a polygon wall in the Model panel of Wall Settings. select an endpoint of the current reference edge. in gold. the materials are assigned depending on the location of the reference edge. To make another edge the reference edge. here. • The “Reference side material” is the reference-edge surface. The pet palette contains a command with which you can move the reference edge endpoints to other nodes of the polygon wall. 886 ArchiCAD 15 Help . here.

check the PolyWall Corners Can Change box in the Geometry and Positioning section of the Wall Settings dialog box (available when the PolyWall geometry method is active in the Info Box). For more information. in blue. If you wish to override this setting. ArchiCAD 15 Help 887 . here. see PolyWall Corners. plain walls. To edit polygon walls. click the nodes and edges of the selected Walls and use the pet palette. wall polygons keep their original contour by default.Virtual Building • The “Opposite Side Material” surfaces are assigned to all other edges (those which are opposite the reference edge). When connected to other.

The top of a composite wall. this can be zero. you can’t go any higher. the wall is transformed as follows: • If you transform a single-slanted into a double-slanted wall. When setting the angles of a double-slanted wall. The height of either type of slanted wall is the distance between its lowest and highest point. A slanted wall tilts in one direction. see Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns. its two faces are parallel to each other. double-slanted wall. however. 888 ArchiCAD 15 Help . has to be wide enough to accommodate all of the skins. For a simple structure (using a single material). you are constrained by the minimum thickness of the top of the wall. if you have a double-slanted wall and change it to either a vertical or single-slanted wall. the new wall’s width (i.e. • Similarly. its wall base) will take on the width of the old. once the two faces meet. you face the obvious constraint that the wall’s width at the top cannot be negative (i. When entering a height value of a double-slanted wall. single-slanted wall.e. the wall is trapezoid in shape. Enter the desired wall angle(s).) The thickness of a slanted wall is its thickness perpendicular to its slant vector (as indicated by the icon in the Info Box): The thickness of a double-slanted wall equals the width of the wall base. If you switch from one kind of slant to another. Click the desired Slanted Wall Icon. A double-slanted wall has faces which are not parallel. For information on modifying slanted wall geometry. in Section view. the new wall will have the same width as that of the old.Virtual Building Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall To draw a wall whose vertical axis is slanted on either or both sides. go to Wall Settings (Geometry and Positioning panel).

Virtual Building Create a Log Wall You can create straight walls constructed from logs. Clicking the Log Details button in the Model panel of Wall Settings provides a number of geometry and texture options. Note: Log construction is only available for simple straight walls. ArchiCAD 15 Help 889 . See Log Details Dialog Box. remember that if you enter a value that is larger than the wall’s width parameter. When determining the log’s height. the logs will not rest on each other. Log details appear in both the 3D Window and Section/Elevation/IE Windows.

the cursor snaps to each endpoint of the inner skin as well. the element of higher priority will be in front. Display of Intersecting Composite Wall Skins (2D only) When displaying an intersecting composite wall in 2D windows and the 3D Document window. In the case of composite walls. which you can fine-tune in Options > Attributes > Composites. To make alignment of connecting walls easier. Each skin of a composite wall has a separate intersection priority. and the intersected part removed You can set a separate priority for each individual wall. When walls of unequal priorities intersect. using the Wall Priority slider switch (Wall Settings > Floor Plan and Section panel). you can control its display of skin by skin if you wish. the element of higher priority will remain intact in 3D.Virtual Building Wall-Wall Intersections The connection of walls and their fills on the floor plan and in 3D is determined first of all by their Wall Priorities. These Walls intersect according to the following rules: 890 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) The element of lower priority will be cut. (In 2D. See Composite Structures Dialog Box. on a scale of 0-16 (even numbers only). the intelligent cursor snaps to all sides and corners of wall segments.

• Skins with equal priorities will form a mitered joint. Composite Wall Intersection Example You can make good use of the priority options to fine-tune the appearance of connecting fills on your floor plan. do not check Enable Skin Priorities. In the example below. you must activate them with the Enable Skin Priorities checkbox (in Wall Tool Settings: Floor Plan & Section Panel). The skins of the wall core do not intersect the way we want. Once you set these skin priorities for a composite wall. if you want to set a single 2D intersection priority for the composite Wall as a whole. ArchiCAD 15 Help 891 . the Wall Priorities of both Walls are set to 8 in their Wall Settings dialog boxes. However.Virtual Building • Skins with higher priorities will block skins with lower priorities. the Wall Priority slider switch (in Wall Tool Settings: Structure) will prevail for this wall in 2D as well as 3D. in this case. (provided they have the same fill pattern) Wall Outlines and Overhead lines also intersect each other.

A priority value is assigned to each component of a Complex structure. the skins intersect as desired. Display of Intersecting Profile Wall Skins Complex Wall skins are represented as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. just as they are assigned to each skin of Composite Structures.Default/Selected Panel. In this composite. Now.Virtual Building So. For more information. we set Skin Priority numbers for the Composite used for these Walls. Then we return to the Wall Settings dialog box and check the Enable Skin Priorities box. see Components . we set the Core skin’s Priority to 12. 892 ArchiCAD 15 Help . in Options > Element Attributes > Composites.

Beam Intersection Priority Numbers are always odd numbers.Virtual Building For example. Thus. the predefined “Brick Wall with Footing” complex wall has three components. any time a Wall/Column intersects with a Beam in 3D. Note: Wall (and Composite Structure) and Column Intersection Priority Numbers are always even numbers. the program can determine which is “dominant” depending on their Priority Numbers. ArchiCAD 15 Help 893 . In the Profile Editor. select each of these components in turn to assign a separate intersection priority for each.

the wall you place second will cut the wall that is already on the plan. then the running wall will prevail over the adjoining wall.” and works only if the Options > Auto Intersection option is switched On. You don’t have to meet the target wall’s reference line manually. change their Wall Priorities. and the walls will also be joined correctly in 3D. See Display Order. When drawing a new wall to meet an existing wall. In the case of L intersections. The 2D Display Order affects the intersection sequence in both the 2D and 3D windows. Walls in an “X” Intersection Two walls crossing each other in an X junction will automatically create a clean intersection. You can modify this intersection sequence for X intersections using the Edit > Display Order command. 894 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Then the Clean Wall & Beam Intersections option (View > On-Screen View Options) will ensure that walls are joined correctly in 2D. it is sufficient to click any edge or inside the hatching of the target Wall. see Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections. the new Wall’s reference line will be adjusted automatically for proper connection. The intersection sequence is visible in the 2D window (if Clean Wall and Intersections is off) as well as in the 3D window. if the connecting walls have equal priorities. provided that the two walls have equal intersection priority. Note: Wall intersections are effective even if some of the intersecting elements are on currently hidden Layers. then wall intersection will not take place. For more information. However. if intersecting walls are on layers with differing Layer Intersection Groups. To change the order in which they are joined. Walls in “L” or “T” Intersections In the case of T intersections. When making an X wall junction. they will be joined in random order.Virtual Building Wall Intersection Display in 2D For best display of wall intersections in 2D. the reference lines of the intersecting walls must be joined together. if the connecting walls have equal priorities and are of equal thicknesses. This feature is called “Auto Intersection.

PolyWall Corners When connected to other. the fill that is thicker has priority. check the PolyWall Corners Can Change box in the Geometry and Positioning section of the Wall Settings dialog box (available when the PolyWall geometry method is active). enable the Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams checkmark in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. If you wish to override this setting. plain walls. If you need a more elaborate drawing detail at wall intersections. Intersections involving complex walls will always be calculated as if this function were active.Virtual Building If two walls are connected in an L intersection and have equal priorities. Intersecting Walls in 3D To improve the appearance of wall connections in 3D. ArchiCAD 15 Help 895 . “L” or “T” intersections are not affected by Display Order modifications. Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each wall has been cut. wall polygons keep their original contour by default. If your project’s wall intersections involve simple walls of equal heights. See Create Patch Object. especially when connecting walls of different heights. you can create a patch or a detail drawing. you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked. Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance.

896 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Turning Clean Wall & Beam Intersections On will give a different results depending on whether PolyWall Corners Can Change is active. a Single Wall is connected to a Wall Polygon.Virtual Building In the following example. The first illustration shows you the situation with View > On-Screen View Options > Clean Wall & Beam Intersections turned Off.

you can set the fill. you can set its thickness. and still keep the position of a desired part of the Wall. you can change the hatching of the selected Walls. You can add it to the Edit menu (or any other menu) by customizing the menu scheme in Options > Work Environment > Work Environment > Command Layout Schemes > Menus. With the Modify Wall Structure command. you can modify the thickness. At the top of the dialog box. ArchiCAD 15 Help 897 . With the commands of the Modify Wall hierarchical menu.Virtual Building Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) Note: This tool is not visible in the interface according to ArchiCAD’s Standard Work Environment profile. see Customizing Menus. If not. Click the radio button at the bottom to choose which part of the wall should keep its position after the modification. the Reference Line position and the direction of selected wall type elements. If the chosen fill is not a composite.) With the Modify Wall Reference Line command. this will be done by adding an offset to the reference line. For more information. the reference line will be moved. (If possible. you can move the reference line of the selected walls without changing the walls’ position on the Floor Plan. otherwise the thickness of the core layer is displayed.

On the right you can add an offset to the reference line to position it to the desired part of the wall. you can change the reference line side of walls.) See also Wall Reference Lines.Virtual Building On the left side of the dialog box. 898 ArchiCAD 15 Help . With the Invert Direction command. you can change the direction of the reference line. (This is visible when the Clean Wall & Beam Intersections command toggle is Off.

Relation to Zones: In the Listing and Labeling Panel of Wall settings. beam priorities are odd. See Model Element Connections. The element of lower priority will be cut in 3D. define how the Wall should behave in relation to zones: as a zone boundary (delimiter). Roofs/Shells and Walls: The Connect commands can trim Walls to Roofs or Shells. the element of higher priority will remain intact. • • • • ArchiCAD 15 Help 899 . or whether its area/volume should be subtracted from the zone it is in. or whether it should have no effect at all on a zone. See Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof. which means that the intersection part will be removed from it. In these cases. (Wall priorities are always even numbers. See Relation to Zones. You can also crop a Wall to a Single-plane Roof. the trimming element (either a Roof or a Shell) will prevail over walls in terms of connection priority.) When a wall intersects a beam.Virtual Building Walls and Other Elements • Beams and Walls: Intersection priorities for walls and beams are set at the element level in their respective Settings dialog boxes. See Join Wall to Curtain Wall. Walls and Curtain Walls: Walls can be connected to Curtain Walls using the Design > Connect > Join Wall(s) to Curtain Wall command. Columns and Walls: see Columns and Other Elements.

Columns can stand free. The Column’s section can be rectangular or circular.Virtual Building Columns Columns in ArchiCAD are made up of two components: the load-bearing core and the optional veneer used to simulate fire proofing or any kind of sheathing around the core. Creating Columns Create a Slanted Column Column Display on Floor Plan Column Display in 3D Columns and Other Elements Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Column Tool Settings 900 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Double-click the Column tool icon to open the Column Tool Settings and set your preferences. or they can be smartly connected to walls. or they can be complex. as defined in a profile. The column’s axis can be either vertical or slanted.

rotate it around its vertical axis and click. you can still stretch a column’s height in the 3D window. click to place the column. the second will define its rotation angle around a vertical axis. and click to complete.Virtual Building Creating Columns Use the Column tool to create new columns in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.will affect the display of the wall/column in the Floor Plan. Revolved placement method: If your column is complex and/or slanted. set the rotation angle). ArchiCAD 15 Help 901 . then click to place the column into the project. Column Construction Methods When placing a Column that will intersect a Composite wall. • • • Simple: Place the Column with one click. The Column axis will be projected vertically from the Floor Plan. this input method provides a three-step placement process. Second. Column Placement Methods There are three Geometry Methods (input methods) available in the Info Box for placing Columns. revolve it around its own.e. Third. Choose the desired column attributes and geometry from Column Settings. After placement. See Stretch Height. slanted axis (i. Rotated: Your first click determines the position of the Column’s Anchor Point at its Base. First. your choice of Geometry method wrapped or unwrapped .

Wrapped Columns can only break through the core skins of composite Walls. retaining their thickness. For more information. 902 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The other wall skins wrap around the column. see Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan.Virtual Building Use the wrapped/unwrapped (or “freestanding”) icons from the Column Info Box or the Column Settings dialog box to determine how the columns will be interact with composite walls.

(See Column Placement Methods. Choose a Placement Method from the Info Box.Virtual Building Create a Slanted Column From Column Settings. choose the Slanted icon and enter a slant angle in degrees. then place the column. ArchiCAD 15 Help 903 .) See also Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns.

Slash.g. combined with element projection preferences. cut surfaces. in both 2D and 3D views. Use Column Settings to choose attributes for the display of your column in the various 2D and 3D windows. You can add an optional veneer to your column.) 904 ArchiCAD 15 Help . X. However. Display of Column Core and Veneer The structure and cut attributes of the core and veneer are set in the Floor Plan & Section panel of Column Settings. See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting). Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane. “finish” or “other”. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. The display of all column floor plan symbols in the project can be turned on or off with the Show Column Symbol checkbox in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. The contour of Column cores with a slash or an X is always fully drawn. you have the option of defining the column veneer as either “core”. Crossing Symbol The Floor Plan Symbol options (in Column Tool Settings. (See Partial Structure Display. this veneer is considered part of the “core” of the column for display and listing purposes. overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Floor Plan and Section Panel) refer to the column’s crossing symbol (Plain. overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the column’s Settings dialog box. to determine which parts of the placed column should be displayed. By default. or Crosshair). Attributes for each part of the representation (e. (See Column Veneer.Virtual Building Column Display on Floor Plan Attributes for each part of the Floor Plan representation (e.g. cut surfaces.) Your Partial Structure Display settings will take this veneer definition into account. in Column Tool Settings. regardless of any other factors.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 905 . Veneer is defined as a “Finish:” Unwrapped Columns on the Floor Plan Unwrapped Columns (those placed with the Freestanding Construction method) do not modify the shape of the wall. The other (non-core) wall skins wrap around the column. breaking through all wall skins. Note: For composite walls.Virtual Building Column with a veneer. just cut out a place for themselves. Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan Wrapped Columns (those placed with the “wrapped” construction method) break through the core skins of composite Walls. The connection line between wall skins and the column are removed where their fill patterns match. thus adding this thickness to the column. the skins that are “core” are defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites.

” Wrapping on the Floor Plan will only occur if: • the Column was placed using the Wrapped Method • it intersects a composite Wall • the composite Wall type has at least one skin that is non-core (which will wrap around) • the Column touches or intersects the core skin(s) of the composite Wall Note: Wrapping is not available for curved or polygonal Walls.Virtual Building See Composite Structures Dialog Box. 906 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Note: You cannot wrap columns whose veneer is defined as a “Finish. or for Columns whose veneer is defined as “Finish”.

A column veneer. ArchiCAD 15 Help 907 . (See Display of Column Core and Veneer. and even if there are no wall skins configured to actually wrap around the Columns.Virtual Building Column Display in 3D The Model panel controls the wall’s material settings in 3D view.) Columns in 3D Views Columns placed with the Wrapped Construction Method will inherit the Surface Material of the connecting Walls. even if the wall is not a composite wall. In 3D. if any. is displayed or hidden. depending on the veneer’s component definition and on the Partial Structure Display settings in effect. a single material is used to display all their surfaces.

Virtual Building Unwrapped columns retain their own materials in 3D. If Column surfaces are connected to wall or slab surfaces or other Column surfaces within the same 3D plane. the connection lines are eliminated in 3D view when using the Internal 3D engine. 908 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

See Trim Elements to Roof or Shell. Beams is a global setting applicable to all columns. See Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof. or whether it should have no effect at all on a zone. Roofs/Shells and Columns: Columns can be trimmed to Roofs or Shells. ArchiCAD 15 Help 909 . Walls and Columns: See Column Display on Floor Plan. See Relation to Zones. • Beam Priority is set in the Beam Tool Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel). You can also crop a Column to a Single-plane Roof. the element of lower priority is cut in 3D. define how the Column should behave in relation to zones: as a zone boundary (delimiter). it is set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.Virtual Building Columns and Other Elements Beams and Columns: When a Beam crosses a Column. or whether its area/volume should be subtracted from the zone it is in. Relation to Zones: In the Listing and Labeling Panel of Column settings. • Column Priority vs.

They can be rectangular or complex in shape.Virtual Building Beams ArchiCAD Beams are horizontal or inclined construction elements with vertical end faces. Beam Reference Axis Beam Display on the Floor Plan Create a Beam Create a Hole in a Beam How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces Beams and Other Elements Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Beam Tool Settings 910 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

the reference axis runs in the center of the Beam’s upper face. moving and transforming Beams. You can also offset it from the center by any distance (for example. The direction of the reference axis follows your cursor as you drag it to draw the beam. in the Geometry and Positioning panel of Beam Settings.Virtual Building Beam Reference Axis Each Beam possesses a reference axis (center line) which serves the precise connection of Beams for clean intersections and establishes hotspots and edges for selecting. (To see the arrow on the beam that indicates the axis direction. In the 3D window. the reference axis of a selected Beam is shown in a separate color: you can change this color using the “Reference Lines in 3D” setting at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. ArchiCAD 15 Help 911 . using the “Show Center Line” checkbox in the Symbols part of the Floor Plan and Section Panel of Beam Settings. turn on View > On-Screen View Options > Walls and Beams Reference Lines.) By default. Its direction determines the beam’s “left” and “right” surfaces for the purpose of applying materials in the Model Panel of Beam Settings. See Beam Model Panel. if you are using a beam with an asymmetrical profile): enter a value in the Offset field. You can show/hide the reference axis (center line) of any individual beam on the Floor Plan.

or just the contours. or just the reference lines. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.g. 912 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting). cut surfaces. the “Show Beam as” options apply globally to all beams in the project. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Global Settings for Beam Display In Document > Set Model View > Model View Options (Options for Construction Elements panel). Choose to display beams in their entirety. ArchiCAD generates its Floor Plan display according to your choices in Beam Settings. Attributes for each part of the representation (e. combined with element projection preferences.Virtual Building Beam Display on the Floor Plan When you create a beam with the Beam Tool. to determine which parts of the placed beam should be displayed. These determine the individual beam’s structure and its fill and line attributes. overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box.

click the inclined beam icon (in either the Info Box or in Beam Settings). See Beam Tool Settings. at the reference line’s starting point and endpoint. and so on. Choose one of these Geometry Methods from the Info Box. • The Single Beam method produces a beam element by clicking twice.Virtual Building Create a Beam Use Beam Settings to define the parameters of your beam. Beam Geometry There are four Geometry Methods available for drawing Beams. The process for drawing chained Beams is the same as for Walls. • The PolyBeam method creates a sequence of connected beam elements with automatically coincident reference line endpoints. • The Rectangle Beam produces four beam elements with coincident nodes and aligned to the X and Y axes. New Beams can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window. Only straight beam segments can be drawn when creating a PolyBeam. you automatically start drawing the second one. Create an Inclined Beam To create an inclined (slanted) beam. until you double-click to finish drawing the chained Beams. ArchiCAD 15 Help 913 . • The Rotated Rectangle Beam method produces four beam elements with coincident nodes. When you click to end the definition of the first Beam. Define the rectangle by clicking the starting point and the endpoint of one of its diagonal lines. the first side of the rectangle being defined by the first two mouse clicks at their endpoints and the perpendicular side defined by the third mouse click.

and is measured from the starting point of the Beam. 914 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Inclined Beams are placed the same way as Horizontal Beams. The Beam is inclined in the vertical plane defined by its Axis. In the image below. the Beam’s height was set to 500 mm in its Settings dialog. The 3D body of an Inclined Beam is created so that the height of its section cut by a plane perpendicular to its Inclined Axis will be constant at every point (and equal to the Beam Height value).Virtual Building The slant angle field is now enabled. The slant angle of Inclined Beams must be between -89° and +89°.

the Hole will immediately appear in the Beam.Virtual Building Create a Hole in a Beam All types of Beams can include Holes. you may wish to first create the series of Holes by multiplying them and then fine-tune some of the Holes’ shapes. Click the Hole icon. Selecting and Modifying Holes If you need a number of Holes in the Beam whose settings are dissimilar. Holes are defined after the Beam has been placed. sizes ArchiCAD 15 Help 915 . create a hole by clicking on the Beam’s reference line. On the Floor Plan. Select the desired Beam and make sure that the Beam tool is active. you can access the pet palette by clicking the Mercedes cursor on a top edge of the selected Beam element. Holes can be circular or rectangular. In the 3D window. Click OK to apply the beam hole settings. The geometry of the Holes is defined in the Hole panel of the selected Beam’s Settings dialog box. The Beam Hole Settings dialog box will appear. letting you set hole parameters. The pet palette appears with the possible editing choices. and Holes of different shapes and sizes can appear in the same Beam.

To select a hole. the pet palette offers you the possibility of moving the Holes up and down. Note that only one selected hole can be edited at a time. The position of the Hole can also be changed graphically. you can modify the values of all holes simultaneously.Virtual Building or positions. Selected Holes can be moved along the Beam in Floor Plan view. make sure the Beam tool is active. 916 ArchiCAD 15 Help . To modify a selected Hole’s shape and size. use the controls in the Beam Settings dialog box or the Info Box. In 3D. but if you select the Beam itself. then Shift-click in the center of the hole.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 917 . Draw the zero thickness Beam starting from the end of the reference axis of the first Beam at the desired angle as shown in the figure below. Click to complete the zero-thickness beam and view the result in 3D. 2. use the following trick: 1. Draw your Beam. 5. Set Beam thickness to zero in the Beam Settings dialog box in order to draw a second (virtual) Beam. 3. Touch up the floor plan symbol by adding a line segment to complete the gap.Virtual Building How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces For end faces at free angles. 4.

Virtual Building Beams and Other Elements Beam Intersection Priority A Beam’s intersection priority is set using the “Beam Priority” slider in the Floor Plan and Section Panel of Beam Settings. Beams is a global control set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. T and L junctions of Beams if the Options > Auto Intersection feature is turned on. See Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof. This applies to both the 3D Window and volume calculations. 918 ArchiCAD 15 Help . You can also crop a Beam to a Single-plane Roof. Note: The priority of Columns vs. the end of the joining Beam will automatically adjust to the reference axis. See Model Element Connections. the trimming element (either a Roof or a Shell) will prevail over walls in terms of connection priority. ArchiCAD automatically cleans crossings. (See Trim Elements to Roof or Shell). Roofs/Shells and Beams: Beams can be trimmed to Roofs or Shells using the “Trim to Roof/ Shell” command. Auto-Intersection of Beams with Other Beams When a Beam intersects another Beam. which means that the intersection part will be removed. When Beams cross Walls or Columns. provided that the beams have the same intersection priority. Slabs and Beams: Beams always cut Slabs when the two elements join in space (provided that their Layers belong to the same intersection priority group). the element of lower priority will be cut in 3D. The element of higher priority will remain intact. Their appearance in 3D will be “cleaned up” accordingly. If one end of the joining Beam falls within the contour of the other Beam. In these cases.

if two intersecting beams are on layers with differing Layer Intersection Groups. However. without intersecting reference lines. Note: Beam intersections are effective even if some of the intersecting elements are on currently hidden Layers. If Beams pass each other in space. If your project’s intersections involve simple beams at uniform elevations. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each beam has been cut. ArchiCAD 15 Help 919 . then beam intersection will not take place.Virtual Building Beam junctions are also cleaned up if the crossing or joining Beams run at different elevations. especially when connecting walls of different heights. See Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections. Beam Connections in 3D To improve the appearance of beam connections in 3D. the junction will be cleaned up depending on their respective intersection priorities. enable the Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams checkmark in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked. Intersections involving complex beam will always be calculated as if this function were active. Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance.

Virtual Building Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile About Complex Profile Elements Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile Profile Manager Dialog Box 920 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

the following image shows a curved wall to which the “Brick Wall with Footing” profile has been applied. To use them. columns and beams that can be edited by hand to take nearly any desired shape. ArchiCAD ships a number of predefined profile elements for these tools.Virtual Building About Complex Profile Elements If customizing a standard construction element gets very complicated. or create a new one. you can place a profiled Wall. Beam) Settings dialog box. To place a complex element. For example. Column. Alternatively. or you don’t find a specialized construction object in the library. and/or Beam element. Note: You can also place a Standard steel Column or Beam profile from a catalog. Complex Profiles are predefined and custom defined walls. See Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile. A Complex Profile element is composed of a cross-sectional profile that is extruded perpendicular to the profile’s plane. you can apply a custom profile to any selected element in the model window on a one-time basis without having to save it as an attribute. ArchiCAD 15 Help 921 . Saved profiles will appear in the Settings dialog box of the respective tool. A saved Complex Profile element is handled as an attribute of the Wall. you can use or modify a predefined profile. do the following: • Open the Wall (Column. known as a Complex Profile. Column or Beam.

Virtual Building • Choose Profiled Wall from the Geometry and Positioning panel. Choose the desired profile. • 922 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Once you place a complex profile element. • Click on the plan to place. Special pet palette commands are available to stretch and rotate profile elements: see Modifying Complex Profile Elements. • The Structure section of the Floor Plan and Section panel includes a pop-up that lets you choose among saved profiles for the current element. similar to other construction elements. The pop-up includes a preview to help you choose. you can modify it graphically on-screen. then adjust the rest of the settings in the element Settings dialog box as you would for any other element.

In this window you will draw or edit the cross-section of the profile element. • To edit an existing profile. • To create a new profile. they will all be saved together as a single profile. with the usual 2D techniques. then click Duplicate. Use the Fill tool to draw the cross-section of the complex profile and edit it.Virtual Building Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element Choose Design > Complex Profiles > Profile Manager. Your cross-sectional profile can contain multiple shapes. Manage Profiles: Choose a command in this section of the Profile Manager depending on what you want to do. • To create a new profile based on an existing profile: Choose an existing profile. Beam or Column element in the active model window. select it. click New. then click Edit chosen profile. the origin represents the location of the Wall’s reference line. to achieve the desired shape. click the Capture element’s profile button in the Profile Manager (or choose Capture Profile of selection from the context menu of a selected element in the model window). The Profile Editor window opens. using the 2D drawing tools that are available. The Origin shown in the Profile Editor window is a significant reference point: if the complex element is a Wall. In case of a ArchiCAD 15 Help 923 . • To create a new profile using the shape of a selected Wall.

they will not be visible in the placed profile. while they will be saved as part of the profile attribute. determine which ArchiCAD tools can be used to place the current profile. The rest of the Profile Manager settings are active only if the Profile Editor is open. Design Layers: The Design Layers section of Profile Manager contains layer settings that apply to the Profile Editor window only. but will have no effect on the final appearance of the complex profile when placed into the model. dimensioning. Note: Dimension elements placed in the Profile Editor window are not saved as part of the attribute. all items drawn on the Construction layer will be saved as part of the profile.) can be used as local drafting aids. Check the boxes to switch on the stretch parameter in either or both directions. The layer of the active tool will be highlighted. For example. the origin represents the location of the element’s axis. (These drafting aids are located on the “Drafting” Design Layer. Other 2D elements added to the Profile Editor window (lines. You cannot move this origin. if the Fill or Hotspot tool is active. but you can move the profile shape so that it correctly positioned with respect to the origin. the Construction layer will be highlighted. Other 2D elements in this window will be placed on the Drafting layer. If you do 924 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The show/hide parameters for Design Layers affect the Profile Editor window only.) In Profile Manager. see below. etc. they are for drafting purposes only. the Use with buttons.Virtual Building Column or Beam. Horizontal and Vertical Stretch (in the list of Design Layers) are an optional attribute of the profile. Only hotspots and shapes drawn with the Fill tool in the Profile Editor window will be part of the saved profile. like those in other Attribute Settings dialog boxes.

e. the Profile Editor window displays a line representing the reference line at which doors/windows will be placed. This material will be applied to all sides of the selected component (“Uniform”). Edge/Side Materials for Profile Element Use the Materials pop-up under Side Material in Profile Editor to select a material for the 3D display of the sides of the profile element.. ArchiCAD 15 Help 925 . the Profile Editor window displays dotted lines indicating the plane that can be stretched. Edit its intersection priority as needed. Edit Profile Components Use the controls in the Components panel of Profile Manager to set the attributes of each profile component (i. like any other line. If you do not switch on Opening Reference. If Horizontal/Vertical Stretch is switched on. to conform to the shape of the profile so that openings will be in the right place. you can move these lines like any other drawing element to any part of the profile. doors/windows will be placed along the profile element’s bounding box. If you switch on Opening Reference (in the list of Design Layers). you will not be able to stretch or resize the cross-section of the resulting profile once you place it on the plan. once you place the profile wall on the plan. edit the line. the solid body represented by each fill drawn in the Profile Editor window) individually. Note: This setting will be applied to the placed profile element only if you check “Enable Skin Priorities” in the Structure/Cut Surfaces/Outlines part of the element’s Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel). Within the Profile Editor window. these will serve as the stretch “handles” of the resulting profile element after it is placed in the model. If necessary. Select a component (represented by a fill) in the Profile Editor window.Virtual Building not switch it on.

If you do not want to store the profile. you can apply a different custom edge material/contour line to each individual edge. The profile is called “Custom” until it is stored. or to all edges. These custom edge settings will be applied to the edge from which you opened the Pet Palette (Selected edge only). then the modifications will be applied to all profile elements of this type that have been placed in the plan.” then edit the controls in the appearing Custom Edge Settings dialog box. and you do not rename it. 926 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Store or Apply a Modified Complex Profile Click Store Profile to name and save the profile you have edited. If needed.Virtual Building To apply a different material to one or more selected sides of this component. and need the profile only for a one-time use. The selected element will turn into that profile element. you can apply it to a selected element in the model. If a newly stored profile is a modified version of an existing profile. select a profile component fill in the Profile Editor window and execute the pet palette command “Set parameters for profile edge. using the Apply to selection button.

they may be at a distance from each other. More than two Columns may be merged at the same time. To use this command. The new profile element will be as long as the longest original element. Slanted. The bodies of the two Walls do not need to touch. Polygonal and Curved Walls. The Merge Columns command allows you to merge two or more Columns whose axes are parallel to each other. modified and renamed. The elements must be of the same type and must be parallel to each other. use the Merge Walls command on them. and will inherit the attributes of the original as well as any wall openings. Custom Profile) may be merged. all types of Columns (Vertical. Executing the command will create a new profile element.Virtual Building Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements A quick way to create a complex profile is to use the Design > Complex Profiles > Merge Walls/ Columns/Beams. This command works only for Straight Walls (Vertical. The Walls will become the same length. draw multiple walls. To merge two or more parallel Straight Walls. the new profile is named “custom” but can be opened in the Profile Editor. Double-Slanted. It does not work for Trapezoid. columns or beams in the model window. ArchiCAD 15 Help 927 . By default. Slanted. which will replace the original elements. If this condition is met. Custom Profile). and the cross section of the resulting Wall will be a unity of the cross sections of the two Walls.

Custom Profile) may be merged. If this condition is met. all types of Beams (Horizontal. Related Topics: Profile Manager Dialog Box 928 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Inclined.Virtual Building Use the Merge Beams command to merge two or more Beams whose axes are parallel to each other.

those structural engineering programs will recognize and identify such standard elements accurately and completely. our list of Project Profiles (the list window on the right) is empty. so we must add selected profiles from the database. sort the list columns by Name or by specific dimension. Profile Types and Geometry controls to help find the profiles you need. it can be helpful to use standard elements as your profile Columns or Beams. From the non-editable Available Profiles list on the left. Use the Options > Import Standard Steel Profile command. using the IFC standard. During the data exchange process.) Use the Country Code. (If needed. This brings up the Profile Database. ArchiCAD 15 Help 929 . you can access thousands of standard profiles. Profile Database In this image. without requiring any settings adjustments.Virtual Building Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile If you exchange data with structural softwares.

click Remove to remove a project profile.) Click Import. See also Working with IFC. The selected structures now appear in the list to the right. 930 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Select these. then click Add Profile to the Project. The selected profiles are now available for use in your ArchiCAD project. Place Structural Profile Element Choose the Complex geometry method in the Geometry and Positioning Panel of Column or Beam Settings. (If needed.

choose the profile you need. ArchiCAD 15 Help 931 .Virtual Building In the Complex Structure pop-up of the Floor Plan and Section panel of Column (or Beam) Settings.

note that its insertion point is the center of the object’s bounding box. However. These predefined steel profile Beams and Columns can be listed by name in the Interactive Schedule: just include “Cut Fill/Profile” in the Fields panel of Interactive Schedule Scheme Settings. 932 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building When placing the structural Column or Beam. an additional hotspot is located at the element’s center of gravity.

Virtual Building Roofs About Roofs Create a Single-plane Roof on the Floor Plan Create a Single-plane Roof in the 3D Window Create a Multi-plane Roof Examples of Multi-plane Roofs Editing Roofs Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker Trim Elements to Roof or Shell Roof Tool Settings ArchiCAD 15 Help 933 .

A Multi-plane Roof can have more than one level. You can edit each plane separately. Roofs in ArchiCAD (along with Shells) can serve as trimming elements: the Connect commands enable you to use Roofs to trim other construction elements. Roof Pitch The Roof Pitch is measured from the pivot line. In most cases. The Connect commands let you trim several separate Roof elements to each other. and then remain connected to those elements even if you edit them later. Note: You can hide all pivot lines on the Floor Plan. A Roof’s pivot line or pivot polygon can be edited to graphically change Roof geometry. When you edit one of the planes. a horizontal non-printing line that you draw when creating the roof. which is especially powerful with Multi-plane Roofs. you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide with a Wall Reference Line or a Slab edge. A Multi-plane Roof can be split up into Single-plane Roofs: select the Multi-plane Roof and use the Design > Split into Single-plane Roofs command. 934 ArchiCAD 15 Help . changing its pitch or material as needed. You can change this color (“Reference lines in 3D”) in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. In the 3D window. as in a Gambrel roof. by disabling the Roof Pivot Lines option in View > On-Screen View Options. yet such a Roof always remains a single element in ArchiCAD even after you edit its components. The Multi-plane Roof is a single element despite its multiple planes. The Pivot Line height is shown in the roof’s info box (the “H” value).Virtual Building About Roofs ArchiCAD’s flexible Roofs can be used to create both standard and abstract 3D shapes meeting a wide variety of needs. pivot lines are shown with a specific color to make editing easier. combining them into a more complex structure. Choose either the Single-plane or Multi-plane geometry method to create a Roof element. the rest of the planes automatically are automatically adjusted to the new geometry. This is the same value as the Roof’s Relative Base Height. in Roof Settings. Pivot Line The roof’s elevation is measured by the elevation of the pivot line or pivot polygon.

As of ArchiCAD 15. see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.including. for example. in Symbolic mode with their top surface only . all Roofs in ArchiCAD 15 will be displayed on the Floor Plan as a true 3D projection.that is. the default Floor Plan Display option is “Projected with Overhead”. as shown below.you can switch this as a Project Preference: go to Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. and choose “Symbolic” as your preferred display mode. Display of Roofs on Floor Plan Attributes for each part of the representation (e. See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting).g. showing all visible contours . This affects Single-plane Roofs plus any Skylights they contain. overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of Roof Settings.Virtual Building The Roof Pitch value is also shown in the Info Box (the “P” value). to determine which parts of the placed roof should be displayed. See also Modify the Roof Pitch. If you prefer to display Single-plane Roofs in ArchiCAD 15 as they were in ArchiCAD 14 and earlier . the edge of the hole in a pitched roof plane. For Roofs. cut surfaces. All Visible Contours Top Surface Only ArchiCAD 15 Help 935 . Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane. combined with element projection preferences. For more information on Floor Plan display of roofs.

and equals the sum of the skins’ thicknesses. Roof or Shell. For more information. See Gravity. Column. Slab. see Composite Structures and Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall. If the structure of the Roof is a composite. Create a Composite Roof You can apply or customize a composite structure for a Roof. Beam and Object type elements relative to the elevation of a Roof. 936 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Gravitate New Elements onto a Roof Use the Gravity control to place Wall. then the Roof’s thickness is defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites.) See Partial Structure Display. (Remember that the model’s Partial Structure Display settings will affect the display of composite Roofs.

Virtual Building Create a Single-plane Roof on the Floor Plan Note: Apart from drawing a new Roof as described below. Select the Roof Tool. using Design > Split into Single-plane Roofs. Rotated Rectangle) 4. click twice to define the Roof’s pivot line. 5. you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide with a wall Reference Line or a slab edge. 3. ArchiCAD 15 Help 937 . Rectangle. pitch. In Roof Settings or the Info Box. Choose one of the three Input Methods in the Info Box (Polygon. 1.g. materials). In most cases. Draw the pivot line. Choose the Single-plane Geometry method from the Info Box or from Roof Settings. 2. adjust the main roof parameters (e. On the Floor Plan. you can also select a Multi-plane Roof and split it into several Single-plane Roofs.

Use this cursor to click on the side of the pivot line where you want the roof plane to rise (or. After you draw the pivot line. Or use the Magic Wand: click on an existing element to serve as the pattern for the roof’s contour. slope downward). 938 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 7. Draw the contour of the roof by clicking on each of the new roof’s nodes.Virtual Building 6. in the case of a negative roof pitch. a cursor in the form of an Eyeball will appear.

Virtual Building See also Magic Wand. ArchiCAD 15 Help 939 .

Virtual Building Create a Single-plane Roof in the 3D Window Note: Apart from drawing a new Roof as described below. materials. adjust the main roof parameters (e. 1. 3.g. Rectangle. Use this method if you want to place a roof that snaps to existing elements in the 3D window. The first two points constitute the pivot line. In Roof Settings or the Info Box. 4. In the 3D window. pitch. 940 ArchiCAD 15 Help . using Design > Split into Single-plane Roofs. or Rotated Rectangle). define the roof plane by clicking on three points. you can also select a Multi-plane Roof and split it into several Single-plane Roofs. Choose one of the three Input Methods in the Info Box (Polygon. eaves overhang) 2. Select the Roof Tool. Choose the Single-plane Geometry method from the Info Box.

6.Virtual Building 5. Draw the contour of the roof. ArchiCAD will generate the Roof. Click to close the polygon. ArchiCAD 15 Help 941 . The Hammer cursor appears when you return to the first node.

adjust the main roof parameters (e. Select the Roof Tool. pitch. Choose the Multi-plane Geometry method from the Info Box or from Roof Settings. Choose one of the Input Methods from the Info Box: • Complex • Hip • Gable • Rotated Hip • Rotated Gable 3. along the outline of your building structure. In Roof Settings or the Info Box.g. 2.usually. Start drawing the pivot polygon of the Multi-plane roof . materials. eaves overhang). 942 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Create a Multi-plane Roof On the Floor Plan or 3D Window: 1. 4.

See Customize Roof Plane. See Add Roof Level. ArchiCAD 15 Help 943 .g. The result is a single roof element. e. See Graphical Editing of Roof Geometry. assign a custom material or pitch to any plane). Alternatively. you can easily change the roof geometry by graphically editing the pivot polygon or the roof ridge.Virtual Building 5. Even after the roof is created. 6. use the Magic Wand (space+click) on an existing Wall to instantly place the pivot polygon and the resulting Multi-plane roof. but the roof always remains a single element. Close the polygon to complete the Multi-plane roof. You can divide a Multi-plane Roof structure into multiple horizontal levels or segments. to make a mansard Roof. consisting of multiple planes. You can further edit the roof plane by plane (for example.

Virtual Building Examples of Multi-plane Roofs Hip Roof Complex Roof Gable Roof Pyramidal Roof Mansard Roof Gablet Roof Gambrel Roof Add a Tower to the Roof 944 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Virtual Building Cross-Gable Roof ArchiCAD 15 Help 945 .

Multi-plane roof element.g. eaves overhang) 4. Click twice to place the rectangle-shaped pivot line of the Roof. In Roof Settings.e. The created Roof is a single. Draw the Floor Plan outline of your building (i. adjust the main roof parameters (e.Virtual Building Hip Roof 1. and use the Multi-plane Geometry method and the Hip construction method. 5. 2. Activate the Roof Tool. external walls). 946 ArchiCAD 15 Help . pitch. 3. or use the Magic Wand (Space+click) on the edge of the Wall outline to quickly create a Multi-plane roof.

Activate the Roof Tool. Multi-plane roof element. adjust the main roof parameters (e. ArchiCAD 15 Help 947 . Trace the outline the building. The created roof is a single. 5. 3. external walls). Draw the Floor Plan outline of your building (i. pitch.Virtual Building Complex Roof 1.g. eaves overhang) 4. and use the Multi-plane geometry method and the Complex construction method. 2. or use the Magic Wand (Space+click) on the edge of the Wall outline to quickly create a Multi-plane roof. In Roof Settings.e.

adjust the main roof parameters (e. 2. pitch. The created Gable roof is a single.e. Change a Roof Plane into a Gable Use this method to make any roof plane of a Multi-plane roof into a gable. 5. In Roof Settings. Click twice to place the rectangle-shaped pivot line of the Roof. Find the pivot line on the roof plane that you want to change into a gable. and use the Multi-plane geometry method and the rectangular Gable construction method (this is found in the pop-up next to the Hip construction method). 3. In the 3D window: 1. 2. eaves overhang) 4. Multi-plane roof element. 948 ArchiCAD 15 Help .g. Select the Multi-plane roof. external walls).Virtual Building Gable Roof 1. Draw the Floor Plan outline of your building (i. Activate the Roof Tool.

and choose the Custom Plane Settings option. select the endpoint of the roof ridge. (The cursor will snap to the vertical position to make this easy. Click to bring up the Pet Palette. Another way: 1. use the Stretch Horizontal Ridge option to drag the ridge endpoint until the plane on that end becomes vertical. Do this for any roof plane that you want to change into a gable.) The roof plane then becomes a gable. ArchiCAD 15 Help 949 . choose Gable to define the selected plane as a gable. In the 3D window. In the appearing dialog box. 2. From the Pet Palette.Virtual Building 3. 4.

Use the “Stretch Ridge vertically” command from the pet palette.Virtual Building Pyramidal Roof Try two ways of making a pyramid roof: • On the Floor Plan. with the Rectangular Hip construction method. to draw a square roof outline. use the Roof Tool . • Another way is to select the ridge of an ordinary hip roof in the 3D Window.Multi-plane geometry method. and move the cursor up until the ridge endpoints meet in the middle. 950 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

2. 1. Begin with a regular Hip Roof.Virtual Building Mansard Roof To create a Mansard Roof. you want a Multi-plane Roof that has two different levels to accommodate two different pitches. Select the Roof. ArchiCAD 15 Help 951 .

adjust the materials as desired. In the Model panel of Roof Settings. we have set the eaves overhang offset to 0. flatter level is 30 degrees. The top. 6. Change any other Roof Settings as needed. In our example. Adjust the pitches of each level. 7. 952 ArchiCAD 15 Help . click Add to add a new Roof level. Adjust the elevation of Level 1 so that it ends (and Level 2 begins) at 2000 mm. the first. 5. In this example. 4.Virtual Building 3. In the Multi-plane Geometry panel of Roof Settings. steeper level is 60 degrees.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 953 . See Customize Roof Plane.Virtual Building 8. For example. Click OK to close Roof Settings. define custom attributes for the individual planes of the mansard roof by changing the parameters in the Custom Plane Settings. See Gablet Roof. you can gable a roof plane at each end of the upper Roof level to create a Gablet roof. See Edit Roof Levels. You can further edit the geometry of Roof levels. available from the pet palette during editing. As needed. The Mansard Roof is complete.

Make this roof into a two-level roof: open Roof Settings and go to the Multi-plane Geometry tab page. To see how to make a hip roof. • • 954 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 2. see Hip Roof. The pitch can be the same for both levels. Click OK to close Roof Settings. Begin with a regular hip roof.Virtual Building Gablet Roof 1. Click Add to add a second level. Enter the elevation at which the first level ends (and the second level begins).

Since the pitch is uniform for both levels. View the two-level Roof in 3D. you must select it to see where the second level begins.Virtual Building 3. ArchiCAD 15 Help 955 .

956 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building 4. Gable each end of the second level. See Change a Roof Plane into a Gable.

Virtual Building 5. ArchiCAD 15 Help 957 . View the final Roof.

Select the Roof. 2. click Add to add a new Roof level. 1. Begin with a Gable Roof. except that it is gabled at both ends. 3.Virtual Building Gambrel Roof The Gambrel Roof is like the Mansard. 958 ArchiCAD 15 Help . In the Multi-plane Geometry panel of Roof Settings.

Click OK to close Roof Settings. 5. adjust the materials as desired. Adjust the elevation of Level 1 so that it ends (and Level 2 begins) at 1500 mm. The Gambrel Roof is complete. The first. flatter level should be 25 degrees. Adjust the pitches of each level. The top. steeper level should be 50 degrees. In the Model panel of Roof Settings. ArchiCAD 15 Help 959 . 7. The additional roof level is indicated by a dotted line on the Floor Plan.Virtual Building 4. 6.

make the trimming bodies visible at View > On-Screen View Options > Trimming Bodies.Virtual Building Cross-Gable Roof Create this by trimming two separate gable roofs to each other. Select both roofs. This shows you how the roofs will cut each other. From the context menu. 960 ArchiCAD 15 Help . choose Connect. like this: To see how to make a gable roof. 1. and placed atop each other. Start by creating two roofs gabled at each end. see Gable Roof. 3. Before doing the trim. 2. You can adjust the pivot line elevations of each roof as needed to achieve the correct geometry. then Trim Elements to Roof/ Shell.

The reason is that the trimming body for both Roofs is the part inside of the pivot line and going downward: this is defined in the Model panel of the Roof Settings dialog box: ArchiCAD 15 Help 961 . We see that some bits have been left out of the trim. View the result. 5.Virtual Building 4. leave the option as-is in the appearing dialog box and click Trim. Since you want both selected Roofs to do the trimming.

To fix this. See also Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim. 962 ArchiCAD 15 Help . just change the trimming body definition of both Roofs to “Contours Down. the trimming relationship is updated automatically. You do not have to re-do the Trim command. any parts of the trimmed Roofs that fall outside of that trimming body are not trimmed.Virtual Building For this reason.” See how the trimming geometry changes. 6.

Virtual Building Editing Roofs Graphical Editing of Roof Geometry Modify the Roof Pitch Add Roof Level Edit Eaves or Gable Overhang Edit Roof Contour Edit Roof Ridge Customize Roof Plane Customize Edge of Roof or Roof Hole Create a Hole in a Roof Create an Atrium Add a Tower to the Roof Create Roof Level Lines Intersect Single-plane Roofs ArchiCAD 15 Help 963 .

editing the pivot line adjusts the geometry of the roof plane and of the adjoining planes as needed: 964 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use the familiar polygon editing commands in the pet palette: As you can see in 3D. edit any of the following: • the pivot line • a ridge line • the Roof level dividing line. if your Roof has several levels • the Contour line To edit the pivot line.Virtual Building Graphical Editing of Roof Geometry To graphically edit the geometry of a selected Roof.

Virtual Building Here. See Skylight Constraint Relative to Roof. The resulting roof geometry is modified. and the roof remains a coherent single element. Any skylights in the modified Roof will adjust themselves to the new Roof geometry. we have added an extrusion to the roof using the Add to Polygon editing command of the pet palette. use pet palette commands from the selected level line to edit the vertical position or geometry of the Roof level. with each roof plane adjusted as needed. See Edit Roof Ridge. For a multi-level Roof. and will remain anchored to the plane depending on the skylight’s constraint setting: either vertical or horizontal. See Edit Roof Levels. You can also modify the roof geometry by grabbing the ridge line at either endpoint or anywhere along the ridge line. ArchiCAD 15 Help 965 .

then Ctrl+click (MacOS: Cmd+Click) at any point on the roof plane to bring up the Roof Elevations dialog box. you can modify its pitch in any one of the following ways: • Change the roof pitch in the Info Box or in Roof Settings. • In the Floor Plan or 3D Window.) The roof will rotate around the pivot line. select the roof.Virtual Building Modify the Roof Pitch For a Single-plane Roof: Once you’ve drawn a roof and selected it. click on any point that is not on the pivot line. Enter a numerical value in the top field: this value will be the elevation value of the roof plane at the point at 966 ArchiCAD 15 Help . select the roof. • In the 3D window. then select the Change Roof Pitch command from the pet palette and graphically adjust the roof angle (or enter a Pitch value into the Tracker.

• Use the Pet Palette editing commands (e.g. • Use the Custom Plane Settings dialog box to set a custom pitch for any selected plane. Altering this elevation value has the same effect as modifying the roof pitch. For a Multi-plane Roof: Modify the roof pitch in one of the following ways: • Change the roof pitch in the Info Box or in Roof Settings. Elevate Horizontal Ridge) to alter the geometry of the selected plane(s).Virtual Building which you clicked it. ArchiCAD 15 Help 967 . SeeCustomize Roof Plane. including the Pitch.

you want two roof levels. or from the Info Box. 1. Adjust the pitches of each level. For examples. click Add to add a new Roof level. each with a different pitch. Select the Roof.Virtual Building Add Roof Level You may wish to add additional levels to your Multi-plane Roof: for example. the elevation value for Level 1 indicates the elevation at which Level 1 ends (and Level 2 begins). In the Multi-plane Geometry panel of Roof Settings. For example. in creating a mansard roof. Adjust the elevation of any roof level. 968 ArchiCAD 15 Help . see Mansard Roof and Gambrel Roof. 4. 3. 2.

Edit Level Height Drag Level Horizontally Choose the Drag Level Horizontally command from the pet palette to move the level horizontally. select the line indicating the Roof level.Virtual Building Edit Roof Levels For a multi-level Roof. then use pet palette commands to edit the vertical position or geometry of the Roof level. ArchiCAD 15 Help 969 .

that edge is gabled: 970 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building If you drag the level all the way to the edge of the Roof.

Virtual Building Edit Eaves or Gable Overhang The offset of the eaves (or the gable) from the pivot line can be set: • For the selected Roof as a whole in Roof Settings: • For any single panel of a Multi-plane Roof: ArchiCAD 15 Help 971 .

Use the Customize Roof Plane dialog box to enter an offset for that roof panel only: If the selected Roof plane is gabled. the yellow patch indicates that at least one roof panel now has a different.Virtual Building Click on the pivot line of the panel whose eaves overhang you wish to customize. the control is called Gable Overhang Offset. Notice that the value in the Eaves Overhang control in Roof Settings has not changed . If you change the shape of the Roof contour by editing it manually (see Edit Roof Contour). the Eaves overhang control changes to “Manual”. customized overhang value. However.it still reflects the overhang value set for the roof as a whole. 972 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Virtual Building Edit Roof Contour The Roof contour may be edited graphically. Editing the contour (as opposed to editing the pivot line . ArchiCAD 15 Help 973 . just the shape of the roof’s edge. Select the contour line in Floor Plan or 3D and use the available pet palette commands.see Graphical Editing of Roof Geometry) does not change the overall geometry of the roof.

you will end up with a gabled roof plane. The pet palette offers three ways to edit the roof: Stretch Horizontal Ridge This option has a built-in “snap” when you get to the vertical point. If you click then.Virtual Building Edit Roof Ridge You can modify the roof geometry of a Multi-plane roof by grabbing the ridge line at either endpoint or anywhere along the ridge line. 974 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Elevate Horizontal Ridge Drag Horizontal Ridge ArchiCAD 15 Help 975 .Virtual Building However. you can keep stretching to extend the Roof past its pivot line.

2. Click the pivot line of the roof plane which you want to customize. From the pet palette. To open the Custom Plane Settings dialog box: 1. choose Custom Plane Settings: Here. 3. eaves overhang. and pitch are different from the Roof Settings in effect for the roof as a whole. you can customize any of its planes so that its materials. Select the Roof.Virtual Building Customize Roof Plane For a Multi-plane Roof. set one or more of the following custom settings: • Pitch • Eaves overhang • Material (top and/or bottom roof material) Apply changes to: Choose to apply the custom settings to: • the Clicked Plane (this is the default) 976 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

a yellow patch appears next to those controls for which at least one roof panel or edge has a different. the values shown for roof pitch. However. this is meaningful only if you have a multi-level roof: see Add Roof Level. eaves overhang.Virtual Building • the Clicked Level (all planes of the current Roof Level. the patch turns red: this means you have the option to apply this change to the all planes/edges of the roof (including the custom ones). ArchiCAD 15 Help 977 . material and/or curve resolution will not change. If you make a further change to one of these values in Roof Settings. or else apply the change to the roof while keeping the custom values unchanged. customized setting.) • All Planes In Roof Settings. because they reflect the settings of the roof as a whole.

Select the Custom Edge Settings icon to open the dialog box. Select the Roof. to all edges of the clicked polygon (hole). 978 ArchiCAD 15 Help . or to all roof edges. 2. you can choose to apply them to the clicked edge only. or the edge of a hole in a Roof. Once you set the customized material/angle options.Virtual Building Customize Edge of Roof or Roof Hole You can customize the material and/or angle of any edge of a Roof. Click on the Roof’s contour line (not the pivot line!) to bring up a pet palette. 1. 3.

the Model Panel of Roof Settings will indicate that a custom side material has been applied. If you choose custom. Edge Angle: Choose an angle (vertical. on a roof that is not flat. • All Edges will apply the chosen options to all edges of the roof as well as all edges of its holes. The Roof Edge type you define here can be used as a parameter in all of ArchiCAD’s listing functions. see Element Listing Parameters in the Interactive Schedule. custom) for the roof edge. 5. horizontal. For an explanation of edge types. choose a type for the roof edge. Click OK to apply changes. Apply Changes to: Once you have set the options as needed. ArchiCAD 15 Help 979 . For example. edge type) only to the edge you clicked when bringing up the pet palette. choose the edges to which to apply these changes: • Clicked Edge will apply the options you choose below (angle. Note: You can set a horizontal edge angle only if the selected edge is parallel to the pivot line. depending on which one is selected. you can add “Eaves Length” and “Gables Length” as parameters of an Interactive Schedule that lists roofs.Virtual Building 4. material. Side Material: Choose a material for the roof edge(s). Edge Type: Optionally. If you apply a material here to any edge that is different from the default roof edge material. enter the desired angle value in the field below. 6. Side Material and Edge Type. perpendicular. • Selected Polygon will apply the chosen options to the edges of the roof only or the edges of the hole only. Use the controls to adjust the Edge Angle.

Note: If you create a hole whose outline intersects the host Roof’s contour or the outline of other holes in the same polygon. Method 1 1.Virtual Building Create a Hole in a Roof There are two ways to create a hole in a Roof. Select the Roof in the Floor Plan or the 3D window. 3. bring up the pet palette and choose the Subtract from Polygon command. ArchiCAD will display a warning message. From the contour polygon (not the pivot polygon!). Method 2 1. 2. With the Roof tool active. View the result in 3D. Select a Roof. Draw the hole in the Roof. 2. The new contour will be interpreted as a hole in the Roof. 4. 980 ArchiCAD 15 Help . draw a new contour within its boundaries. but the outline of the hole will still be created.

bring up the pet palette and choose the Subtract from Polygon command. ArchiCAD 15 Help 981 . From the pivot polygon (not the contour polygon!). View the result in 3D.Virtual Building Create an Atrium To create an atrium in a Multi-plane roof: 1. 3. Select the Roof in the Floor Plan or the 3D window. Draw the atrium shape in the Roof. 2. 4.

2. In this new plane. 4. See Customize Roof Plane. Begin with a regular hip roof. You can customize this arc resolution method for any specific arced plane (such as the tower). Chamfer the polygon to create an additional roof plane. The number of divisions in all the arced planes of your Roof are distributed either by arc or by circle. as set in the curve resolution control of Roof Tool Settings (Multi-plane Roof panel). In the Floor Plan or 3D. 3. again select the pivot line and use polygon editing to add a curve to the edge and create a tower shape. using the Customize Plane dialog box. select the pivot line on the plane where you want to add the tower. See Curve resolution.Virtual Building Add a Tower to the Roof 1. 982 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

if the geometry of the surrounding roof planes changes. then enter 6. you can specify that the tower consist of six divisions: choose By arc. This way.Virtual Building For example. ArchiCAD 15 Help 983 . the arced planes of your tower still remain divided into six.

The Design > Create Roof Level Lines command. After you place the Roof Level Line. Specify Roof Level Lines height level: Use either input field . you can place a Level Dimension there to indicate the elevation.to define the height of the desired roof level lines. 984 ArchiCAD 15 Help . On Top/On Bottom: Choose whether you want to measure the height value to the top or to the bottom surface of the roof. available in the Floor Plan.the current story level or Project Zero .Virtual Building Create Roof Level Lines This works on Single-plane Roofs only. will place a line on a selected roof at the height value you specify in the Roof Level Lines dialog box.

lines that fall outside the roof polygon will be drawn to be of equal length to the pivot line of the roof they belong to. If the checkbox is disabled. In this case. Note: This option is greyed if the Suspend Groups toggle is active. ArchiCAD 15 Help 985 . all resulting lines will be drawn. Group with Roof: Check this box to group level lines with the roofs they belong to.Virtual Building Omit Lines Outside Roofs: Check this box to omit level lines that fall outside the floor plan polygon of the roof they belong.

and Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (MacOS) the ridge line of the other. Now select the other roof plane and Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (MacOS) the ridge line of the lower one. To have these two roof planes intersect: Select one of the Roofs on the Floor Plan. 986 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Intersect Single-plane Roofs You may need to adjust Single-plane roof panes to each other.

See also Cropping with a Remote Roof. ArchiCAD 15 Help 987 .Virtual Building The two faces have been adjusted to each other.

988 ArchiCAD 15 Help . creates a changed Wall geometry which is static. (Remember. where you can see the spatial relationships of roofs to other construction elements. or • Select both elements and roof(s). Do one of the following: • Select the elements you wish to crop. all eligible elements are cropped • if you select only elements. The Crop to Single-plane Roof command is available only if at least one roof or one element of the above types is selected. and only if you check its element type in the Crop to Single-plane Roof dialog box. To crop elements to a roof. To create associative trims between Roofs and other elements. or • Select the roof(s) to which you want to crop elements. follow these steps: 1. only elements which intersect a roof at any point can be cropped). Roofs can crop either the top or the bottom of • Walls • Beams • Columns • Slabs • Library Parts (Doors.Virtual Building Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof Using the Crop to Single-plane Roof Function Undo Roof Crop Effect of Roof Crop on Wall/Column Height Settings Use Roof Crop to Create Complex-Shaped Walls. Beams and Columns Cropping Slabs with a Roof Cropping with a Remote Roof Using the Crop to Single-plane Roof Function To crop an element to a Single-plane roof. Crop to Roof. The Crop to Single-plane Roof function is not associative. see Trim Elements to Roof or Shell. Objects) Elements are cropped only if they intersect a Single-plane roof at any point. available for Singleplane roofs only. Windows. use the Design > Crop to Single-plane Roof command. Selection of roofs and/or elements narrows the scope of the crop: • If you select only a roof. It is usually easiest to use Crop to Roof in the 3D window. they will be cropped to all the eligible roofs.

Click Crop and view the result. Go to Design > Crop to Single-plane Roof to bring up the Crop to Single-plane Roof dialog box. 5.) 4. depending on which part of the eligible element(s) you want to crop: • Crop Element Top: Crop the part of the element(s) above the roof • Crop Element Base: Crop the part below the roof. ArchiCAD 15 Help 989 .Virtual Building 2. Click the preferred cropping option. these checkboxes are greyed. Check the element type(s) you want to crop. (If you have already selected certain elements before bringing up the dialog box. 3.

Virtual Building The crop remains in effect even if you hide the Roof or the cropped elements. or definitive. If you crop a Wall with a roof that crosses the Wall entirely. move them away from each other or even delete the Roof that is executing the crop. the original Wall will be cut into two: one Wall that is cut by the cropping Roof. and a second wall that is separate and uncut. Undo Roof Crop Cropping an element can either be temporary. for visual display only. 990 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Virtual Building You can restore elements after a temporary crop-to-roof. Exception: A crop on a Slab can only be undone through the regular ArchiCAD Undo function (Edit > Undo). the cropped Wall’s selection dots are still where they used to be before the crop. ArchiCAD 15 Help 991 . the Undo All Crops button becomes active in that element’s Settings dialog box (Model panel). As seen in this image. If you want to recalculate the cropped element’s height to reflect the cropped geometry. If an element has been cropped to a Roof. cropping a Wall or Column to a Roof does not alter the cropped element’s height. Effect of Roof Crop on Wall/Column Height Settings By default. then click the checkbox: Set Wall/Column Top to highest Point at the bottom of the Crop to Single-plane Roof dialog box.

If the box is checked. The Undo All Crops command will have a different effect depending on the checkbox status: 992 ArchiCAD 15 Help . the height of a cropped wall or column is recalculated to equal the maximum of its cropped height (if you cropped the top) or the minimum cropped base height (if you cropped the bottom). This means that the Wall’s actual height (as shown by the selection dots) has changed to the highest point of the cropped Wall.Virtual Building (If you chose Crop Element Base. the checkbox refers to the Wall/Column’s base elevation (lowest point)). the checkbox is checked. In this crop.

beams and columns by cropping them to Roofs. as shown in this image: If you did not check the box. then Undo All Crops will recreate the original Wall height. then the Undo Roof Crop will only recreate the Wall/Column up to the maximum cropped height. Moreover. Use Roof Crop to Create Complex-Shaped Walls. slabs are always cut along the whole section line of the roof and the slab.Virtual Building • If you set the Crop operation to recalculate the Wall/Column’s height value (if the checkbox was active). the cropped edge of the slab is always vertical even after being cropped by a slanted roof. ArchiCAD 15 Help 993 . While other elements can be partly cropped. no matter how many roof segments you have. Cropping Slabs with a Roof Slabs can also be cropped by the lower or upper slope of roofs with the help of the Design > Crop to Single-plane Roof command. Beams and Columns You can cut complex shapes into walls. The wall will always follow the shape of the roof(s) above them.

Note: The Wall/Beam/Column is cut whether it is under a Roof or not. manually adjust the slab edge angle. Select the elements you intend to cut. and even roofs on other stories whose outline is shown on the given story. however. 2. Make sure the Roof tool is selected. See Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material. See also Intersect Single-plane Roofs. 1. to crop elements to the plane of that particular roof. 994 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Be sure to set a sufficient height for the original rectangular Walls/Beams/Columns so that they are cut correctly.) Cropping with a Remote Roof You can use remote roofs. The reverse procedure will also work: select the roof you want to cut with and Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) the individual elements you want to be cut. In this case.) However. you can use a keyboard shortcut when cropping with a remote roof. then Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) an edge or a node of the roof you want to cut them with.Virtual Building (You can. the Crop to Single-plane roof command does not work (it only works if the elements intersect each other.

The definition of elements. This way you can easily keep track of all the connecting elements. uses this reference line as a basis.Virtual Building Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker RoofMaker allows you to add GDL Object-based elements to specific parts of your design in order to enhance them in 3D views and Section/Elevation/IE windows. For more information. you can use the roof to cut elements that are standing upon the rafters (e. After placement. with or without overhang. Although the placement of roof construction elements using RoofMaker works using other methods. a single roof surface has to be selected. see Using the Roof Wizard. when placing rafters you already know the thickness of purlins.g. etc. The Roof Wizard is a RoofMaker function that allows you to create entire roof constructions quickly and easily. This way. You will then be able to select roof surfaces individually.. roof construction elements behave like ordinary Objects and can be modified. Posts). (When placing ridges. a collar beam or a tie beam. ArchiCAD 15 Help 995 .) To place rafters. and rafters in the same roof surface for a trimmer). hip and valley rafters. we strongly recommend setting the reference line of the roof to the upper exterior edge of the wall beneath (as handled by ArchiCAD’s Complex Roof Placement Method). If multiple roof surfaces are grouped. RoofMaker can be accessed from the Design > Design Extras menu. two corresponding rafters must be selected (opposite rafters for a collar beam or a tie beam. ridges or purlins (beams). Technically. you must first ungroup them using the Edit > Grouping > Ungroup. RoofMaker is an ArchiCAD AddOn and is loaded with ArchiCAD on startup. To place a trimmer (blocking). you already know the thickness of the purlin. We recommend that you begin modelling the roof construction with the purlins and continue with the hip rafters/valley rafters before placing the rafters. We recommend setting the roof thickness equal to the general cross-section height of the rafters.

all the subsequently placed elements will have the new color. Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan. Create a rafter Create multiple rafters Create hip or valley rafter Create a trimmer Create a purlin Create an eaves purlin Create collar beams Create tie beams Using the Roof Wizard Create a rafter When creating rafters. Surface materials and a layer can be assigned to all elements. The object is then placed with one or more clicks. depending on the object type. Rafters will be automatically placed on top of it. which contains shortcuts to all of the RoofMaker menu commands. a dialog box opens in which certain parameters concerning the object itself can be set. the bottom plane of the roof serves as a reference plane. choose Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker > Show RoofMaker Toolbox. Use the appearing Rafter Settings dialog box to set parameters. To display the RoofMaker commands in a separate floating toolbox. The current pencolor set for the Object is used by default. or is placed automatically.Virtual Building After choosing the command for the placement of an object. If you change the current pencolor. 996 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Choose Create a rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the first icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The RoofMaker Toolbox opens.

L-beam or C-beam profiles. but the placement controls for multiple rafters are also active. Click inside the selected roof surface. Create hip or valley rafter The hip rafter usually lies between two neighboring roof polygons. Click twice inside the selected roof surface to define a placement line. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. The difference between the two methods lies in the shape of the resulting objects.) Several rafters are placed along the placement line. (If you click outside. rafters are perpendicular to the reference line of the roof. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. A Hip or a Valley Rafter (or a Valley Rafter without Overhang) is placed along the specified edge of the roof.Virtual Building See Rafter Settings Dialog Box. the object will be placed along the common edge of the two surfaces. depending on the position of the edge to the roof’s reference line.) A rafter is placed with its axis going through the specified point. with the axis of the first rafter going through the point defined with the first click. You will set the same controls as for a single rafter. and the axis of the last rafter going through the point defined with the second click. Set the desired parameters. Create multiple rafters Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan. an error message appears. Among others. the top cut in the latter method makes the object suitable for steeple type roofs. the parameters include profile and profile thickness. an error message appears. other methods may cause errors. After adjusting those settings. After the rafter is placed. Select the roof surface where the hip rafter connects to a purlin instead of another hip rafter. Choose Create multiple rafters from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the second icon from the RoofMaker toolbox. See Multiple Rafters Dialog Box. Click along one of the edges of the selected roof that is NOT parallel or perpendicular to the reference line. click OK to return to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. By definition. ArchiCAD 15 Help 997 . It is then not necessary to click afterwards to specify an edge. (If you click outside. By definition. rafters are perpendicular to the reference line of the roof. Choose Create a hip rafter or valley rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the third icon of the RoofMaker toolbox). See Hip or Valley Rafter Settings. Hip and Valley Rafters can also be placed with two roof surfaces selected previously. you can select it and open its Object Settings dialog box. The rafter may have a rectangular (default) profile as well as I-beam.

you must first select the two rafters the trimmer is going to be placed between.) If you click inside the polygon. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Clicking inside the roof polygon determines the position of only one side of the purlin. or inside the roof polygon. Click either an edge of the selected roof.) Choose Create a Trimmer from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu. For more information. A trimmer is placed at the same height as the rafters.) A trimmer is placed between the two rafters. (Clicking outside the polygon produces an error message. an error message will appear.) If you click on an edge. Set the values for the width and the height of the cross-section. Click between the rafters. since a purlin generally supports the rafters from below. The Trimmer Settings dialog box appears. The Purlin Settings dialog box appears in which purlin parameters can be set.Virtual Building Create a trimmer In order to place a trimmer. see Create a Trimmer (or Blocking). However.as indicated in the “Height difference” parameter of the library part . a purlin is placed with its axis along the edge. Create a purlin Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan and choose Create a Purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the fifth icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). the purlin is placed under the reference plane defined by the roof. (If you click outside them. It can be vertical or rotated to a position perpendicular to the pitch angle of the roof. if you want to place a rafter in line with the interior side of a wall. If the purlin is placed on top. (This also means that they have the same pitch angle and they are both perpendicular to the reference line of the roof. By default.and the purlin will be inclined. The 2D symbol also shows the current position. the axis of the beam will pass through the clicked point parallel to the reference line of the roof. an elevation value can be set for the purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. If the edge is not parallel to the reference line of the roof. (For example. The purlin can also be perpendicular to the rafters and be on the top of them as well. the endpoints of the axis of the purlin will be at different heights . The two rafters have to be within the same roof polygon. For more information. you return to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. first you click to the interior side and then toward the exterior. Trimmers are always parallel to the reference line of the roof and thus perpendicular to the rafters. Clicking OK. see Create a Purlin (or Beam). the axis going through the specified point. the cross section height of the rafters has to be set. 998 ArchiCAD 15 Help . an additional click is needed to define the direction where the purlin extends.

) By default. with its side along the edge. These posts are generally displayed as a larger circle to indicate that there is some kind of supporting structure. Choose Create a collar beam from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or the seventh icon in the RoofMaker toolbox). click once more to determine on which side of the rafters the collar beam will be placed. and the purlin will be inclined. A collar beam can be double. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan. You can use the Bring to Front and Send to Back commands to ensure the accurate positioning of elements. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. as indicated in the “Height difference” parameter of the library part. The Eaves Purlin Settings dialog box appears in which eaves purlin parameters can be set. If the two rafters are not inserted at the same height.) If you click on an edge. If the edge is not parallel to the reference line of the roof. You need to click either one of the edges of the selected roof. This type of purlin is placed under the reference plane defined by the roof. the two endpoints of the axis of the purlin will be at different heights. (For example. the purlin is placed inside the polygon. In addition to the dimensions of the cross-section. or inside the roof polygon. first click on the interior edge of the wall and then toward the exterior. You can also set the values for the width and the height of the cross section. the collar beam is placed relative to the higher one. an elevation value must be set. If a singlesided collar beam is selected. An additional click is then needed to define the direction where the plate beam extends. parallel to the reference line of the roof surface. an error message appears. a background fill is assigned to the 2D symbol of purlins because purlins usually have to cover posts placed underneath. see Create Collar Beams. see Create an Eaves Purlin (or Plate Beam). calculated from the height of the insertion point of the rafters (which is usually also the height of the reference line of the roof). ArchiCAD 15 Help 999 . The axes of the two rafters must be along the same line and meet at the top. the axis of the purlin will pass through the clicked point. with the reference roof surface still selected. For more information. if you want to place a rafter in line with the interior side of a wall. it is placed automatically in the appropriate position.Virtual Building Create an eaves purlin Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan and choose Create an eaves purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the sixth icon in the RoofMaker toolbox). supporting the rafters from below. Create collar beams In order to place a collar beam you must first select two rafters to place it between. (If you click outside the polygon. otherwise you will get an error message. If a double-sided collar beam has been selected. an elevation value can be set for the eaves purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. However. The Collar Beam Settings dialog box appears in which different parameters of the collar beam can be set.or single-sided. If you click inside the polygon. For more information.

For more information. see Create Tie Beams. Using the Roof Wizard The Roof Wizard allows you to create entire roof constructions quickly and easily. purlins. calculated either from Project Zero or the current story elevation. To begin. In addition to the dimensions of the cross section. 1000 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. you must first select two rafters to place it between. The axes of the two rafters must be along the same line and meet at the top. The roof construction elements you have specified are placed automatically in the appropriate position. Choose the Roof Wizard command from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or the last icon in the RoofMaker Toolbox). The tie beam is placed automatically in the appropriate position. Choose Create a tie beam from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or eighth icon in RoofMaker Toolbox). You can place rafters. collar or tie beams in one step. trimmers. an elevation value must be set. select all the roof surfaces in the project that you wish to add structural elements to. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan. See Roof Wizard Dialog Box. otherwise you will get an error message. The objects now behave as ordinary Objects and can be modified as such. The placement of the rafters is optimized to meet the specified requirements. The Tie Beam Settings dialog box appears in which different parameters of the tie beam can be set.Virtual Building Create tie beams In order to place a tie beam.

The result is a more complex structure whose elements are trimmed precisely to each other. is not associative. Wall. if you change the Roof pitch. just do the Trim operation over again. Elements trimmed to each other are associative: a change to any element will immediately affect all the connected elements. A Roof or Shell can trim any model element (e. If you want to change this relationship. The trimming element is always either a Roof or a Shell. Roofs and Shells trimmed to each other act as a single body when trimming other model elements. although they remain separate elements.Virtual Building Trim Elements to Roof or Shell The Trim to Roof/Shell command allows you to connect Roofs or Shells with each other or with other model elements in any ArchiCAD model window. see Crop Elements to Single-plane Roof. Column). Topics in this section: Define Trimming Bodies Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim Trim Particular Elements: Manual Trim Merge Trimming Bodies Managing Element Connections ArchiCAD 15 Help 1001 . For example. creates a changed Wall geometry which is static. available for Single-plane roofs only. the elements involved are connected. the Wall that it trims will change accordingly. Crop to Roof. For more information. the Crop to Single-plane Roof function in ArchiCAD 15 (known as Trim to Roof in earlier versions). you don’t have to undo the connection. Once you have created a trimming relationship. Note: In contrast. Beam.g.

which represents the direction and shape in which it will execute the trim on the other element(s). it may be difficult to visualize exactly what will happen when you embark on a Trim operation. Note that all the trimming bodies (except the “editable”one for Shells). 1002 ArchiCAD 15 Help . The Roof/Shell has a “trimming body” attached. By default. For a Shell. turn on Trimming Bodies in the View > On-Screen View Options menu. the default body is defined as “downward extrusion” from the Shell membrane. and the body extends downward from there. Since a Roof/Shell shape is often quite complex in itself. However.Virtual Building Define Trimming Bodies The trimming element is always either a Roof or a Shell. the Roof’s trimming body is “Pivot lines down”. you can change the geometry of this trimming body in Roof or Shell Settings: use the “Trimming bodies” control in the Model panel of Shell (Roof) Settings. To see these trimming bodies while you work (in the 3D window only). that is. the pivot line is the boundary of the trimming body. in fact represent bodies that are extended infinitely upward or downward (this is not shown in the feedback).

allowing you to change the shape of the trimming body. Note: If you created a profile that is a closed polygon. (This line represents the limit of the trimming body. you cannot edit this bottom line. the selected Shell will show a line connecting the two ends of the Shell profile. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1003 .Virtual Building The trimming body options are illustrated here for both Roofs and Shells: Pivot Lines Down Contours Down Downward extrusion Upward extrusion Editable Edit Inner Shape of Shell’s Trimming Body For a Shell whose trimming body is set to “Editable”.) This line is editable.

as follows: • Roofs and Shells trim each other so that any element parts that fall inside of the other’s trimming body are eliminated. • The trimming bodies of the involved Roofs and Shells are merged into a single trimming body. You select multiple elements which include one or more Roofs or Shells. in Roof Settings or Shell Settings. See the following descriptions: Automatic Trim: Example 1 Automatic Trim: Example 2 1004 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 4. The default trimming logic works as follows: 1. and other selected model elements. without any special requests for which pieces should remain and which to eliminate. choose the default Use Roofs/Shells from current selection and click Trim. • This single trimming body proceeds to cut the non-Roof and non-Shell model elements (e. 2. see: Trim Particular Elements: Manual Trim. Note: For a more specific workflow in special situations. the outside parts remain. Walls) such that what falls outside the Roof/Shell structure is eliminated. Select the Connect > Trim Elements to Roof/Shell command.g. From the Trim Elements dialog box. what falls inside is cut out (The intersection priority among trimmed Roofs and Shells is determined by their respective Connection Priority settings. ArchiCAD will automatically use all Roofs and Shells in the selection to trim each other. 3.Virtual Building Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim Use the automatic Trim workflow if you want to trim selected multiple elements to each other using the default trimming logic. That is. and without specifying which Roof or Shell should do the trimming job.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 1005 .Virtual Building This process is carried out automatically and immediately without any further input from you.

you can turn on the trimming bodies if you want to see them while you work. In the appearing dialog box. click Trim. From the context menu.Virtual Building Automatic Trim: Example 1 Suppose we have the two intersecting Shells shown here and wish to trim them to each other. go to Connect and view the available commands. (View > On-Screen View Options > Trimming Bodies) 1. 4. Before you start. 1006 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 3. 2. Choose Trim Elements to Roof/Shell. Select both Shells.

ArchiCAD 15 Help 1007 . View the result in 3D. The internal parts of both elements that coincided with each other’s trimming body have been eliminated. Note that the trimming bodies of the two Shells have been merged into a single trimming body.Virtual Building 5.

Select all the elements shown (Roof. 2. Walls).Virtual Building Automatic Trim: Example 2 Suppose you have the following Shells and Walls: 1. From the context menu. 1008 ArchiCAD 15 Help . click Trim. Shell. 3. go to Connect and choose Trim Elements to Roof/Shell. In the appearing dialog box.

View the result in 3D: For another example of an automatic trim. see Cross-Gable Roof.Virtual Building 4. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1009 .

to trim several selected elements automatically in one step. and • the V-shaped Shell should be cut to make holes for the tunnel The automatic trimming logic (see Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim) will not suffice. see: Trim Multiple Selected Elements: Automatic Trim. 1010 ArchiCAD 15 Help . use the following trimming workflow: 1.g. (A V-shaped Shell and a tunnel-shaped Shell running through it.Virtual Building Trim Particular Elements: Manual Trim Use the manual Trim workflow if you want to trim one or more model elements to a specific Roof or Shell while deciding which parts (e. inside or outside) of the trimmed elements should remain. Note: For the automatic trim logic.) You wish to trim them so that • only that part of the tunnel-shaped Shell that is inside the V-shell should remain. you would end up with the inside part missing. and • the outside parts of the tunnel should be chopped off. You can even decide that all parts of the trimmed element should remain intact (see Merge Trimming Bodies below). Select the Shell you want to trim (the tunnel). which is not what you want: Instead. Manual Trim: Example Suppose you have two intersecting Shells as shown.

Note that the cursor has changed to a little roof.Virtual Building 2. From the context menu. Use it to click the element to use as the trimming element (here. the V-shaped shell. 3. they will appear here automatically for the duration of the trimming operation. choose Connect > Trim Elements to Roof/Shell. with red feedback). Now you must select the trimming element. Note: If Trimming Bodies are not on. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1011 .

Move the cursor over the parts of the tunnel (inside and outside of the V-shell) and see how the blue feedback identifies them: this indicates the options for which parts of the tunnel can be retained after the trim: 5. Note: Alternatively. Select the Shell you want to trim (the V-shell). 1012 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Now you must trim the other element. the V-shaped Shell. You want to retain the part that is inside. From the context menu. The feedback will always show in blue the part that will be retained. Repeat the trimming process: 1. to cut holes for the tunnel. choose Connect > Trim Elements to Roof/Shell. Now you must select the part of the tunnel that you want to retain.Virtual Building 4. ctrl-click one of the parts to eliminate it. The trim is executed. 2. so click on that part.

The trim is executed. 4. Now select the part of the V-shell that you want to retain. It will now be shown with red feedback. Move the cursor and see how the blue feedback identifies the options for which parts can be retained after the trim: 5. Now. the tunnel. with the little roof cursor. Click on the part of the V-Shell to be retained. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1013 .Virtual Building 3. you must choose the trimming element: in this case.

From the context menu. and then run a Wall through it. using this combined but intact Shell complex as the trimming element. 1. without trimming the Shells themselves. Now. You have combined the Shells’ trimming bodies. without trimming off any parts of the Shells themselves.Virtual Building Merge Trimming Bodies Suppose you start with the following two-Shell design. Then you will use the combined trimming bodies to trim the Wall in one step. Select both Shells. you can do the automatic trimming procedure on the Wall: 1. Select the Wall and the Shells together. Yet the Shells themselves should remain intact. 2. choose Connect > Merge Trimming Bodies. The solution is to combine the trimming bodies of the two Shells. 1014 ArchiCAD 15 Help . You want to trim the Wall in such a way that it does not extend above either Shell.

From the context menu.Virtual Building 2. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1015 . click Trim. 4. View the result in 3D. In the appearing dialog box. 3. choose Connect > Trim Elements to Roof/Shell.

any connected element will be highlighted in blue. The following examples involve Trimming relationships. click the icon to view each connection relationship in a list. you will see a Connections icon appear: Note: The Connections icon will not appear if you have selected multiple elements. If you move your cursor on top of this icon. If the selected element (such as the Roof. Thus. but the feedback works the same way for Solid Element Operations and joined Curtain Walls. Managing Trims If you select a single model element that is part of a Trim relationship. 1016 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Managing Element Connections Connected elements can involve the following operations: • Trim to Roof/Shell • Join Wall to Curtain Wall • Solid Element Operations Elements connected to each other are associative: a change to any element will immediately affect all the connected elements. below) is involved in multiple Trim relationships. it can be important to keep track of which elements are connected to which. The Connections icon and the Connections List provide in-place interface to help you manage these relationships.

g. the gable Wall in the image below). Roof A (Highlighted from the grip) Roof B (Cuts Wall-A. then Wall A will be trimmed by Roof B as well. Wall A’s connection grip will list only Roof A. but not listed in grip) Wall A (Selected) Move your cursor through the list: as you hover over any listed item. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1017 . that connected element is shown with a highlight in the project (e.Virtual Building If Roof A is connected to Roof B. and Wall A is trimmed by Roof A. since only they have direct connections.

The connection is cleared.g. or on a different story). click the X icon next to that connection in the list.g. click the X next to the header in the list (e. Trim) in the connection list: If the list includes connections to elements not visible in the current view (e. 1018 ArchiCAD 15 Help . that connection item is listed in italic type.Virtual Building To highlight all of the elements connected to the selected element. it is on a hidden layer. hover over the header (e. to sever the associative relationship and undo the Trim). To clear a connection (that is.g. Trim). To clear a whole group of Connections.

From the context menu. choose Connect > Clear All Connections.Virtual Building To clear multiple connections all at once. All connections of the selected element(s) are cleared. select one or more model elements. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1019 .

Virtual Building Shells About Shells Extruded Shells Revolved Shells Ruled Shells Define Shell Base Height in 3D Sample Workflows for Shell Creation Graphical Editing of Shells Create Hole in Shell Edit Shell Hole Define Shell Contour Customize Edge of Shell or Edge of Shell Hole Trim Elements to Roof or Shell 1020 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

freely rotating it. See Graphical Editing of Shells. If the structure of the Shell is a composite. Basic Shell Creation Shells can be created in either the Floor Plan or 3D Window. Shell Structure A Shell (like a Wall. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1021 . and equals the sum of the skins’ thicknesses. adding openings or cutting its contour into any shape. or • Ruled Creating a basic Shell of any of these types is easy. Use it to model elements ranging from a building’s entire exterior to a single custom object.Virtual Building About Shells The Shell in ArchiCAD is a real building element with a wide range of creative uses. Slab or Roof) can have a composite structure. The Shell is constructed out of a membrane plus a Shell body attached to one side of the membrane. Then you can develop the Shell further by graphically editing it. Use one of three basic shapes: • Extruded • Revolved. then the Shell’s thickness is defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites.

See Create Hole in Shell and Skylights. 1022 ArchiCAD 15 Help .as with Roofs . Thus. Shell Display on the Floor Plan • • Shell display on the Floor Plan is based on its real 3D geometry.can be set to reflect the vectorial hatching of the Shell’s 3D material. The body is the Opposite to the Reference Side. which . Shells can display a cover fill. This means you can trim Shells to other elements to achieve precise geometries and complex structures. See Trim Elements to Roof or Shell. you will see the effects of Solid Element Operations on Shells on the Floor Plan. in the Model Panel of Shell Settings. for the purposes of assigning materials.) Shell Connections Like Roofs. Use Flip (from Shell Settings or the Info Box) if you want to move the Shell body to the other side of Shell membrane. (Enable the Use Fill of Surface Material checkbox under the Cover Fill settings. Shell Openings Holes and Skylights can be placed into Shells. Shells are trimming elements and participate in associative model connections.Virtual Building The membrane is defined as the Reference side of the Shell. in Shell Settings.

when placing a new Wall. Column. Beam or Object-type element.Virtual Building Gravitate to Shell ArchiCAD’s Gravity feature works on Shells. the Gravity function lets you place it directly on top of an existing Shell. See also Gravity. Topics in this Section: Extruded Shells Revolved Shells Ruled Shells Sample Workflows for Shell Creation Create Hole in Shell Edit Shell Hole Define Shell Contour Customize Edge of Shell or Edge of Shell Hole Graphical Editing of Shells Trim Elements to Roof or Shell ArchiCAD 15 Help 1023 . thus taking on the elevation of the element it is placed on. That is.

For example. 1024 ArchiCAD 15 Help . See the following sections for basic creation of Extruded Shells: Simple Extruded Vault: Parallel to the Floor Plan Simple Extruded Vault: Perpendicular to the Floor Plan Extruded Shell with Freely Defined Profile For more examples. then extruding the profile.Virtual Building Extruded Shells Use the extruded method to create a Shell by drawing its profile on a plane (either freehand polygon or a default shape). see Sample Workflows for Shell Creation. you can extrude a Shell over the walls of a building.

On the Floor Plan or 3D Window: 2. Activate the Shell Tool and choose the extruded geometry method with simple input method. then extrude it graphically. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1025 . (You can edit the profile later.Virtual Building Simple Extruded Vault: Parallel to the Floor Plan Use this method to place a vault-shaped Shell profile. The Shell’s profile here is always a half-circle (vault).) 1. Click a third time to define the width of the Shell Profile. The Shell is complete. Click twice to define the Shell’s extrusion length. 4. 3.

3. A negative number will extend the vector away from you. enter the length of the Shell’s extrusion. (You can edit the profile later. In the appearing dialog box. Click OK to close the dialog box. then extrude it up or down (perpendicular to the Floor Plan).Virtual Building Simple Extruded Vault: Perpendicular to the Floor Plan Use this method to place a vault-shaped Shell profile. Double-click at the place you want to place the Shell. 4. The Shell’s profile here is always a half-circle (vault). A positive number will extrude the Shell upward (toward you). then click to define the width of its profile. 1026 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Activate the Shell Tool and choose the extruded geometry method with simple input method.) Its base elevation depends on the value set in Shell Settings.) On the Floor Plan: 1. (A temporary profile appears. 2. Move the cursor to define the Shell position.

The Shell is complete.Virtual Building 5. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1027 .

Click OK. Double-click to complete the polyline or polygon. Two examples are shown here. Draw the Shell profile . In the appearing dialog box. 1. enter the length of the Shell’s extrusion. 1028 ArchiCAD 15 Help .with the usual polygon input method.Virtual Building Extruded Shell with Freely Defined Profile Use this method to define the Shell profile with a polyline. A negative number will extend the vector away from you. On the Floor Plan: 2. 3.a polyline or a closed polygon . A positive number will extrude the Shell upward (toward you). Activate the Shell Tool and choose the extruded geometry method with detailed input method. The extrusion is always perpendicular to the Floor Plan. then extrude it perpendicularly to the editing plane. 4.

or choose another input plane based on existing elements. In the 3D Window: 1. 500). (In the 3D window. the default input plane is at the base elevation defined in Shell Default Settings (here. . choose it by clicking on any points and/or edges or surfaces: the automatic feedback (a gray square) will ArchiCAD 15 Help 1029 . . the profile line of a selected Shell is displayed in a separate color.) Note: You can change this color using the “Reference Lines in 3D” setting at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. Choose the input plane. The Shell is complete.If you click in “empty space”. View it in 3D. Either click to find the default plane.To place an input plane defined by points or surfaces of an existing element.Virtual Building 5.

two different examples are shown.Virtual Building show you where the potential input planes are.a polyline or a closed polygon . Extrude the Shell by dragging the cursor. (Here. 1030 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Complete the polygon. It will be extruded perpendicular to the input plane.) 3. 2. Draw the Shell profile . 4. click to make it appear.with the usual polygon input methods. When you get the plane you want.

Click to complete. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1031 .Virtual Building 5.

Virtual Building Revolved Shells Use the revolved method to create a Shell by defining its profile (either a default shape or a freehand profile). see Sample Workflows for Shell Creation. then revolving the profile around an axis. By default. You have the option of dividing it into segments as needed.) See the following sections for basic creation of Revolved Shells: Revolved Shell: Simple Input Revolved Shell with Freely Defined Profile For more examples. 1032 ArchiCAD 15 Help . (See Segment Surface Along Rotation. the surface of Revolved Shells is smooth.

(The initially placed axis is always vertical. Click where you want to begin revolving it around the axis.Virtual Building Revolved Shell: Simple Input In the Floor Plan or 3D window: 1. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1033 . 4. Drag the cursor and click to complete the angle of revolution. 2. Drag the cursor to define the size (width) of the Shell. Click to define the Shell axis at the center of the dome.) 3. though you can edit the axis slant later. Activate the Shell Tool and choose the revolved geometry method with simple input method.

View the result in 3D.Virtual Building 5. 1034 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

ArchiCAD 15 Help 1035 . Double-click to complete the polyline or polygon. Draw the Shell profile .Virtual Building Revolved Shell with Freely Defined Profile 1.a polyline or a closed polygon . On the Floor Plan: 2. Activate the Shell Tool and choose the revolved geometry method with detailed input method.with the usual polygon input method. 3.

Click OK to complete the Shell. 5. In the 3D Window: 1036 ArchiCAD 15 Help . though you can edit it later. Click twice to draw the revolution axis. enter the Shell’s revolution angle. 6. View it in 3D.Virtual Building 4. A positive number will revolve the Shell toward you. The initially placed revolution axis is always parallel to the Floor Plan. A negative number will revolve the Shell away from you. In the appearing dialog box.

3. Complete the polygon. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1037 . Draw the Shell profile . .Virtual Building 1. the default input plane is at the base elevation defined in Shell Default Settings. click to make it appear.with the usual polygon input methods. . Click to define the center of the revolution axis.If you click in “empty space”. Choose the input plane. or choose another input plane based on existing elements. 4. When you get the plane you want.To place an input plane defined by points or surfaces of an existing element.a polyline or a closed polygon . Either click to find the default plane. 2. choose it by clicking on any points and/or edges or surfaces: the automatic feedback (a gray square) will show you where the potential input planes are. This is the plane on which you will draw the profile and then its revolution axis.

1038 ArchiCAD 15 Help .) 6.Virtual Building 5. The Shell is complete. Move the cursor to complete the revolution axis. (Navigate in the 3D view to find the best angle for seeing the feedback.

Choose the desired icon from the Info Box or the Geometry and Positioning Panel of Shell Settings. If the segments/nodes cannot be matched up one-to-one. Ruled Shell Morphing The logic (called “Morphing rules”) by which the two profiles are connected can take two forms. • Smooth: Profile polygons are connected by joining the respective segments that are of proportionate lengths. ArchiCAD will draw connecting lines between the respective segments and nodes of each of the two profiles. • Paired: Profiles are connected by mapping each segment/node on one profile to a single segment/node on the other profile. like line-type elements.Virtual Building Ruled Shells A Ruled Shell requires two separate profiles in any two planes. consists of segments and intermittent nodes. with the Ruled Construction method selected. The Shell is then “grown” onto the resulting geometry. then they are paired off proportionately. without calculating the position of nodes. To create a ruled Shell. which creates a large number of seemingly random nodes. This may be advantageous if you have drawn the profiles based on a spline. Each of the two profiles. See the following section on the basic creation of Ruled Shells: ArchiCAD 15 Help 1039 .

1040 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Ruled Vaulted Shell For more examples. see Sample Workflows for Shell Creation.

Drag the cursor to the opposite wall segment. • The second profile is always a straight line. On the Floor Plan: 2. Choose the Shell tool’s Ruled geometry method and the Simple input method. Click on each endpoint of the lower wall segment to define the width of the first. straight-line profile. With this input method: • The first profile is always a vault shape. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1041 . vault-shaped profile. you will define two profiles on parallel planes. Here we will place a vaulted ruled Shell atop this wall complex.Virtual Building Ruled Vaulted Shell To create a Ruled Shell with the simple input method. 1. 3. then click on each endpoint of that wall to define the width of the second.

Virtual Building 4. 1. 2. vault-shaped profile. The Ruled vault-shaped Shell is complete. In the 3D Window: Here we will place a vaulted ruled Shell atop two pairs of columns of different heights. View in 3D. Click on each of the two taller columns to define the width of the first. Choose the Shell tool’s Ruled geometry method and the Simple input method. 1042 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

View in 3D.Virtual Building 3. shorter columns and click on each to define the width of the second. Drag the cursor to the opposite. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1043 . 4. straight-line profile. The Ruled vault-shaped Shell is complete.

Note: This option not available for Revolved Shells created with the simple method . the 3D Editing plane appears at the default base height set in Shell Settings. However. you can define the Shell’s base height graphically if you prefer. when you activate the Shell tool. then click again as usual to define the width of the Shell profile. You will begin input on this plane.Virtual Building Define Shell Base Height in 3D In the 3D window. Click twice (on the hotspots of existing elements) to define the extrusion length and direction. 1044 ArchiCAD 15 Help .such Shells are created in 3D at their predefined base height.

Virtual Building Sample Workflows for Shell Creation Extruded Shell: Wavy Canopy Roof Revolved Shell: Arced Triangular Roof Complex Revolved Shell: Define Contours in Section Ruled Shell: Tennis Court Shell Ruled Shell: Twisted Tower ArchiCAD 15 Help 1045 .

Next. or click three points. in this case a wavy line. 2. Activate the Shell Tool and choose the extruded geometry method with detailed input method. with the usual pet palette options. extrude the profile: extend it back to the far wall and click to place it. click on a surface. 4. Click to complete. 3. to define an input plane onto which to draw the profile.Virtual Building Extruded Shell: Wavy Canopy Roof 1. 1046 ArchiCAD 15 Help . View the result. In the 3D window. Draw the desired profile.

Raise the Wall height so that the it intersects the Shell. 6. For more information on Shell connections. so that you can trim the Wall to the Shell. From the context menu. choose Connect > Trim Elements to Roof/Shell. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1047 .Virtual Building 5. View the result. see Model Element Connections. 7. Select the Wall and Shell which you want to trim.

mirror a copy of this Shell. activate the Shell Tool and choose the Revolved geometry method with simple input method. Define a square contour with which to cut the edge of the Shell. choose Define Shell Contour from the context menu. 3. 1048 ArchiCAD 15 Help . 4. Back on the Floor Plan. 2. On the Floor Plan. Create a Revolved Shell with a 45-degree angle of revolution. as shown. 5.Virtual Building Revolved Shell: Arced Triangular Roof Complex 1. With the Shell selected. View the result in 3D.

7.Virtual Building 6. Create two Curtain Walls. Return to the 2D window.) View it in 3D. Move the second Shell so that it is alongside the first one. each facing in the opposite direction. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1049 . 8. 9. View in 3D. running between the two Shells as shown. Move the second Shell slightly upward on the Y-axis so that it slightly overlaps the first Shell (this will make it easier to trim the elements to each other.

by following these steps. then stretch its top corner to the right height. Edit the position of the Curtain Walls into the right place: elevate the Curtain Wall.Virtual Building 10. Now select each Curtain Wall in turn and trim it to each of the Shells to achieve the desired geometry. 1050 ArchiCAD 15 Help . • Select one of the Curtain Walls and use the Connect > Trim Elements to Roof/Shell command. 11.

and trim it to each of the two Shells. • Multiply the resulting structure as needed. • Now select the other Curtain Wall.Virtual Building • Trim the selected Curtain Wall to each of the two Shells. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1051 .

Virtual Building Revolved Shell: Define Contours in Section Here. each of a slightly different size. in the Section window. select each Shell separately and draw its contour in the shape of a rectangle .use progressively smaller rectangles. but slightly offset from each other. 1. The result is several overlapping Shell segments. Draw the first revolved Shell on the Floor Plan as shown. Then. 1052 ArchiCAD 15 Help . you draw several revolved Shells having a common endpoint for their profiles. 2. Ensure that the default Shell elevation is 0.

Draw two more revolved Shells using the same profile starting point. 5. Now create a Section for these Shells and open the Section window.Virtual Building 3. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1053 . but each slightly larger and offset from the previous one. 4. View the result in 3D.

8. 7. Draw the contour as a rectangle. Select the Shell closest to you. From the context menu.Virtual Building 6. choose Define Shell Contour. Select the other two Shells and define rectangular contours for them. 1054 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

View the result in 3D and fine-tune as needed. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1055 .Virtual Building 9.

1. Place a Ruled Shell on top: 1. Go to the 3D window and activate the Shell tool. 1056 ArchiCAD 15 Help .Virtual Building Ruled Shell: Tennis Court Shell Create a Shell atop a tennis court stadium. Place the Tennis Court object. Draw a rectangle of walls around it at 45 degrees to the stadium. 2. this wall will serve as the reference for the Ruled Shell’s profiles (it will be deleted later). with the Ruled geometry method and Detailed input method. 2. by clicking on the outside surface of the wall. Define the first input plane on one side of the wall rectangle.

Define the second input plane on the outside of this opposite wall. define the Shell contour: ArchiCAD 15 Help 1057 . Draw a line from one top corner to the other and double-click to complete the first profile: a straight diagonal line as shown. by clicking on the wall’s outside surface. Next. draw the second profile. On this plane. Double-click to complete. you will draw a diagonal. 5. 4. relying on the feedback to see how the Ruled Shell will be formed. turn the view so that the opposite wall is now closest. The initial Shell is completed.Virtual Building 3. You can delete the wall rectangle and view the result. straight line. In the 3D window. In this case.

1058 ArchiCAD 15 Help . Go to the Floor Plan.Virtual Building 1. Use the circle tool to draw an ellipse in the desired shape of the stadium roof. choose Define Shell Contour. Select the Shell. 2. 3. From the context menu.

click on the ellipse to define the Shell’s contour in the ellipse shape.Virtual Building 4. 6. (You can then delete the ellipse element. and trim them to the Shell. Place surrounding walls to make a stadium as needed.) 5. With the Magic Wand (press the spacebar). ArchiCAD 15 Help 1059 . View in 3D.

and the second one. The feedback shows the ruled Shell taking shape. which you are about to draw. 1060 ArchiCAD 15 Help . we draw a square. 6. 3. already placed. 5. View the result in 3D. Double-click to complete the polygon and the Shell. 2.) 4. In this case. shown in red). whose plane is parallel to the first.Virtual Building Ruled Shell: Twisted Tower 1.e. Choose the Shell tool’s Ruled geometry method and the Detailed input method. draw the shape of your first profile polygon (its plane is flat on the Floor Plan). On the Floor Plan. We draw a skewed square (here. Double-click to complete the first profile polygon. enter the distance between the two planes of your Ruled Shell profiles (between i. In the appearing dialog box. the first profile. Now draw the polygon of the second profile.

any cutting bodies it may contain will remain in place in the global coordinate system. Section and 3D view. both are editable. As you edit the Shell. See images for each type of Shell when selected in 3D: • An Extruded Shell has a profile and an extrusion vector. • A Revolved Shell has a profile and an axis. • A Ruled Shell has two profiles. and rotate your Shell into the shape and position that you need. (See Edit Shell Hole. axes and extrusion vectors are shown in a different color. a wide range of editing possibilities are available for the Shell.) Options for Editing Extruded Shells Options for Editing Revolved Shells ArchiCAD 15 Help 1061 . the holes may be located in a different part of the Shell. The profiles can be edited and rotated. the editable profiles. This means that after the editing is done. on any two planes. connected by the Shell body. Select your Shell and try out the pet palette commands: twist.Virtual Building Graphical Editing of Shells In Floor Plan. In the 3D window. so it is easy to find them. turn. Note: You can change this color using the “Reference Lines in 3D” setting at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. You can also rotate either or both of the profile planes.

Virtual Building Options for Editing Ruled Shells 1062 ArchiCAD 15 Help .

Its slant and its other geometric parameters remain unchanged. ArchiCAD 15 Help 1063 . Edit Extrusion Vector Click on either end of extrusion vector to bring up these commands on the pet palette.Virtual Building Options for Editing Extruded Shells About the Extrusion Vector • • One end of the extrusion vector (its initially placed point) is distinguished by a larger hotspot. this represents the Shell’s base height. • Edit Extrusion Length: Edit the length of the extrusion vector. The extrusion vector can be located apart from the Shell body itself.

the Shell slant changes accordingly: 1064 ArchiCAD 15 Help . if you join the vector endpoint to an existing element. remains unchanged.Virtual Building • Edit Extrusion Slant: Edit the slant of the extrusion vector. If you stretch the Shell to reach a point on another existing element. The starting/ending angles and the distortion angle remain unchanged. You can also rotate its slant. • Stretch: Edit the length of the extrusion vector and its rotation. The extrusion length. as well as the Shell starting/ending angles and the distortion angle.

Mirror Profile ArchiCAD 15 Help 1065 . • Drag.The Shell’s base elevation changes to the new location of the vector . If you drag the extrusion vector.The Shell’s start and end angles are now editable based on this new vector location. Click anywhere on the Extrusion vector to bring up this command from the pet palette.) Edit Profile of Extruded Shell Select the Shell and use the familiar pet palette commands to edit the profile. two things happen: . the extrusion vector remains in place. Rotate. Note that even if you move the profile. (The vector serves as the axis of rotation for the Shell start/end angles.Virtual Building • Drag Extrusion Vector: Drag the Shell’s extrusion vector to another location.

Virtual Building

These three commands operate on the Shell profile on its own plane (the plane is displayed in the 3D window while you edit):

1066

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

• •

Insert New Node Curve Edge

• Set Distortion Angle Select the Shell profile and use the pet palette command to set the distortion angle graphically. This can be useful, for example, to “flatten” your vault-shaped Shell into more elliptical form.

View the resulting distortion angle in the Tracker, the Info Box or Shell Settings. • Continue Profile If you select the endpoint of the Shell Profile, the Continue Profile command is available in the pet palette. Use this add one or more segments to the profile, as if you were extending a polyline (double-click to complete the polyline, or click on the other profile endpoint to create a closed profile.)

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1067

Virtual Building

Remove profile Edge: For a closed Shell Profile, the Remove edge command is available in the pet palette from any selected profile edge. Click to remove that segment.

1068

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Options for Editing Revolved Shells
Select the axis or the profile of the Revolved Shell. One end of the axis is distinguished by a larger hotspot; this represents the Shell’s base height. • Edit Revolution Angle Click anywhere on the profile of the selected Shell to bring up this command in the pet palette. Choose Edit Revolution Angle.

Distort Axis

Slant Axis

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1069

Virtual Building

Move Profile Node

Continue Profile

Rotate Profile

1070

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Select the Rotate profile command from the Pet Palette. Then (as when rotating other elements) click on a point, then draw a rotation axis. Click to complete the rotation.

• Curve Edge Click anywhere along the Shell profile to bring up this command on the pet palette.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1071

Virtual Building

Options for Editing Ruled Shells
The Ruled Shell has two profiles. One end of the first profile is distinguished by a larger hotspot; this represents the Shell’s base height. Here are some editing possibilities for either profile: • Continue Profile For example, extend the straight-line profile to make that end of the Shell wider.

Curve Edge

1072

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

• Drag Profile Use this command to drag the profile within its own plane, in horizontal and/or vertical directions, to a new location.

• Rotate Profile Use these commands to rotate the selected profile in space.

• Elevate Profile Plane Here you move the entire plane of the profile in the vertical direction.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1073

Virtual Building

• Drag Profile Horizontally Here you take the profile plane and drag it horizontally.

Turn Profile Plane

Click to enter the turning point. Then move your cursor to define the turn direction, and click to complete.

1074

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Create Hole in Shell
On the Floor Plan or Section window:
1. Select any Shell on the Floor Plan or Section. 2. From the context menu, choose Create Hole in Shell.

3. Draw the desired polygon onto the Shell. (The opening’s plane is the Floor Plan, but you can edit this later: see Edit Shell Hole.)

4. View the result in 3D:

In the 3D Window:
1. Select the Shell. 2. From the context menu, choose Create Hole in Shell.
ArchiCAD 15 Help

1075

Virtual Building

3. Choose an input plane on which you want to draw the hole: use the feedback to choose the desired plane location. (Choose a plane anywhere in the model; it does not have to be on top of the Shell.)

4. Draw the desired polygon onto the input plane. (You can edit this later: see Edit Shell Hole.)

5. View the result.

Listing Shell Holes in the Interactive Schedule
Properties of Shell Holes (e.g. Holes Surface and Perimeter) can be listed in an Interactive Schedule. As with other elements, you can set a preference (“Calculation Rules”) for the size of holes which should be taken into account when calculating Shell volume or surface. For details, see Calculation Rules.

1076

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Edit Shell Hole
The Shell hole is created by an editable cutting body. The cutting body is visible when you select the hole itself, not the Shell. To select the hole, zoom in on the hole and click its edge. Note: When selecting the hole, you must click the hole on the side of the Shell that coincides with the profile line. Hole edge selection is not available on the side of the Shell opposite to the profile line.

Each cutting body is specific to its own Shell and cannot cut any other elements. However, a Shell that bends back upon itself is automatically cut twice (or more) by the single cutting body.

When you move the Shell as a whole from one place to another, the cutting body moves with it. However, editing the Shell itself (e.g. its profile or drawing its contour) will not affect the hole geometry.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1077

Virtual Building

Edit Extrusion Length of Cutting Body
To limit the extent of the hole’s cutting body, select the hole and use the Edit Extrusion Length command from the pet palette to change the length of the cutting body. This way, for example, you can eliminate a hole created by a cutting body that runs through both sides of your Shell.

Edit Hole Contour
Select the hole so that you see its cutting body. Edit either the hole edge itself, or the contour of the cutting body (the result is the same). Use the familiar polygon editing commands from the pet palette.

1078

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Edit Hole on its Own Plane
The cutting body that creates the hole has its own plane. When you select the hole, you can edit the hole on this plane using the pet palette commands marked here. Then the hole plane is also displayed.

Turn Hole Plane: This command rotates the hole plane, and thereby changes the hole geometry within the Shell. (You can also rotate the hole itself: see Rotate cutting body to change hole geometry.) Select the Turn Hole Plane command. Define the rotation arc, then move the cursor to rotate the plane.

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Hole: These edits move the hole on its own plane.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1079

Virtual Building

Edit Hole on Horizontal/Vertical Project Planes
• Drag or Drag a Copy Horizontally/Vertically These commands drags the hole itself (or a copy) on the project’s horizontal/vertical planes.

Rotate cutting body to change hole geometry
One way to change the hole geometry is to free-rotate its cutting body. 1. Select the hole. 2. Use the Free Rotate command from the pet palette. 3. Define a rotation axis with two clicks. 4. Define the starting point of the rotation arc with a third click, then free rotate the cutting body to its desired location. 5. Click to complete.

1080

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Define Shell Contour

Suppose we have a ruled Shell like the one above. You can trim it, or any Shell geometry, to the desired shape by defining its contour. 1. Go to the Floor Plan or Section window. 2. Select the Shell. 3. From the context menu, choose Define Shell Contour.

4. Draw the desired polygon: in this case, an ellipse. (Or use the Magic Wand on an existing polygon.) 5. Click to complete the polygon. The Shell is trimmed.

See also Edit Shell Contour Polygon.

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1081

Virtual Building

Edit Shell Contour Polygon
The Shell’s contour polygon, and the plane of this contour polygon, are editable.

Select Contour Polygon
To edit the contour, you must select the contour polygon itself, not the Shell. Move the cursor to the edge of the contour and make sure that the Info Tag indicates that the Shell’s Inner Polygon is going to be selected.

Offset Contour Polygon
Before you edit the Shell contour, it may be helpful to offset the contour polygon, so that it is easier to do your editing. Select the Shell contour, then choose Offset Contour Polygon from the pet palette. Offset to the desired location.

1082

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Turn Contour Plane
By default, the plane of the contour polygon is parallel to the Floor Plan. Use the Turn Contour Plane pet palette command to change this polygon plane. This may also affect the geometry of the Shell contour.

Drag Contour Polygon

ArchiCAD 15 Help

1083

Virtual Building

Rotate, Mirror Contour Polygon

1084

ArchiCAD 15 Help

Virtual Building

Customize Edge of Shell or Edge of Shell Hole
You can customize the material and/or type of any edge of a Shell, or the edge of a hole in a Shell. Once you set the customized material/type options, you can choose to apply them to the clicked edge only, to all edges of the clicked polygon (hole), or to all Shell edges. 1. Select the Shell. 2. Click on an edge to bring up the pet palette. 3. Select the Customize Edge settings icon to open the Custom Edge Settings dialog box.

4. Use the controls to adjust the Side Material and Edge Type as needed. Side Material: Choose a material for the Shell edge(s). If you apply a material here to any edge that is different from the default Shell edge material, the Model Panel of Shell Settings will indicate that a custom side material has been applied.

Edge Type: Optionally, choose a type for the Shell edge. The Shell Edge type you define here can be used as a parameter in all of ArchiCAD’s listing functions. For example, you can add “Eaves Length” and “Gables Length” as parameters of an Interactive Schedule that lists Shells.
ArchiCAD 15 Help

1085

Virtual Building

For an explanation of edge types, see Roof/Shell Edge Listing Parameters. 5. Apply Changes to: Once you have set the options as needed, choose the edges to which to apply these changes: • Clicked Edge will apply the options you choose below (material, edge type) only to the edge you clicked when bringing up the pet palette.

• •

Selected Polygon will apply the chosen options to the edges of the Shell only or the edges of the hole only, depending on which one is selected. All Edges will a